I 
 
 I . 
 
 ■ 
 
 ■ 
 
 ■ 
 
 ■ 
 
 ■ 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a\ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 x ^. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .-V 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <*>. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 v 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «5 r ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 •** 
 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 
 ^ V T 
 
 - 
 
 
 ^ <\a 
 
 8 I A 
 
 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 v* 
 
 $•' 
 
 V 
 
 
 - <$ 
 
 if \> 
 
 vx. 
 
 
 <>• 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 <\V </> rt 
 
 
 >?- 
 
 r 
 
 
 f>_ 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 
 \° 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 ^< 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■#' 
 
 * 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 <t 
 
 Z 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 A ^ 
 
 A\> <?„ 
 
 r c 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ ^ ,A^ 
 
 
 ,0o 
 
 o, 
 
 is 
 
 
 V 
 
 .v* V ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ % 
 
 x ^. 
 
 
 2-, f 
 
 
 
 ""o 0* 
 
 V * 
 
 
 v '., 
 
 ^ % 
 
 .<&• 
 
 
 % **' 
 
 ,^' 
 
 
 cP. 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 >% 
 
 
 A 
 
 -> 
 
 
 
 -> 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 ** v 
 
 <* 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 \° °<. 
 
 
 QA ^ 
 
 - ^ 
 
 
 ,0 o 
 
 
 
 -f 
 
 
THERAPEUTIC 
 
 SARCOGNOMY, 
 
 A SCIENTIFIC EXPOSITION OF THE MYSTERIOUS UNION OF 
 
 SOUL; BRAIN AND BODY, 
 
 AND A 
 
 New System of Therapeutic Practice without medicine, by the vital 
 nervaura, electricity and external amplications. giving 
 the only scientific basis for therapeutic magne- 
 tism and electro-thekapeutics. 
 
 By JOSEPH RODES BUCHANAN, M. D., 
 
 The founder of Systematic Anthropology; Discoverer of Psychometry and 
 Sarcognomy; Professor of Physiology and Institutes of Medicine in four 
 
 Medical Colleges successively, and formerly Dean of the E&ter- 
 i Medical Institute, the parent School of American Medical Eclecticism. 
 
 ^ f OCT 18 II 
 
 DESIGNED FOR THE USE OF 
 
 79^ 
 
 Nervauric and Electric Practitioners, and also for intelligent 
 
 families, for the -prevention and cure of disease, and 
 
 moral and -physical developement of youth. 
 
 Volume ist — Nervauric and Electric, 
 published by the author, 20, fort avenue, boston 
 
i*$f 
 
 Copyright, 1884, by Joseph Rodes Buchanan, 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 Chapter Page 
 
 I. INTRODUCTION i 
 
 II. Life as a Spiritual Power, and Its Location 
 
 in the Brain n 
 
 III. Sarcognomy — General View 38 
 
 IV. The Spinal Region — Its Anatomical, Neuro- 
 
 logical and Therapeutic Relations ... 51 
 
 V. Relation of the Brain to Vitality in its 
 
 DIFFERENT REGIONS IOI 
 
 VI. Zonal Arrangement and Therapeutic Treat- 
 ment of the Brain 113 
 
 VII. Health and Its Restoration . 129 
 
 VIII. Operative Methods 144 
 
 IX. Nerv auric Therapeutics 168 
 
 X. The Occipital Energies 184 
 
 XL The Abdominal and Crural Regions . . . . 201 
 
 XII. Pelvic Functions and Organs 217 
 
 XIII. Animal Magnetism Reviewed and Rectified . . 232 
 
 XIV. Synopsis of Practical Rules and Descrip- 
 
 tion of Plates .... - 252-69 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 In this volume, hastily prepared, under many hindrances, to 
 meet the immediate demands of students, there are doubtless many 
 imperfections, and it is far from being such a work as I would 
 have desired to publish. 
 
 Nevertheless, it is a fearless solution of the problem of- soul 
 and body which lies at the foundation of all philosophy — a 
 problem which my predecessors generally have shunned as if it 
 wer inaccessible to human intelligence — Gall and Swedenborg 
 alone having attempted each a partial solution. 
 
 The correctness of my exposition of the triune constitution of 
 man is sustained by the experiments which I have for many years 
 been making in private and before classes, which my pupils have 
 satisfactorily repeated, and it is sustained by universal experience 
 in the history of diseases which demonstrate according to their 
 locality the laws of Sarcognomy. It has also a beautiful and 
 interesting artistic illustration in the varieties of the human form, 
 attitude and gesture, which I hope hereafter to present. 
 
 As to the verity of my experiments on the brain and body on 
 which the science of Anthropology rests for its evidence, I refer to 
 my experiments before public audiences in New York and Boston, 
 to_the reports of many committees of investigation forty years ago, 
 especially those of the Faculty of Indiana University, the committee 
 of Boston physicians and the New York committee .of which 
 Dr. Forry and the poet Bryant were members, and the unanimous 
 testimony of those who have repeated my experiments wherever I 
 have taught, including a number of eminent medical professors, 
 who have been my colleagues. The large and intelligent medical 
 class of the Eclectic Medical Institute of 1849-50 (then the leading 
 medical college at Cincinnati; (Prof. Warriner being chairman) 
 expressed their conclusions as follows: "Many of us at the 
 ■ commencement of this series of lectures were skeptical as to the 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 impressibility of the subject in the waking state, but we take 
 pleasure in announcing that the remotest doubt is now dispelled. 
 We have seen the subject deprived of muscular power ; we have 
 witnessed a great increase of his strength ; we have seen any faculty 
 of the mind brightened or subdued at pleasure ; we have personally 
 performed many of the experiments set forth in the "Journal 
 of Man," and can testify, as can many in this city who have 
 witnessed our experiments in private circles, that the half has not 
 yet been published to the world." The frequent repetition of my 
 experiments, not only in this country but in Great Britain, by the 
 late Dr. Spencer T. Hall and many others*, in private and in 
 public, has given as broad a foundation as could be demanded for 
 the verification of such discoveries, even though they constitute a 
 complete revolution in Physiology and Psychology. 
 
 This volume is therefore presented, not to introduce the 
 subject by argument and evidence, for the evidence has long been 
 on record, but to introduce its readers to a portion of the vast 
 science of Anthropology, the future guide of human progress. 
 
 * I have not thought it necessary to describe in tbis volume the numerous 
 and marvelous experiments on the brains of adults during the last forty years, 
 but would mention another class still more more convincing. 
 
 The eminent Dr. Ashburner of London, published among accurate and well- 
 authenticated facts the statement of his friend, A. Lidington : "I have many 
 times excited the different phrenological organs of the brain of this child, and he 
 has answered to each one most correctly ; for instance, when I mesmerized the 
 organ of Tune, he has declared to me that he can hear beautiful music, and so 
 with Veneration, he has felt irresistably impelled to pray and speak of God and 
 Heaven. I have more often operated upon little children than adults, purposely 
 to convince the people of the truth of your science', for surely children so young, 
 and many of whom I have never seen before, could not be guilty of any deception." 
 
 In my experiments with private classes, nearly every member of the class 
 was usually made a subject of experiments, which was not practicable with larger 
 audiences. The report by Drs. Ingalls, Mattson and others on my Boston 
 lectures in 1843, said : " Most of us witnessed many hundred experiments on at 
 least six impressible subjects — one a gentleman and member of the class, whose 
 intelligence and moral worth cannot be questioned." 
 
CHAPTER I. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Developeincut of Cerebral Science by discovery in 1S41. Its grand importance 
 and its hostile reception. Failure of all attempts to obtain judicial investi- 
 gation. Establishment of a liberal college. Attitude of the National 
 Medical Association and similar bodies. Confession of Prof. Gross. 
 
 Origin of the present volume in the discovery of Savcognomy. Its 
 fundamental principles. Its presentation in lectures, and cordial recep- 
 tion. Explanation of Cerebral Physiology and Sarcognomy. Their 
 scientific certainty. Invitation of correspondence. Electric therapeutics 
 of Sarcognomy in second volume. Its extensive scope. 
 
 In 1841 I had the good fortune to consummate six years 
 investigation of the cerebral functions by the discovery that the 
 functions of the human brain, instead of being an inaccessible 
 mystery as they have seemed to the scientific world, were really 
 the most accessible of all the great secrets of nature, and that a 
 method of investigation, the very simplicity of which had caused 
 it to be scornfully overlooked, was competent to reveal the citadel 
 of life, the organ of the soul, the seat of all consciousness, all 
 faculties and passions, the organic embodiment of that Divine 
 principle in which exist all the potentialities of the universe and 
 consequently the basis of all science and wisdom. 
 
 Of all subjects that have ever interested the mind of man, 
 this is beyond all comparison the most important, whether we 
 consider its scope and its grandeur as a philosophy, the light which 
 it throws upon all other departments of investigation, or its imme- 
 diate practical utility in reorganizing, correcting and developing 
 therapeutics, sociology, education, religion, pneumatology and the 
 arts of human expression. Its scope, its power and its grand- 
 eur in these respects cannot be adequately conceived until the 
 sciences and the philosophies, that must result from such a dis- 
 covery, shall have been developed and published, although to a 
 
2 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 clear intuitive thinker it may be apparent as it was to David Hume 
 that in mastering Anthropology we conquer all science and 
 philosophy. 
 
 Such a discovery in science and philosophy, bringing 
 within our reach a larger realm of truth than all the 
 sciences and philosophies taught in the Universities, was like the 
 discovery of Columbus, which added a new and better world to 
 geographical knowledge and national expansion, the initial inci- 
 dent which marks the humble beginning of a mighty change in 
 human destiny, and if it were not the still existing condition of the 
 human mind to be dominated by the past — if habit and conserva- 
 tive inertia were not still, as they have ever been, the dominant 
 forces of human existence, the authentic announcement that such 
 a discovery had been made in the honorable and sincere cultiva- 
 tion of science would have commanded the attention of the 
 civilized world, not with telegraphic speed, for telegraphs were 
 then unknown, but as rapidly as the mail could have borne the 
 news, and an immediate investigation by all the colleges and 
 learned societies would have settled the question in the public 
 mind and made the year 1841 the most significant epoch in history 
 — the year in which mankind added psychic to physical science, 
 the world of causes to the world of effects, the elements of Divine 
 wisdom to the perceptions of physical knowledge. But there 
 were no collegiate organizations prepared or willing to look to the 
 future, as there were none to welcome the discoveries of Galileo 
 and of Harvey. The great ear of the literary world was still 
 turned backward to catch the lingering echoes of the crude specu- 
 lations that preceded the dawn of science, for the names of Plato 
 and Aristotle were still revered in the Universities. 
 
 It is true the announcement appearing in the Louisville 
 Journal was copied throughout the United States, that my 
 experiments on the brain were immediately repeated by Prof. 
 Mitchell, of Jefferson Medical College, and that many repetitions 
 of them in an imperfect manner were made before public audiences 
 in this country and abroad, while I was myself for a few years 
 actively engaged in presenting the subject by lectures and experi- 
 
INTRODUCTION. 3 
 
 merits, and challenging investigation by the scientific, but it soon 
 became apparent that habit, not reason, governed the world, and 
 that a professor of European Astronomy would not be more unin- 
 teresting and unwelcome in China, than a discoverer presenting 
 the key to a new world of science in American Colleges, or scien- 
 tific magazines, and I abandoned the thankless task of propagan- 
 dism to confine my teaching to a college in which I addressed my 
 own pupils. 
 
 There were of course some honorable recognitions of my dem- 
 onstrations (see credentials of Anthropology in the Appendix) and 
 the Democratic Review recognizing logically the importance of 
 the discoveries, affirmed that all prior discoveries in physiological 
 science shrunk into insignificance in comparison with these dis- 
 coveries in the brain ; but it was the only magazine, I believe, 
 which had the logical capacity and the manliness to make such a 
 statement, although it would not seem to require any great intel- 
 lectual capacity to understand that a discovery of the functions 
 of the brain, which reveals the exact capacities of the soul, and 
 the mental and physical powers of the brain, the seat of life, the 
 controller of all physiological functions — the centre of all phys- 
 iology and psychology, must be of far greater importance than 
 any scientific discoveries heretofore made. 
 
 I cannot speak upon such a theme in the language of diffi- 
 dence and* doubt, with reverence for the wisdom which governs 
 the world (and forbids all rapid progress), for the true discoverer 
 who has ascertained any fact, is, as to that fact, an authority 
 superior to the entire world to whom it is unknown. My discov- 
 eries of over forty years standing, often verified by others, and 
 never refuted or seriously impeached, challenge attention still, but 
 I present them only as a teacher to those who wish to profit by 
 new science, without seeking to force them upon the attention of 
 those who have no desire to enlarge their knowledge of such 
 subjects. 
 
 It is true that in my credulous and inexperienced enthusiam, 
 I did at first suppose that a science derived from and resting 
 
 upon experiment, and eagerly courting investigation by the ex-peri ~ 
 
a INTRODUCTION. 
 
 menial method — a science of unequalled importance and 
 fascination, would speedily interest the educated classes of all 
 nations, but I was speedily undeceived. Of the medical professors 
 in whose halls I had heard the first exposition of medical science, 
 I found but one (and he the most learned and distinguished) who 
 had either the interest in the subject to induce them to investigate, 
 or the intellectual training and knowledge that would have made 
 them fully competent. Under his auspices, I sent an account of 
 my discoveries to what I supposed to be the most competent and 
 appreciative body in Great Britain — the gentlemen who hod main- 
 tained a phrenological society at Edinburgh, and published the 
 Phrenological 'Journal '.and were therefore familiar with novel inves- 
 tigations of the brain ; but my report, though authenticated by one 
 whom they knew as a distinguished scientist, was too marvellous for 
 them, and they simply filed it away (like caveat,) as a document fit 
 to be preserved for future reference, but not fit to be published. 
 
 After the failure with the Faculty, the failure at Edinburgh, 
 and an abortive attempt to procure a thorough investigation by the 
 Academy of Arts and Sciences, at Boston, medical journals being 
 closed against such investigations as mine, I thought it useless to 
 seek any further a decision by any authoritative scientific tribunal, 
 and united with other unconquerable liberals in the medical pro- 
 fession to establish a liberal system of medical education and break 
 the unreformable intellectual despotism which had held and still 
 holds the great mass of the medical profession. That effort was 
 successful, and the flourishing condition of the Eclectic party in 
 medicine, which was then organized, gives promise that in time 
 there will be freedom of investigation in medical study, medi- 
 cal practice and medical discovery. 
 
 That such discoveries as the new cerebal science which con- 
 stitutes a complete Anthropology, are entirely inaccessible to the 
 mass of the medical profession was very apparent, and that they 
 would not, under any circumstances, be examined by the National 
 Association which dominates over the profession in America, and 
 therefore that it would be folly to address a memoir to them or 
 invite an experimental investigation of the new science, I was very 
 
INTRODUCTION. 5 
 
 courteously, but very distinctly informed, in a letter by the late 
 Prof. Gross, in 1878, who was, if any one, then entitled to be 
 recognized as the head of the profession in this country, and who, 
 appreciating the impossibility under the Code (and the unwritten 
 code,) which governs the Association, advised me to seek some 
 scientific body outside of the medical -profession, to investigate 
 discoveries which belong to the sphere of medical science (of which 
 Biology is a conspicuous portion), entirely unconscious of the 
 latent satire upon his profession which he expressed. 
 
 I was previously well aware of its truth, as a memoir upon 
 Cerebral Embryology which I offered the National Scientific 
 Association at Cincinnati in 185 1 was suppressed by the intrigues 
 of medical opponents who desired to crush the movement of 
 medical liberalism represented by our college ; and the committee 
 of investigation appointed by the Kentucky State Medical Society 
 at my request in 1877, so entirely neglected their duties that they 
 did not even hold a meeting. 
 
 Under these circumstances, the reader will not wonder that 
 this work comes forth as a manual for students, on my own author- 
 ity, not authenticated by the medical profession, or any collegiate 
 body, excepting the parent school of American Eclecticism in 
 which for ten years my teaching was the recognized philosophy of 
 the Institute. 
 
 The present volume however, is not an exposition of Anthro- 
 pology, but a sketch of the therapeutic application of Sarcognomy, 
 published in advance of its proper place in the exposition of 
 Anthropology, to satisfy the demands of students for a text book 
 to aid in retaining my instructions, and to reach a great number 
 of healing practitioners who need an exposition of the science 
 which makes manual healing a scientific art. 
 
 This application of my discoveries arises from the fact that in 
 1842 my discovery of the cerebral functions was completed by the 
 discovery of the sympathetic relations of the brain and the body, 
 in consequence of which, the functional operations of the brain, 
 which when confined within the cranium are purely psychic, 
 become when transferred to the body by the laws of sympathy, 
 
5 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 physiological in their effects, and also by the inevitable manner 
 in which they use the body for their purposes in voluntary acts, 
 produce the same effects which result directly from the laws of 
 sympathy — a wonderful illustration of the ingenuity and Divine 
 wisdom of the plan of the human constitution. 
 
 But the reactive effect of the same law renders operations 
 which are purely physiological in the body, such as circulation, 
 digestion or muscular action in their reflex influence on the brain, 
 disturbing or modifying influences of psychic life. That such reflex 
 influence is continually in progress, we readily perceive when we 
 think of the effects on the brain and mind of an excessive dinner, 
 a glass of brandy or a copious inhalation of pure air; and a vast 
 array of mental symptoms accompanying diseases of various 
 organs, which have been observed especially by homoeopathic 
 physicians, carries us still further into a recognition of the special 
 influences each portion of the body exerts in its irritated or 
 inflamed conditions, upon the state of the mind. 
 
 Thus we have, by rational necessity, a science of cerebral 
 physiology, or physiological influences of the brain, and, on the 
 other hand, a science of corporal psychology, or influence of the 
 body upon the brain and mind. In all of which we understand 
 that these inverted, or reflex sciences, cerebral physiology and 
 corporeal psychology, are partly sciences of sympathetic association 
 and reflex influence, and partly sciences of functional action, as 
 the vital forces in the brain act directly upon their subordinate 
 apparatus in the body, and the organs of the body in their func- 
 tional action directly influence the brain, by means of nervous 
 connection and by their influence upon the blood, which as it 
 passes through the body receives and carries along the influence 
 and modification produced by each organ. In addition to which, 
 each organ in the brain or body is compelled for its own efficiency 
 to use its correspondent organ, as Combativcness uses the muscles 
 and heart, and as the vigorous muscular and cardiac action rouses 
 the combative spirit — or as the perceptive organs use the eye, 
 and the eye in its visual action rouses the perceptive faculties. 
 
 Thus, we have a science of cerebral and corporeal corres- 
 
INTRODUCTION. 7 
 
 pondence and association, which, above, is cerebral 
 physiology, and below, a compound science of corporeal 
 psychology and physiology combined, which I have called 
 Sarcognomy ; the primitive effect of any excitement in the body 
 being physiological, and the secondary, psychological. 
 
 It is this primitive physiological effect to which this volume 
 will be mostly devoted, for Sarcognomy embraces not only the 
 discovery of the sympathetic psychic effects, but the still more 
 important principle that each vital function of the body is 
 expressed at the surface^ and that for every function there is an 
 external locality at which it may be reached, and stimulated or 
 tranquillized by nervauric methods, by electricity, or by heat, cold 
 and medical applications. 
 
 How very important it is, then, that those who treat human 
 diseases by the application of the hand or by electricity, should 
 know the influence of each portion of the surface, and of the 
 'currents passed through the body, from one locality to another, 
 since these vital forces which have been discovered, and which 
 are controlled, by the hand (and the battery) are not merely specific 
 and limited influences for each organ, but are also general 
 influences for the brain and body productive of general conditions, 
 as, for example, the influences at the shoulder, which are 
 universally tonic and restorative to mind and body, and the influ- 
 ences of the electric hygienic current, which animates every 
 function of life, and these give us an entirely new conception of 
 the vital forces of the human constitution. 
 
 The principles of sarcognomy were very briefly presented in 
 my system of Anthropology thirty years ago, but I believe this 
 produced few practical results with my readers. When I resumed 
 medical instruction in 1877, I began to teach classes the manual 
 treatment of disease according to the principles of Sarcognomy, 
 giving some hints also as to the collateral use of electricity, and in 
 the College of Therapeutics at Boston I have given a complete 
 exposition of manual treatment. But experience has convinced 
 me of the transitory influence of lectures and the absolute 
 necessity of a manual for habitual guidance of the practitioner 
 
8 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 in a matter so entirely foreign to the education and habits of 
 society. 
 
 My lectures have been invariably accompanied by practical 
 demonstration of the truth of all that was taught, the majority of 
 the classes have been sufficiently sensitive to feel, recognize and 
 describe the influence of every. function described by Sarcognomy, 
 often throwing new light upon the subject by the peculiar manner 
 in which each one was affected. 
 
 As a method of healing, Therapeutic Sarcognomy was regu- 
 larly illustrated upon the members of the classes by treatment of 
 their own infirmities, pains or diseases, as a demonstration of the 
 value of the methods and a part of the instruction. There was 
 no more hesitation or doubt than in the collegiate lectures which 
 present and illustrate the experimental science of chemistry, nor 
 will there be any difficulty or hesitation among those who read 
 this volume and entering into the spirit of the subject, engage in 
 the experimental demonstrations which would make them practi- 
 cally familiar with with the subject in the manner that I have 
 recommended. But I presume the result may be different with 
 those who approach the subject in a spirit of antagonistic skepti- 
 cism, and without proper experimental inquiry, attempt to 
 form opinions by a -priori speculations upon the basis of 
 their knowledge of other subjects and their ignorance of this. 
 Ferchance there may be reviewers too, who would rather assail 
 than investigate, and who do not feel that practical ignorance of 
 any subject is any disqualification for instructing the public. This 
 volume was not written for that class, but for sincere seekers of. 
 scientific truth who have sufficient sincerity and rationality to 
 reccgnize the same qualities in the author, and to believe that a 
 system of science which has been cordially accepted by all who 
 have become well acquainted with it, is worthy of patient study. 
 
 I might have introduced a long array of the unanimous testi- 
 mony of those who have felt the truth of Sarcognomy in their own 
 persons, and of those \\\\o have been healed upon its principles; 
 but such is not the custom of scientific teachers. We state the 
 
INTRODUCTION. 9 
 
 truths that exist in nature, we state what we have found, and we 
 show others how to find the same. 
 
 That which I have taught as to the constitution of man, which 
 I have illustrated in thousands of experiments upon others, is also 
 to me a matter of personal knowledge. I feel the influence of 
 many localized functions described in Sarcognomy, and I can speak 
 of them with confidence, as I could say that I see with my eyes 
 or hear with my ears, and hence I do not feel like arguing upon 
 such subjects or adducing any testimony as to truths which are so 
 familiar. 
 
 Yet, although I do not consider such testimonials necessary 
 in this volume, I am not indifferent to the expressions of those who 
 honorably and sincerely study the laws of nature in the same spirit 
 as myself, and who by their observations may throw additional 
 light upon the laws and phenomena which I have so briefly stated. 
 I would therefore earnestly invite the correspondence of those who 
 undertake to investigate and practice in the new department to 
 which I have called attention, and to cultivate a science which 
 time has not permitted me to elaborate to the perfection in which 
 it may be enjoyed by posterity. 
 
 I shall respond with equal pleasure whether my correspon- 
 dent shall enumerate his triumphs, or state his difficulties, — 
 whether he desires additional information, or contributes facts and 
 discoveries made by himself in the boundless field of Sarcognomy 
 and Therapeutics. 
 
 The period of life at which I have arrived does not permit me 
 to anticipate witnessing the future triumphs of Sarcognonry and its 
 revolutionary influence on medical science, or the new aspects its 
 Therapeutics may assume under scientific cultivation, and I am, 
 therefore, more desirous of communicating with those who become 
 my co-laborers in this science, of which this volume is a partial 
 exposition only. In the second volume I propose to show the 
 existing status of Electric Therapeutics, and the fundamental 
 changes in practice and principles which are macle by Sarcog- 
 nomy, as well as the new apparatus by which I hope to enlarge 
 
eneral use 
 ell as an 
 
 ATION. 
 
 IO INTRODUCTION. 
 
 the scope of its practice, and render it more worthy of g 
 by medical practitioners and manual healers, as vv 
 important element in popular hygif.ne and educ 
 
 29 Fort Avenue, Boston, 
 July 8, 1884. 
 
 APEUTICS. 
 
 Postscript: — The Scope of Sarcognomic 1 HER /0 | ume to 
 It is well, before offering the specific therapeu'ics of this A e ] opec j DV 
 glance at the entire scope of the Therapeutics to be dev gc - ence f 
 Sarcognomy. If the healing art is based upon the true j power 
 life, and if (as will be shown) life is an enduring spiritu.. a ac j t - es ' 
 or being, of wonderfully complex constitution and Session of 
 which organizes the human form into a complete exp^o-ned to 
 
 itself, and of every faculty of its complex existence (de,\ each 
 
 act on matter here and in a spiritual world hereafter^ having 
 
 faculty having a double purpose, spiritual and material, ai e Doc j v 
 
 a specific structure for manifestation in the brain and in th T s arC0 o-_ 
 and if ihese vital powers (their localities being shown bjjj^ j Dy 
 nomy) can be reached, stimulated, strengthened and mc.„.„ — „,. 
 other means than drugs, with a precision never beiore kn< me t noc i? 
 not this new therapeutics largely supersede the drugging 1 _ me( ii ca i 
 Might it not supersede the drug method entirely, if our nor t extent 
 agencies are sufficiently powerful to act upon all? To wl r _ '„ 
 this can be done must be shown by the students of Sarcoc* ,. i ac , 
 
 r . , .. . J . c clUI a Ilda 
 
 1 o a very large class, at present, the vital nerv | 3llt t a 
 
 proved sufficiently potent to make medicines unnecessary I- t \ 
 
 still larger class, in the temperate zones, it is not suffic'p' t u„ t 
 
 cannot be substituted for medicine to any great extent. ^r q1 ^„ 
 , , . ii» • «i t • 01 eiec- 
 
 Jarger class, however, we have the irresistible a g encles p- u j ( i ance 
 
 tricity and caloric, the application of which needs only the ^, ap . en . 
 of Sarcognomy, to which this volume is devoted. With su • Ai 
 
 cies at command, enthusiasts may exclaim " Throw phy OM i ^„^ 
 
 d„ 1 , t , ... J F * ana eco- 
 
 ogs ; but medical remedies are too potent, too convenient -^ 
 
 nomical to be discarded by those who understand their val\ V e i ec _ 
 
 can they be very extensively discarded to introduce the use Sarcop- 
 
 tricity, until its application shall have been perfected by Q j t s h a ii 
 
 nomy and until by apparatus different from any now in us< *" 
 
 have been made more genial, safe and curative. a v 
 
 T , , . , . B . .ii,-, , e human 
 
 In this volume, the nervaunc method, which uses th • 1 • 
 
 se 
 
 •paring 
 
 for the exposition of Electro-Therapeutics, will be dela*/ at ^ |_ 
 I can accompany its exposition and illustration with appar 
 ter adapted to the new method than any now in use. 
 
CHAPTER II. 
 
 OF LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER, AND ITS 
 LOCATION IN THE BRAIN. 
 
 Ancient medical philosophy, spiritual or vital. Des Cartes the apostle of modern 
 skepticism. His visionary dogmatism. Prof. Huxley a follower. The 
 Cartesian spirit in medicine. Its intolerant rejection of facts and fair in- 
 vestigation. Criticism by Dr. Lionel Beale. Living beings have powers 
 foreign to dead matter. Medical dogmatism developes ignorance. Its 
 repudiation by Dr. Reynolds. The unproved hypotheses of scientists. 
 Interesting physiological statements of Prof. Bennett. Vital phenomena 
 of amoebae and white globules. Prof. Ranvier's statements. Phenomena 
 of granules, bacteria and vibriones. Haeckel's primeval parent of life a 
 fiction based on imagination. The example of the amoebae refutes mate- 
 rialism. Bastian's evasion of the issue. No anatomical difference to 
 explain different vital endowments in nerves. Vitality an indestructible and 
 permanent existence. Total failure of the fashionable physiology to explain 
 muscular motion. Fallacious ideas of the action of the brain, and its influ- 
 ence on health. Fallacies in education. The fundamental error which 
 makes biology a physical science. Public denial of vitality. The alterna- 
 tive doctrines, life or mechanism. The source of life. All life comes from 
 influx. The blood a channel of influx of vital conditions. Nervous influx 
 necessary to sensation, motion and circulation. Life comes and goes 
 through the nervous system. Death occurs from below upward. Observa- 
 tions of Bernard and Bezold. Life a neurological influx, controlled by the 
 brain. Paramount importance of cultivating the brain. Report of 
 M. Gasparin on Belgian miners. Cerebral stimulants a substitute for food. 
 Effect of heroic excitement. Something more necessary than the chemical 
 elements of food. 
 
 Effect of interrupting the transmission of influence from the brain. 
 Effect of injuries to the spinal cord. Fatality of severe laceration. Patho- 
 logical effects of spinal injuries. Effects on the heart. Analogy to typhoid 
 fever. Effects of injury of the nerves. Fallacies of Claude Bernard. Wast- 
 ing of the muscles from lack of nervous influence. The ganglionic system 
 dependent on connection with the cerebro-spinal. Centralization of life. 
 Brain controls both voluntary and involuntary processes. Tenacity of the 
 old ideas on this subject. Rapid decay of the body after injury to the brain. 
 Brain the chief seat of life, as the heart is of circulation. Intellectual inca- 
 pacity formerly to understand the heart, and now to understand the brain. 
 Persistent avoidance of the investigation, and rejection of proper methods. 
 Disregard of Gall and neglect of my demonstrations, and the experiments 
 of Prof. Mitchell. Unfortunate results. Vague and confused notions prev- 
 alent. The Divine origin of life, and its modes of influx. Benefits from 
 Its culture. Cerebral energy the source of health and object of 
 therapeutii 
 
I2 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 
 
 The medical philosophy of to-day is low in the trough between 
 the great waves of thought which once touched the higher realms of 
 being, and will again, in its reaction from a downward career. 
 
 The old medical philosophy which exclusively ruled the world 
 
 until the 17th century, recognized the spirit or pneuma as the basis 
 
 or essence of vitality. Van Helmont, Stahl, Harvey, Hunter, 
 
 (Note — Van Helmont located the soul in the epigastric region because he sup- 
 posed the brain had no circulation of blood.) 
 
 Cuvier and Bichat were vitalists, recognizing the vital force as dis- 
 tinct from and superior to the chemical forces which were subor- 
 dinate and antagonistic to vitality. 
 
 Des Cartes (1596 — 1650) the Apostle of Skepticism, led the 
 way in that style of dogmatic denial, inspired by the combative 
 animal nature, which has done so much for the limitation of human 
 knowledge and the diffusion of falsehood ; for dogmatism is not 
 content with simply ignoring principles or truths that are great and 
 wonderful, but prompts to the arrogant presentation of a -priori 
 hypotheses, often of the most absurd nature, to sustain its own con- 
 tracted views which originate in the rejection of evidence and neg- 
 lect of observation. His astronomical system of vortices was but a 
 crude speculation, which was set aside by the scientific researches 
 of Newton. Equally visionary were his conceptions of the human 
 constitution as a physical body, operating wholly by physical laws, 
 but giving lodgement to a soul in the pineal gland, which was sim- 
 ply a spectator, having no action upon the body and receiving no 
 influence from it. A baseless notion more fully developed afterward 
 by Liebnitz. The speculative dogmatism of Des Cartes has com- 
 mended him to the admiration of the famous modern skeptic, Prof. 
 Huxley, who has revamped the other insane notion of Des Cartes, 
 that animals are mere machines, operating without consciousness or 
 thought, as a clock or any other physical apparatus — a very logi- 
 cal inference from materialism. 
 
 The Cartesian spirit of dogmatism limiting the mind to the 
 conception of physical facts, has taken possession of the medical 
 profession, and Dr. Lionel Beale well says : 
 
 ' 'The disciples of the new philosophy insist that there is but 
 
LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 13 
 
 one force or power in nature, that the sun is the source of that 
 force, and forms livers, hearts, lungs and brains ; and that every 
 living thing is formed by him — that in the language of Bence 
 Jones — ' The one law of the union of force and matter, and of the 
 conservation of energy, obtains throughout the organic as well as 
 the inorganic creation. ' I feel quite sure that if the physicists who 
 make these confident assertions could condescend to study the 
 phenomena of very simple living things, they could very soon dis- 
 cover that they had no case at all. Physico-chemical dogmatizing 
 of this kind has been going on for twenty years. It has done no- 
 thing towards unravelling the mysteries of life which meet an hon- 
 est student of nature at every turn, and it has led a number of idle 
 people to believe that we really know a great deal more than we 
 do know. " 
 
 The " simple living things" which confound materialism are 
 seen in every living structure. Such structures are built up by a 
 structureless, transparent jelly, called protoplasm, or more prop- 
 erly bioplasm, which is the seat of life, and is self-moving with 
 motions for which no scientist has ever discovered any other cause 
 than vitality — with . a power of assimilating and vitalizing dead 
 matter, and a power of organizing structures for the formation 
 of which no reason can be given except that their formation is the 
 result of the vitality which maintains the mysterious motions of the 
 bioplasm. 
 
 Medical dogmatism is not philosophic — it is not a faithful 
 seeker of facts, but rejects or stubbornly evades those which might 
 give deeper philosophic views, and seems to hold that any fact 
 contradicting materialistic theories may be ignored entirely, or may 
 be discarded on any frivolous pretext, and that any author who 
 records such facts should be suppressed or ignored. Hence a 
 large amount of most valuable scientific literature is entirely un- 
 known to the pupils of the colleges, and this ignorance is firmly 
 maintained ; for the physician is ostracised or scoffed at, and the 
 professor ejected from every honorable position who treats all facts 
 with fairness, and makes no secret of his convictions. Yet all are 
 not governed by this absolute materialism. Dr. Reynolds in the 
 
1^ LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 
 
 address on medicine delivered in 1874 before the British Medical 
 Association said " Physical force may be compared to vital acts, 
 but life itself is the special property or the condition of the special 
 material which effects that peculiar relation, and it is as far 
 from comprehension now as a thousand years ago. " To the sug- 
 gestion that by further experimentation we may get rid of the term 
 and the idea of life itself, and so make a great advance in science, 
 he says " I believe it will not be done but that there will ever 
 remain the same kind of mystery with regard to life itself 
 that still shrouds the nature of the simpler forces, such for instance 
 as gravitation or heat.," " The view that is taken of the correla- 
 tion of vital and physical forces, when it assumes the form that I 
 have mentioned, is, I think mischievous in therapeutics. ' He re- 
 fers especially to the abuse of electricity, which " has again and 
 again been used when it could by no possibility have been produc- 
 tive of the slightest advantage, and when the production of such 
 enforced action of muscle and nerve has but diminished the strength 
 and exhausted both the energies and the endurance of those who 
 had not one grain of either of those qualities to spare." What 
 was needed, he says, was the " conservation of the central nutrition, 
 and a consequent addition to the stock of vital force," not 
 " Faradization, alcohol or strychnia. " 
 
 Alas, if the whole tale could be told of the destruction of 
 health and life by false and narrow medical theories, it would 
 rival the horrors of war. 
 
 The fact that chemical manipulation cannot produce the most 
 highly organized substances and structures, which are developed 
 in human bodies, does not embarrass the anti-vital colleges, for 
 they can hold on to their unproved hypothesis a thousand years, 
 and if at the end of that time they shall have produced the greater 
 portion of those substances by chemical methods, they will be still 
 as far off as ever, for they will be unable to make any of their 
 substances act as living bodies do, and it will still be as apparent 
 as ever that life comes only from life, and never from mere organi- 
 zation. But it will not require a thousand years to improve the 
 brain developement sufficiently to enable men to investigate in a 
 
ETFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 15 
 
 candid spirit, and give due weight to facts a thousand times dem- 
 onstrated. Prof. John Hughes Bennett gives the following inter- 
 esting illustrations of vitality. " Other movements which are 
 unquestionably vital, occur in the molecules of the yolk, on the 
 entrance into the ovum of the spermatozoid. Here it cannot be 
 maintained that the results are purely physical, because in differ- 
 ent ova we see such widely varying effects from apparently the 
 same cause. Neither can it be attributed to any direct influence 
 of the cell, or of its nucleus — the germinal vesicle. For exam- 
 ple, an egg is fully maturated in the female organs of generation, 
 and would prove abortive if a spermatozoid did not find its way 
 through the zona-pellucida, and get amongst the molecules of the 
 yolk. As soon as it does so, the apparently purposeless Bruno- 
 nian movements receive a new impulse and direction. Both sper- 
 matozoid and germinal vesicle are dissolved among them, and 
 wonderful phenomenon of the division of the yolk takes place, 
 not by cleavage or other action of the cell wall or nucleus, but by 
 the separation of the mass into two masses, instead of one. The 
 nature of the phenomenon in this case may be compared to what 
 is observable in a dense crowd of men called upon to pass over 
 to the right or left hand in order to settle any disputed question by 
 a majorit}'. At first unusual confusion is communicated to the 
 whole — some hurry in one direction, others in another; but after 
 a time is seen at the margins, where the crowd is least dense, a 
 clear space, which gradually approaches the centre, and at length 
 bisecting the whole, produces a complete segregation of the crowd 
 into two portions. So with the molecules of the yolk in the egg 
 after impregnation. Their movements are directed by conditions 
 which did not previously exist, and a stimulus is imparted to them 
 which causes the peculiar result. It is the division and subdivision 
 of the yolk, wholly or in part, which produces the germinal mass 
 out of which the embryo is formed, and this not by any direct 
 influence of the cell or nucleus, but in consequence of a power 
 inherent in the molecules themselves, which was communicated to 
 them for a specific purpose." 
 
 There are numerous phenomena in every animal body, which 
 
T 6 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 
 
 are entirely distinct from the operation of physical forces, and 
 which to a clear intuitive mind are an instantaneous demonstration 
 of a controlling power utterly different from mechanical and chem- 
 ical energies. The incessant locomotion and change of form 
 occurring in amoeba? and in the white globules of the blood' cannot 
 be explained mechanically. These white globules (which in man 
 vary from one-fiftieth to one-fivehundredth of the red, in number, 
 show continual changes on their surface, putting out or withdraw- 
 ing a small portion of their exterior, like living amoebas, until after 
 a few hours this vital property disappears and they remain spheri- 
 cal and at rest. 
 
 (Note—" In studying the amcebas, white globules of the blood and the lym- 
 phatic cells (organic equivalents of the nervous system) we have stated that their 
 movements styled amoeboid are not produced by accident or at random. The pro- 
 longing of their substance in their movements shows itself at the points where the 
 cellules are subjected to some irritation. The cell is then sensible, and its sensi- 
 bility excited acts on its mass which responds by a movement. The amoeboid cell 
 is then an element at once nervous and muscular, but its sensibility and mobility are 
 not localized — they do not depend upon any organic differentiation according to 
 the precise expression of naturalists. This differentiation begins among beings a 
 little more complex.— such, for example, as the polypi." — {Prof. Ranvier's 
 Lectures ; in the College of France.) 
 
 Equally unaccountable are the movements continually in 
 progress, of the granules in the interior of the white corpuscles, 
 which continue after the white corpuscle has been dissolved and its 
 contents have escaped. Nor is there any physical explanation of 
 the movements of bacteria and vibriones which originate when ani- 
 mal matter is undergoing decomposition in fluids. Still more mys- 
 terious are the strange movements of conception when the male and 
 female elements unite in forming the embryo. The materialist 
 looks at this, and instead of drawing the most obvious and natural 
 inference, substitutes the hypothesis that in some future age we 
 shall discover the physical causes which he supposes to be the 
 agents, without any scientific basis for his opinion. 
 
 The origination of bacteria and vibriones in fluids from matter 
 once vitalized as vegetable or animal substance (independent of the 
 atmospheric germs for which M. Pasteur contends so firmly) 
 gives no substantial aid to the hypothesis of the materialist. It 
 simply proves that life is capable of entering into very close union 
 
LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 1 7 
 
 with suitable albuminous substances, so close as to remain in com- 
 bination after the substance is separated from the body in which it 
 was produced, in which it worked in combination with the general 
 vitality. There is no vital chemistry to explain this combination 
 of organized matter with vitality except that which I have derived 
 from Psychometry. That the globules of blood and of milk, sepa- 
 rated from the body to which they belong, originate new forms of 
 life as bacteria, vibriones or the mildew on milk, is well known; 
 and it has also been observed that the general vitality does not 
 always control these subordinate growths, as some species of bac- 
 teria have been observed in the fluids of various plants, such as the 
 Apocynum Cannabinum (Indian hemp) Asclepias Cornuti (milk- 
 weed) and Sambucus Canadensis (elder) which are supposed to 
 be transformed starch globules. Bacteria and fungi have been 
 found in the interior of the brain, of the liver, in hepatic cells, 
 epithelium cells, membranes and other parts of dead animal bodies 
 or parts of living bodies undergoing decay. They have also been 
 found in eggs. Their occurrence in the living body circulating in 
 the blood (as I have found in certain patients) is simply an evi- 
 dence of the failure of the general vitality to control subordinate 
 parts, allowing abnormal action to take place, as occurs in fever, 
 inflammation and gangrene, when vitality is injured and unable to 
 control the fluids of the body which continually tend by their 
 chemical properties toward decomposition, in which new forms 
 arise ; for which reason antiseptics give great assistance to vitality 
 in fevers, in controlling the fatal septic tendency of animal com- 
 pounds. The bisulphites of lime and soda, by their great anti- 
 septic power counteract the degenerations of fever and the ten- 
 dency to evolution of bacteria. 
 
 To deny the existence of life power as something distinct 
 from matter, is to assume that matter may come together and origi- 
 nate life by its accidental grouping — but this has been sought in 
 vain, and Hasckel has been driven to rely upon the Monera or 
 Amoeba, in which the marvellous properties of life are manifested 
 by an apparently homogeneous speck of gelatinous matter, as the 
 " -primeval parent of life on the earth" This example he con- 
 
l8 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 
 
 siders of "the very greatest importance to the hypothesis of 
 spontaneous generation ; " but his example proves nothing, except 
 that he can, as he says, "easily imagine their origin by sponta- 
 neous generation :-" and he must also imagine a miraculous 
 transformation of the lower into the higher order of animal life, 
 proceeding through countless ages without leaving any record — 
 so that his theory at last is but an affair of imagination, like the 
 vortices of Des Cartes. If this " semifluid formless and simple 
 lump of albumen," as he describes it, is "the primeval parent of 
 all other organisms," why does not a formless and simple drop of 
 albumen from an egg or from the coagulable lymph of the blood 
 manifest the same active life and again act as "the primeval 
 parent of all other organisms? " 
 
 The example of the Monera, instead of helping the mate- 
 rialist, is really one of the best evidences of the futility of their 
 hypothesis, as it shows that vitality is competent to display its pow- 
 ers in an organization of the simplest character, while a structure 
 apparently the sajne, without the vitality, simply goes into decom- 
 position. The vital power displayed by the amoeba are not expli- 
 cable by any complexity of organization. " The amoeba," says 
 Baslian, "is forever changing its form. It is composed of a clear 
 jelly-like, material, endowed with a super-abundance of that 
 intrinsic activity characteristic of animal life generally. Those 
 internal molecular movements, indeed, which are inferred to occur 
 to a marked extent in all living matter, seem to take place in it in 
 a preeminent degree. Its whole substance shows a mobility of the 
 most striking kind. It continually moves through the water or 
 over surfaces, by. alternate projections and retractions of its active 
 body-substance." Thus, without visible muscles it moves, and 
 without a digestive apparatus it takes and digests food, taking it at 
 any point of its surface. The vital powers are as Bastian says, 
 "uniformly possessed by all parts of the organism," " composed 
 almost wholly of undifferentiated protoplasm." And from this 
 "undifferentiated protoplasm" or "jelly like material" the vital 
 energy builds up the muscular and other organs. The formation 
 of muscular and nervous tissue by vital -processes acting on the 
 
LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 19 
 
 jelly like substance, is the conclusion adopted by Bastian, and 
 what other conclusion could be adopted in view of the facts of 
 embryology, than that life constructs its organs in the first place, 
 as it modifies them continually, so long as it holds them. But 
 Bastian as a materialist is compelled to express himself vaguely ; 
 instead of a vital force modifying and carryi-ng on developement, 
 he regards the -processes as the cause of the developement — thus 
 assuming that all the powers of life are inherent in the jelly-like 
 substance — but if this were so (nature operating by unvarying 
 laws) we might expect that all such jelly-like substances would 
 show the same inherent powers of life, and if they did it would 
 give great plausibility to the position of the materialist. In meeting 
 the issue Bastian unconsciously resorts to a subterfuge. To say 
 that " vital processes " are the cause of anything is as lucid as to 
 say that locomotion is the cause of our travelling. Vital processes 
 are not a substance or a power, but merely a name for the action 
 of vitality. If we deny the vitality, then the processes are merely 
 chemical and mechanical, and the use of the word vital is 
 inappropriate. 
 
 Organization is not the cause, but the effect of vitality. The 
 most learned anatomists can discover no organization that explains 
 the movements of amoebae, and they seek in vain for any percep- 
 tible difference in peripheral nerve filaments between those which 
 have sensitive and those which have motive power. Vitality or 
 vital power is continually going beyond organization, seizing and 
 appropriating dead matter, and endowing it with vital properties 
 by union with an existing organism ; and when sufficiently con- 
 centrated and free from material incumbrance, it is competent to 
 take hold of a large mass of dead matter, producing wonderful 
 changes and transmutations, or moving large bodies weighing 
 more than the human form with irresistable force, so long as it 
 holds them. These facts, older than any facts of modern scientific 
 discovery, and as extensively demonstrated before intelligent and 
 critical observers, are unknown only to those who do not desire or 
 seek to know them. If eminent scientists close their eyes and 
 turn away their heads w r hen their dogmas are demolished, they 
 
20 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 
 
 may nevertheless live long enough to blush for their willful 
 ignorance. I do not choose to follow their shameful example in 
 ignoring the most wonderful scientific facts established in the 
 nineteenth century. 
 
 There is no evasion of the issue. Either chemical and 
 mechanical forces do all that is done, or a higher and subtler 
 power called vitality does what is essential. If that higher power 
 exists it is, like other primitive forces, indestructible, and must be 
 capable of existing in other forms and places when it leaves any 
 embodiment. Like caloric, it passes from one place to another 
 without loss — but, unlike caloric, it has an organized coherence 
 which prevents its dissipation or reduction. The honest and 
 enlightened scientist who is not cramped by bigotry or dogmatism 
 is bound to seek the existence of this force after it departs from the 
 human body, if it can be any where detected, and w r hen millions, 
 uncramped by prejudice, have followed and recognized it in 
 spiritual forms, in more perfect exhibition than it makes in the 
 human bodv — # when, moreover, the research has been most 
 severely critical and exact, conducted often by those whose names 
 are eminent in science, to refuse to investigate or even look at the 
 results of investigation is the same exhibition of fatuous bigotry 
 which was arrayed against Galileo. 
 
 ; The fashionable Physiology in its attempted explanation of mus- 
 cular motion independent of life, is compelled to rely upon a mere 
 hypothesis. It pretends to account for muscular power as a result 
 of the combustion of elements of the muscle or of the blood, which 
 furnish carbon and hydrogen. 
 
 (Note — According to Hermann, who has specially studied the chemistry of the 
 developement of heat during muscular contraction, muscular work is the result 
 of the decomposition of nitrogenous substances. — Dr. Beard.) 
 
 But combustion does not generate contractile power ; on the contrary 
 
 it generates caloric, which is an expansive power, and which so 
 
 far from favoring muscularity, is a relaxing, debilitating influence ; 
 
 and the greatly increased combustion of fever is accompanied by the 
 
 almost entire destruction of muscular strength. J To assume that an 
 
 expansive force like caloric is under such circumstances converted 
 
 into a contractile force, when there is no example in the human 
 
LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 21 
 
 body or in any department of nature of such a transformation, is a 
 most unscientific and unwarrantable exercise of a credulous imagi- 
 nation. Caloric in the steam engine manifests force, but it is ex- 
 pansive force alone, it never shows contractile power. I Combus- 
 tion occurring in a muscle, is the same chemical fact as when it 
 occurs elsewhere, and must produce the same effect — but the 
 more rapid the combustion the greater the heat, the more the muscle 
 is relaxed. The muscle is much more contractile when cold, and its 
 maximum persistence of contraction is in the coldness of death — 
 the rigor mortis. Contractility belongs to cold and magnetism, 
 but the attractive power of the magnet is destroyed by heat. 
 Contractility is a property of muscular substance given to it by 
 the forces .of vitality in its organization, and controlled by vitality 
 in its operation, but it is still an unsolved mystery in physiology — 
 certainly it is not the effect of combustion, nor is it any less 
 conspicuous in the cold muscles of the fish, in which there is so 
 little of oxidation. 
 
 It is very remarkable that this obvious sciolism should have 
 been so unanimously adopted with unquestioning faith by modern 
 biologists, when it is but a metaphysical inference from their 
 a -priori dogma of matter and force, as the cause of all things, 
 though a moment's candid reflection might have suggested that when 
 one form of force is converted into another, it entirely disappears 
 by the transformation, and exists only in the new form. The 
 work that is done in a steam engine is commensurate with the 
 consumption and disappearance of caloric, but there is no evidence 
 that caloric is ever in the slightest degree consumed or diminished 
 by muscular contraction ; on the contrary, there is commonly an 
 elevation of temperature about two degrees by vigorous muscular 
 contraction. All thecaloric generated in the human body by the 
 consumption of oxygen — all the oxygen is capable of producing — 
 exists in the body as caloric, until it is lost by radiation, conduction 
 and evaporation. The ingenuity of chemists has been severely 
 taxed to discover the chemical processes in the human body which 
 are adequate to account for the amount of caloric that we know is 
 generated and discharged ; and it is not entirely certain that they 
 
22 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 
 
 have discovered a complete explanation. Hence there is no 
 possible opportunity for discovering chemical or combustion pro- 
 cesses to manufacture something convertible into contractile force 
 when all that can be discovered is known to be devoted to the 
 production of sensible caloric, which is discharged without doing 
 any work in the bodj r , precisely as it is from the fire that warms our 
 apartments, having performed its sole office of maintaining the 
 warmth which is a necessary condition for the control of matter by 
 spirit and for all physiological processes. 
 
 As according to the fashionable physiology, vitality is a result 
 of chemical process in the body to which the convoluted brain con- 
 tributes nothing, and from which it expends a great deal. We 
 have been warned against the effects of cerebral excitement, 
 of mental cultivation and of precocity, as though the action of 
 the brain were both exhausting and dangerous. 
 
 All of these theories were erroneous, and based upon inaccu- 
 rate or incomplete knowledge. Education and mental excitement 
 are injurious only «vhen they exercise, excite or fatigue the ante- 
 rior, intellectual and sensitive portions of the brain, instead of 
 giving normal exercise to the whole brain, which is in the 
 highest degree invigorating, and far more beneficial than 
 muscular exercise. 
 
 Among medical authors, ignorance of the brain has been too 
 profound to discriminate between or understand its functions, and 
 to know that the frontal region alone is exhaustive to the vital 
 forces, while the occipital half is the very seat and source of vital 
 power. 
 
 Not understanding this, the world has adopted an educational 
 system which attempts to exercise the frontal brain alone, which 
 exhausts the physical and moral energies, undermines the health, 
 injures the eyes and shortens life. Then, attributing these evils 
 to education and cerebral activity, it regards the latter as 
 unfriendly to health, and unsuitable for woman, when, in reality, 
 a normal or complete education is an evolution of health and vigor, 
 and the cerebral activity which embraces the emotions and ener- 
 
LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 23 
 
 gies, is a grand renovator of health, and invigorator of the 
 constitution. 
 
 Influenced at first by the old theories universally taught in the 
 colleges, it was difficult for me to understand the true relations of 
 the brain to vitality, until by many experiments and prolonged 
 study it became apparent that vitality was not the product of or- 
 ganization, but organization was the product of vitality, which is 
 the organizing and sustaining power, the dominant power in our 
 complex constitution. This vitality has ever eluded and baffled 
 the medical profession because they have regarded Biology as one 
 of the -physical sciences, and thus reversing the plan of nature, 
 have regarded combinations of matter as the source of life (although 
 they 'have been unable to produce life by any chemical combina- 
 tion), and hence have fixed their attention on matter alone, ignor- 
 ing life — treating it as a phenomenon or a fact — of no substan- 
 tial existence or power, and entirely refusing to follow or witness 
 the evidence of its continued existence after its separation from 
 matter, because such evidence annhilates dogmatic theories. 
 
 That this gross materialism has usurped the control of Biological 
 science, is sufficiently evident when we find that a President of the 
 American Association for the advancement of Science could give a 
 public lecture in New York, denying vitality as a power, and 
 assuming its origin from mechanical and chemical causes, without 
 a word of protest from scientists, clergy and literati. Such scien- 
 tists expect by thermometic observation to find the calorific and 
 mechanical equivalents of thought and emotion as Joule determined 
 the mechanical equivalent of caloric ! They are altogether too 
 serious and positive to see anything ludicrous in such speculations. 
 
 We are compelled to choose between this gross scientific 
 materialism, which annihilates Pneumatology and Religion, — 
 and the true science of life, which recognizes its potentiality in 
 the living body, and accepting the irrefutable and superabundant 
 evidence of its continued existence after separation, enters with 
 pleasure upon the profound and sublime study of pneumatology, 
 in which science enters the sphere of wisdom and love. 
 
 If life is a reality, a power, a cause, and not a mere phenom- 
 
24 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 
 
 enon or effect, the question arises, where is it located, whence it 
 comes and how it is fed or sustained. These questions must be 
 answered before we can determine the relation of vitality to 
 the brain. 
 
 If life is a distinct element of permanent existence — as per- 
 manent and as distinct as the oxygen which constitutes the major 
 part of the human body — it must be like other elements derived 
 from some abundant supply of the same element, and if it increases, 
 it must increase by influx from its source, as do the ponderable 
 elements which are supplied by influx of food. 
 
 The ponderable elements do not supply life, but only an 
 apparatus for its use. When their supply ceases, the physical 
 apparatus of life is lacking, and we die of inanition — i. e. life 
 leaves a structure which is incompetent to hold it, or, rather, to 
 which it cannot hold. 
 
 As bodily structure comes from material influx, it is equally 
 true that all life is from influx. There is no such thing as life 
 inherent in structure, all life being influx, and this becomes, 
 evident by a brief and simple course of reasoning. 
 
 The life of any limb, or other part of the body, depends 
 immediately upon the influx of blood, and its death follows the 
 entire loss or removal of the blood. The increased developement 
 of vitality which comes from an increased supply of blood is seen 
 when the circulation of the face is increased by section of the 
 cervical ganglionic nerves. In these cases the evolution of heat is 
 greater, the sensibility longer resists the influence of chloroform, 
 the rigor mortis is later in its appearance, and putrefaction does 
 not begin so soon. But the blood has no more inherent vitality 
 than the limb. If it stagnated in the limb — the limb and the 
 blood would die together. It obtains the conditions of vitality 
 in the lungs, and dies when deprived of those conditions. 
 But is not the structure of the lungs that imparts the conditions — 
 it is the air that enters the lungs, without which influx lungs, 
 blood and organs all die. Thus there appears to be an influx 
 through the head by the trachea, of a vitalizing element, which we 
 call oxygen, which is a magazine of the conditions necessary to 
 
LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 25 
 
 vitality, but not of vitality itself — Food supplies the physical ele- 
 ments, and the continued influx of both is essential to life, but does 
 not make life. The limb that is supplied by alimentation and res- 
 piration with good blood is not thereby kept alive, but only in a via- 
 ble condition. 
 
 An influx from the nervous system is necessary to give the 
 vital capacity for sensation and motion, and influx through the 
 nervous system is necessary to give motion to the heart and the 
 proper conditions to the bloodvessels for circulating* the blood. 
 Hence without the nervous system there can be neither conscious 
 active life, nor the circulation of blood which gives the conditions 
 of vitality, and the consumption of food which supplies material. 
 
 As life is manifested by sensation, motion, circulation (and 
 consequent nourishment) and as all three are dependent on influx 
 from the nervous system, it is obvious that life really comes into 
 all parts from its seat in the nervous system. And although the 
 digestive organs supply material and the lungs supply by means 
 of oxygen the imponderables, these are but subordinate contribu- 
 tions incapable of evolving life, which comes entirely by the ner- 
 vous system, and takes its departure therefrom when it leaves the 
 body, first abandoning its outposts in the lower limbs, concentra- 
 ting to the upper end of the spinal cord, lingering in the chest — 
 then in the base of the brain and finally leaving from the upper 
 portions of the brain, in accordance with pathognomic laws — and 
 as has been observed by clairvoyants. After death, the muscles of 
 the limbs as shown by Onimus, lose their contractility much soon- 
 er than the muscles of the trunk, and the extensors before the 
 flexors. A similar order of succession is observed in general pal- 
 sies. 
 
 That death occurs from below upwards was illustrated by the 
 celebrated physiologist Claude Bernard in experiments on the nerves 
 and muscles of frogs. When the animal dies from loss of blood 
 or from woorara poisoning, the filaments of nerves nearest the mus- 
 cle first lose their vitality, the nerves die from the periphery to the 
 centre, and the muscles that have ceased to obey their nerves may 
 be roused by induction currents applied nearer the spine or upon 
 
26 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 
 
 the spinal cord at the roots of the nerves . The death of the nerves 
 as shown by Von Bezold, begins in the filaments which are distri- 
 buted in the muscles, which gradually lose their power, and pro- 
 gresses through the trunk of the nerve to the spinal cord. 
 
 If then life emanates from the nervous system which actuates 
 the muscles, the lungs, the digestive organs and the circulation, 
 and which also controls nutrition — it is evidently a neurological 
 influx, which through the nervous system controls the material in- 
 flux in voluntary and unconscious processes, and its seat or channel 
 must be sought in the controlling portions of the nervous system 
 which we know are in the cranium. 
 
 In discovering this truth we are led to important practical con- 
 clusions, for hygiene and for virtue. We learn that it is far more 
 important to cultivate and energize the brain and the soul, than 
 to confine our attention to purely physical matters. We learn that 
 with proper spiritual energy man's life may be efficient and success- 
 ful, but without that higher energy, an abundant nourishment may 
 develope only a gross and degraded humanity. 
 
 The influence of a regimen which stimulates the brain was 
 shown by the report of M. Gasparin to the French Academy upon 
 the diet of the working population. He ascertained the usual 
 amount of nitrogenous food in the diet of the laboring population 
 of France, and ascertained that Belgian miners performed the 
 most vigorous labor, beyond the average of French miners, with 
 much less of food — less even than the inmates of workhouses and 
 the monks of La Trappe. "The mining population of the en- 
 virons of Charleroi (says M . Gasparin) have resolved this prob- 
 lem to nourish themselves completely, preserve health and great 
 vigor of muscular strength upon a diet with less than half of the 
 nutritive principles of that indicated by observation in Europe." 
 
 The distinctive peculiarity of the diet of the Belgian miners 
 is the use of a potent cerebral stimulant. They use three times a 
 day half a pint or more of coffee, using no other beverage, coffee, 
 bread and butter being the major part of their diet. This gives a 
 stimulus to vitality which resists the rapid disintegration of the tis- 
 sues and by diminishing the amount of excretion diminishes the 
 
LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 27 
 
 neccessity for food in proportion. In the same way the demand 
 for food diminishes in those who live under high heroic excitement, 
 like Kossuth, who in the Hungarian war was accustomed to take 
 but one meal a day. w We know," says M.Gasparin w how sober peo- 
 ple are who drink coffee. The prodigious abstinence of the caravans, 
 the slightly nurtitive regimen of the Arabs, come with all the author- 
 ity of experience in support of the effects attributed to this beverage ; 
 and the distribution of coffee to the French troops during their fati- 
 guing marches through Algeria is regarded by the officers as one 
 of the best means of enabling the troops to support them." 
 
 There is much truth in the conclusions of M. Gasparin, but 
 he overlooks the fact that human constitutions are not all alike — 
 and that some are naturally able to live on a smaller quantity of 
 food than others from having greater tenacity of constitution and 
 greater power of appropriation of nourishment. 
 
 Food must give us something else, in addition to the chemical 
 constituents of the body — something that sustains our spiritual 
 energy, without which health declines. The fibrin of the blood is 
 chemically speaking a complete embodyment of nutriment, but 
 dogs fed upon it will starve in about a month, according to Majen- 
 die, for it is lacking in something not yet understood. 
 
 It is easy to verify the transmission of life from the brain to 
 each and every organ of the body by interrupting the channels of 
 its transmission, and finding that life is impaired or destroyed in 
 proportion to the interruption, as a stream is diminished when its 
 fountain is obstructed, and disappears when it is closed. 
 
 The spinal cord through which the brain power is transmitted, 
 is so strongly protected by the bones of the spinal column that it is 
 only in severe injuries that we discover its importance. In the 
 nervauric experiments which I have introduced, we are exempted 
 from the necessity of studying the records of surgery or engaging 
 in the tedious cruelties of vivisection, as the human hand 
 can evolve any local function regardless of the hindrance offered 
 by bones and integuments. 
 
 Injuries of the spinal cord operate with terrible effect upon 
 
28 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 
 
 all parts which lose their connection with the brain by the injury, 
 or have their connection impaired. 
 
 Brodie says, that "wounds which penetrate through the ex- 
 ternal parts into the spinal cord are almost invariably fatal at a 
 very early period, the examples of recovery from them being very 
 few in number." "The effect of a violent concussion is at once to 
 impair, and even to destroy the functions of the spinal cord, some- 
 times even causing the patients death in the course of a few hours." 
 
 It is well known that when the cord is divided .or severely 
 injured by compression, all sensation and voluntary motion are 
 lost below the point of injury. The inferior parts are beyond our 
 consciousness and beyond our control as if they belonged to 
 another individual. Surely such facts should have fixed in the 
 minds of Biologists the truth that life belongs to the brain and to 
 other parts in proportion as it is borrowed from the cerebro-spinal 
 system, of which the brain is the commanding center. 
 
 Injuries of the spinal cord seldom amount to an absolute isola- 
 tion of the parts below the injury, as the physical connection 
 exists notwithstanding the laceration or compression. But if the 
 injury be sufficiently severe and sufficiently high on the cord, then 
 death is speedy. The quickest way to kill an animal (except 
 crushing the brain) is to sever the cord just below the cranium. 
 " A case of sudden death from dislocation of the second vertebra 
 as recorded by Petit, and other similar cases are described by Sir 
 Charles Bell and Mr. Stafford. The latter author mentions two 
 cases of death taking place immediately from fracture of the 
 second and third cervical vertebra. "I attended a young gentleman 
 who labored under symptoms of caries of the superior cervical 
 vertebra, and, who, having eaten a hearty dinner, suddenly 
 expired while altering his position in bed." (Brodie.} Evidently, 
 as all life in the body proceeds from the brain, the severance of 
 the spinal cord immediately below the cranium, or its severe com- 
 pression must be immediately fatal, and all surgical records confirm 
 this statement. 
 
 A remarkable illustration of this, is mentioned by Sir Charles 
 Bell, in his Anatomy. — "A young man was brought into the 
 
LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 29 
 
 Middlesex Hospital, who had fallen upon his head. He soon 
 recovered, and lay prostrate for some time without exhibiting a 
 symptom to raise alarm. He had given thanks to the assembled 
 governors of the hospital, and had returned into the ward for his 
 bundle, when, on turning around to bid adieu to the other patients, 
 he fell and in the instant expired. Upon examining his head, it 
 was found that the margins of the occipital hole had been broken : 
 no doubt it had happened that in turning his head, the pieces 
 were displaced, and closed and crushed the medulla oblongata as 
 it passes from the skull." 
 
 But as spinal injuries commonly amount only to a slight lacer- 
 ation or a slight compression, life though greatly impaired may in 
 some cases continue until the injury has been repaired. 
 
 In these cases, however, organic life is gradually impaired to 
 a great extent — an extent proportional to the injury. Thus the 
 bladder becomes paralyzed and incapable, expelling its contents. 
 The secretion of urine is either entirely suspended or becomes 
 quite morbid, having a disgusting odor, an unnatural color and 
 amorphous sediment. It is most commonly ammoniacal (corres- 
 ponding to its decay when outside of the body), turbid and full of 
 unnatural mucus, derived from the bladder, and frequently con- 
 taining blood. In other cases the quality of the urine changes 
 from day to day. The bladder, by impairment of its vitality, is in 
 a congested condition with adhesive mucus and phosphate of lime 
 in its interior. 
 
 The bowels become torpid and require the most powerful pur- 
 gatives to move them, the abdomen becomes tympanitic. Evacu- 
 ations sometimes take place unconsciously and involuntarily. 
 Vomiting occurs in other cases, ejecting large quantities of dark 
 colored fluid. The alvine evacuations are sometimes of a black 
 tarry character and highly offensive odor. 
 
 The external parts show an equal loss of vitality, and sloughs 
 are formed, and gangrene developed from the mere pressure of 
 lying on the bed. Sloughs often appear on the sacrum, nates and 
 ankles as early as the second day. The sloughing is more severe 
 when the injury is higher up, and consequently vitality more com- 
 
3<D LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 
 
 pletely excluded, and all the surgeon can do is to endeavor to dif- 
 fuse and moderate the pressure. 
 
 Notwithstanding the severe consequences to the body, the 
 brain is not usually affected unless the injury be above the cephalic 
 and pulmonic regions of the cord, with which the brain maintains 
 a close sympathy. " I have seldom observed," says Brodie, " the 
 sensorium to be materially affected, except where the injury was 
 in the cervical portion of the spinal cord." 
 
 The heart is not directly dependent on the spinal cord, but 
 indirectly, through the ganglionic system and consequently is not 
 liable to the same sudden paralysis as the voluntary muscles ; 
 nevertheless " the first effect which a severe injury of the spinal 
 cord produces on the circulation is to lessen the force of the heart's 
 action and to cause a state of general depression and collapse, the 
 pulse being very feeble, contracted, and sometimes scarcely percep- 
 tible. When the injury is in the lower part of the neck, the patient 
 not infrequently dies before complete reaction is established, the 
 pulse remaining feeble to the last. In the majority of cases, after 
 the first twenty-four hours the pulse rises to 96 or 100 a minute ; 
 but still it is feeble and contracted, indicating a state of great gen- 
 eral debility. The appearance of the tongue corresponds to the 
 character of the pulse ; it is not unusual at the end of twenty-four 
 hours to find it dry and parched, covered with a brown fur, which 
 is soon converted into a black crust, resembling what we observe 
 in the last stage of a continued fever." 
 
 The blood also has the characteristics of fever, the coagulum 
 being large and loose, or soft as when its vitality is reduced by 
 miasmatic poison. 
 
 The analogy of the conditions produced by obstructing the 
 action of the brain on the body to those produced by th^ devitalizing 
 power of malaria and the consequent fever is quite striking, and it 
 is a curious coincidence that in a case described by Sir Charles 
 Bell, in which there was a fracture of the eleventh dorsal vertabra 
 death took place on the fifth day, preceded by typhoid sy?nftoms — 
 symptoms of which indicate inflammation of the ileum, which is 
 
LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 3 1 
 
 controlled by the lower dorsal portion of the cord — the portion 
 injured in this case. 
 
 Injuries and morbid conditions of the brain produce a great 
 variety of morbid conditions in the body, and Dr. Brigham remarks 
 that "after death from injury of the brain, putrefaction of other 
 parts of the body takes place much more rapidly than after death 
 from the injury of other organs." 
 
 The direct injury of the brain by miasmatic poison, which is 
 the cause of typhus fever, developes a group of symptoms singu- 
 larly analogous to those which follow the impairment of its 
 influence by injury of the spinal cord. 
 
 "Most of the fatal cases of typhus (said Prof. Graves) at 
 present die of cerebral disease." " In the genuine typhus fever 
 (says Dr. Gerhard) this is almost always the case : Very few 
 patients die of this disease without strongly marked cerebral 
 symptoms." And yet there is seldom any appearance of inflam- 
 mation of the brain in such cases. The functional impairment of 
 the brain alone is enough to destroy life. 
 
 Without looking farther, we have facts enough to establish 
 clearly that all life depends upon the brain, and that just in propor- 
 tion as the influx from the brain is hindered by any injury to its 
 well-protected channels, every vital process is deranged or sus- 
 pended. If the hindrance be absolute and complete, death is 
 immediate, for the death of the body deprives the brain of the 
 conditions and elements necessary to retain vitality. 
 
 Injuries of the nerves also by cutting off their dependent parts 
 from the spinal cord, show similar results, in loss of vitality and 
 predisposition to disease. It is stated in the Medico Chirurgical 
 Review, vol. 22d, that Mr. Earle cut the ulnar nerve behind the 
 elbow, and that in consequence the fore-arm became disposed to 
 constant attacks of inflammation, and the temperature of the little 
 finger was four degrees lower than that of the other. 
 
 According to Demarquay (De la Regeneration des Organes et 
 des Tissus) when a nerve has been cut, the central end, in 
 connection with the nervous system does not degenerate, but the 
 exterior end does, rapidly, undergoing a fatty degeneration, 
 
2,2 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 
 
 completed in six or eight weeks. The muscles begin to degen- 
 erate in about three weeks. But with regard to paralyzed 
 nerves and muscles which retain their connection with the central 
 system , it is remarkable how well they are preserved for a long 
 time. " It is a common observation (says Dr. Poore) that after a 
 hemiplegia has endured for many months, the wasting of the 
 muscles is often trifling in the extreme, and as often as not, the 
 electric irritability to both forms of the current remains the same as 
 on the healthy side. If, however, a man injures a peripheral 
 nerve — say his ulnar, or one of the branches of the external 
 popliteal — it is astonishing with what rapidity the muscles sup- 
 plied by the injured nerve waste, and how soon the electric 
 irritability becomes altered." The muscles cut off from their 
 nerves would not only waste away and lose all irritability but 
 would also die and rot, if it were not for the vascular connection 
 which brings them living blood, and also the influence of the 
 ganglionic nerves, which are co-extensive with these blood vessels. 
 Claude Bernard* claims that the growth and changes of all the 
 organs are affected through the nervous system only by the control 
 of the blood vessels, but in this case we see the'blood vessels and 
 their nerves uninjured and the blood supplied, but atrophy occurs 
 because the vitality from the brain and spinal cord has been cut 
 off, except so far as it may be supplied by the blood and the 
 vasomotor nerves. If the theory of Bernard were true, there could 
 be no atrophy after the section of a muscular nerve. Yet Bernard 
 is one of the most eminent modern physiologists, and in trying to 
 locate vitality in the tissues instead of the central nervous system, 
 he is merely following the mechanical anti-vital drift of the 
 profession, which he has carried to the reductio ad absurdnm. 
 
 There is a great wasting of the muscles even when they are not 
 cut oft' from the cord and brain by section of their nerves, in cases 
 of hysterical paralysis. In these cases there is a loss of sensibil- 
 ity as well as motion, and consequently the muscles can have no 
 reflex influence from the cord, and it no longer sustains them. 
 
 The ganglionic system extending along the spinal column, 
 and sending its ramifications along all blood vessels has been 
 
LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 33 
 
 regarded as an independent seat of life, but in man, at least, its 
 action soon ceases when the influx from the brain is cut off. 
 
 How clearly does it appear, when we consider all the facts, that 
 life in the body is an influx from the brain, not only in its voluntary 
 but in its involuntary processes, all of which are controlled by the 
 action of the brain and responsive to its emotional conditions, which 
 not only control every secretion, every movement of fluids and 
 every vital change, but transmit a similar life with all its psychic 
 and physiological peculiarities to a new being in the womb. 
 
 And yet so strong is the domination of habit and of world-wide 
 opinions, that I retained the old Biological ideas on this subject long- 
 er than I am willing to confess, without comparing them with facts. 
 Like other physiologists I regarded the brain as. an addition to a 
 solid s} T stem of life developed at a lower stage of being in the body 
 and the nerves — not perceiving that as life is in all cases an affair 
 of the nervous system it must necessarily centralize in the highest 
 developement or controlling structure of the nervous system, instead 
 of remaining in its subordinate parts — as it is a law of the ani- 
 mal kingdom that with advancing developement the functions dif- 
 fused through the body shall become centralized in organs of great- 
 er power and superior organization. Thus the heart becomes the 
 chief reliance for circulation, instead of the diffused capillary sys- 
 tem, and the brain, instead of the spinal and ganglionic systems, 
 which still remain in a subordinate position as do the capillaries 
 in the circulation of the blood. To ignore the brain as the chief 
 seat of life would be as unscientific as to ignore the heart as the 
 cause of the circulation. 
 
 The materialistic physiologists who ignore the concentration 
 of life in the brain, and suppose the spinal cord and adjacent ganglia 
 to be the entire sources of the organic functions to which they hold 
 an immediate executive relation, have reflected but little upon the 
 absolute dependence of all upon the brain, and the speedy suspen- 
 sion of all when the influx from the brain is interrupted. 
 
 It is characteristic of animals to scan phenomena closely with- 
 out dwelling upon or even discovering their causes, and it shows 
 how little the general intelligence of the human race has advanced 
 
34 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 
 
 beyond the stage of animal life, to observe that in the days of 
 Harvey, almost the entire medical profession could look at the 
 passage of red blood from the heart and the return of the venous 
 blood toward the heart, the arrangements of its valves and its 
 forcible action, without realizing that the heart was the active 
 agent of the circulation, but stolidly, rejecting the idea, and treat- 
 ing with coarse derision this simple and manifest discovery. 
 
 Is it not the same intellectual incapacity to-day which hinders 
 the recognition of the paramount power of the brain as the seat of 
 vitality, and the consequent direction of investigations to discover 
 the locations, the laws and the philosophy of life in the seat of its 
 existence by comparative developement as illustrated by Gall — 
 by accurate pathological investigations of psychic as well as phys- 
 ical functions ; by the study of the marvellous facts developed by 
 the cultivators of animal magnetism, or by my own method of vital 
 excitation of the brain and psychometric exploration of its functions. 
 
 The method of Gall (studying comparative developement in 
 men and animals} was eminently rational, and no one has ever 
 followed that method as a student of nature, without realizing that 
 Gall had made many important discoveries. But his method was 
 abandoned, by the profession generally, for no reason apparently, 
 but its aversion to psychic studies. His inaccuracies were treated 
 as falsehoods, and a host of frivolous objections were brought for- 
 ward, the majority of which were based on ignorance of the 
 subject and ignorance of the doctrines of Gall — and under such 
 influences the present generation of physicians has become con- 
 firmed in the prejudices of ignorance against a science of which 
 they have no valuable knowledge. 
 
 Hence it is that my demonstrations of the brain, before the 
 Boston committee of physicians, before the Faculty of the Indiana 
 State University, and on many other occasions in collegiate insti- 
 tuions, has produced no impression on the profession beyond the 
 sphere of my personal presence, and the repetition of my experi- 
 ments by the famous Prof. J. K. Mitchell, of the Jefferson Medical 
 College of Philadelphia, produced no more impression than a 
 sky-rocket would make on the darkness of night. 
 
LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 35 
 
 Prof. Mitchell was a man of genius, but not of the moral cour- 
 age which appreciates, upholds and diffuses truth. He could not 
 realize the splendor and the power of a revelation of the functions 
 of the brain, which he knew would make even less impression upon 
 the well organized and consolidated mass of the medical profession 
 than did the discovery of Harvey, which was so simple and so 
 easily within the grasp of the humblest intelligence. Hence he 
 ceased to speak of the subject or manifest any further interest in it, 
 and *for these forty years past, physiological instruction has gone 
 on, blind to the greatest and most fundamental truths, the igno- 
 rance of which has had far more serious and disastrous effects than 
 the ignorance of the circulation, for it was an ignorance of the 
 basis of all medical philosophy, ignorance of the basis of insanity, 
 ignorance of the philosophy of animal magnetism, and ignorance 
 of the greatest powers o{ the human mind, through which ail rapid 
 intellectual progress will hereafter be made. 
 
 The state of intellectual hebetude which permits the cultiva- 
 tion of physiology,, in the study of its minor phenomena, to 
 the neglect of the brain, with a vague and dreamy notion that the 
 brain, as to its convoluted structure, maintains some vague relation 
 to psychic phenomena in their aggregate, w'thout having as all 
 other nervous structures are known to have, specific functions in 
 in special structures, and without realizing that its wonderful 
 psychic powers are anything more than rrsults of chemical and 
 mechanical processes, is partly the result of our miserably defec- 
 tive education, and partly the result of imperfect developement of 
 the higher faculties which seek and appreciate the highest truths, 
 and cannot therefore be overcome until a higher ethical condition 
 shall place society or at least its teachers, on the plane of philoso- 
 phy which is far above the animal nature. 
 
 When w r e understand clearly that life is located in the brain 
 and its subordinate spinal and ganglionic structures, we may 
 enquire whether it originates there, or comes by influx and is 
 replenished from the limitless ocean of unembodied life which is 
 invisible — whether the over-soul of the universe does by anv intelli- 
 gible species of influx sustain and develope the life of individuals, 
 
$6 LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 
 
 which seems to be a fragment of the Divine nature — will wis- 
 dom and love. 
 
 That there is such an influx I believe, for as life is the poten- 
 tial element that survives the body, and is therefore distinct from 
 all material structures, and capable of growth and developement 
 while in the body, it must have an influx distinct from the influx 
 of food, and that influx must come from other life, or vital elements 
 which are also distinct from matter. 
 
 Whether and to what extent this influx is a direct, immediate 
 influx from the spirit world, or is an indirect influx by coming in 
 with organized matter, and developing from food and air is a pro- 
 found question. To me it appears that we have both the direct 
 and the indirect influx, and that there are potentialities in food and 
 air which are received into the body, and combined with, as sub- 
 ordinate to, the higher influx which is purely spiritual. The dis- 
 cussion of this would be out of place here, further than to say that 
 the healer may often use this spiritual influx for his own benefit 
 and for that of his patient. The great positive life must be the 
 source of all other life, controlling - all evolution of life on this 
 globe, inflowing to man before birth, and continuing through life, 
 which influx controls the subordinate influx of light, oxygen and 
 food. After this subordinate influx has ceased, and the body has 
 become unfitted for farther influx of life through the nervous sys- 
 tem, the vitality or soul which takes its departure becomes in a 
 far higher degree the recipient of a continued influx. The non- 
 perception and non-recognition of this influx by scientists is no 
 objection to its reality. The chief stars of the stellar universe are 
 unknown and unrecognized — by the common mind — by those 
 who have not used the telescope — and no matter how many hun- 
 dred millions ignore or disbelieve the invisible influx, its distinct 
 perception by a single telescopic mind establishes its reality. 
 
 When the laws of Divine influx are studied and obeyed, there 
 will be men and women with nobler physical forms, far less liable 
 to disease, or to early decay and death. The study of the brain 
 and soul will lead to that noble result. 
 
LIFE AS A SPIRITUAL POWER. 37 
 
 With this hasty glance it will be apparent that I regard the 
 brain as the source and not the consumer of life, and that we may, 
 advantageously, stimulate the brain for sanative effects, when we 
 understand its organology. The natural stimulus of the brain, 
 as our spiritual energies are roused in conquering obstacles, per- 
 suing our pleasures and enjoying society, developes our entire 
 being, physical and mental. Force of character, arising from 
 the occipital brain, not only leads to success, but energizes and 
 developes the body. Men degenerate when confined for twelve or 
 fourteen hours to quiet, humble work, and deprived of the exer- 
 cise of the active ambitious faculties of the occipital region. 
 Cerebral energy is therefore an essential condition of health, and 
 the treatment of the brain, which requires accurate knowledge, is 
 an important part of nervauric treatment. 
 
CHAPTER III. 
 SARCOGNOMY — GENERAL VIEW. 
 
 Definition of Sarcognomy. Its origin. Why do we recognize psychic influences 
 in the body. Contrary to prevalent medical doctrines. The misdirected 
 energy of the medical profession . Incapacity of the colleges for psychic 
 investigations. The body has no psychic functions in man. Conscious life in 
 the brain, physiological processes in the body. Soul controls both. The 
 triple reaction is the process of lile. Vagary of Leibnitz. Failure down 
 to the present age to investigate these problems. The five great reasons for 
 the failure. Ruskin's view of it. Gall and Swedenborg. Purpose of this 
 work. Necessity for Sarcognomy. Its bases, philosophical, physiological, 
 pathological and experimental. The triune sympathies. Illustrations of 
 Sarcognomy. To be treated only as a basis for healing. The three methods 
 Indications of impressibility. Psychic treatment. Manual treatment on 
 brain and body. Correspondence of soul, brain and body. General state- 
 ment and directions for operating. Laws of location of the organs. 
 
 The word Sarcognomy was coined in 1842, as the name of 
 the new science which arises from the discovery of the compound 
 psychic and physiological character of the human body, revealed in 
 the experiments in which I ascertained that the same psychic and 
 physiological effects which I produced on the head could be 
 produced on the body. 
 
 Derived from Sarx or Sarcos, flesh, and Gnoma, an opinion, 
 it means ctymologically a knowledge of the flesh, or recognition of 
 its character and relations. Practically, as the name of a new 
 science, it means a knowledge of the physiological and psycholog- 
 ical powers which belong to each part of the body in health, in excite- 
 ment and in disease, and consequently an understanding of the 
 correlation of soul, brain and body. 
 
 I had discovered in the human body its pervading and con- 
 trolling influences, exercised through the nervous system, and 
 recognized at its surface as physiological and psychological, by 
 experiments made in 1842, and published by my lectures, by the 
 
SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. 39 
 
 yournal of Man and System of Anthropology — and applied by 
 myself and pupils in the treatment of disease. 
 
 But why do we recognize psychological influences at the sur- 
 face of the body ? The life forces of the body as heretofore under- 
 stood are solely physiological ; and physiological powers are 
 regarded by the materialistic school, which predominates in the » „ j 
 medical profession to-day, as mechanical, chemical and electrical \J\ 
 — resulting from the same elementary forces which belong to the I 
 
 mineral kingdom, which is void of life. Hence there can be 
 nothing psychic in the body, nor anything which (according to the 
 leaders of the old-fashioned portion of the medical profession) will 
 not ultimately be resolved into chemical processes. 
 
 (Note — Hence the physiological zeal of the medical profession to-day is 
 directed mainly to the chemical processes and laws which are manifested in living 
 bodies — the consequences of which will continue to be, as they have been, an 
 immense addition to our stock of chemical knowledge, accompanied by an immense 
 neglect of the science of life, and an increasing intensity of ignorance of true vital 
 science, which is sadly impressive to one who understands the psychic elements of 
 humanity. In looking at a trained pugilist, athlete, gladiator or acrobat, we are 
 impressed with admiration of their superior physical powers, but when we come to 
 know them as men and look for something more than skilful muscularity, we feel a 
 great disappointment. So when we look at the achievements of the medical pro- 
 fession in the physical sciences connected with man — their vast accumulations in 
 anatomy, minute histology, chemistry, pathology, mechanical and chemical physi- 
 ology and comparative biology, we are profoundly impressed with the greatness of 
 their extremely laborious investigations and achievements in the physical sphere; 
 but when we come to the ethical sphere, to the achievements of the science as a bene- 
 factor of humanity, we are painfully impressed with the slowness of progress and 
 the stolid neglect or active hostility displayed toward the noblest works of scientific 
 philanthropy — the healing of the sick by new remedies and new methods : and 
 although this barbaric insensibility has greatly diminished within fifty years, there 
 is still enough to maintain a fierce hostility against the only method of medical 
 practice ever discovered which is incapable of doing any harm by its own 
 curative agencies. 
 
 I This digression naturally comes before us when we realize that the pre- 
 occupation of the mind by exclusive physical science and by the dogmatic 
 conviction, enforced by all surrounding authority, that nothing but physical science 
 has any reality, establishes a mental condition totally unfitted for the study of life 
 which is not physical, and of its laws, which are widely distinct from those of the 
 laboratory, as much as a life devoted to pugilism would unfit one to cultivate and 
 practise the Christian virtues. Thus, as national wars have prevented the growth 
 of true religion, so does a dogmatic and intolerant materialism, pervading every 
 department of scientific education, disqualify for vital and psychic studies, 
 although physical science per se, in its proper place, and unaccompanied by the 
 
40 SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. 
 
 dogmatism which sneers at evidence, is entirely harmonious with and beneficial to 
 the cultivation of the higher departments of science. I do not, therefore, anticipate 
 any proper investigation of my own scientific discoveries by the scientific societies 
 or universities, until they have undergone such a change in their dominant spirit 
 as will probably require a century for its accomplishment. When that time 
 arrives — when thousands of investigators, in a philosophic spirit shall carry on 
 those investigations which adverse circumstances have not permitted to myself — 
 the brilliance of that era will contrast with this century as it contrasts with 
 the middle ages of Europe.) 
 
 We need not affirm that the human body -per se performs any 
 psychic functions, although the voluntary action of the body of an 
 alligator after decapitation would seem to indicate the presence of 
 a psychic or conscious element, which, as we descend in the ani- 
 mal kingdom, is less concentered in the brain. 
 
 In man is verified the general law of the animal kingdom, 
 that functions are more centralized and separated as we ascend in 
 the scale. The psychic faculties are concentrated in the brain, and 
 there is no conscious sensation or perception in any part of the body, 
 until the impression originating there has been conveyed along 
 some nerve to the brain. As sensation and perception are thus 
 realized in the brain, and never without its cooperation, it would 
 appear erroneous to locate them in the body at all. The body, how- 
 ever, is the seat of physiological processes, and the brain of conscious 
 life, which operates upon and through the body, and the soul is 
 life itself, which operates through the brain, and through the brain 
 reaches the body, in which its impulse and influence are manifested 
 as when an emotion or passion of the soul, such as love or anger 
 working through the brain, makes its expression in the body, by 
 the voice, the actions and the circulation of blood. 
 
 The process of life however, is not merely action of the sou] 
 on brain and bod}', for the conditions of the body in health and dis- 
 ease continually react on the brain and soul, and under the influ- 
 ence of alcohol or of fever, the psychic action is entirely changed. 
 The mind and character are thus modified by the conditions of 
 the body, and all life is the reaction between soul and body, 
 through the brain, the grand centre in which we find and interpret 
 all the powers and principles of psychology and physiology. 
 
SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. 41 
 
 (Note — Of all the baseless speculations of metaphysical philosophizers, the 
 greatest departure from the truth was the doctrine of Leibnitz that there was no 
 reciprocal influence between the soul and body " everything (said Leibnitz) takes 
 place in the soul as though there were no body, and in the body everything takes 
 place as if there were no soul.") 
 
 Familiar as this has been to all mankind, and forcibly as it 
 has been exemplified in the processes of disease, under the daily 
 obsvervation of many thousand physicians for many thousand years, 
 I know of no systematic attempt to bring this chaotic mass of phe- 
 nomena under the jurisdiction of science. It has always appeared 
 to me very remarkable that men of scientific and literary pursuits 
 should be so entirely and passively content in ignorance of the 
 boundless worlds of surrounding truth yet unexplored, even when 
 these truths are a part of their daily and hourly experience. For 
 this there appear to be four evident reasons. The engrossing 
 necessities of subsistence, of labor, business, pleasure and ambition 
 leave the multitude little time for even serious thought upon the 
 mysteries of life. 
 
 Secondly — The engrossment of ambitious minds in their 
 immediate environment, and the consciousness of their own ener- 
 getic capacities and success, give them a feeling of self-sufficiency, 
 an exalted idea of their own attainments, and a habitual uncon- 
 sciousness of the infinite realm of the unknown upon which we 
 have made so small an encroachment. Thus arises a tacit notion 
 expressed in acts but seldom in words, that we have nearly 
 attained the boundaries of the knowable, and that attempts to 
 explore new regions originate fanciful delusions, scarcely worthy 
 of serious attention, as there is nothing very important to be 
 discovered. 
 
 Thirdly — As the engrossing pursuits and delusive ambitions 
 of our leading people produce a state of mind unfitted for the 
 exploration of the unknown, this disability is vastly increased 
 by our systems of education, which utterly fail to develope inven- 
 tion, originality and power of independent reasoning. Hence the 
 few fitful efforts to investigate and explore are generally profitless, 
 and productive of crudities or delusions, and the feeling is fos- 
 tered that the unknown is chiefly the unknowable. 
 
42 S ARCOGNOMY — GENERAL VIEW. 
 
 Fourthly — A dominating love of scientific and philosophic 
 truth for its own sake is a rare quality, and seldom strong enough 
 to induce any one to devote himself to the unknown, when the 
 result of success is the developement of existing error and 
 ignorance, offending the vanity of the entire class of teachers 
 and leaders, and isolating the discoverer from the sympathy 
 and fellowship which are essential to success in all pursuits. 
 In all professions and classes the existing state of opinions is 
 maintained not only by that immense -power, the inertia of fixed 
 habit, but by an unyielding hostility to innovation. The medical 
 clerical and legal professions and the business classes also, furnish 
 so many illustrations of this, that a very instructive volume might 
 be made by a periscopic view of the steady warfare against truth 
 and its discoverers throughout all the historic ages — a warfare still 
 maintained with energy, though the battle fields are changed, and 
 the soldier, jailer and executioner have little to do in the modern 
 processes of freezing and drowning unwelcome arrivals from ' the 
 Divine sphere of wisdom. 
 
 Fifthly — In all ages the spirit of dogmatism has made men 
 unfair and intolerant towards all opinions but those into which they 
 have been educated, or have been led by passion and prejudice. 
 At the present time materialism rules, and the scientific classes 
 imbibe it in their education unconsciously. Hence there is a prevail- 
 ing disposition to ignore everything that is not materialistic, and to 
 meet the profoundest truths with that supercilious contempt which 
 prevents all candid investigation. Biological questions are studied 
 in so one sided a manner as to justify in some cases the sarcasm of 
 Ruskin that scientific men have so contracted modes of thought that 
 " if beyond this safe and beneficial business they ever try and explain 
 anything to you. you may be confident of one of two things, either 
 that they know nothing ( to speak of ) about it, or that they have 
 only seen one side of it, and not only have not seen, but usually 
 have no mind to see the other. " 
 
 Such are most apparent explanations of the remarkable fact, 
 that now near the end of the nineteenth century, no one has yet 
 attempted to explore and describe the triune constitution of man — 
 
SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. 43 
 
 union of soul, brain and body, and the laws of their vast and various 
 sympathies and interactions, which are of so grand importance not 
 only in Medical Philosophy and Therapeutics, but in Hygiene, 
 Education, Mental Philosophy, Ethics, Esthetics, Sculpture, Paint- 
 ing, Forensic and Dramatic Eloquence, and last, not least, Pneuma- 
 tology. These remarks apply of course to the prevailing doctrines 
 of science and philosophy — to what is recognized in the Universities. 
 I do not refer to the bold exploration of the brain and its psychic 
 functions by Gall nor to the still more extraordinary scientific 
 doctrines of Swedenborg, both of which the colleges have laid aside 
 without investigation, and neither of which has grasped the entire 
 problem of the triune constitution of man. 
 
 In this book I propose to present but one of these ten aspects 
 of Sarcognomy — viz., its therapeutic utility, and the instruction 
 which it gives us in reference to healing the human constitution by 
 the hand, the electric poles, and the various external applications 
 which produce different effects as they are applied to different parts 
 of the body. 
 
 A knowledge of the physiological and psychic forces or influ- 
 ences connected with each part -of the body is as necessary to judi- 
 cious treatment by Electricity as Anatomy is to surgery ; and the 
 present state of Electric Therapeutics may be compared to the condi- 
 tion of surgery at the siege of Troy, anterior to anatomical 
 dissections. 
 
 Equally necessary is it as a scientific basis for Nervauric practice 
 of what has been called Magnetic Therapeutics or treatment by 
 Animal Magnetism, and for the blind, clumsy processes called 
 Massage, which have arisen from a sense of the necessity of manual 
 treatment, and have been adopted in blind ignorance of the neuro- 
 logical laws of vitality, as well as disregard of the extensive expe- 
 rience of magnetizers during the last hundred years. 
 
 The philosophical basis of Sarcognomy is the three fold consti- 
 tution of man, and the very intimate sympathy and parallelism of 
 soul, brain and body, which enable us through either of the three, 
 to affect the other two in a corresponding manner. 
 
 Its practical physiological basis is the fact that the exercise of 
 
44 SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. 
 
 every psychic faculty, emotion or impulse produces a characteristic 
 and definite effect on the body, and a special excitement in a corres- 
 ponding portion, while the exercise of any portion of the body 
 produces a characteristic effect on the brain and mind, the locality 
 of which can be specified on the brain. 
 
 The pathological basis is the fact that every disease of the 
 body affects the brain and produces a particular and distinct effect 
 on the mind, so that diseases have a mental as well as a physical 
 symptomatology, which has been especially observed by Homoeo- 
 pathic physicians. 
 
 The experimental basis is the fact that in applying the hands 
 or fingers upon the head of an impressible person we stimulate the 
 subjacent portion of the brain, and rouse it to the manifestation of 
 its functions with a vigor proportioned to the impressibility, the 
 physiological and psychological results being a complete develope- 
 ment of the cerebral functions — and that the application of the 
 hands on the body produces the same evolution of the physiological 
 and psychic functions as the application to the head at the corres- 
 ponding locality. 
 
 Thus the entire surface of the brain corresponds to the entire 
 surface of the body, maintaining therewith an active sympathy in 
 our experiments, precisely as it occurs in the progress of diseases 
 and local excitements. The facts of diseases sustain the localization 
 of Sarcognomy, and the map of Sarcognomy explains the philoso- 
 phy of disease. 
 
 Sarcognomy is also illustrated by the laws of developement, by 
 natural language or gesture, and by the intuitive judgment which 
 arises in our minds on seeing different forms w hi ch express different 
 characters — the whole person being as expressive as the face to 
 close observers. When we contrast Venus and Hercules, Jove and 
 Apollo, or Washington and a degraded sot, or a lion and a lamb 
 we realize that the entire form is an embodyment of character. 
 
 Putting aside the pathological, philosophical and physiognomic 
 aspects of the subject, I propose to treat Sarcognomy only as the 
 basis of the practical art of healing. 
 
SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. 45 
 
 In acting upon the triple combination of soul, brain, and body 
 we may fix our attention as appears best on either one or all three. 
 
 If the constitution is highly impressional ( manifested usually 
 by breadth and height of the front head) mental influence will 
 be efficient, and the nervous system will respond readily to nervau- 
 ric treatment. This impressibility is greater among the n itives of 
 warm climates, greater in summer than winter, and generally 
 greater in females than in males. Breadth of the temples 
 fom right to left and largeness of the pupils of the eyes, with full- 
 ness of the upper part of the face are favorable indications. 
 
 A simple method of testing this impressibility is to pass the 
 ends of the fingers close to the open extended hand of the patient, 
 who, if impressible will feel a slight coolness at each passage of 
 our fingers. When this occurs, we may be sure that the application 
 of the hands on the body or head will be effective. 
 
 I recommend the application of the hands on the body for the 
 purpose of healing, because the disease being located in the body 
 and the vital forces emanating from the spinal column, it is desira- 
 ble to approach as near as possible to the difficulty that is to be 
 removed, and the seat of the vital force on which we operate. 
 
 It is true that diseases may be treated by the soul power alone, 
 without any contact — the heahh benevolence and will power of 
 the operator being effective without contact upon the patient who sits 
 near him or in some cases at a distance, if the proper rapport exists, 
 but in the present condition of societv in northern climates it is only 
 a small minority who can be treated in this way.- 
 
 Contact is generally necessary to efficient treatment, as it is to 
 efficient contagion, and it is loo evident for argument that the farther 
 apart two persons are placed, the less effect they can have upon 
 each other. 
 
 The contact of the hand with the skin is therefore desirable for 
 the most complete effect, and the fewer the garments between the 
 hand and the patient the better. Nevertheless patients are success- 
 fully treated without removing any of their clothing. The vital 
 influences emanating from an operator are more diffusive in propor- 
 
46 SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. 
 
 tion to their subtlety, and while caloric and electricity are resisted 
 by clothing, the subtler forces, which reach to great distances, are 
 not hindered. Operators in whom these subtler forces are abun- 
 dant, and who produce effects without contact, are not hindered by 
 clothing. There is a class of patients who realize the effects of the 
 hand when it is not even in contact with the clothing, and a class 
 who feel the influence, not only of persons at a distance, but of 
 their departed friends, and even the ancient inhabitants of the spirit 
 world. 
 
 In operating upon the body, we have the advantage that 
 we may use percussion, friction and dispersive passes — the 
 friction and percussion not being applicable upon the head. 
 
 Effects produced on the body are local and physiological, but 
 become -psychic, in proportion as the brain sympathizes with the 
 spot. In persons of a low grade of susceptibility there is less sym- 
 pathy between the mind and body, and operations on the body do 
 not produce the distinct psychic effects which occur in the 
 impressible. 
 
 Effects produced on the brain are mental and become physio- 
 logical only as the cerebral influence extends to the body. But as 
 the brain is the controlling organ, it is obvious that it may produce 
 any amount of physiological action, and forty years ago I operated 
 chiefly through the brain, being interested in demonstrating its 
 physiological powers. When we wish to do all that is possible, 
 we should operate on body, brain and soul, treating the latter by 
 our own psychic force of will and emotion with a resolute desire to 
 cure, and rendering the individual as passive as possible by the 
 methods I shall explain. The desire to heal, born of love, is the 
 healing agency, and the force of will or occipital energy is 
 the power that subdues the patient to passiveness — a power 
 which may exist without a high degree of healing capacity. 
 
 Correspondence of Soul, Brain and Body. 
 When we make a map of the cerebral organs and understand 
 
SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. 47 
 
 their relative positions, we are well prepared to understand their 
 correspondences on the body, which are very simply arranged. 
 
 The superior part of the brain corresponds to the superior 
 part of the body, the basilar portion of the brain corresponding to 
 the lower half of the body. The lateral ventricles of the brain 
 corresponding nearly with the upper part of the waist. The lower 
 end of the trunk corresponds with the base of the brain, as exter- 
 nally indicated at the junction of the head and neck. 
 
 The limbs are a departure from the compact form which would 
 most easily coincide with the head. The lower limbs correspond 
 with the basilar region, represented or covered by the neck. The 
 upper limbs correspond with the Brachial region of the occiput, 
 which starts from Firmness and extends down the middle of the 
 occiput, embracing the regions appropriated to Ambition, Ostenta- 
 tion, Self Esteem, Self Confidence, Love of Power, Arrogance 
 and Hostility. 
 
 The superior anterior fourth of the head corresponds to the 
 anterior surface of the thorax, and is marked Thoracic. The 
 face corresponds to the abdominal region. The entire occipital 
 region above the Crural, and exclusive of the Brachial, corres- 
 ponds to the back and is called Dorsal. 
 
 From this investigation we learn that the posterior half of the 
 brain controls and impels the forces of life which belong to the 
 spinal column and the entire back and limbs, while the lovely and 
 intellectual elements associate with the breast, and the sensitive, 
 impressional, relaxing elements coincide with the abdomen. 
 Hence to invigorate the vital forces, the hand should be applied to 
 back of the head. 
 
 If applied upon the neck, it invigorates the lower limbs, send- 
 ing the circulation and vital forces downwards, warming the feet 
 aud sustaining physical vitality. The organ of Vitality, or rather 
 Vital Force, is at the base of the occiput, and its correspondence at 
 the posterior summit of the thigh. Hence the application of the 
 hand on the back of the neck is an excellent method of renovating 
 exhausted vitality, invigorating locomotion and relieving determi- 
 
48 SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. 
 
 nation of blood to the head and chest — effects which may be 
 enhanced by applying the hand at the summit of the posterior 
 aspect of the thigh, on the region of Vital Force. 
 
 When one hand is applied upon the occipital base and the 
 neck, and the other upon the upper half of the occiput, we pro- 
 duce a powerful and health giving effect, as the upper part of the 
 occiput (corresponding with the upper half of the back) contains 
 the most perfect sanative energy of the constitution, in the organ 
 of Health and its surrounding group. (Health is indicated in the 
 map by the letter H.) The application of the hands upon the 
 upper part of the occiput and upon its base or junction with the 
 neck, corresponds with their application on the shoulder blades and 
 the summit of the thighs and base of the trunk — with this differ- 
 ence, that a relatively larger space may be covered on the head, 
 and if, instead of touching Health and Vitality with the fingers, 
 we apply the whole hands, covering nearly the whole occiput, we 
 cover a space corresponding to the entire back and arms, and 
 thus produce a # very extensive effect, rousing the entire will 
 power and physiological energy. 
 
 In applying the hands upon the superior anterior region of 
 the head, which corresponds with the anterior part of the thorax, 
 we produce the amiable and soothing influences which belong to 
 the gentler emotions. We may proceed now in this consideration 
 of the different regions of the head, which the unskilled may cover 
 with the hand, and hereafter will proceed with the specialization 
 of organs which the skilled operator understanding localities, may 
 touch with the ends of the fingers, when a more special and lim- 
 ited influence is desired. 
 
 The influence of the anterior superior region of the brain 
 is remarkably soothing and happy, rendering the patient 
 entirely amiable, good natured, patient, obedient, cheerful and 
 more impressible to the nervauric treatment. Hence it is often 
 desirable to impress this region to establish the best relations 
 between the physician and patient. But we should be careful not 
 to carry it too far, for it antagonizes the base of the occiput, in 
 which the strong physical energi es and impulses reside. These 
 
SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. 49 
 
 it reduces to tranquillity by a quieting and anodyne influence, but 
 when the vital forces are very feeble, they would become too 
 quiescent and weak under continued excitement of the coronal 
 region, the tendency of which is toward trance, or complete sus- 
 pension of physical activity. The special locality in which this 
 tendency to trance exists in the highest degree, is about an inch 
 and a half at each side from the sagittal suture, nearly at the pos- 
 terior corners of the rectangular space assigned by Gall and 
 Spurzheim to Veneration. 
 
 In operating on the superior surface of the brain, we should 
 understand, that by the general law of organology, we find 
 stronger influences as we go back, and gentler toward the front. 
 
 If we understand the general laws of organology, we are less 
 dependent upon the memory of special localities. The controlling 
 principles are quite simple. The energy of any organ may be 
 determined by its anterior or posterior position. The intellectual 
 and sensitive organs of the extreme anterior portion of the head are 
 not only void of physiological power, but tend to check and exhaust 
 it. The back of the head, the extreme occipital portion, gives 
 power and ambitious impulse. Between the posterior pole of power 
 and the anterior pole of weakness, position determines the power, 
 and when we think of any faculty, emotion or impulse, we can 
 determine its longitude on the head by a consideration of its energy. 
 Thus Modesty would be anterior, as Vanity would be posterior. 
 Liberality and generosity would be anterior — avarice posterior 
 — sympathy anterior, stubbornness posterior etc. 
 
 The latitude or height can be determined with equal ease by 
 the proper rule, as it corresponds to the moral elevation, and thus I 
 have taught an intelligent class in an hour to locate any faculty in 
 its proper organ with approximate correctness. 
 
 Organs are higher in the brain as they are of a more kind, lov- 
 ing, spiritual nature, and lower as they are more animal, selfish, 
 and violent. Love and tenderness are at the summit — hate and 
 cruelty at the base. 
 
 A similar law applies to the body. The vital forces are at 
 the back. The spinal column is the commanding region. The 
 
50 SARCOGNOMY GENERAL VIEW. 
 
 upper portion of the back is the seat of those normal powers 
 which happily combine the moral and physical influences, and in 
 their greatest developement produce the best results. A large 
 developement of the shoulder is the best conformation for a superior 
 constitution, while the developement of the thighs and lower part 
 of the back gives the greatest vital force, but with less moral 
 power and equable, healthful action. The passions and appe- 
 tites are below — the nobler impulses above. 
 
 Anteriorly, above the diaphragm, we find the gentle and 
 refining influences ; below the diaphragm the sensual, sensitive 
 and morbific. 
 
 This general survey indicates the obvious principles of ner- 
 vauric treatment. The entire posterior half of the surfaces of the 
 head and body constitutes the tonic or invigorating region, the 
 region of vital power, upon which the nervauric healer will chiefly 
 expend his energies — the treatment being applied higher or lower 
 according to the location of the disease. In the majority of cases, 
 both upper and l©wer energies require to be roused, but in all cases 
 the upper posterior region of the head and body requires special 
 attention. 
 
 In the application of electric currents, the backward direction 
 (towards the spine) is the most generally beneficial, and the 
 upward currents are more extensively beneficial than the down- 
 ward. 
 
CHAPTER IV. 
 
 THE SPINAL REGION — ITS ANATOMICAL, NEURO- 
 LOGICAL, AND THERAPEUTIC RELATIONS. 
 
 Duty of the healer. Necessary predominance of the upper posterior regions. Their 
 antagonism to the abdominal region. Upward passes. Morbid tendencies 
 and vital relations of the abdominal region. Dispersive passes. Medical 
 applications. Spinal regions. The cephalic — its arm power and brain 
 power. Description of the cephalic region. The brachial plexus and other 
 nerves of the cephalic region. The phrenic nerve, its extensive distribution 
 and relations. The vertebral ganglia and arteries, subclavian and vertebral 
 — their control over vital powers. Anatomical explanations. Power of the 
 
 p -cephalic region. Electric experience of Dr. Rockwell. Muscles of the 
 cephalic region. Importance of the cephalic region in fevers — testimony 
 of Drs. Gerhard and Beard. The upper dorsal nerves. Second dorsal 
 nerve and the pupil of the eye — cilio-spinal region — its nerve channels. 
 Testimony of Onimus and Legros. Thoracic and abdominal divisions of 
 the dorsal region. Pulmonic influence of the dorsal region. Cardiac region 
 of the cord. Anatomical structure of the thoracic region. Corporeal region 
 of inspiration. Its pathological conditions. Upper and lower regions of 
 chest. Illustrations in sunstroke, insanity and typhus. Treating the heart 
 through the dorsal region. Its relations to the neck. Connection of 
 cephalic and thoracic regions — complex arrangements. Upper cephalic 
 region, phrenic nerve and its distribution. Respiratory combination. Rela- 
 tion of coughs to lower dorsal region. Demonstration of this region in 
 experiments of Onimus and Legros. Effect of injuries. The diaphragm — 
 its spinal and phrenic relations — phrenic zone. Explanation of coughs and 
 their treatment. The diaphragm and its treatment. Abdominal influence 
 on respiration. The lower dorsal region — its abdominal influence and 
 anatomical relations — Valentine and Brodie — general view. 
 
 Lumbar region — its ganglia and spinal plexus, anatomy and functions. 
 Illustrative cases. Description of its nerves and physiological inferences. 
 Lumbo-sacral region, nervauric experiments and observations of physiolo- 
 gists, Longet, Breschet and Budge. The sacral nerve, sacral plexus and 
 hypogastric plexus. Commingling of functions round the lnmbo-sacral 
 location. Genito-spinal ganglion. Electric currents. Sexual power and 
 animal force. Relations to brain of the leg, foot and pelvis. Lethargy and 
 insanity. General view of spine. 
 
 Correlation and combination of functions : — Van Kempen's experiment. Roots 
 of the nerves. Complex relations of the heart with ganglia, phrenic nerve 
 and spine. Relations of thoracic part of the cord. Cervical ganglia and 
 pneumogastric. Heart and diaphragm. Relations of splanchnic nerves. 
 Combination of brain, lungs and stomach. Connection of cardiac and pul- 
 monary nerve forces. Comparison of functions and auatomical structure. 
 
52 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 Therapeutic Treatment: — Importance of spinal cord. How to 
 invigorate the brain and the entire constitution. To invigorate intellectual 
 powers for special purposes and for oratory. Developement for action, for 
 excellence, for conquering difficulties. Developement through the head. 
 Treatment of the lungs on the body and the head — the pulmonic zone. 
 Treatment of pulmonary diseases — hemastasis. Stimulating the diaphragm 
 and recovery from axphyxia. Treatment of the liver. Treatment of the 
 stomach. Cure of intemperance. Treatment of the bowels. Evolution of 
 heat. The urinary organs. Treatment of the sexual organs. Treatment 
 of paralysis of upper and lower limbs, and use of electricity. Six different 
 methods of treating the spine — vital, Galvanic, Faradic, mechanical, med- 
 ical and counter-irritation. Treatment of hemiplegia. 
 
 The enlightened healer understands that he must not merely 
 remove the existing disease and the morbid elements in the body, 
 which was the general aim of the drug practice (operating very 
 often with remedies on which there was little reliance, because 
 they had so often failed), but that he must, by that direct and con- 
 genial aid which drugs could seldom give, rouse each organ to 
 more vigorous performance of duty, and rouse the whole con- 
 stitution from its depression, to assist by the general vital force 
 each special organ, and then, if possible, so invigorate the psycho- 
 dynamic health- region, as to place the whole being on a higher 
 plane of life. 
 
 There are certain general principles to be continually borne 
 
 in mind. Health, happiness, and efficiency depend on the 
 
 predominance of the upper half of the back and the upper half of 
 
 the occiput — over the abdominal region of the body, and the 
 
 anterior inferior region of the brain covered by the face. 
 
 (Note — This does not imply that the abdominal region is the seat of 
 injurious influences, or that it is not absolutely necessary to human life and harmo- 
 nious developement, but simply that the abdominal region has not the vitalizing, 
 elevating and protective power which belongs to the chest, and that if it were the 
 ruling element of the constitution, there would not be sufficient vital force to 
 animate and perfect the crude material which it introduces but does not fully vital- 
 ize, and to resist the malign impressions to which the nervous system of the 
 abdomen is continually liable. The vitality which enters by the brain and chest, 
 elevates the constitution from abdominal helplessness, and as soon as the thorax 
 ceases to act in respiration the fatal decline of life begins. A low grade of life, 
 such as that of the oyster, may exist when the digestive apparatus is the chief ele- 
 ment of the constitution, and the respiration is reduced to a minimum.) 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 53 
 
 Upward and backward passes over the front of the body, but 
 especially over the abdomen, are of great benefit in nine tenths 
 of the cases of disease. When you find one fatigued, debilitated, 
 feverish, melancholic or depressed in any way, the brisk upward 
 passes over the abdomen, either upon the clothes or upon the 
 uncovered person, are always felt as restorative, refreshing and 
 strengthening. The abdomen is the castle and battle ground of 
 disease, where life is busily engaged in conquering, to assimilate 
 the dead matter introduced, and where the portal vessels gather 
 the most degenerate and devitalized blood of the whole body. 
 There are the abundant nerves, the acute sensibilities, and the 
 atonic relaxation which invite disease. There is the continual 
 gathering of all the foul, dead and morbid matter of the body, 
 prior to its expulsion ; there is the open thoroughfare of dead mat- 
 ter, coming in to be vitalized, and taxing the resources of vitality 
 to lift it to a higher condition. If it is not at once controlled and 
 partially dissolved by the healthy energy of the secretions, it 
 becomes an immediate oppression and cause of debility, disease or 
 suffering. The abdominal organs are therefore a continual tax 
 upon the constitution, to assist their battle with dead and decaying 
 matter, and its accumulation either as undigested food, or as unex- 
 pelled decomposition, lowers the general vitality, which gains its 
 maximum vigor, only after the expulson of the waste, and the 
 digestion of the food supply. 
 
 Concentration of excitement to the abdomen is lowering, and 
 its dispersion is invigorating — hence in addition to the upward and 
 and backward passes, dispersive passes from the lower region of 
 the abdomen down the thighs are highly beneficial, transferring the 
 excitement from the hypogastric region of depression to that of 
 physical force — the thighs and legs — as the upward passes carry 
 it to the shoulders. 
 
 [The doctrine that the relaxing influences belong to the 
 abdominarregion, and the energetic influences to other portions of 
 the constitution, is illustrated by many familiar- facts, beside the 
 terribly debilitating and prostrating effects of abdominal diseases. 
 Whenever we make a vigorous exertion, calling forth our maximum 
 
54 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 energy, the abdomen is powerfully compressed by the abdominal 
 muscles and diaphragm, the descent of the latter being sustained 
 or aided by the closure of the larynx, retaining the air in the chest, 
 the compression of which assists the downward pressure. Without 
 this compression of the trunk, driving out the abdominal blood into 
 the muscular system, brain and spine, our maximum energy 
 cannot be attained. On the other hand, the' congestion of the 
 blood in the abdominal region from any cause is extremely 
 depressing and dangerous, as we see in congestive chills and the 
 collapse of cholera.] 
 
 In a great many cases a single treatment in this way by "an 
 efficient healer will break up a commencing fever, or arrest the 
 progress of one which is more advanced. It will also relieve cases 
 of diarrhoea and cholera morbus, menstrual disorders, hysteria and 
 melancholy. 
 
 Following this operation, the hands should be placed on the 
 region of Health on the shoulder blades, the perfect vitality of 
 which has already been explained, and a gentle or vigorous 
 percussion applied over the whole upper part of the back, from 
 the neck ten or twelve inches down. 
 
 A gently stimulant or mild capsicum plaster, six or eight by 
 ten or twelve inches, according to the size of the person, may be 
 placed across the shoulders, to maintain the impression thus 
 produced and left upon the patient for a few hours. 
 
 If any particular remedy is plainly and positively indicated, it 
 may be applied upon the skin as an embrocation under the plaster, 
 in the form of a tincture or strong decoction, and its constitutional 
 effects produced without introducing it in the stomach. The most 
 sensitive locality for the external application of medicines is on the 
 median line between the sternum (breast bone) and umbilicus. 
 
 As the physician should combat not only the prostration of 
 the vital powers generally, but the special debility, disorder and 
 disease of each organ, he will go to the basis of the vital forces in 
 the spinal column to re-inforce the dilapidated energies. The 
 vital forces and positive elements are in the posterior half of the 
 brain and the body — the sensitive and negative in the anterior. 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 55 
 
 This is the general plan of the animal kingdom. In the torpedo, 
 for example, the spinal side of the body is positive and the abdom- 
 inal surface negative. The current is from the spinal toward the 
 abdominal surface. 
 
 The commanding importance of the spinal region has not 
 escaped the observation of the most enlightened practitioners of 
 electro-therapeutics. Dr. Beard says "in the employment of gen- 
 eral Faradization particular attention should be given to the spine, 
 even at the expense of neglecting other portions of the body ; " 
 and he recognizes the upper dorsal region as the most important 
 portion of the spine. 
 
 The seats of the various energies which may be treated in this 
 way are arranged in a very simple and intelligible way along 
 the spine. 
 
 The summit of the spinal column is the region that invigorates 
 the brain, and may therefore be called Cephalic. The stimulation 
 of that region gives strength of will, dignity of character, self- 
 reliance and all that belongs to conscious strength of character. 
 
 The three upper A and four lower cervical vertebras are the 
 location of the channels of the power which invigorates the brain 
 and the entire character. The elevation of this part in a proud, 
 manly, erect attitude expresses the strength of the character, and 
 its depression in a drooping attitude characterizes humility, timidity, 
 feebleness and disease. There may, however, be a large amount 
 of the coarser energies from the lower part of the spine when the 
 nobler energies of this region are defective, as we see in misers 
 and men of bad, coarse character, whose shoulders droop while the 
 back projects. It is from this region that the nerves proceed 
 which supply the arms by which man exercises his intelligent 
 vigor and enforces his authority. The arms are physiologically 
 associated with the occipital organs, near the median line, in 
 which are situated the commanding and ambitious faculties. The 
 capacity of the cephalic region to sustain the brain power makes it 
 important, not only to success in life, but in overcoming the 
 irresolute feebleness of ill health and prostration of severe diseases. 
 Hence, when the patient is failing in fortitude, stability, self-control, 
 
56 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 power of attention and self-reliance, this is the region to be 
 roused, while we should disperse from the hypochondriac regions 
 — the margin of the ribs, in which the enfeebling, depressing 
 elements are seated. 
 
 I do not mean by these remarks that the power of the spine 
 overrules that of the brain, but that it is a co-operative instrument, 
 as the entire body, by the laws of Sarcognomy, responds to the 
 entire brain in sympathetic co-operation. Each portion of the body 
 co-operates with and strengthens the portion of the brain with which 
 it is in sympathy. As the eye is the necessary instrument of the 
 perceptive organs, and the muscles the necessary instrument of 
 combativeness, it is obvious that the loss or decay of these instru- 
 ments would diminish the perceptive and the combative powers. 
 
 The upper region of the spinal cord, which I designate as 
 Cephalic, is by far the most important, as it is also the largest 
 portion. Even the great muscular power of the lower limbs, sus- 
 tained by an enlargement of the cord at the beginning of the lum- 
 bar regions does not require so large a developement. The 
 posterior or sensory roots of the spinal nerves show a more marked 
 predominance over the anterior or motor in the cephalic region, 
 corresponding to the refined sensibility of the upper part of the 
 body. 
 
 The cephalic region embraces the five lower cervical and three 
 superior dorsal nerves, which hold under their jurisdiction the arms, 
 shoulders and upper part of the chest. By these muscles are 
 executed all the movements of the arms, hands and shoulders, 
 while they erect the head as well as the shoulders, and produce 
 all the commanding dignity of human attitudes. The region of the 
 body to which the nerves of the cephalic region are distributed may 
 be called the cephalic region or zone — the region which sym- 
 pathizes with the brain, and sustains its functions. This I state, 
 not from anatomical inferences or theories, but from experimen- 
 tal facts — the production of similar conditions by the brain and 
 by the body. 
 
 The largest nervous emission from the cephalic region 
 
 is the brachial plexus, devoted to the arms, formed from the 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 57 
 
 fifth, sixth, seventh and eighth cervical nerves, and first dorsal. 
 
 The anterior branches of these nerves form the brachial plexus, and 
 
 the posterior go to the muscles and integuments of the lower part 
 
 of the neck, corresponding externally with the cephalic region. 
 
 (Note — In addition to the nerves of the arm, the brachial plexus and its 
 spinal roots give off nerves for the upper thoracic region — the anterior and 
 posterior thoracic, the supra-scapular, sub-scapular and superior muscular, and 
 supply the major and minor pectoralis at the lateral front of the chest, the serratus 
 magnus on its lateral surface, and in the neck and shoulder supply the longus colli, 
 complexus, spinatis cervicis, multifidus spinae, scaleni, rhomboidei, supra and infra 
 spinatus, shoulder joint, teres major, subscapularis, subclavius, levator anguli 
 scapulae — and latissimus dorsi at the back of the chesl. There are also two large 
 nerves from the fourth cervical (acromialis and clavicularis), which pass to the sur- 
 face of the front of the chest, between the sternum and acromion process. From 
 the lower part of the cephalic region — the first, second and third dorsal nerves — 
 proceed the intercosto-humeral nerves, which supply the posterior inner part of 
 of the arm, the lower part of the scapula, and the surface in the axilla. This 
 location corresponds closely in its character with the cephalic region at the spine. 
 The upper dorsal nerves in their anterior or intercostal distribution, correspond with 
 the course of the ribs, and therefore relate to the upper part of the chest — the third 
 and fourth supplying the mammary gland. Hence the region above the mammary 
 gland may be properly included in the cephalic zone, with which it is also identi- 
 fied by its functional sympathies with the highest elements of humanity, con- 
 nected with the upper portion of the brain.) 
 
 Another very important relation of the cephalic region, illus- 
 trating its commanding position, is found in the Phrenic nerve, 
 commonly regarded merely as the nerve of the diaphragm, but 
 really one of the most important and extensively related nerves, 
 comparable to the pneumogastric and sympathetic, and similar to 
 
 the sympathetic in some of its functions, but going more freely 
 to the diaphragm than the heart. 
 
 The phrenic originates from the third, fourth and fifth cervical, 
 also communicating with the vertebral ganglion, and thus associates 
 the cephalic region with its very extensive and important functions. 
 Through its branches to the lower vena ca,va, pericardium and 
 right auricle, it has an important influence on the heart, 
 assisting its action. 
 
 Through its distribution to the diaphragm it becomes an 
 important vital nerve, and corresponds in its position as an inspir- 
 atory nerve for the body, with the spiritual inspiratory function of 
 the brain. As the sensitive nerve of the pleura costalis (the sensi- 
 
58 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 bility of which is very acute in pleurisy) it represents a region that 
 sympathizes with the upper cerebral surface and connects also 
 with pulmonic regions of the spine. 
 
 Finally, by its distribution to the peritoneum, liver, small intes- 
 tines and supra-renal capsules, it brings these regions into close 
 relation with the brain and lungs, such as we see illustrated in the 
 coughs and convulsions produced by the intestinal irritation 
 of worms. 
 
 This latter distribution is an important fact in Sarcognomy, as 
 without it there would be no explanation of the functions I have 
 found at the abdominal surface (the regions of Respiration and emo- 
 tional expression) for the entire brain. But even this anatomical 
 illustration is hardly an adequate explanation of my discovery 
 which requires some additional knowledge for its full comprehension. 
 
 The cephalic region of the spine is closely connected with the 
 vertebral ganglia ( lying at the junction of the cervical and dorsal 
 vertebrse, or between the last cervical vertebra and the first rib. 
 They are under the immediate control of the cephalic region, as all 
 the ganglia communicate with and are controlled by the adjacent 
 regions of the cord. Branches may be traced from the 7th and 8th 
 cervical nerves to this ganglion. The vertebral ganglia are the 
 governors of the entire circulation of the posterior half of the brain, 
 and its downward extension, the spinal cord. They lie on the ver- 
 tebral arteries which give the supply of the posterior part of the 
 brain and the spinal cord, and send a plexus along the course of 
 these arteries, which accompanies their ramifications (after forming 
 the basilar artery) with minute branches, which finally connect 
 with the analogous branches coming from the carotid plexus along 
 the carotid arteries and branches for the anterior half of the brain. 
 
 When the operator's hand is placed on the cephalic region, it 
 covers the subclavian artery (for the brain and the arm) adjacent to 
 the Last cervical vertebra, the vertebral arteries which supply the 
 brain and spine, and the vertebral ganglia which not only control 
 the circulation of the energetic portion of the nervous system, but 
 contribute to sustain the action of the heart. 
 
 The superior regions of the brain sympathize with the superior 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 59 
 
 region of the chest, as is shown by pathology (and as I have often 
 felt in my own person) in accordance with which fact the vertebral 
 ganglia (controlled by the cephalic region) send some branches 
 down to unite in the pulmonary plexus (which is supplied from the 
 third and fourth ganglia in the dorsal region) with the pneumo- 
 gastric, the sensitive^ nerve of the lungs and heart. 
 
 It also cooperates with nerves from the cephalic region, viz : 
 the seventh and eighth cervical and first dorsal, in forming the 
 axillary or brachial plexus, which controls the arms and shoulders. 
 Moreover it sends down one of the principal nerves of the heart. 
 Probably this nervous connection may explain the pain felt in the 
 left arm as far down as the elbow in cases of cardiac disease. 
 
 From the first three dorsal vertebras proceed the anterior spinal 
 nerves, called intercosto-humeral, which supply the inner and pos- 
 terior surfaces of the arm, the axillary region and a portion of the 
 upper frontal surface of the chest. These surfaces according to 
 Sarcognomy correspond with the region of Dignity and authority 
 in the brain, and a portion of the emotional and intellectual region 
 sympathizes with the frontal distribution of the first dorsal : the 
 first three nerves are therefore strictly cephalic in their distribution. 
 
 Thus we see the cephalic region is a great centre of power 
 sustaining through its subordinate ganglionic nerves the posterior 
 cerebral lobes, cerebellum and spinal cord, while it controls the 
 upper limbs, sustains the action of the heart, and contributes to the 
 organic life of the summit of the lungs, which sympathizes with the 
 upper part of the brain. At the same time the posterior nerves 
 from the cephalic region of the cord supply the integuments of the 
 upper part of the back which Sarcognomy shows to sympathize 
 with the upper occipital region of the brain. In short we have 
 here the vital knot, the combination of the executive power of the 
 arms as well as the cerebro spinal and cardiac power, with the pul- 
 monic region, which is at once the sympathetic support of the brain 
 and the inlet of life conditions to the body — spirit life, blood 
 life, action and inspiration, being here inextricably combined. 
 Hence in exciting this region in the impressible, they feel a great 
 sense of additional strength and manhood, or force of character, 
 
6o THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 for it commands the entire forces of the body. Any one who 
 wishes to realize its influence, if not impressible by the hand, may 
 realize it by placing upon it a gently stimulating plaster, and if the 
 plaster should also extend down as far as the sixth dorsal vertebra, 
 the stimulation of the lungs and heart will greatly increase 
 the effect and enhance the capacities for social or oratorical 
 exertion. 
 
 In looking over the experience of electric therapeutists I cannot 
 but wonder that they should have so generally failed to recognize 
 the local influences revealed by Sarcognomy, when they are clearly 
 indicated by the history of diseases. 
 
 The cephalic region of the cord however has not entirely 
 
 escaped observation. Dr. Rockwell in Lectures on Electricity says 
 
 "the back part of the head and upper -portion of the spine (cilio 
 
 spinal centre) will usually bear powerful applications ; and it is an 
 
 interesting and important fact that applications to this centre will 
 
 produce far greater tonic effects than when the pole is applied to 
 
 any other one po'rtion of the body." No doubt much of his success 
 
 in electric treatment w r as due to his discovery of this fact. Dr. 
 
 Rockwell is a stronger advocate of Faradization than the majority, 
 
 and superficial Faradic currents might be used with great benefit 
 
 on the two regions he mentions., 
 
 (Note — An additional illustration of the character of the cephalic region of 
 the body may be'found in the muscles which it contains. The trapezius, rhom- 
 boideus major and minor, upper serratus, splenius colli, semi-spinales colli and 
 dorsi, spinalis cervicis, upper interspinals and multifidus spinae all contribute to 
 maintain the firm, erect attitude of head and shoulders, which is pathognomic of 
 strong character and sustained energy. These are adjacent to the spinal cephalic 
 region. The muscles further off, controlled from the cephalic spine, in the shoul- 
 ders and arms, with the serratus magnus and pectoralis, on the chest are the mus- 
 cles of intelligent action and expression, by which mainly the conceptions and 
 purposes of the brain are carried out, while the inspiration that vitalizes the brain 
 is obtained through the fifth cervical and the upper intercostal nerves and muscles, 
 aided by the upper serratus, serratus magnus and upper levatores costarum ) 
 
 A knowledge of the character of the cephalic region may be 
 of great value in diseases which, like typhus, affect the brain. 
 Dr. Gerhard, of Philadelphia, discovered the value of the cepha- 
 lic region, in the treatment of typhus fever. 
 
 " Scarified or dry cups, applied to the nuchas or along the 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 6 1 
 
 spine, between the shoulders, have been found of great efficacy in 
 removing or diminishing the suffusions of the eyes, the injection of 
 the face, the headachy, the delirium and other symptoms. They 
 constitute in nearly all the cases a part of the treatment pursued 
 by Dr. Gerhard at Philadelphia in 1836. Speaking gene- 
 rally of dry cups, he says "Applied in considerable numbers and 
 left upon the nape of the neck and between the shoulders for twenty 
 minutes or half an hour they always seemed to me a more power- 
 ful in nervous functional derangement, not attended with inflam- 
 mation than scarified cups. I have used them largely in the treat- 
 ment of the apoplectic symptoms of malignant intermittent with 
 the best effects, and resort to them with confidence as one of the 
 most powerful means of controlling discordant nervous action." 
 (Bartlett on Typhoid and Typhus.) 
 
 Dr. Beard by his experience in electrical treatment discovered 
 the great importance and controlling power of the upper dorsal 
 region of which he says (page 391) "There is no other single place 
 on the surface of the body where the electrical influence can be 
 communicated to so many important nerves as at the cilio-spinal 
 center." "This application is a very important factor in general Far- 
 adization, and will achieve decided tonic effects on the system even 
 when no other portion of the body is touched by the current." The 
 anatomical reasons which he gives, however are entirely inadequate 
 to explain its importance. 
 
 The stimulation of organs by nervauric influence is not limited 
 to any exact lines but is always diffusive. Hence I shall not assign 
 any exact boundaries to the localities to be acted on, but allow them 
 to overlap. I speak of the second and third dorsal vertebrae in the 
 cephalic group, although their adjacent ganglia are tributary to the 
 upper portion of the lungs. The second and third dorsal spinal 
 nerves supply the posterior aspect of the arm, and inner aspect of 
 arm and fore-arm, which associates them practically with the bra- 
 chial plexus that springs from the cephalic region. The region 
 these two nerves supply corresponds with the posterior lobes of the 
 brain along the median line and turning in between the hemis- 
 pheres. 
 
62 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 There is another curious fact, illustrating the cephalic influ- 
 ence of the upper part of the spinal cord, viz., that the second dor- 
 sal nerve originates the expansion of the pupil of the eye. Yet 
 such is the diffusive tendency of impressions on the nervous system 
 that this influence may be excited any where from the first cervical 
 to the 6th dorsal nerve, hence this space has been called the cilio- 
 sfinal region. But exact experiment has shown that the second 
 dorsal nerve is the sole seat of this spinal power. It is however 
 exercised or transmitted through the sympathetic ganglia and nerves 
 of the neck, the section of which deprives the pupil of the power of 
 dilation by cutting off communication with the cord at'the second 
 dorsal nerve. 
 
 (Note —Why there should be such a control of the iris at the second dorsal 
 nerve is a mystery, but when we find that it is identified with the brachial region 
 which corresponds to the occipital brain on the median line this gives us a clue, 
 for the tendency of organs on the median line is expansive. The coinciding region 
 of these median organs is at the lateral aspect of the parietal bone, where Prof. 
 Ferrier's experiments on pigeons indicated a close connection with vision.) 
 
 The expansive influence of the cephalic region upon the pupil 
 corresponds with my observation that the superior portion of the 
 l>rain tends to the expansion and the inferior to the contraction of 
 the pupil. 
 
 Onimus and Legros have ascertained by their electric investi- 
 gations the value of the cephalic and upper dorsal region as to its 
 controlling influence in the head, not knowing the neurological 
 relations of the parts but guided by the cilio-spinal phenomena. 
 "In peripheric lesions (they say) it is advantageous to electrize 
 only the nervous centres." "Hence to act on the circulation of the 
 head and especially of the eyes it is preferable to electrize the cilio- 
 spinal center, rather than to place the electrodes directly on the 
 face or near the eyes," which is very true, as applications on the 
 face would be rather injurious to the cerebral circulation. 
 
 The upper half of the dorsal region of the spinal column may 
 be regarded as its thoracic portion and the lower half as abdom- 
 inal. Hence in treating affections of the lungs and heart, we act 
 upon the upper half, reaching the nerves emitted at the first six 
 vertebras. If the first three are accessary to cephalic action, they 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 63 
 
 are none the less pulmonic, as the upper pulmonic region is direct- 
 ly tributary to the brain by sympathy and correspondence. 
 
 I The application of the hand on the upper dorsal region between 
 the shoulder blades, produces a wholesome, invigorating effect on 
 the lungs, and a similar effect is produced by any other stimulating 
 application. Anatomy illustrates the relation of this region to the 
 lungs through the blood vessels. The aorta from the third to the 
 sixth dorsal vertebrae sends off the bronchial arteries, which are the 
 arteries of the bronchial region and the lungs. The posterior pul- 
 monary plexus and the root of the lungs through which they are 
 supplied with air are on the level of the three upper dorsal vertebrae. 
 To speak exactly the bifurcation of the trachea is opposite the third 
 and fourth dorsal vertebras. 
 
 The heart, too, is invigorated from this region, and we cannot 
 entirely isolate the cardiac and pulmonic influences. The five 
 upper ganglia in the dorsal region send branches along the inter- 
 costal arteries to the aorta, where they unite with the nerves that 
 sustain the cardiac power. 
 
 Hence diseases in this locality affect the heart. Sometimes the 
 symptoms of an acute affection of the heart have manifested them- 
 selves, when the irritation was seated in the dorsal region. 
 M. Serres relates a case of meningeal inflammation and ramollisse- 
 ment of the cord, in which the heart's action and impulse were of 
 such a nature that the disease was pronounced to be dilation with 
 hypertrophy of the left side of the heart, which notwithstanding 
 proved to be perfectly sound. 
 
 Below the first dorsal nerve (which goes to the arm) the next 
 seven spinal nerves, going anteriorly supply the muscles and integ- 
 uments attached to the ribs, and thus although they do not supply 
 the lungs, they are associated therewith in action, giving inspira- 
 tory power to the intercostal muscles, and sensibility to the chest. 
 The interior and exterior of the thorax are thus connected with the 
 upper region of the cord, which may be strictly called thoracic, as it 
 governs the thorax both internally and externally, and the posterior 
 dorsal nerves supply the muscles and integument of the back — the 
 upper half of them supplying the thoracic region. 
 
64 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 As we find the maximum excitability (which is intermediate 
 between power and sensibility — between impression and reaction 
 — on the lateral surface of the head and body, we are not surprised 
 to discover that the corporeal region of Inspiration is on the lateral 
 surface of the thorax (see map) behind the mammae, running down 
 to the seventh rib and thus corresponding with the anterior distribu- 
 tion of the intercostal nerves and muscles, the agents of costal inspi- 
 ration, and associates of the phrenic nerve in diaphragmatic inspira- 
 tion. The costal inspiration is more cephalic and spiritual in its 
 associations with the brain, and diaphragmatic inspiration which 
 belongs to a lower position on the head'and body is associated with 
 the basilar region and impulsive energies and passions. 
 
 According to Drs. Griffin, when the dorsal region exhibits 
 tenderness, we find pains about the chest or in the side, weight 
 and constriction of the chest, cough and fits of syncope, sense of 
 sinking, loss of appetite, gastrodynia, pain in the region of the 
 liver, and hiccup." — all of which is explained by the functions of 
 the dorsal region. 
 
 If physicians had been accustomed to report the pathological 
 effects of irritation of the spinal cord, we should have had a fine 
 illustration of its functions. 
 
 Dr. Robert Little, in the Southern Medical and Surgical 
 Journal, described the effect of spinal irritation as follows : 
 " Irritation of the cervical division is indicated by pains in the face, 
 temples and scalp, accompanied frequently by rigidity of the mus- 
 cles of the jaw, when confined to the superior part. When the 
 irritation is lower down, there is pain In the region of the clavicle, 
 scapula and chest, extending along the arm, giving rise to great 
 lassitude, sighing, spasmodic twitchings of the muscles etc. When 
 the dorsal division is affected, we have in addition to a few of the 
 foregoing, stricture across the chest, difficult breathing, palpitation 
 of the heart, angina pcctar 'is, darting pains in the intercostal mus- 
 cles, edges of the ribs and the epigastrium. Lower down still in 
 the dorsal division pains in the stomach anb abdomen are felt. In 
 addition to these, a burning sensation in the sternum and ensiform 
 cartilage is said to be always present in decided cases of irritation 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 65 
 
 of the dorsal nerves. When the lumbar and sacral division are in 
 a state of irritation we have pains of an acute lancinating character, 
 soreness in the skin and muscles over the genital organs, spas- 
 modic twitchings along the course of the crural nerves, together 
 with an unsteady carriage in walking, the patient having no confi- 
 dence" in his ability to retain an erect position, .and exhibiting the 
 reeling appearance of a drunken man." He ascribes also to the 
 superior spinal nerves " throbbing of the carotid and temporal arte- 
 ries, acute pains in the head, violent palpitation and painful sensa- 
 tion of the heart, and a feeling of inability to expel the air from the 
 lungs." 
 
 Thus it is anatomically and neurologically certain that the upper 
 half of the dorsal region is thoracic, and is the region on which to 
 treat all thoracic affections. 
 
 The thoracic region has widely different characteristics in its 
 upper and lower regions. The lower portion of the chest, 
 brought into play by the diaphragm, is associated with vigorous 
 active life, and is most readily brought into play by the active 
 exertion of the lower limbs. Its tendencies in disease are 
 chiefly inflammatory. The upper portion of the lungs is the part, 
 used in quiet sedentary occupations, and is therefore more nearly 
 associated with the intellectual and moral faculties. It is the chief 
 location of consumption, a disease arising from imperfect physical 
 developement and blood supply. The superior portion of the chest 
 is associated with the delicate refined sentiments which are antag- 
 onistic to animal force. The organ of Mortality or extatic trance, 
 belonging to the upper surface of the brain, has its correspondence 
 on the upper surface of the chest, above the nipple. Hence disea- 
 ses in the upper portion of the lungs tend strongly to death ; and 
 this was the cause of the invariably fatal character of pulmonary 
 consumption until within the last forty years more correct ideas of 
 its treatment have been slowly gaining ground against dogmatic 
 opposition. Pneumonia, belonging chiefly to the lower or more 
 vitally energetic portion of the lungs, would never have been con- 
 sidered a very dangerous disease but, for the absurd and injurious 
 methods of its treatment. But pneumonia too becomes a very dan- 
 
66 THE SPINAL REGION* 
 
 gerous disease when it seizes the upper portion of the lungs* 
 Prof. Boling says that pneumonia, " commencing at the apex of the 
 lung, is in proportion to the number of cases the most frequently 
 fatal form of the disease." He had met with about six cases of 
 this affection — they all proved fatal — the deaths occurring from 
 less extensive alteration than usual. Prof. Eberle used to speak 
 of suddenly fatal cases of relapsing pneumonia from congestion of 
 the superior portion of the lungs, with so little disturbance that 
 they had what he called a " morbidly natural pulse. " These fatal 
 upper-lung cases of pneumonia are accompanied by a -persistent 
 mucous or crepitant rhoncus, that should warn us of the danger, 
 which is also found in fatal consumptive conditions. 
 
 Costal respiration, which developes the upper part of the 
 chest, the seat of refined sentiments, is more characteristic of 
 women, as diaphragmatic respiration which developes more vital 
 impulse is characteristic of men. Hence women have smaller 
 waists, and are more willing to undergo tight lacing. 
 
 The upper part of the chest, corresponding with the upper 
 surface of the brain, cooperates in determining the vital forces 
 upwards or toward the head. The upper part of the chest, there- 
 fore, is the region of cephalic tendencies, and there are a great 
 number of pathological facts that illustrate this proposition, which 
 I may present when I undertake a full exposition of Sarcognomy. 
 
 A striking illustration of this sympathy is afforded by cases 
 of sunstroke, which are supposed to be simply affections of the 
 brain. In three fatal cases of sunstroke, which occurred in the 
 Sixty-eighth regiment, at Madras, India, autopsies were made by 
 Surgeon Russell, who found in all alike, no material disorder in 
 the brain, " but, in all three, the lungs were congested even to 
 blackness, through their entire extent." 
 
 In a violent outbreak of typhus fever among the British troops 
 in Spain, as reported by Surgeon Bacot, the patients came to the 
 hospital very much depressed, sad and melancholy — "giddiness 
 of the head was a frequent complaint, and deep and constant sigh- 
 ing was a universal symptom. " This sighing inspiration is an 
 effect of the upper region of the brain, especially under depressing 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 67 
 
 influences — a common effect of the amiable emotions which ele- 
 vate the chest and the feeling of depression which acts on the dia- 
 phragm anteriorly. 
 
 Dr. Bartlett 'says "the morbid alterations which are found 
 within the cavity of the chest seem to be more constant and more 
 important in typhus than in typhoid fever. The lungs were more 
 or less changed from* their healthy condition in all the cases 
 reported by Dr. Gerhard. This change generally consisted in 
 a somewhat peculiar condensation of a portion of one or both lungs. 
 Of forty-three cases examined by Dr. Reid, there was 
 more or less lesion of the lungs in all." It appears from a careful 
 comparison, that extensive engorgement and congestion of the lungs 
 were more frequently associated with those cases in which there 
 was increased serous effusion within the cranium, than with those 
 where this condition did not exist. Nearly all these patients 
 exhibited more or less prominent cerebral symptoms. Dr. John 
 Cheyne, who made a number of dissections in Dublin, said " our 
 expectations were never disappointed as to the state of the brain. 
 The vessels of the head were turgid ; there was increased 
 vascularity of the brain, especially on its surface." 
 
 Thus it appears that the state of the cephalic circulation, 
 whether hyperemic, irritated or congested, is responded to by 
 similar conditions in the lungs, and I have often personally experi- 
 enced that a determination to the upper region of the brain, stimu- 
 lating the amiable and intellectual faculties, is produced by the partial 
 hyperemia of the lungs in a cold affecting their upper portion. 
 
 The history of insanity furnishes another illustration of cephalic 
 and pulmonic sympathy. The leading cause of death among the 
 insane, according to Dr. Thurnam's tables, is disease of the res- 
 piratory organs ; the fatality of which excels that of epidemic, 
 endemic and contagious diseases, apoplexy, paralysis and epilepsy 
 combined. Dr. Fischel, of Prague, reported that in that city seven 
 per cent of the deaths of the insane were caused by gangrene 
 of the lungs. 
 
 Dr. Vierordt, of Carlsruhe, in examining fifty-one cases of 
 typhus fever, states that the lungs were never healthy. They 
 
68 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 exhibited a wrinkling and dark red color of the bronchial mem- 
 brane, with ademic and hypostatic congestion, carnification, hep- 
 atization, and in two cases, gangrene. 
 
 An interesting anatomical illustration of this blending is 
 observable in the location and action of the serratus posticus supe- 
 rior, which rises from the cephalic region and runs in the cephalic 
 and pulmonic zones, to act as an inspiratory muscle. It proceeds 
 from the sixth, seventh and eighth cervical, and first and second 
 dorsal to the second, third, fourth and fifth ribs, beyond their 
 angles, and therefore acts as inspiratory muscles for the upper 
 part of the chest. 
 
 That the lower part of this thoracic region holds a close rela- 
 tion with the heart can easily be shown by experiment with the 
 hand. Its effect is not exciting or agitating, but strengthening to 
 the heart, and thereby rousing and invigorating to the whole con- 
 stitution, but with rather less composure and tranquility than 
 by the pulmonic and cephalic regions. Sedative applications to 
 this region wiM diminish the activity of the heart. A galvanic 
 current down the dorsal region will diminish its excitability and 
 retard its pulsation, according to Althaus ; the current he used was 
 that of from forty to sixty cells. 
 
 The heart is not dependent on this region alone, for its chief 
 ganglionic nerves come from the sympathetic ganglia in the neck, 
 which are connected with the cervical region of the cord, and it is 
 also influenced by the pneumogastric nerve (which serves to exer- 
 cise a restraining power). Thus it seems that both cervical and 
 upper dorsal regions sustain the heart — in other words it is asso- 
 ciated closely with our whole vital brain force, through the ganglia 
 which simultaneously sustain the brain and the heart, thus making 
 the neck preeminently a vital region — a region that links the cere- 
 bral with the corporal seat of life. 
 
 A similar close association occurs in the spine, in which the 
 cephalic and thoracic regions are adjacent — the latter combining 
 the pulmonic and cardiac influences in close association. The five 
 or six upper dorsal ganglia forming a sort of plexus, supply filaments 
 which run to the aorta and join the great mass of ganglionic nerves 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 69 
 
 that sustain the heart, the third and fourth ganglia supplying fila- 
 ments to the posterior pulmonary plexus. The thoracic and 
 abdominal regions divide the spine between them nearly equally, the 
 lower ganglia being abdominal. 
 
 The ganglia and their nerves are the sources of the power 
 that sustains the heart, and they have close associations with the 
 cord, from the base of the cranium to the middle of the dorsal 
 region. They are also the sustaining power of the pulmonic 
 region, although the pneumogastric is the chief source of the pul- 
 monary plexuses, which also receive branches from the vertebral 
 ganglion. 
 
 But whatever the anatomical arrangement, the fact that the 
 hand applied about the sixth dorsal vertebra energizes the heart, 
 is sufficient for therapeutic purposes. » Dr. Steiner, of Vienna, has 
 in several cases succeeded in resuscitating animals whose hearts 
 had ceased to beat, by applying the positive pole to a needle at 
 the heart, and the negative to the seventh intercostal space. This 
 was in accordance with Sarcognomy. 
 
 At the upper margin of the cephalic region the fifth cervical 
 nerve sends off a branch to unite with the fourth in forming the 
 phrenic, the great inspiratory nerve of the diaphragm, (and auxil- 
 iary nerve of the heart and abdominal viscera) which is thus 
 brought into connection with the brain, associating the action of 
 the brain with physical as well as spiritual inspiration — the asso- 
 ciation being completed by nerves from the vertebral ganglion to 
 the phrenic, and branches from the seventh cervical, which go to 
 the vertebral ganglion and also (according to Bell) generally sup- 
 ply filaments in company with the sixth to form the Phrenic. 
 Thus we perceive how closely the functional life of the brain is 
 associated with the transmission of both life and oxygen to the 
 body. Let us look closely again at the distribution and relations 
 of the phrenic nerve. 
 
 In the interior of the chest, the phrenic nerve not only supplies 
 the pleura costalis (with some help from the pneumogastric in the 
 internal lamina) but supplies the mediastinum or most interior 
 region, which sympathizes with the interior and more spiritual 
 
70 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 region of the brain, near the falx, between the hemispheres, the 
 activity of which stimulates inspiratory action. Thus the most 
 superior part of the cephalic region seems to associate with inspira- 
 tion, and with the superior and interior regions of the brain, while 
 its most inferior portion (according to the general laws of the 
 nervous system) has an inferior function, as it sends off the first 
 dorsal and last cervical nerves, by which the muscles and integu- 
 ments of the hand are supplied. It is a beautiful illustration of the 
 wise and ingenious plan of the human constitution that the cephalic 
 power in the cord which is in relation to the high and interior 
 regions of the brain — the channel of this higher influx of life, is 
 also in relation with the inspiration which gives an influx of vital 
 conditions to the body, making our compound life a possibility. 
 
 The phrenic nerve also participates in the cardiac power. — 
 Opposite the third rib it sends branches to the pericardium. It 
 also supplies the right auricle of the heart and inferior vena cava ; 
 and experiments on dogs and rabbits show that irritation of the 
 phrenic puts th„ right auricle into contractile movement. 
 
 Thus we see how closely the brain power and cephalic region 
 of the cord are associated with both circulation and respiration and 
 in fact with all the viscera, for the phrenic and pneumogastric 
 nerves, the former from the middle cervical region, and the latter 
 from the medulla oblongata in the cranium, convey to the brain all 
 the sensations of the abdominal as well as thoracic organs, and of 
 their serous membranes, which are supplied by the phrenic. 
 Thus we perceive a direct anatomical channel for the sympathies 
 which we know to exist. 
 
 The brain belongs not to the locomotive or active, but to the 
 visceral system, and it sympathizes with all the thoracic and 
 abdominal viscera. Upon the lungs it depends for the vitalizing 
 influence of red blood. Upon the abdominal organs it depends for 
 the existence of the red blood, since they supply, through the 
 thoracic duct, the digested material of the blood, and by their 
 excretions they maintain its purity. Upon the kidneys it depends for 
 the removal of narcotic and irritating elements. 
 
 The intercostal spinal nerves which are from the dorsal tract, 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 7* 
 
 are combined. with the ganglionic filaments in their distribution to 
 the walls of the chest, and also to the diaphragm. (The latter 
 distribution is not usually mentioned in text books of anatomy, and 
 their description of the phrenic nerve is extremely defective.) Thus 
 although the upper dorsal is the special pulmonic region, there is 
 a respiratory influence through the whole dorsal tract, opera- 
 ing above through the intercostal or rib-lifting muscles, and 
 below through the diaphragm and abdominal muscles, which latter 
 are supplied from the lower dorsal region and constitute the appa- 
 ratus of expiration. The pulmonic, cardiac, cephalic and abdom- 
 inal influences of the dorsal region are so important as to make it 
 a dangerous location for disease. The Cyclopedia of Practical 
 Medicine says " it has been observed that the fatal termination is 
 much more rapid when the dorsal region is the seat of disease." 
 
 Let us then understand that while the upper dorsal region is 
 the pulmonic and cardiac tract, the entire dorsal region is a respi- 
 ratory tract, acting above by the ribs, and below by the abdominal 
 muscles and diaphragm. And although the lungs and heart should 
 be treated directly on the upper dorsal region, a cough, which 
 involves the irritation of the respiratory, muscles, has its immediate 
 seat in the lower dorsal region, which controls the expiratory 
 coughing muscles, and they depend much upon the irritabitity of 
 that part of the cord. Hence an embrocation or manipulation 
 designed for the relief of a cough may be very properly applied on 
 the lower dorsal region, for injuries or irritations of that region may 
 produce a spinal irritability shown by coughing. In a case of fracture 
 of the eleventh dorsal vertebra, and softening of that portion of the 
 cord (reported by Brodie) a cough would be brought on by any 
 slight change of position. 
 
 It is quite interesting to find that the physiology of the dorsal 
 region of the cord has been well illustrated in the electric experi- 
 ments of Onimus and Legros. In their forty-seventh experiment, 
 the spinal cord of a dog was exposed at the third and fourth dorsal 
 vertebras, and divided. In electrizing the upper portion by a gal- 
 vanic current, they state that the respiration became very deep, 
 and the blood pressure in the carotid very feeble. In the superior 
 
72 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 part of the divided cord an upper current increased the blood pres- 
 sure as it stimulated the portion of the cord connected with the cer- 
 vical ganglia. 
 
 On the lower part of the divided cord a current from the cut 
 end downward raised the pressure higher than the current through 
 the upper part. A Faradic current through this lower part pro- 
 duced at once a rapid elevation of the blood pressure and a consid- 
 erable fall, as the excitability was exhausted, when the action of the 
 heart suddenly ceased. This appears to be a fair demonstration 
 of the intimate dependence of the lungs on the region above the 
 fourth dorsal vertebras and of the heart on the region just below. 
 
 In a case of dislocation between the sixth and seventh verebrae 
 reported by M. Carassus in the Gazette Medical it is stated that the 
 pulse was feeble and frequent. The cord in this case was com- 
 pressed by the sixth vertebra, and its posterior part at the junction 
 was softened. There was complete paralyses below the injury. 
 The mental faculties were clear, death ensued in twenty-four 
 hours. 
 
 Injuries at the lower cevical vertebrae below the sixth cervical 
 destroy all power either of inspiration or expiration, except by the 
 diaphragm, controlled by the phrenic nerve, and by such assistance 
 as may be given by the trapezius, serratus magnus anticus, and 
 sterno-cleido-mastoid, in lifting the ribs — an assistance which is 
 not very important and would not sustain life long. 
 
 The diaphragm is not entirely disconnected from the spinal 
 system, as it may be excited from the sixth, seventh and eighth 
 intercostal spaces, by the hand and by electric currents. At the 
 sixth, seventh and eighth vertebra, electric or nervauric stimulation 
 gives vigor to its action, but not the restless excitement which is pro- 
 duced at the lateral surface of the trunk. Its connection with the 
 spine is through branches of the intercostal nerves, as described by 
 Luschka, and indirectly through the ganglia and splanchnic nerves, 
 and the solar plexus. The dorsal ganglia are the vasomotor con- 
 trol of the intercostal arteries, which anastomose with the phrenic 
 arteries, and they have direct communication with the phrenic 
 nerve, through the great splanchic, and the ganglion diaphragm- 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 73 
 
 niaticwm, as well as a controlling influence on the diaphragm 
 through the great splanchnic, solar plexus and -phrenic plexus, the 
 immediate agent of its organic life. The diaphragm, therefore, 
 has a close relation to the spinal and ganglionic regions between 
 the sixth and tenth vertebras, and we may therefore recognize a 
 Phrenic Zone, extending as low as the solar plexus. 
 
 The lower dorsal region has some other relations to the dia- 
 phragm as the latter cooperates with the expiratory abdominal mus- 
 cles, when it is necessary to compress the abdominal viscera, but 
 not the lungs, as in vomiting or defecation, or if we wish to speak 
 while engaged in laborious efforts. The great solar plexus, con- 
 nected with the lower dorsal region, originates superiorly the phre- 
 nic plexus which goes to the diaphragm and phrenic artery, and 
 communicates with the phrenic nerve. 
 
 As the lower dorsal region contains the ganglia which emit 
 the splanchnic nerves that pass down through the diaphragm and 
 govern all the abdominal viscera, we perceive how abdominal 
 irritations in any of the organs may disturb the lower dorsal 
 region and become the cause of a cough or its aggravation, 
 as is seen in a liver cough or stomach cough. Most generally, 
 however, coughs begin in an irritation of the lungs, which is 
 conveyed by their sensitive nerve, the pneumogastric, to the 
 medulla oblongata within the cranium, and if the irritation be suf- 
 ficient, it is propagated downwards to the lower dorsal region, and 
 produces the convulsive expiration which is called a cough. But 
 before reaching that region it starts the phrenic nerve in the mid- 
 dle of thq cervical region and produces by it an act of inspiration 
 by the diaphragm, and then in the upper dorsal region, it starts 
 the intercostal muscles, lifting the ribs, and as the chest expands, 
 the irritation reaches the lower dorsal region and the *cough or 
 sneeze explodes by means of the abdominal muscles. 
 
 Quieting anodynes, either by inhalation, by swallowing medi- 
 cine, or by manipulation, diminish the irritability of the pneumo- 
 gastric and the spine, and thus relieve the cough. As secretion 
 generally diminishes irritability and soothes the surfaces, expecto- 
 rant remedies are in that way beneficial. 
 
74 TIJE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 The diafhragm^ lying between the heart and the liver, 
 (between the thoracic and abdominal cavities) we might anticipate 
 that its spinal region would lie between the upper and lower dorsal 
 regions, and experiment shows this to be the fact. The greatest 
 energy is given to the diaphragm by manual or electrical stimula- 
 tion at the sixth, seventh and eighth dorsal vertebrae. Continuing 
 anteriorly along the sixth, seventh and eighth ribs, we trace the 
 phrenic zone, and in accordance with the general law we find that 
 phrenic excitability increases on that line toward the front. On each 
 side, halfway to the front, we find the maximum excitability, and an 
 electric current through the body at that location rouses the dia- 
 phragm more forcibly than at any other location — better, even, 
 than through the phrenic nerve, in which it is impossible to localize 
 the current. This lateral current goes directly to the diaphragm 
 and its local nerves. Currents which combine this lateral stimulation 
 with stimulation of the cord at the sixth, seventh and eighth dorsal, 
 would give the most efficient rousing of the diaphragm possible for 
 recovery from asphyxia. A Faradic current might be passed 
 between the spine and the two localities mentioned, after they had 
 been roused from torpor by an interrupted galvanic current. 
 
 These functional locations are different from the received ideas, 
 which give undue prominence to the phrenic and ignore the spine. 
 They are not, however, without anatomical support, as the dia- 
 phragm is not as commonly supposed dependent solely on the phrenic 
 nerve. It receives many nervous filaments from the six lower inter- 
 costal nerves, the corresponding ganglia and other solar plexus. 
 
 It would appear singular to me if it were not so — if the 
 inspiratory action of the diaphragm were dependent solely on a 
 single remote nerve while the expiratory action with which it alter- 
 nates, and with which it often cooperates, as in coughing, vomiting, 
 defecating and struggling (in which the diaphragm and abdominal 
 muscles balance each other) has an ample location in the spinal 
 cord. The multiplex functions of the phrenic, as a nerve of sensa- 
 tion and of organic life at the heart and below the diaphragm, 
 must diminish its importance as the special excitor of the dia- 
 phragm, and I think it important in the treatment of asphyxia to 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 75 
 
 bear in mind the locations I have mentioned as most potent for 
 inspiration. 
 
 I find also, experimentally, a respiratory region on the surface 
 of the abdomen corresponding with that on the face. Anatomical 
 ideas gave little encouragement to such a location, but no matter 
 what anatomy says, the nervauric experiment, which should be the 
 guide in the science of life, locates a respiratory impulse on the 
 abdomen, around the umbilicus, as if there were a close association 
 between the influx of life by the umbilical cord and the influx of 
 inspiration — the inflow and outflow of oxygenized blood and the 
 inflow and outflow of the oxygenizing air. 
 
 The abdominal impulse of respiration, following the general^ 
 law, has less energy than the lateral and posterior impulses, and 
 would not be as efficient for recovery from asphyxia — neverthe- 
 less it may be serviceable in nervauric practice, especially to coop- 
 erate in the evolution of warmth, and also to assist in deepening 
 respiration, for which I frequently use it. 
 
 It is not entirely destitute of anatomical foundation, as the phre- 
 nic sends branches to the region at which we find respiration on the 
 abdomen, and it is reasonable to believe that excitation of its 
 extreme filaments may rouse its functions as the diaphragmatic 
 nerve. 
 
 Leaving the upper dorsal half as the thoracic region (for lungs 
 and heart) we should presume that the lower half must maintain 
 relations with the regions below the diaphragm ; accordingly, we 
 find that the spinal nerves of the lower half pass down over the 
 ribs and distribute to the muscles and integuments of the abdomi- 
 nal walls, including the diaphragm, while the adjacent ganglia of 
 the sympathetic system, sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth and tenth ? 
 send down through the diaphragm the splanchnic nerves, which 
 form the solar plexus, controlling the abdominal viscera. The 
 solar plexus comprises not only the ganglionic nerves but branches 
 from the pneumogastric and phrenic, especially of the right side. 
 
 Hence we apply the hand on the lower dorsal region for the 
 invigoration of liver, pancreas, stomach, bowels and kidneys. It 
 is the most inferior of the dorsal ganglia (tenth, eleventh and 
 
?6 * THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 twelfth, or twelfth alone) which form the lesser splanchnic 
 (ganglionic), nerve which supplies the kidneys (which are located 
 at the bottom of the dorsal region) by forming the usual plexus. 
 
 We understand the power of the solar plexus, formed by 
 branches from the lower dorsal ganglia, when we look to its exten- 
 sive ramifications. It sends branches along the abdominal aorta 
 and forms the subordinate controlling plexuses of the abdomen, viz., 
 the phrenic, caeliac, gastric, hepatic, splenic, renal, supra renal, 
 superior and inferior mesenteric and spermatic plexuses, which 
 supply the stomach, liver, spleen, pancreas, duodenum, intestines, 
 testes and ovaries. 
 
 At the last vertebra of the dorsal region we find the ganglionic 
 origin of the nerves of the kidneys and the kidneys themselves at 
 the junction of the dorsal and lumbar vertebrae. 
 
 Thus the anatomical structure directs us to the lower half of 
 the dorsal region for the treatment of the abdominal viscera gen- 
 erally — the kidneys being reached at the lower, and the liver at 
 the upper vertebrae of this tract, and the circulation being also 
 modified through the lumbar region. 
 
 Experiments in vivisection illustrate the physiology of this 
 region. After section of the splanchnic nerves, a gentle Faradic 
 current applied to their peripheral end has caused increased action 
 of the intestines. "Valentine found that the Galvanization of the 
 superior thoracic ganglia revived the pulsation of the heart after it 
 had ceased, and increased the frequency of the beats when already 
 in action. Mild Galvanization of the splanchnic nerves that arise 
 from the six lower dorsal, ganglia of the sympathetic increases, 
 while strong Galvanization diminishes the peristaltic action." 
 
 It was formerly believed, and even supposed to be proved by 
 experiments, that gastric digestion depends entirely on the pneu- 
 mogastric nerve, although it is well known to be almost wholly a 
 sensory nerve at its origin, and the digestive function has reap- 
 peared in the stomach after section of the pneumogastric, when 
 time has been allowed to recover from the immediate effects of the 
 injury. Moreover, the irritated secretions produced in the stomach 
 by a poison, appeared the same when the pneumogastric nerves 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 77 
 
 had been divided as when they were whole. This was evidently 
 under the control of the sympathetic or ganglionic nerves, which 
 proceed from the lower dorsal ganglia to the solar plexus, and are 
 combined with spinal filaments. Hence it is through that route 
 we reach the stomach — the nerve tracts in which electric exper- 
 iments demonstrate the control of intestinal movements. 
 
 In treating the lower section of the dorsal region for the viscera 
 we influence also the regions supplied by its spinal nerves, viz: 
 the muscles and integuments of the abdomen — the transverse 
 oblique and rectus muscles, by which the abdominal viscera are 
 kept in motion and their contents compressed, and by which the 
 actions of coughing, vomiting and defecation are performed. Sir 
 Benj. Brodie relates that in a case of injury of the spinal column 
 at the sixth dorsal vertebra, the muscles of the abdomen were par- 
 alyzed and unable to cooperate in expiration ; hence coughing was 
 impossible. 
 
 As the lower dorsal region for the abdomen supplies muscular 
 power for its motion, so the upper dorsal region for the thorax, sup- 
 plies power for its action by the intercostal inspiratory muscles, 
 and also moves the pectoralis major. 
 
 From this review it is apparent that the upper portion of the 
 spinal cord tends to sustain the growth of the head and chest, and 
 to expand the lungs, while the lower portion developing the abdomi- 
 nal viscera, and the lower part of the body, tends also by expira- 
 tion to contract the developement of the lungs and chest. In emo- 
 tional character the thoracic region cooperates with the higher 
 impulses and principles, and in growth it cooperates with the brain. 
 Hence we draw the practical conclusion that increase of thoracic 
 developement is of the greatest importance in hygienic and moral 
 culture. 
 
 In the lumbar region, the ganglia go to supply the lumbar 
 plexus of the spinal system and also to the aortic plexus, which 
 controls important arteries. 
 
 The spinal lumbar plexus, formed by the lumbar nerves and 
 the last dorsal, constitutes the chief motor power of the thighs, and 
 
78 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 by its lowest nerve the lumbo-sacral exercises an important control 
 over the reproductive organs. While its vascular and nervous 
 connections bring it into relation with all the abdominal viscera 
 below the stomach. 
 
 Thus it appears that the lumbar region has an important con- 
 trol of the inferior portion of the alimentary canal, and the 
 abdominal region of the spinal column extends from the middle of 
 the dorsal region to the sacrum. 
 
 This is illustrated by pathological and experimental facts. 
 Brachet divided the spinal column of a dog between the third and 
 fourth lumbar vertebras. He kept him two days and fed him. 
 Neither faeces nor urine was discharged — they accumulated in 
 large quantity. He kept a young cat seven days after severing 
 the spinal cord between the third and fourth lumbar vertebrae, and 
 fed it as usual. The rectum and bladder became enormously 
 distended, and a small portion only of feces and urine escaped. 
 In the case of a man whose spinal column had been fractured by a 
 fall from a higk tree, the lower limbs, rectum and bladder were 
 paralyzed and had to be relieved mechanically, while he had no 
 feeling of the necessity for evacuation. 
 
 (Note — ■ The relation of the spinal lumbar plexus formed by the first four 
 lumbar nerves, lying from the second to the fourth lumbar vertebrae (and therefore 
 accessiolc to the influence of the hand or electric current along a space of about 
 five or six inches, beginning just below the inferior ribs) to the abdominal region 
 in front of it, arises from the branches it gives to the integuments and muscles of 
 the lower part of the trunk, and the ganglionic nerves and plexuses with which it 
 connects, which control the organic life within the pelvis and bring it into sympa- 
 thy with the lower limbs which depend on the lumbar and sacral regions. 
 
 The nerves of the lumbar plexus; in succession from above downward are — 
 
 i. The Uio-hypogastric, or superior musculo-cutaneous. 
 
 2. Ilio-inguinal, or inferior musculo-cutaneous. 
 
 3. Genito-crural, or external pudic. 
 
 4. External cutaneous. 
 
 5. Anterior crural, or femoral. 
 
 6. Obturator. 
 
 In addition to these anterior nerves, the lumbar region emits a few posterior 
 nerves of smaller size, diminishing as we descend. They supply the muscles that 
 sustain the spinal column (multifidus spinae and inter spinales) and the integu- 
 ments of the sacral and gluteal regions. The integuments of the buttocks are 
 supplied by the posterior branches of the upper lumbnr nerves and the anterior 
 branch of the first lumbar. 
 
 The llio-hypugastric and the Ilio-inguinal may be taken together, as they 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 79 
 
 arise from the first nerve and have proximate distributions. Sometimes the Ilio- 
 hypogastric exists alone without its adjunct. Their names indicate their distribu- 
 tion — they pass over the ilium (hipbone) the ilio-hypostric going to the buttocks 
 (the skin over the glutei muscles) and the hypogastric branch to the integuments 
 of the hypogastric region (the lower part of the abdomen). The ilio-inguinal passes 
 through the transversalis muscle of the abdomen, through the inguinal region and 
 external abdominal ring to the integuments of the scrotum, the spermatic cord, 
 the pubic and labial surfaces, and the upper, inner surface of the thighs. The 
 ilio-hypogastric also gives muscular filaments to the lower part of the abdominal 
 muscles and to the iliacus, situated interiorly, which lifts the thigh or lowers the 
 trunk. 
 
 The ge?iito-crural or external pudic, and the external cutaneous arise from the 
 second nerve. The genito crural, going to the genital organs and thigh, rises 
 from the second nerve, and its connection with the first. Its genital branch sup- 
 plies the spermatic cord, the cremaster muscle and investments of the testis, and in 
 the female the round ligament and external labium. It supplies also the integu- 
 ment of the groin and the lower border of two of the abdominal muscles. This 
 teaches us the association of the inguinal region (the groin) with the sexual func- 
 tions. The crural branches of the genito crural, passing down with the external 
 iliac artery, go to the integument of the front of the thigh, half way to the knee. 
 Thus we perceive through the ilio-inguinal and genito-crural the upper anterior and 
 inner surface of the thigh is associated with the sexual functions and the entire 
 group of sexual and upper crural functions mentioned, concentrates at the space 
 of the three upper lumbar vertebrae, at which also is located the sensibility of the 
 buttocks. 
 
 The external cutaneous, proceeding from the second lumbar and its connection 
 with the third, has a distinct distribution from the last named. It passes out 
 under Poupart's ligament in front of the ilium, to distribute along the outer and 
 exterior posterior aspect of the thigh, as far as the knee, passing over the tensor 
 vaginae and vastus externus muscles. 
 
 The chief nerve of the lumbar plexus is the anterior crural or femoral nerve, 
 formed by branches from the second, third and fourth. It is the chief muscular 
 nerve of the thigh, for the muscles and integuments of its anterior and inner side 
 and also sends down a long branch for the anterior and inner surface of the leg 
 and dorsum of the foot, and a branch to the femoral artery, which follows it down 
 the thigh. The crural forms five branches, the special distributions of which 
 would interest only the student of anatomy. (Its middle cutaneous branch supplies 
 the integuments along the inner and frontal surface of the thigh as far as the knee 
 — mingling at its upper part with the genito crural. Its internal cutaneous branch 
 supplies the inner surface of the thigh to the knee, and after supplying the surface 
 of the knee joint, sends some filaments down the inner surface of the leg. By the 
 long sapheneous branch, it supplies the inside of the leg, ankle and foot to the 
 great toe. At the knee it supplies the frontal surface and below supplies the front 
 and inner side of the leg. The muscular branches supply all the muscles of the 
 front of the thigh, except the tensor vaginae and pectineus. There are also articular 
 branches that supply the knee joint.) 
 
 From this anatomical review it appears that the sexual region has some asso- 
 ciation with the upper lumbar location, and that the functions become more purely 
 muscular as we descend, until we reach the last lumbar nerve, where sexual 
 functions reappear and continue into the sacral region. 
 
80 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 The obturator nerve, formed by the third and fourth, is much smaller than the 
 crural and belongs chiefly to the adductor muscles which bring the thighs 
 together. (It supplies the adductor longus, magnus and brevis, the pectineus and 
 gracilis. It supplies, also, filaments to the femoral artery and the hip joint and 
 sends a branch, with the long saphenous, to the upper inner surface of the leg.) 
 
 These distributions show that the lumbar plexus gives the 
 nerve-power for the muscles and integuments of the thigh, with 
 only a slight influence on the abdominal muscles at their lower 
 margin, from the nerves nearest the dorsal region, which have 
 some connection with the sexual integuments and functions. 
 There is, however, in the lumbar region the vascular nerve-power 
 of the whole alimentary canal, and when we operate on the lumbar 
 region we influence all the abdominal viscera. We know this 
 experimentally, and when we look for the anatomical reasons they 
 are very apparent. The lumbar region sends out four or five 
 lumbar arteries at each side which curve around the vertebrae and 
 supply the walls of the abdomen, as the intercostal arteries from 
 the dorsal region supply the walls of the chest. The lumbar 
 arteries also supply the adjacent portion of the back and 
 spinal column. 
 
 The entire vascular circulating power of the abdomen is adja- 
 cent to the lumbar vertebrae. The iliac arteries for the lower 
 limbs and pelvis bifurcate opposite the fourth lumbar vertebra, and 
 from that locality to the upper end of the lumbar vertebrae we find, 
 first, the caeliac plexus and artery supplying the stomach, liver 
 and spleen, by its three branches, the superior mesenteric plexus 
 and artery supplying the small intestines and half the colon, the 
 inferior mesenteric plexus and artery supplying the remainder of 
 the colon and the rectum, and between the two mesenteric arteries, 
 the spermatic. 
 
 The lumbar ganglia send branches to the aortic plexus (a 
 continuation of the solar) which originates the inferior mesenteric 
 and part of spermatic and terminates in the hypogastric, to which 
 the lumbar ganglia also send branches. The hypogastric is 
 especially the plexus of the sexual organs. 
 
 Hence although the nerve power of the abdomen connects 
 with the lower dorsal region, the lumbar region is equally impor- 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 8l 
 
 tant, as influences applied to the lumbar region affect everything 
 from the diaphragm to the end of the rectum (the diaphragm 
 included), through the arteries, and the ganglia and plexuses 
 which control the circulation and organic life of all the abdominal 
 organs. Moreover the organs themselves are opposite the lumbar 
 region, the stomach being opposite the first two lumbar vertebrae? 
 the duodenum opposite the third, and the mesentery and umbilicus 
 opposite the fourth. On the same level we find the mesenteric 
 glands tributary to nutrition, and the receptaculum chyli adjacent 
 to the second lumbar. The liver alone has a higher location, 
 being opposite the last two dorsal vertebrae. Hence we reach the 
 liver, stomach, spleen and pancreas., at the junction of the dorsal 
 and lumbar vertebrae, and hold the nutrient absorption between our 
 hands when one is applied over the umbilicus and the other at the 
 two upper lumbar vertebrae. As the lumbar region contains the 
 chief motor power of the lower limbs, there must be a close con- 
 nection of the bowels and the muscles of the thigh, which is 
 evinced in the tendency of sedentary pursuits to promote constipa- 
 tion, and the prompt effect of walking in renewing a diar- 
 rhea or cholera which has been arrested, and which can be kept in 
 check only by lying down. 
 
 The lumbo-sacral, much the largest of the lumbar nerves, 
 comes from the fifth nerve and a branch of the fourth. It enters 
 the pelvis and, joining the first sacral nerve, it becomes a part of 
 the sacral plexus, which is thus constituted by the last two lumbar 
 and four sacral nerves. The lumbo-sacral, being an important 
 nerve, is probably a chief source of the sexual energy coming 
 from the sacral plexus. Near the lumbo-sacral nerve we find the 
 internal iliac artery, which supplies the sexual organs, by pubic, 
 pudic, uterine, vaginal, vesical and hemorrhoidal branches. 
 
 The third and fourth sacral nerves, by their anterior branches, 
 combine with the adjacent ganglionic nerves, and go to the hypo- 
 gastric plexus of the sympathetic system, which controls the sexual 
 functions. 
 
 As my external nervauric experiments showed the junction of 
 the lumbar vertebrae and sacrum to be the chief seat of the sexual 
 
82 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 function, it is interesting to observe that the sexual or sacral plexus 
 derives its nerves above and below the lumbo-sacral junction (the 
 lumbar nerves above this point have a connection with the sexual 
 apparatus, the external pudic or genito-crural arising from the 
 second lumbar nerve), and that anatomy evidently indicates the 
 lumbo-sacral region as the chief source of the sexual functions, 
 the derangements of which, it is well known, are commonly man- 
 ifested by pain or tenderness at the lumbo-sacral junction. 
 
 Longet and Breschet regard the lumbar portion of the spinal 
 cord as the nervous centre of control for uterine action, and Budge 
 found that by Faradization of a small ganglion adjacent to the 
 fifth lumbar vertebra (which corresponds exactly to the external 
 location found by my experiments) powerful contraction of the 
 vasa defercntia, the bladder and the lower portion of the rectum 
 are produced. 
 
 The lumbo-sacral sends off a branch to the glutei muscles, 
 which have in consequence an association with the sexual function, 
 and the lower lumbar ganglia, by their connection with the aortic 
 and hypogastric plexuses, are in close relation to the sexual func- 
 tions. Moveover, the lumbo-sacral junction is adjacent to the ori- 
 gin of the internal iliac artery, which supplies the whole pelvic vis- 
 cera, and Faradization of the lower lumbar region acts most effi- 
 ciently upon the bladder. 
 
 (Note — The sacral nerves give branches posteriorly to the sacro-lumbalis 
 muscles and integuments of the nates and anal region. The lumbo-sacral and first 
 four sacral nerves unite in forming the sacral plexus, which is rather a large nerve 
 than a plexus. This plexus adjacent to the rectum, sends off two great nerves, the 
 greater and lesser sciatic nerves. The great sciatic, the largest nerve in the body, 
 is the continuation of the sacral plexus, deriving filaments from all the nerves that 
 supply the plexus. The great sciatic supplies the obturator internus, the glu- 
 teus and the flexor muscles of the thigh, the adductor magnus, biceps and external 
 rotators, and external surface of the ham, and sends down an important continu- 
 ation, the popliteal or posterior tibial, which ends in the external and internal 
 plantar, and becomes the chief nerve of the muscles and integuments of the leg 
 and foot. It supplies the integuments of the leg, and the gastrocnemius, plantaris, 
 popliteus and soleus muscles, also the tibialis posticus and long flexors, and the 
 ankle and the sole of the foot. The plantar nerves supply the muscles of the foot. 
 
 The smaller sciatic nerve supplies the gluteus maximus and gracilis, and the 
 integuments of the upper and posterior aspect of the thigh to the knee, anpl 
 supplies some filaments to the flexor muscles.) 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 83 
 
 The sacral -plexus, thus, by its downward extension, brings 
 the leg and foot and posterior region of the thigh into close asso- 
 ciation with the pelvic viscera (especially the sexual organs), 
 which are supplied by its anterior or internal branches. These 
 internal branches are the hemorrhoidal, vesical, vaginal, uterine 
 and pudic, going to the pelvis and perineum, their names indica- 
 ting their destinations — the regions of the rectum, bladder and 
 sexual organs. The vesical or bladder nerves supply filaments 
 also to the vesiculas seminales, prostate gland and female urethra. 
 The pudic nerve is the chief nerve of the genital organs, and 
 comes chiefly from the third sacral. 
 
 The last lumbar, and the third and fourth sacral nerves send 
 branches to the hypogastric plexus, which is the chief immediate 
 control of the sexual apparatus. The external sexual locality 
 therefore for Sarcognomy should be the lumbo-sacral junction and 
 space extending above and below it, and the entire lumbar and 
 sacral regions may be regarded as having sexual influences, 
 through the surfaces at and around the sexual organs, and by con- 
 nections with the hypogastric plexuses. Moreover, we find oppo- 
 site the superior lumbar vertebrae the spermatic artery, a source of 
 sexual power, as they supply the male testes and the female 
 ovaries. (In birds, the kidneys and supra renal capsules lie in con- 
 tact with the testes and the ovaries, and in man the testes in the 
 embryonic condition are near the kidneys.) 
 
 The hypogastric plexus is formed from the sacral ganglia, 
 aided by the third and fourth sacral spinal nerves, and the inferior 
 mesenteric plexuses with which it connects. This is especially the 
 sexual plexus, as it follows and controls the arterial supply of blood 
 to the sexual organs. 
 
 It is difficult in such a commingling of nerves, where the sex- 
 ual powers are reinforced from different sources — from the upper 
 and lower lumbar and sacral regions, to fix upon its chief cen're 
 anatomically ; but nervauric experiments and the principles of 
 pathognomy direct us to the lumbo-sacral location as its com- 
 manding centre at the spine, as the sexual organs themselves are 
 the immediate seat of the functional energy and excitement. In 
 
84 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 this matter as in all other developements of Sarcognomy, I have 
 followed experiment without regard to anatomy — only looking to 
 it afterwards to see that it gave no incompatible facts. As to the 
 lumbo-sacral junction, anatomy and physiological experiments con- 
 firm the nervauric discovery, showing the lumbo-sacral junction, to 
 be the sexual centre, although the distribution of nerves might 
 have led to a different opinion. 
 
 Budge, who discovered the cilio-spinal centre (governing the 
 iris) " has discovered a similar centre in that portion of the spinal 
 cord which corresponds to the fourth lumbar vertebra. By Fara- 
 dization of the same, powerful contractions of the vasa deferentia, 
 the bladder, and the lower portion of the rectum are caused. The 
 same effects are produced by stimulating a small ganglion, situated 
 in the neighborhood of the fifth lumbar vertebra, and which 
 receives branches from the third and fourth lumbar nerves. This 
 ganglion Budge has called the genito-spinal ganglion ." 
 
 Dr. Beard has also observed the influence of this region — he 
 says — "If a strong current can be applied over the lower portion 
 of the spine, between the upper borders of the ossa innaminala, 
 a slight sensation is sometimes, though by no means uniformly, 
 communicated to the rectum and the male genital apparatus, the 
 penis and the testicles, through their spinal nerve supply." 
 
 Still more remarkable is the mingling of the locomotive and 
 sexual powers in the spinal system. The lumbar region, chiefly 
 for the thigh, and the sacral region, chiefly for the leg, are the 
 sources of the sexual powers which thus arise from the midst of 
 the greatest physical force. Hence, in their maturity, they devel- 
 lope or sustain the greatest energy, as we see in the contrast 
 
 between the sound and the emasculated animal. The active life, 
 
 * 
 
 which developes the greatest muscular energy also developes the 
 greatest virile force, and hence population is not checked by the 
 struggles of poverty so much as by the indolence of wealth. 
 
 The consociation of virility and the more turbulent energies 
 corresponds with the usual course of nature. The season of sex- 
 ual love among most animals is a season of restless energy and 
 often of fierce combat. Among men it is the source not only 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 85 
 
 of social animation but of a great deal of turbulent lawlessness, 
 jealousy and violence. The impetuous lover fights all rivals or 
 obstacles, and sometimes when .disappointed is ready to murder 
 the woman who has rejected him and terminate his own life in his 
 blind fury. 
 
 The sexual -power which belongs to the spinal system, and 
 which is an aggressive impulse, is distinct from the sexual sensi- 
 bility and excitability which belong to the sexual organs, the 
 influence of which tends to debility and exhaustion. Both belong 
 to the lower end of the trunk, which antagonizes the head and sum- 
 mit of the chest according to the law of antagonism which is a 
 fundamental principle of Biology according to my discoveries. 
 
 The lower limbs are especially antipodal to the brain, and in 
 this they coincide with the excretions of the pelvis. 
 
 The foot is the most thoroughly anti-cephalic region, with the 
 strongest tendency toward sleep or coma, and it is dependent upon 
 the sacral plexus through its continuation, the great sciatic nerve. 
 The sacral plexus is in close relation with the fecal and urinary 
 matters which depress the nervous system. (' The foot, under 
 the influence of warmth, is effective in subduing the brain to sleep, 
 and under the influence of fatigue from prolonged walking lowers 
 all the cerebral powers.) 
 
 It would then seem probable that the pelvic distributions of 
 nerves from the sacral plexus should have a similar anticephalic 
 and lethargic character, and in fact we find in the pelvis the influ- 
 ences most hostile to cephalic integrity, tending to develope every 
 form of hysteria, coma, paralysis, dementia and insanity. 
 
 The pelvic region receives the dead substance rejected from 
 all the organs — devitalized, benumbing, debilitating. The solid 
 waste of the body comes to the colon and rectum, the fluid waste 
 comes by the kidneys and ureters to the bladder. The urea thus 
 discharged is a narcotic element, torpefying to the brain, and we 
 find in the pelvic region at the mons veneris a tendency to lethargy 
 and coma similar to that which, on the head, appears under the jaw 
 just above the larynx — a quality manifested not only in cerebral 
 disorders, but in the manner, when largely developed, as was seen 
 
86 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 in Mr. Webster, in whom notwithstanding his great developement of 
 brain there was an extreme dullness and slowness of mental action, 
 quite a contrast to that of Mr. Clay and Mr. Calhoun. 
 
 The explanation of this lethargic tendency at the mons veneris 
 which quite surprised me when I discovered it is found in the nar- 
 cotic chararacter of the contents of the bladder behind the mons. 
 It is a curious coincidence that the pubic region in question receives 
 nerves (the ilio-scrotal branch) from the musculo-cutaneous, a 
 branch of the first lumbar nerve which is in close proximity to the 
 kidney from which the narcotic element takes its departure. The 
 nerve is thus at each end in relation with narcotic impressions. 
 
 The lower pelvic region is the region of insanity and all forms 
 of mental and cerebral degeneracy — that is — predominant irri- 
 tations and excitements in that region produce all forms of cerebral 
 derangement. 
 
 How nearly parallel these forms of cerebral disorder of pelvic 
 origin are to the forms of mental degradation produced in connec- 
 tion with parts beiow the knee I will not discuss at present. 
 
 We have now hastily surveyed the spinal column, the repository 
 of vital forces for the body, energized by an influx from the brain 
 above. We perceive that from its summit, which cooperates with 
 the brain, and summit of the lungs, to its lower end devoted to the 
 legs, it is a collocation of unitized forces, acting on the different 
 segments of the body by its voluntary spinal nerves, by the adja- 
 cent ganglia, and by the blood vessels those ganglia control, thu s 
 determining all activity and all growth. 
 
 The nervauric healer, with these principles impressed on his 
 mind, will give more attention to the spinal region than to any 
 other portion of the body. 
 
 The instant control of the spinal cord over all parts of the 
 body renders it the channel of all sympathies, as we perceive when 
 the cooling of one hand or foot has a cooling influence on the 
 other, which was illustrated by the experiment of Dr. James J. 
 Putnam on frogs, in which electrization of one foot produced con- 
 tractions of the blood vessels of the web of the opposite foot, and 
 by the experiment in which Brown Sequard showed that pinching 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 87 
 
 one arm caused a fall of temperature in the opposite arm through 
 its effect on the cervical spine. 
 
 Correlation and combination of functions — Notwithstanding 
 the distinct specification of the several regions of the spinal cord 
 which has been shown, we cannot speak of these as distinctly sep- 
 arate and isolated regions, for every organ is in some way related 
 to other portions of the cord than the region of its spinal control, 
 and all inferior organs depend upon the immediate superior tract, 
 through which communication is maintained with the brain and its 
 continuations. Van Kempen found that a longitudinal section in 
 the middle of the spinal cord along the fifth, sixth and seventh 
 cervical vertebras in dogs and rabbits produced a partial parlysis 
 in the posterior limbs. (This experiment explains the galvo-tonic 
 contractions of Remak who excited contractions in the anterior 
 limbs by Galvanizing the posterior.) 
 
 Pathologists might be puzzled to account for paralysis in the 
 lower limbs by affections in the cervical region, which this experi- 
 ment would explain. It also adds to our knowledge of the com- 
 manding importance of the cephalic region in controlling every- 
 thing below it. 
 
 Anatomy further illustrates the commingling of functions by 
 the fact that spinal nerves are not limited in their connection to the 
 spot where they appear to unite with the cord. Sensory nerves, 
 when they unite with the cord run a little way up or down, or in 
 both directions, and then cross to connect with the opposite side 
 and carry out the general law of decussation. We know not how 
 far the filaments pass before effecting their connection with some 
 ganglion-like substance as their origin. 
 
 The heart not only responds to the upper dorsal region, but 
 by its intimate dependence on the three cervical ganglia is brought -» 
 into close relation with the brain and the cervical region of the 
 cord, which associates with these ganglia. Moreover it has close 
 relations with the third, fourth and fifth cervical nerves, the origin 
 of the phrenic, by the phrenic distributions which supply the per- 
 icardium and the vena. cava. The right phrenic goes to the lower 
 vena cava and the adjacent portion of the right auricle, while the 
 
88 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 lower vena cava and contiguous portion of the right auricle are 
 supplied from the mixed phrenic and ganglionic nerves of the dia- 
 phragmatic plexus. Irritations of the phrenic nerve have pro- 
 duced contractions of the right auricle and diaphragm in dogs. 
 It is clear, therefore, that both inspiration and circulation depend 
 upon the cervical region, and are not so much centralized in the 
 medulla oblongata as commonly supposed. The phrenic nerve 
 communicates extensively with the branches of the middle and infe- 
 rior cervical ganglia, the motor ganglia of the heart, and supplies the 
 pericardium froxn its branches opposite the third rib, and also from 
 its ramifications at the diaphragm. Moreover, the costal pleura 
 (a portion of which is in the precordia over the heart) is supplied 
 with its sensibility by the phrenic nerve, and thus connected with 
 the middle cervical region. This region was intimately concerned, 
 as well as the pericardium, in the Faradization by which Duchenne 
 roused the action of the heart. 
 
 Again, the heart has connections with the lower dorsal region, 
 for the solar plexus, originated by the splanchnic nerves coming 
 from the sixth to the tenth dorsal ganglia, sends up branches 
 through the diaphragm to the pericardium, by the diaphragmatic 
 plexus. 
 
 The pulmonic and cardiac regions lie together in the cord, 
 and the lungs are supplied largely by the pneumogastric nerve, 
 which also supplies the pulmonary pleura, and is the great sensitive 
 nerve of the thoracic cavity, the sensitive excitation of which is so 
 subduing to the heart. Thus the heart is in relation to the pul- 
 monic portion of the cord, and the origin of the pneumogastric at 
 the medulla oblongata, not as the source of its power, but as the 
 moderator of its action. 
 
 The upper thoracic region which thus plays upon the heart, 
 subduing and softening its action and structure, is the corporeal 
 seat of the soft and subduing emotions belonging to the upper sur- 
 face of the brain (see map), the influence of which explains the 
 effect of the tender emotions on the heart and the poetic conception 
 of the broken heart, which is not destitute of a physiological basis. 
 
 Again, the cervical ganglia which control and sustain the 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 89 
 
 heart are at the same time the regulators of the brain, determining 
 the amount of circulation in its anterior and posterior regions, and 
 in the spinal cord, and as the brain demands a larger supply of 
 blood, or the muscles demand more power, they start an increased 
 cardiac energy to supply the demands created by the passions ; 
 but when the gentler emotions demand peace, their responsive 
 region (the upper pulmonary) rouses the pneumogastric nerve, 
 tranquillizing and relaxing the heart. The cephalic portion of the 
 cord is also tributary to the heart, sending ganglionic fila- 
 ments to the aorta. 
 
 The heart is closely related to the diaphragm, to which it is so 
 closely situated, and their controlling regions in the brain and cord 
 are so closely connected as to insure their cooperation. The same 
 exertion or passion which accelerates the pulse also increases the 
 action of the diaphragm. 
 
 The lack of definite limitation in the nerve supply of organs 
 is apparent in all parts of the cord. The splanchnic nerves for 
 the abdomen are connected no higher than the sixth dorsal gan- 
 glia, but their fibres may be traced up as high as the third, thus 
 giving the abdominal region a nervous association with the lungs, 
 heart and brain. In the sexual apparatus not only do we trace a 
 definite anatomical connection (verified by nervauric experiment) 
 between the sexual organs and the sacral region and lumbo-sacral 
 junction, but we find an important influence in the lumbar region, 
 as the genito-crural nerve arises from the second lumbar, and 
 the lumbar ganglia go to form the lumbar, aortic and hypogastric 
 plexuses, which control the pelvic viscera ; and we observe that the 
 spermatic arteries which supply the testes and ovaries originate at 
 the head of the lumbar region, controlled by the spermatic plexus, 
 which, derived chiefly from the renal, is thus connected with 
 the lowest dorsal region, which originates the minor splanchnic 
 nerve, the source of the renal plexuses. Hence we speak of the 
 genito-urinary organs which are anatomically connected. 
 
 Thus in the intricate machinery of life there are so many forces 
 brought to bear upon every organ, to stimulate, to modify or to 
 arrest its action, that if we were not guided by a comprehensive 
 
90 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 philosophy and an exact knowledge of the dominant laws, we 
 might fall into serious mistakes. 
 
 In localizing the source of any function we locate the more 
 important source of action and not an isolated concentration of the 
 entire power. The nervauric physician should understand the 
 relation of each organ to the entire nervous system. 
 
 (Note — Adjacent to the four upper dorsal vertebrae we find the recurrent 
 laryngeal nerves — the left rising lower than the right, beneath the aortic arch, 
 which ascend to the larynx, and are associated with the cervical ganglionic nerves. 
 Hence, through this region comes the power of the voice, and the power of clos- 
 ing the larynx firmly, which comes into play when we exert our maximum strength. 
 The voice is the most spiritual of all the physical powers of the body, and it 
 originates in the cephalic region, (which I neglected to mention in its proper 
 place) as it comes through the power of the spinal accessory nerve to the recur- 
 rent laryngeal, and the spinal accessory rises by several roots above the seventh 
 cervical. In this region also, we have the descending branches of the pneumo- 
 gastric, which join the cardiac plexus and give sensibility and sedative relaxing 
 influences to the heart, as well as the anterior and posterior pulmonary plexuses, 
 the latter joined by the nerves from the third and fourth dorsal ganglia, and 
 going to supply the substance of the lungs, which are partly supplied from the 
 cardiac as well as the pulmonary plexuses ; in which we see a further illustration 
 of the combination ot cardiac and pulmonary energies, and their joint relation to the 
 pneumogastric nerves, and the upper section of the cord.) 
 
 Finally it may be asked how do the facts of anatomy coincide 
 with the localities of Sarcognomy ? There must be a coincidence, 
 as two classes of facts cannot be in collision. Sarcognomy does 
 not affirm an isolation or separation of influences. Every location 
 on the brain or body, though it may influence one function in a 
 greater degree than others, is not limited thereby but exerts iu 
 various degrees modifying influences on other functions assisting 
 the neighboring, and checking the most remote. 
 
 The nerve forces of the heart and lungs are inextricably 
 mingled with each other, both in the ganglia and plexuses near 
 the heart and in those along the spine, and even the lower dorsal 
 region has relations to the heart. The heart and aorta confront 
 the entire tract from the third to the tenth dorsal vertebra, the body 
 of the heart occupying the space from the fifth to the tenth. 
 Hence the nervauric influence of the hand may reach the heart at 
 any point from the third to the tenth vertebra in consequence of its 
 proximity, and that influence would be specially effective from the 
 third to the sixth vertebra because it would reach the cardiac plex- 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 9I 
 
 uses and ganglia. ; the immediate source of its action. The sixth 
 vertebra may be considered the central locality for cardiac influence. 
 Anteriorly, the heart corresponds to the space between the second 
 and sixth ribs, and its lower end touches the wall of the chest two 
 inches below the nipple and one inch nearer the median line. (The 
 base of the sixth rib in front corresponds with the tenth dorsal ver- 
 tebra) . The heart may be reached in front, but the frontal influence 
 is feeble compared to the dorsal, and the left side, which is the 
 more muscular side of the heart, is toward the back. The inter- 
 costal nerves and arteries, which supply the chest around the heart, 
 proceed from the space between the second and sixth dorsal vertebras . 
 The sympathetic connection of the sixth dorsal region with the 
 brain shows that it is best adapted to sustain healthy and equable 
 cardiac action. A calm and firm action of the heart is produced 
 by the influence of the cephalic region of the cord, which is best 
 adapted to sustaining the action of the brain. 
 
 A powerful and tumultuous action of the heart to which I have 
 not yet alluded, is produced by the three cervical ganglia which 
 cooperate with the basilar region of the brain, the seat of the tur- 
 bulent impulses and animal force which we rouse by placing the 
 hands on the neck near the cranium. The large neck is a well- 
 known indication of strong circulation and strong passions. The 
 cervical ganglia are equally cephalic and corporeal in their func- 
 tions, and sustain the brain and heart in scenes of the wildest 
 violence. 
 
 The anatomical commingling of nervous forces which we find 
 serves as an additional illustration not only of the sympathies of 
 organs, but of that intimate correlation and blending of functions 
 which is revealed in the study of the brain, in which we find no 
 organ which has not a diffusive influence, extending beyond its 
 own jurisdiction into the sphere of other functions. 
 
 The intimate and overwhelming sympathy of the stomach 
 with the brain, heart and lungs is explained not only by the pneu- 
 mogastric and phrenic nerves, its direct channels, but by the con- 
 nection of the upper dorsal ganglia with the splanchnic nerves, and 
 the intimate relations of the Gastro-Abdominal tract in the brain 
 
92 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 with the regions of sensibility, disease and insanity. But a full 
 exposition of this subject would be beyond the scope of the present 
 volume. 
 
 I would remark in conclusion, that in nervauric and electric 
 treatment we are not to confine our attention, as has been the fash- 
 ion, to the cerebro-spinal system, overlooking the immediate agents 
 of vital functions, for it is well established that the immediate 
 agents of all vital processes are the ganglionic nerves or ganglia. 
 Animals may exist without a cerebro-spinal system, and the human 
 fetus may be developed without either brain or spinal cord. To the 
 ganglionic or subordinate system nature adds a controlling spinal 
 system, and to this adds a controlling brain. But the ganglionic 
 system thus overruled, carries on the machinery of iife, and when 
 we treat the spinal column we control the - adjacent ganglia as well 
 as spinal nerves, thus controlling circulation, sensation and uncon- 
 scious action in the viscera. Physiologists have given very little 
 thought to this commanding relation of the spinal cord to the vis- 
 cera and none at all to the corresponding relations of the brain, 
 nor have the ganglionic functions been studied in a practical 
 manner for local treatment. 
 
 Therapeutic Treatment. 
 
 Understanding the foregoing exposition of the spinal powers, 
 the operator will have little difficulty in treating the spinal column 
 — the most important region of the body for the healing art — 
 according to the following directions, recollecting that we stimu- 
 late the impressible temperament by the application of the hand, by 
 gentle percussion, or by the negative pole of an electric current. 
 
 i. To invigorate the brain, stimulate the junction of the cer- 
 vical and dorsal vertebrae, or union of the neck and the trunk. 
 
 2. To reinforce this region, stimulate the region of sanity, 
 just below the arms. The union of the two functions produces a 
 greater effect. 
 
 3. For the more complete invigoration of the brain and the 
 entire constitution, the treatment may be applied not only to the 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 93 
 
 cephalic region of the spine, but upon the entire shoulders, and 
 the arms down to the elbow. 
 
 4. While stimulating the cephalic region, the effect may be 
 assisted by dispersive upward passes from the margin of the ribs 
 in front (region of disease). If a galvanic current is used, the 
 positive pole applied by broad rheophores to the lower 
 margin of the ribs on their anterior half, and the negative 
 on the cephalic region, will produce a great concentration to 
 the cephalic locality, — a very tonic sustaining influence. 
 
 5. If it be desired to use the brain power for intellectual pur- 
 poses, we should also stimulate along the course of the sternum. 
 At the lower end of the sternum it could be directed to impressional, 
 psychometric and clairvoyant investigations. If the object should 
 be a general mental elevation to a lofty plane of thought, opening 
 the mind to spiritual influx, we should stimulate the region of 
 Inspiration, on the side, parallel to the anterior line of the arm. 
 
 6. If we wish to use the mental energy in speech (conversa- 
 tion or oratory) we should combine with the cephalic the pul- 
 monic region, just below it, whic*h would cooperate admirably with 
 the region of Inspiration. For mediumistic speech^ we need both 
 Inspiration and Idealism — the latter being easily covered by the 
 hand at the lower end of the sternum. The term Idealism is used 
 for the whole Ideal region, including Imagination, Spirituality, 
 Marvelousness and Intuition. 
 
 7. If we would use our mental energy for physical achieve- 
 ment we should combine with the cephalic region that of Vital 
 Force, and the entire thigh. 
 
 8. If we would use it for an ambitious career, we should 
 excite the energies of the arms — especially the regions of Ambi- 
 tion and Love of Power. 
 
 9. If we would use it for the attainment of moral excellence 
 and perfection, we should extend the stimulation from the cephalic 
 region, over the shoulder, on the front of the chest, as far as the 
 nipples. 
 
 10. If our chief object is to encounter enemies and difficulties, 
 we may also stimulate the lower posterior half of the body, espe- 
 
94 - THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 cially the region on the level of the lumbar vertebrae and below; 
 If our object is to gain social influence and ascendency, we may 
 stimulate the whole of the upper posterior surface of the trunk and 
 the entire arms, or at least to the elbow. 
 
 ii. To stimulate the cephalic region in the head, we may 
 touch the regions of Firmness and Dignity. To produce a strong 
 and harmonious combination of cephalic energies, we may extend 
 the hand across Firmness and Dignity, so far as to include the 
 regions of Sanity and Magnanimity, thus covering the posterior 
 par* of the cephalic region of the brain. In all cases we improve 
 the sustaining faculties by passes upward and backward from Dis- 
 ease and Insanity (the cheek-bone and the under-jaw regions) 
 towards the crown of the head, the capillary centre. The pass is 
 a light brushing movement with the fingers. 
 
 12. To invigorate the lungs in any condition whatever, we 
 may stimulate the upper half of the dorsal region (the six upper 
 vertebras). Precision. in confining the hand to one locality is not 
 desirable in therapeutic treatment, for adjacent localities are always 
 cooperative. The pulmonic zone extends around the chest in the 
 direction of the ribs, nerves and blood vessels ; but on the frontal 
 surface we have none of the elements of vigor. Hence, we do not 
 extend our manual treatment beyond the side, in which we find a 
 region of Inspiration (near the ends of the intercostal arteries) 
 (see map) corresponding with the organs of Sublimity and Rever- 
 ence — a region which animates the lungs, and prompts a fuller 
 breathing by the ribs, but does not impart any vigor or tonicity, 
 and would, therefore, not be beneficial in inflammatory conditions, 
 which should be counteracted on the tibial surface of the leg. 
 
 13. To stimulate respiration on the head, we place the 
 fingers on the region of Inspiration, extending them downwards if 
 we wish to produce deeper inspiration by the diaphragm, the vig- 
 orous excitement of which is produced just over the cavity of the 
 ear, at the same time stimulating the occiput on the same tract. 
 On the body, we apply the hands on the upper dorsal vertebra, as 
 low as the sixth, and on the corresponding pulmonic zone, along 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 95 
 
 the course of the ribs. The influence of the pulmonic zone grows 
 calmer above, until it blends with the calm cephalic, and relates to 
 the upper part of the chest. Below, it becomes more exciting and 
 relates to the lower part of the chest, blends with the cardiac influ- 
 ence and rouses the diaphragm. 
 
 14. In treating pulmonary diseases it is always beneficial to 
 reinforce the pulmonary vitality by stimulating the pulmonic region 
 of the spine, but not beneficial to stimulate the region of 
 Inspiration, except when respiration is imperfect, the lungs being 
 dry, constricted or asthmatic. Congestive conditions of the lung 
 such as pneumonia, or irritated conditions approximating pneu- 
 monia, are benefitted by stimulating not only the pulmonic, but the 
 cephalic region, which energizes the arms. Both upper and lower 
 limbs, when stimulated by the hands, by hot applications or stimu- 
 lating plasters, divert from the lungs and relieve their congestions 
 and irritations. A very simple and prompt method of relieving 
 any congestion of the lungs is to retain a large amount of blood in 
 the limbs by ligatures at the thighs and shoulders, tight enough to 
 check the return of venous blood, but not to 'hinder the entrance of 
 the arterial. This method is called hemastasis. It is more 
 efficient than the greater part of the medical treatment which has 
 been in vogue, but has been signally neglected by the medical 
 profession. Hemastasis is more effective when following evacua- 
 tions by the kidneys and bowels, and when the limbs are kept 
 warm. It is most efficient when practised by a vacuum apparatus, 
 which diminishes the atmospheric pressure on the limbs 
 inserted in it. 
 
 15. To rouse the diaphragm for forced respiration in 
 asphyxia or drowning, we stimulate at the sixth dorsal, and around 
 the chest to the sides on a level of the sixth and seventh ribs, by 
 the hand or by Faradic currents. Friction and percussion with 
 the hand, on the side, along the seventh rib to the spine, will be 
 found useful. Faradic currents or alternating Galvanic currents 
 through the sixth and seventh intercostal spaces from side to side, 
 also from the side to the spine, at the sixth and seventh vertebras, 
 
g6 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 will be the most efficient measures to restore and deepen respira- 
 tion. But before such means can generally be attained, respira- 
 tion may be restored by manual force. The patient being placed 
 in a reclining position (say an angle of forty-five to sixty degrees 
 above the horizontal) and vigorous compression applied rapidly to 
 the abdomen and lower part of the chest by two or more persons, 
 to expel the air which will be brought in»o the lungs by the reac- 
 tion when the ribs expand by their elasticity, and the bowels 
 descend by their gravity. The reaction of the ribs may be 
 assisted by jerking the shoulders upwards at the moment. The 
 continued repetition of these movements may recover from appa- 
 rent death, and the recovery will be greatly assisted by Galvanic 
 currents from the hypochondriac region of the body-to the cepha- 
 lic region of the spine, and by alternating Galvanic currents across 
 the base of the brain posteriorly, as well as the currents recom- 
 mended for the diaphragm. 
 
 16. To rouse the liver, we stimulate along the sixth to the 
 eighth vertebra, and the corresponding ribs. It is not desirable to 
 carry this beyond the middle of the lateral surface, as it becomes 
 a depressing, peevish, hypochondriac influence anteriorly. When 
 we would rouse from a torpid state, the liver being small or con- 
 tracted, we treat on the side, but in congested, hyperemic, irri- 
 tated or inflammatory conditions, the treatment should be on the 
 back — one hand on the Hepatic location and the other on Health. 
 
 17. From the eighth to the twelfth dorsal vertebras inclusive, 
 we stimulate the stomach and the organs immediately below it. 
 The gastric zone extends along the direction of the ribs, and the 
 specific anterior location for exciting hunger, thirst and love of 
 stimulus corresponding to the organ just in front of the ear, is on 
 the abdomen below the ribs about six inches from the umbilicus, 
 and three or four inches higher. At this locality, we may not only 
 stimulate digestion, cooperating with the spinal location, but may 
 control the drunkard's thirst by dispersive passes on the sensitive, 
 — stimulating at the same time the power of fortitude and temper- 
 ance, which is roused on the top of the shoulder. This may be 
 achieved by electric treatment, placing the positive pole at the 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 97 
 
 gastric location just mentioned, and the negative on the middle of 
 the upper surface of the shoulder. / 
 
 18. From the tenth dorsal to the last lumbar vertebrae we 
 energize the functions of the bowels, and along the Gastro-intestinal 
 location on the abdomen we may assist in the same effect. We 
 may use the hands, or the Faradic and Galvanic currents. Upon the 
 spine we energize at the same time the lower limbs, but at the 
 abdominal locations the tendency is more relaxing than invig- 
 orating. Hence, the positive pole is more appropriate to the 
 abdomen and the negative to the spine. 
 
 19. On the lumbar vertebrae, especially the lower half, we 
 may invigorate the calorific energies, which are developed by the 
 organ of Calorification, located on the abdomen, with the difference 
 that the latter is more feverish and superficial in its effect and the 
 former more substantial and wholesome, being associated with 
 general vigor. 
 
 20. At the upper lumbar vertebrae we may excite the urinary 
 organs — the kidneys being adjacent to the lumbo-dorsal junction 
 and deriving their nerve power from the renal plexus, coming 
 from the tenth and eleventh dorsal ganglia. 
 
 21. At the lumbo-sacral junction, and about three inches 
 below it, we may excite the sexual energies, as this region is the 
 source of sexual functions in both sexes. Sexual desires and 
 exhausting excesses are prompted by the sexual organs, and by 
 the inguinal region, illustrating the general law that anterior 
 organs tend to debility and exhaustion. To disperse from the 
 groin and energize the lumbo-sacral region is the general rule in 
 disorders of the sexual organs, unless we wish to suspend all 
 action in that region, in which case we stimulate the cephalic 
 region on the spine and below the axilla, which is a proper treat- 
 ment in hysteria — a treatment which is sedative and antaphrodisiac. 
 
 22. In the treatment of paralysis, we should recollect that 
 the upper limbs are controlled from the fifth, sixth, seventh and 
 eighth cervical and first dorsal vertebra ; consequently, this is the 
 locality at which the arms are to be strengthened by stimulation with 
 the hand, or by a Galvanic current sent to this locality from the 
 
98 THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 hypochondriac region, or by moderate Faradic currents for a few 
 minutes through this part of the spine or between this part and the 
 hands. Dry cupping on this part of the spine gives relief to pains 
 in the arms or convulsive affections. Irritated conditions of this 
 part of the spine may be relieved by vigorous dispersive passes, by 
 dry cupping or by the positive pole sending a current toward the 
 hands or the feet. 
 
 23. Paralytic affections of the lower limbs involve the whole 
 region from the dorsal vertebra to the end of the spine, and require 
 treatment by the hand and by Galvanic or Faradic currents on the 
 entire space — on the lumbar region for the thighs and the sacral 
 region for the legs. Currents to the spine for five, ten or fifteen 
 minutes are more beneficial generally in paralysis, as Galvanism 
 is the proper excitant for paralyzed or enfeebled nerves ; but an 
 alternation of currents is beneficial. The negative pole too long 
 applied has a congestive and solvent or softening influence, which 
 may be counteracted by the positive. After the negative pole has 
 stimulated the Cord and its circulation sufficiently, the positive pole 
 on the spine may be used to send some of the accumulated energy 
 into the limbs. In stimulating the spine with the negative pole it 
 is not necessary that the positive pole should be placed on the 
 limbs ; on the contrary a better effect may often be produced by 
 placing the positive pole on the opposite anterior surfaces of the 
 body — as a backward-going curreut is always tonic and invig- 
 orating. The upward current developes the spinal cord at the 
 expense of the limbs. As a general method, I would recommend 
 a current from the frontal surfaces of the trunk to the spine, 
 followed by alternating Galvanic currents between the spine and 
 the limbs. If the operator has not a commutator, he can change 
 the position of the electrodes, or shift their connections with the 
 battery. A moderate Faradic current between the spine and the 
 limbs is suitable for their invigoration, but not zuhile the -paralytic 
 condition continues, which is benefitted only by the Galvanic cur- 
 rent. Local Faradism upon the muscles helps to stimulate their 
 growth and developement. 
 
THE SPINAL REGION. 99 
 
 24. In treating the various portions of the spinal cord for 
 their constitutional effects, there are six different methods. 
 
 First. Vital manual treatment, by touch and percussion to 
 stimulate, and by dispersive passes with the hand, for removing 
 morbid conditions. Moderate friction with the hand serves also 
 for stimulation. There are some sensitives who are favorably 
 affected by breathing upon the part to be treated. 
 
 Second. Galvanic currents are stimulant by the negative, 
 and sedative, but tonic by the positive pole. 
 
 Third. Faradic currents are strongly stimulant and should 
 be used with moderation either on the spine, or on the spine and 
 the affected organ, or on the muscles, or on the dry skin which 
 hinders the current from passing inwards. The current should be 
 moderated by using large sponges or broad carbon plates or elec- 
 trodes, and very few cells when the electrodes are near together. 
 
 Fourth. Mechanical treatment may be used by dry cupping 
 to remove irritation and pain — by hot water for a very short time, 
 for its sedative and soothing effects — by cold water or ice for a 
 similar purpose, which must be continued for a longer time to pre- 
 vent reaction. The rubber bag of hot water or of ice is a very 
 valuable application. 
 
 Fifth. Stimulant and tonic plasters are a valuable adjunct in 
 spinal treatment, and may be made more efficient by combining 
 them with suitable remedies or by applying the remedies on the 
 spine and covering them with the plaster. The California Laurel, 
 a new remedy, is one of the most efficient of all agents for restor- 
 ing spinal energy, especially in paralytic conditions. Scutellaria 
 combines with its soothing properties, a restorative influence on 
 the lower half of the spine. Almost any medicine may be applied 
 on the spine in the form of an ointment. 
 
 Sixth Counter irritation on the spine, when obstinate chronic 
 difficulties resist all other measures is effected by mustard plasters, 
 cantharides, ammonia and concentrated acetic acid — also by 
 moxa and the momentary application of the hot metallic button, 
 heated to the temperature of boiling water, for the removal of pain. 
 One of the most powerful of all counter-irritants, for the removal 
 
IOO THE SPINAL REGION. 
 
 of morbid conditions is the compound tar-plaster, or irritating 
 plaster of the Eclectic Dispensatory ; its effect is slow and very 
 unpleasant, but efficient. 
 
 25. Paralysis due to the brain affects that side of the body 
 which is opposite the cerebral hemisphere that is affected. Hence 
 it requires treatment on the brain where the cause (softening or hem- 
 orrhage) is located. Treated by the hand it requires a strong 
 operator, arid he should stimulate the cephalic regions on the spine 
 and under the axilla, also the superior posterior or hygienic region 
 of the head, using at the same time dispersive upward passes from 
 the cheeks and under jaw to the crown of the head. Downward 
 manipulations on the back of the neck and along the jugular veins 
 will also be beneficial. The site of the hemorrhage will proba- 
 bly be at the base of the middle lobe, near the upper frontal line 
 of the ear. Hence dispersive downward passes on that region 
 will tend to promote absorption and check any irritation or inflam- 
 mation. Manual treatment is safe, and after a week from the 
 attack a mild Galvanic current through large carbon electrodes or 
 sponges might be passed through the affected hemisphere to the 
 opposite hand or shoulder blade, or the cephalic region of the 
 spine, to disperse morbid conditions. Faradism should not be used 
 in such cases. The hand should be applied to the occipital base, 
 where it covers the cerebellum, and to the hygienic region at the 
 same time, but we should avoid exciting any part of the regions 
 anterior to the ears. Treatment of the spine in these cases, by 
 manipulation and percussion is a beneficial auxiliary to the brain 
 treatment. Nervauric and Galvanic treatment are appropriate in 
 all cases of paralysis, and the best results are produced when the 
 operator administers the positive current through his own hands, 
 thus combining the nervauric and Galvanic powers. 
 
CHAPTER V. 
 
 RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY IN ITS 
 DIFFERENT REGIONS. 
 
 Division of the brain by the vertical and horizontal line. Rational illustration. 
 Plan of the human constitution, front and back, above and below the ven- 
 tricles. Fundamental law of direction. Action of basilar organs. Their 
 effect on the body. Coronal organs antagonistic to the basilar. Effects of 
 each. How the paralysis of either becomes fatal. Anterior and posterior 
 basilar organs. Seats of vital force at the base of the brain. The anterior 
 basilar region and its subdivisions. The gastric region. The love of stim- 
 ulus, effect of its developement. How to control intemperance. Medical rem- 
 edies. The moral and religious cure. Effects of malaria and of animal food. 
 Treatment of the digestive organs through the brain. General character of 
 the antero-basilar region. Calorification, how to excite it,' — how to protect 
 it. Effect of its overaction. The respiratory region. Signs of pulmonic dis- 
 ease in the mouth. Region of Sensibility. Its confirmation by Ferrier. 
 The organ of Language. Heating and cooling the temples. Region of 
 Somnolence and its mental phenomena. Anterior coronal region. Tempo- 
 ral reo-ion. 
 
 The brain may be divided by a vertical line through the ear 
 and a horizontal line running back from the middle of the forehead. 
 
 The vertical line separates the occipital from the frontal half, 
 leaving the impelling forces in the occipital half, which consti- 
 tute physical and moral power, by which we succeed and 
 conquer, while the frontal half contains the physical, moral and 
 intellectual sensibilities, which yield to the mental influence of 
 others, and the influence of physical objects, obstacles and injuries. 
 The -predominance of the frontal, results in physical and moral 
 weakness, amiability and refinement, without power to resist dis- 
 ease, exposure or hostility. The occipital makes the positive, and 
 the frontal the negative character — one the leader, the other the 
 follower. The occipital character was illustrated in the crania and 
 martial career of the New Zealanders (an equal match for European 
 
102 RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY. 
 
 troops) and the frontal in the gentle, harmless Peruvians — vic- 
 tims of Spanish slaughter. The New Zealand crania are as 
 remarkable for occipital developement as the Peruvians are for 
 occipital deficiency and frontal predominance. 
 
 The general plan of the human constitution places power in 
 the rear and sensibility in front. The senses are exercised in 
 front, and the maximum degree of sensibility is at the epigastrium 
 where a severe blow may give a fatal shock. The skin in front is 
 more sensitive than at the back, and the muscles in front respond 
 more readily to electrical excitement. The muscles of the face 
 and front of the neck are very sensitive to electric excitement ; 
 the muscles of the back are relatively much less sensitive, and the 
 muscles of the posterior aspect of the upper and lower limbs are 
 less sensitive than those of the anterior and inner aspect. Beard 
 and Rockwell say of the head, " in health the head is very sensi- 
 tive, both to Galvanization and to Faradization in all parts except 
 the posterior. In health the spine is but little sensitive to 
 the current." 
 
 The horizontal line divides the regions of the brain (below the 
 great ventricles) which are in close communication with the body, 
 by the ramifications of the ascending fibres of the spinal cord, out- 
 spread in the crura, thalami, striata and cerebellum) from the 
 regions above the ventricles, which are not in close communication 
 with the body, but are directly connected with each other, and 
 unitized by the great commissure, the corpus callosum, which 
 connects the right and left halves or hemispheres. 
 
 The fundamental law of cerebral action (which will be fully 
 developed in the volume devoted to Pathognomy) is that all organs 
 act in accordance with their line of direction. The basilar organs 
 (below the ventricles) act upon the body, impelling all its vital 
 energies and voluntary actions, and by this action they expend the 
 cerebral energies, producing exhausting and destructive effects. 
 Hence their tendency -per se is not healthy and beneficial in a 
 physiological sense, while morally they produce the unbridled 
 sensuality, selfishness and restless violence which, in control, are 
 criminal and degrading. Their influence is beneficial only when 
 
RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY. IO3 
 
 acting harmoniously in conjunction with the higher power. The 
 passions and appetites are essential in their subordinate places, but 
 fatal as rulers, being alike ruinous by their exhaustive violence, 
 their sensual excess, their incessant agitation and their hostile rela- 
 tions to our fellow-beings and to all supernal influences. 
 
 Nevertheless, the basilar organs have been regarded as the 
 seat of animal life, and surgeons have found injuries of the brain 
 more fatal in proportion as they are located further back from the 
 forehead to the base of the occiput. The reason of this is that the 
 basilar organs are the organs of manifestation of soul life in the 
 body, without which all power of manifesting life and volition 
 would be lost. The muscles would cease to contract, the heart to 
 beat, the lungs to respire. The tendency of the coronal organs 
 -per se is to withdraw life from the body to the spirit, the immediate 
 effect being self-control and tranquillity, and ultimate effect, in 
 abnormal excess, trance and death of the bodv. 
 
 Injuries to the basilar organs are fatal because they sever the 
 connection of soul and body by depriving the body of that influx 
 of energy which comes from the brain, thus suspending every 
 physiological process. The suspension of digestion terminates life 
 in a few weeks by taking away the material necessary to the blood 
 and the structure of the organs, — the suspension of circulation ter- 
 minates it in a few hours, or perhaps in a few minutes, by 
 suspending the influence of oxygen ; and the suspension of 
 respiration terminates life in a few minutes. 
 
 I The isolation, paralysis or destruction of the basilar forces 
 suspends all these processes, and thus arrests life in the body, but 
 leaves it perfect in the soul, as it separates from the body. 
 
 Thus the action of either the coronal or the basilar region of 
 the brain alone, while the opposite region is more or less para- 
 lyzed, is fatal. The loss or exhaustion of the upper region of the 
 brain leaves the animal forces, passions and sensibilities in riotous 
 excess, without sustaining power, resulting in disease, exhaustion, 
 insanity and death. The loss or exhaustion of the basilar region 
 while the upper region is active, leaves the soul in full develope- 
 
104 RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY. 
 
 ment, but unable to act upon and vitalize the body, the death of 
 which must follow. 
 
 The cultivation of both coronal and basilar regions is therefore 
 necessary, and as the physician is mainly occupied in restoring the 
 bodily organs which have lost their vigor or their texture, he is 
 required to sustain the higher organs, which are the source of 
 brain power, and also to invigorate the basilar organs. The latter 
 is a large part of the duty of the nervauric healer, and he is 
 frequently required to place his hands on base of the brain behind 
 the ears, to supply the amount of vital power which the enfeebled 
 brain has ceased to yield. In doing this a correct knowledge of 
 cerebral organology is highly important. 
 
 The basilar region, like the coronal, is divided by the vertical 
 line through the ears into anterior and posterior regions — the 
 posterior being the region of vigor and the anterior of sensitive 
 impressibility. Hence the application of the hands to the base is 
 chiefly made on the posterior region. This produces an increase 
 of life, strength, circulation and nutrition throughout the person. 
 The comfortable warmth, the increased strength and the gradual 
 improvement of every function make this a very agreeable oper- 
 ation to the patient. In those who are extremely impressible, the 
 basilar excitement may go too far and stimulate restlessness, or the 
 violent passions, but this seldom occurs with patients, and is coun- 
 acted by the operator's presence and the diffusive influence of his 
 vitality. The posterior basilar cooperate with the posterior 
 superior organs, and the anterior basilar with the anterior superior 
 organs of the amiable sentiments. Hence the amiable sentiments 
 tend to sensitive weakness and the heroic impulses to violence. 
 
 The vital force sustaining the muscular system is specifically 
 reached at the organ of vital force, at the base of the skull, half 
 way between the mastoid processes (just behind the ears) and the 
 median line. On the median line in the depression extending two 
 inches below the occipital knob, we stimulate a vitality which has 
 more influence on the nervous than the muscular system, which 
 invigorates the senses and the sexual system, and is especially ben- 
 eficial to the eyes. To apply the fingers of one hand at this spot, 
 
RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY. IO5 
 
 and the fingers of the other across the brow immediately over the 
 eyes, overcomes weakness of the eyes and resists their diseases. 
 (The reader will understand of course that such remarks apply to 
 the impressible temperament.) 
 
 I do not propose to give a full statement of the physiological 
 organology of the brain at present, but merely to give certain 
 localities easily learned, and often used in nervauric treatment, 
 through the head. 
 
 The anterior basilar region (antagonistic to the upper occipital) 
 has many localities that should be understood. Immediately before 
 the cavity of the ear is the region of the gastric appetites (marked 
 on the phrenological busts as the organ of Alimentiveness, and 
 erroneously extended above the zygoma or cheek bone) corres- 
 ponding to the place where the upper end of the jaw bone works 
 in its glenoid cavity. The stimulation of this locality excites a 
 feeling of hunger which becomes at length debilitating if not satis- 
 fied, but its stimulation, when the stomach is occupied by undi- 
 gested food, relieves the oppression more than a dose of pepsin, 
 and even relieves flatulence. We sometimes hear the effect in a 
 few moments. In my early experiments in 1841, the subject, 
 Mr. V., was made hungry enough to begin eating a tailow candle. 
 
 The intensity of hunger, however, is not always proportional 
 to the desire or demand for food. The demand is sometimes eager 
 when the depressing effect of hunger is not felt, and the depressing 
 effect is sometimes great, when the attraction or impulse to take 
 food is small. Hence if we would invigorate the stomach most 
 effectively, it may be necessary to stimulate the posterior basilar 
 region also, which gives the impulses and desires. 
 
 The posterior portion of the Gastric or Alimentive organ, 
 immediately at the cavity of the ear, is the portion which makes 
 the drunkard, when it controls, and which originates the craving 
 for stimulants in common use, such as tea and coffee, mustard 
 spices, etc. When I stimulate my patients in this region they 
 desire a stimulus stronger in proportion to the excitement, until 
 even a delicate lady of temperate habits will delight in the strong- 
 est brandy or whiskey. The depressing influence of this organ 
 
106 RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY. 
 
 is counterbalanced by the stimulus taken, which restores equili- 
 brium and does not intoxicate unless it exceeds the natural demand. 
 Hence old topers show no intoxication after taking their half pint 
 of alcoholic liquids, for the same reason that the man depressed 
 by the bite of a rattlesnake shows no stimulation after taking a pint 
 of whiskey. But persons in whom this organ is small, or who are 
 ruled by a great preponderance of the coronal region are easily 
 intoxicated, and this class are most rapidly destroyed by intemper- 
 ance. When one is already under the influence of alcoholic liq- 
 uids, the organ of Love of Stimulus should be excited to promote 
 sobriety, by counteracting the intoxication, for the same reason 
 that we excite the gastric organ when overloaded with food. 
 
 To counteract the habit of intemperance, the opposite region 
 of the brain, which is a region of temperance, cheerfulness and 
 fortitude should be stimulated. In the impressible subject this may 
 be done by the hand, and the stimulus of this region destroys the 
 appetite for alcoholic stimulation. If this be done by any method 
 which effectually rouses the higher moral sentiments, intemperance 
 will be conquered, and this has been done extensively in the ine- 
 briate asylums of New York and Philadelphia, which rely upon 
 religious influence. 
 
 Tonic medicines necessarily overcome this depression and 
 rouse the moral and physical energies, taking away the appe- 
 tite which originates the desire. Hydrastis is one of the most 
 efficient and wholesome tonics for this purpose, and when I recom- 
 mended it thirty-five years ago, I heard favorable reports of its 
 effects from my pupils. Quassia has also been successfully used, 
 — so have the sulphate of chincona, strychnia and some prepara- 
 tions of gold, all of which are powerful tonics. Berberis vulgaris 
 (the barberry) is also an excellent tonic for this purpose and very 
 wholesome. 
 
 As the drunkard's thirst is dependent on the basilar region, 
 and controlled by the coronal, it seldom appears among women, 
 and it is very effectively resisted by religious influence. The restora- 
 tion of drunkards in religious asylums in New York and 
 Philadelphia has been marvelous, and as intemperance is associa- 
 
RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY. I07 
 
 ted with the basilar organs, its effective conquest can be made only 
 by cultivating the moral nature. As long as men indulge the 
 violent and selfish passions they will have the corresponding 
 appetites. Moral education alone can abolish intemperance. A 
 healthful atmosphere contributes to temperance as a malarious one 
 contributes to intemperence. Animal food which stimulates the 
 base of the brain favors intemperance, while a vegetarian diet, and 
 especially the use of fruit, has the opposite effect. 
 
 The stomach and bowels may be treated through the brain, the 
 gastric and abdominal tract being located along the course of the 
 lower jaw — i. e., we reach the organs through this external 
 locality. But in overcoming dyspepsia, constipation, etc., I prefer 
 the treatment on the body according to the principles of Sarcognomy, 
 although the head treatment is highly beneficial when the 
 impressibility is marked. 
 
 The general character of the antero-basilar region, as already 
 stated, is sensibility to impressions or excitements, and a tendency 
 to nervous expenditure of vital force. This sensitive excitability is 
 antagonistic to the vital power, and renders us so susceptible of 
 painful, exhausting, overpowering impressions as to become the 
 great inlet of disease. Extreme sensibility cannot exist without 
 extreme liability to injury. Hence the anterior inferior region is 
 the region of morbid capacities, and requires to be overbalanced by 
 the occipital half of the brain, to make - a strong and hardy 
 
 constitution. 
 
 « 
 
 But this region is not necessarily morbid. It gives immense 
 capacity for enjoyment by the physical and mental sensibilities and 
 if no injurious impression is made, its action is healthful, though 
 sensual and relaxing ; but no one can pass through life without 
 encountering many injurious influences, physical and moral, and 
 realizing his capacities for disorder of body and mind. Irregular- 
 ities of climate, exposure, malaria, unsuitable food, excess or 
 privation, anxiety, anger, disappointment, etc., are inevitable, and 
 can be overcome only by the occipital energies. Hence we per- 
 ceive that the habitual indulgence in luxury and sensual pleasure 
 undermines the constitution and lays the foundation of disease. 
 
Io8 RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY. 
 
 The morbid tendency of the antero-basilar region culminates 
 at the anterior end of the middle lobe — against the sphenoid 
 bone, behind the malar bone which gives prominence to the cheeks 
 below and behind the eyes. This is the locality of that irritable 
 sensibility which is easily injured, and gives the greatest liability 
 to disease ; and as its excessive action results in disease, it is 
 marked "Disease" and its stimulation to any great extent is debili- 
 tating and injurious. Hence the bracing effect of the cool breeze 
 striking the face, and of manipulations in which the fingers pass 
 rapidly and lightly backward and upward over this region toward 
 the crown of the head — the method generally adopted in relieving 
 debilitated and oppressed conditions. Passes made in the opposite 
 direction are quieting, relaxing, debilitating and somwhat soporific 
 — sponging the cheeks and temples with warm or hot water has a 
 beneficial effect in feverish, excitable, nervous or depressed 
 conditions. 
 
 There is a lower grade of vitality in structures adjacent to the 
 sensitive anterior base of the middle lobe and the corresponding 
 location of the body, the hypochondria especially. Hence the 
 diaphragm and the tongue are the first muscles after death to lose 
 their electric contractility and next come the muscles of the face. 
 For the same reason diseases in the throat, such as diphtheria, have 
 a very prostrating influence over the whole constitution. 
 
 The region of the anterior base which we reach below the 
 jaws has the same relation to the mental as that at the cheek-bones 
 to the physical health. It gives that degree of excitability which 
 is easily exhausted and easily excites to phrenzy. 
 
 Hence it produces liabilities to melancholy, idiocy and mania, 
 the excitement running beyond the control of the will, and becoming 
 injurious to the brain and the mind. The idiotic tendency is 
 located anteriorly, the violent posteriorly, and the melancholic 
 superiorly, and on the* jaw. The position of the insane region is in 
 the interior portion of the base of the brain, near the median line. 
 
 The location of the insane and morbid tendencies at the base 
 of the middle lobe is probably the reason that the morbid conditions 
 
RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY. IOQ 
 
 of the brain substance are more frequently found there than 
 in any other part. 
 
 A temporary dementia or mania is easily produced in impres- 
 sible subjects, by stimulating the insane region. Condftions of 
 mental depression and disorder are relieved by dispersive manipu- 
 lations, upward and backward, over this region, or downward to 
 the shoulders. The downward manipulation is effective in clear- 
 ing the frontal brain. The brain being supplied by two great 
 arteries and veins, the carotids and jugulars, at the side of the neck 
 and the vertebral arteries and veins at the back, its circulation is 
 promptly affected by downward manipulations on the side and 
 back of the neck. 
 
 Hence I usually begin the treatment of headache by down- 
 ward manipulations on the back of the neck, followed by similar 
 manipulations on the side, and by dispersive passes, generally back- 
 ward, on the spot where the pain is located. 
 
 The upper posterior region including the crown of the head, 
 extending from right to the left posterior angle of the parietal bone, 
 (marked on the old phrenological busts as Cautiousness) is the 
 region antagonistic to disease and insanity, where the application 
 of the hand produces the most beneficial and restorative effects on 
 body and mind. 
 
 Through the chin we operate on the medulla oblongata and 
 stimulate the production of heat. Hence this locality is marked 
 Calorification. 
 
 We know by Chossat's experiments in vivisection, that the 
 production of heat in the body depends upon the transmission of 
 innervation, downwards from the brain, through the spinal cord to 
 the ganglionic nerves of the abdomen. 
 
 When we place one hand around the chin, and the other 
 around the occipital base, the circulation and evolution of heat, are 
 at once increased and directed downwards. Thus we warm the 
 lower limbs and break up chills. 
 
 The calorific power being thus located, enables us to under- 
 stand whv a little woollen clothing around the chin and neck is 
 more protective to our warmth than five times the amount else- 
 
IIO RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY". 
 
 where. When this region is left unprotected and cold penetrates 
 the base of the brain, the power of resistance is thus overcome 
 and sleep follows which ends in death.. Calorification is one of 
 the exciting and wakeful faculties. Hence the cold weather which 
 stimulates our heat-forming power gives greater clearness and 
 wakeful energy to the mind, and hot weather, which diminishes 
 calorification, promotes drowsiness. The hottest part of the day 
 is given to the siesta in warm climates. For the same reason, 
 whenever intense cold penetrates the base of the brain and dimin- 
 ishes calorification, the drowsy influence is felt, which is a danger- 
 ous condition as it shows that the power of resistance to cold is 
 disappearing. 
 
 The over action of Calorification in mental ardor, excitement 
 and fever is exhausting, like that of all other antero-basilar organs, 
 whenever it is more than sufficient to counteract the effects of 
 external cold, and exalts the temperature of the body. For the 
 same reason hot climates produce a more excitable and less ener- 
 getic or enduring constitution, the effect of heat being to stimulate 
 the anterior sensitive region of the brain, developing more delicacy 
 and refinement than strength. 
 
 If the hand, in covering the chin, extends up and around the 
 mouth the effect is seen in increased respiration. 
 
 The external indications of the respiratory tract are around the 
 mouth and nose, through which respiration occurs. Prominence 
 of this region is a sign of greater respiratory power. The portion 
 just below the mouth is indicative of deep respiration and is asso- 
 ciated with greater force of will and violence in coughing. The 
 sympathy of the lungs with this region is shown by many facts — 
 such as the brick-red line along the front teeth and gums which is 
 developed in pneumonia, and the facility with which some persons 
 catch cold, after shaving around the mouth. I have been told by 
 some that they wear their beards rather than shave, for the sake 
 of this protection. 
 
 The application of the hands on the respiratory region stimu- 
 lates the lungs and the respiratory processes. Applied just below 
 
RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY. Ill 
 
 the mouth they excite depth of respiration. The depth of respira- 
 tion is usually increased in exciting calorification. 
 
 The antero-basilar region also contains, just above Disease, 
 the organ of Sensibility, which gives power of sensation to the 
 opposite side of the body, according to the law of decussation 
 which governs the brain in its connection with the body. 
 
 The region of Sensibility connects anteriorly with the organ 
 of Language discovered by Dr. Gall and confirmed by the obser- 
 vations of pathologists, who neglected his discovery until confirmed 
 by numerous dissections of morbid brains. 
 
 My own discovery of the organ of Sensibility forty-five years 
 ago has been confirmed by the cruel experiment of Dr. Ferrier 
 upon a monkey, in which, by injuring the base of the middle lobe, 
 he destroyed the sense of Feeling on the opposite side. The loca- 
 tion in the monkey, however, appeared to be farther back 
 than in man. 
 
 The close connection of Sensibility and Language in the brain 
 with the source of voluntary muscular action in the corpora 
 striata explains the association of the paralyses of motion, sensi- 
 bility and language — paralytics often losing the power of speech 
 or command of language. 
 
 Dispersive passes upward and backward over the temples not 
 only relieve morbid conditions, but diminish sensitiveness, and 
 tend to remove pain. They are especially beneficial in morbid 
 conditions of the eyes and intolerance of light. Heat and excite- 
 ment accumulated in this region produce a great increase of 
 sensibility and impressibility, and sometimes develope the 
 mesmeric somnambulism. 
 
 The tendency to dreamy, somnolent conditions, somnambulism, 
 somniloquence and clairvoyant trance is connected with the locality 
 about an inch behind the brow, marked Somnolence, by touching 
 which a few minutes in the impressible we cause the quivering and 
 closing of the eyelids which precedes a dreamy sleep or clairvoyant 
 trance. This is a good method of inviting the approach of sleep 
 or of making intellectual experiments on the intellectual powers 
 and sympathies developed in that condition, in which psychometric 
 
112 RELATION OF THE BRAIN TO VITALITY. 
 
 perception and intuition, trance and even clairvoyance may occur. 
 
 In the upper half of the brain, the anterior portion antago- 
 nizes the occipito-basilar region, producing a gentle, harmless, 
 unselfish nature, and moderating the violence of the passions and 
 vehemence of the desires. In nervauric treatment, this region is 
 chiefly useful for soothing purposes, brightening the intellect, ele- 
 vating the sentiments and promoting contentment, or improving 
 the moral nature, and friendly sentiments. 
 
 The lateral portion, along the temporal arch, is the proper 
 location for placing the hands to subdue restlessness, loquacity and 
 sexual impulses. The most posterior portion of the arch, verti- 
 cally above the ear, is the location for resisting insane and hyster- 
 ical conditions — the region marked Sanity. 
 
 There is a remarkable coincidence and similarity between the 
 organs on the median line and those located on a parallel line, 
 beginning at the external angle of the brow, and running along 
 the ridge between the lateral and superior surfaces of the cranium. 
 Hence breadth of the upper surface of the brain compensates for 
 the lack of height. 
 
CHAPTEE VI. 
 
 ZONAL ARRANGEMENT AND THERAPEUTIC 
 TREATMENT OF THE BRAIN. 
 
 Explanation of Zonal Arrangement, with illustrations. Its indications of consti- 
 tutional developement. General law of functions. Vertical Zone of Exci- 
 tability. Treatment on the cephalic region. Treatment of the heart. Of 
 the thoracic region, and of the liver. The gastric and abdominal region, 
 and the Crural. The Morbid Zone explained. Hygienic caution, and 
 curious illustrations. Relation of disease to the brain. Treatment, of the 
 crural region. The sexual region. Treatment of special functions. Health 
 and disease. Sleep and wakefulness. The ideal powers. General vigor. 
 Feverish conditions. Mental soundness. Warmth. Mental discipline. 
 
 The zonal arrangement of the brain is a necessary consequence 
 of the laws of Pathognomy. Our review of the spinal system 
 shows that as the organs of the body occupy successive zones, their 
 controlling centres in the spinal system are necessarily in similar 
 successive order, viz. : the cephalic, pulmonic, cardiac, phrenic, 
 hepatic, gastric, abdominal, pelvic and crural — the lumbar and 
 sacral regions being at the same time abdominal, pelvic and cru- 
 ral, as the cephalic region is at the same time cephalic, brachial and 
 partly thoracic — the internal visceral organs being associated with 
 the external muscular, in the spinal functions, and a similar 
 arrangement being apparent in the brain — the visceral and the 
 energetic faculties being on the same plane or in the same zone — 
 as in the spinal column, they occupy the same segments. 
 
 The arrangement is so clearly exhibited on the map that we 
 need only to grow familiar with the locations to understand their 
 treatment, guided by certain general principles. 
 
 Each cerebral zone indicated on the map, tends to direct the 
 vital forces according to its name and gives prominence to the 
 
114 ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. 
 
 region it represents. This is its direct physiological influence, 
 on the constitution. 
 
 But aside from this direct physiological influence, each cere- 
 bral locality has its psychic function, and this psychic function 
 compels the same physiological action which is promoted by its 
 direct influence ; and this wonderful combination of psychic and 
 physiological influences, by a perfect, but simple and intelligible 
 law, is one of the grandest illustrations of divine wisdom. 
 
 To illustrate this remark, all the functions of the organs in the 
 cephalic zone are of a cephalic tendency. They increase the 
 vitality and power of the brain by the exercise of their functions, 
 such as Spirituality, Reverence, Sublimity, Tranquility, Sanity, 
 Dignity, Firmness, Moral Ambition and the moral sentiments of 
 the coronal region. In the thoracic zone we have organs of a more 
 active character which produce more excitement and consequent 
 expansion of lungs, and are not content with tranquil study. It 
 includes the more active forms of Ambition, Love of power, and 
 Social impulses,"Self reliance, Coolness, Caution, Sublimity, Rever- 
 ence and Inspiration. In the cardiac zone we have Excitability, 
 Apprehension, Social Impulse, Business Energy and Self- 
 reliant Ambition. In the Phrenic, Hepatic and Gastric zone, are 
 Irritability, Combative Violence, Jealousy, Avarice, Dogmatism, 
 and Arrogance, the passionate impulses which have made the mental 
 portrait of the bilious temperament. In the Gastric and Abdomi- 
 nal zones we have the selfish, restless, violent and gloomy passions 
 which stimulate the appetites and promote intemperate indulgence 
 while they rouse all the muscular energy of the lower limbs. 
 Thus do the psychic faculties concur with the physiological organs 
 they stimulate through the brain. The unity and harmony of the 
 human constitution are no where more clearly perceived than 
 when we study the psychic powers in all their phenomena, and 
 trace their effects on the constitution. But this is a vast study, 
 which can be illustrated only in the volume of Anthropology. 
 (The volume on this subject was issued in 1854, and, a greatly 
 improved edition will be issued within the next two years.) 
 
 To comprehend the zonal arrangements for therapeutic pur- 
 
ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE P.RAlN. Il^ 
 
 poses, we need only apply the general laws of cerebral science 
 — understanding that each zone uses and stimulates its own region 
 of the body. We may examine the developement of the head, to 
 see what organs predominate in the constitution or which are 
 deficient. Thus if the head be very broad and high at the cepha- 
 lic zone and very small in the crural, we know that animal life and 
 muscular energies are below par, and that the predominate action 
 of the brain in its upper and anterior regions diminishes still, more 
 the basilar energy. Hence there is probably a failure in the mus- 
 cular energy, and in the nutrition. The body is apt to be imper- 
 fectly developed, and the physical powers weak. On the contrary, 
 when the crural region is large, we have a robust physical devel- 
 opement, muscular energy, and in some cases stoutness or corpu- 
 lence. If the cephalic region be proportionally small or imperfectly 
 developed — there is less mental and moral energy, and a greater 
 tendency to exhaustion of the nervous system and all forms of 
 nervous disorder. 
 
 If the Gastric and Abdominal zones are defective in develope- 
 ment, there will probably be great feebleness or inactivity in the 
 digestive organs — with appetites feeble and easily controlled. 
 
 If there be great narrowness or lack of developement at the 
 Hepatic zone, the liver will be found inactive, and liver diseases 
 are a probable consequence. 
 
 If the cardiac zone be largely developed we shall have a 
 strong circulation with the consequent excitability and energy of 
 temperament and a greater passional energy than is desirable, which 
 will be absent when the cardiac zone is moderate. 
 
 If the pulmonic zone be large it will give the temperament a 
 brightness and activity less restless and turbulent than that which 
 comes from the lower organs, but less calm and self controlled 
 than the cephalic temperament. The pulmonic and cardiac zones 
 are mingled in the thoracic zone, of which the upper part is 
 properly pulmonic, and the lower is cardiac and pulmonic, 
 relating to the lower part of the chest. 
 
 These remarks are not sufficient to guide one in a physiologi- 
 
Il6 ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. 
 
 cal examination which requires a knowledge of all the organs, but 
 will serve to explain the significance of the zones. 
 
 The general law of the brain is that organs have a more 
 refined, delicate, intellectual character as they approach the front, 
 and a more energetic, reactive character toward the back — also 
 that they have a more refined, lovely, pleasing, spiritual character 
 as they ascend, and a more gross, selfish, repulsive and violent 
 character as they descend. 
 
 Hence, when we look at the zones, we find the energy of each 
 organ indicated by the posterior, and the delicacy by the anterior 
 part of the zone ; while on the side of the head, between the front 
 and back, there is an excitability which gives activity without per- 
 manent power, and in front there is a capacity for manifestation 
 that only exhausts, and requires to be controlled by the repose of 
 sleep. 
 
 Looking along the sidehead, from the ear up, we easily recog- 
 nize the excitable activity of each organ, but we must look further 
 back for its vital* force. Thus along the whole side of the head 
 and body, we have a longitudinal and vertical segment of excita- 
 bility for all the organs, intermediate between the exhaustive deli- 
 cacy of the front, and the enduring power of the back, upon which 
 latter, as already stated, the curative processes of nervauric heal- 
 ing are chiefly effective, and to which Galvanic currents carry the 
 energy that developes life and strength ; as has been shown by 
 Onimus and Legros. 
 
 There is so little physiological utility -for the healer in the ante- 
 rior regions, that I present the zonal arrangement of the head only 
 to the line of activity or excitability, without carrying forward the 
 zones to the regions of exhaustion, of which the most complete 
 and pernicious is at the anterior end of the middle lobe, at which 
 we locate the organ of Disease. 
 
 When the nervauric physician would treat the brain he applies 
 his hands upon each of these zones to invigorate corresponding 
 organs, as he might, if he had control of circumstances, invigo- 
 rate them by the exercise of the organs in the natural way — for 
 example, he might invigorate the heart, not by stimulating with 
 
ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. 1 1 7 
 
 the hands the cardiac region of physical courage, but by 
 placing the patient in a position which would require the exercise 
 of physical courage. He might invigorate the refined action of 
 brain, not by placing his hands on the region of Reverence and 
 Sublimity, but by placing him in grand scenery or cathedral 
 scenes which would rouse those faculties. 
 
 I present the zonal treatment of the constitution through the 
 brain, as an important adju'nct to healing on the body, but not as 
 a complete statement of cephalic healing, which requires minute 
 knowledge of the cerebral organs, nor as an exact exposition of 
 Anthropology. 
 
 Proceeding upon the proposition that energy is a posterior 
 quality — a quality of the occiput, the healer would place his 
 hands on the anterior part of the cephalic zone, above and a trifle 
 in front of the ear, when he wishes to give a stimulus to cerebral 
 activity without calling forth its strongest capacity. The calm, 
 emotional thought thus elicited at Reverence, Sublimity and Tran- 
 quility, is a pleasant condition, but is not the strongest display of 
 brain power. Moving his hands further back, he elicits the influ- 
 ence of Sanity, which is closely analogous to that of Firmness. 
 This faculty gives a strength of mind and tenacity of brain, stabil- 
 ity of will and power of concentration which resist all the exciting, 
 depressing and deranging influences from which insanity comes. 
 Magnanimity, a little further back, gives still greater positive 
 strength of mind, and from these two organs across to the median 
 line we find still more active sources of cerebral power in Cheerful- 
 ness. Energ}^, Heroism, Firmness, Sense of Honor, Approbative- 
 ness, Oratory, Ambition, Dignity and Self-Reliance or Self-Confi- 
 dence. 
 
 Under the influence of these organs he is not a passive, calm 
 thinker or listener, but feels a disposition and has the power to 
 impress others with his own thoughts, and thinks with an energy 
 and brilliance which is impressive. 
 
 As in the cephalic zone, so in each zone activity is frontal and 
 power occipital. Each organ of the body may be roused by its 
 cerebral zone ; and hence the entire occipital region furnishes a 
 
Il8 ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. 
 
 rousing energy for the whole person, whether stimulated by the 
 nervauric hand, or by the natural circumstances that rouse our 
 energy, ambition, courage, passions and appetites. 
 
 When the healer is familiar with the zones, he has a simple 
 task in cerebral treatment to give the organs excitement or stimu- 
 lation, if torpid, through the lateral section, the vertical zone of 
 excitability, and to reinforce them, if lacking in power, by the 
 occipital portion of their zone. 
 
 The heart, for example, may be roused by the excitability in 
 the vertical zone, just in front of the ear (Cardiac zone) ; but it is 
 very seldom indeed that any such excitement is desirable. The 
 increased rapidity and force of its action produced in that way is 
 like that produced by alarming or exciting scenes or dangers, and 
 would, as a general rule, be quite exhausting, if carried far. But 
 the increased vigor of action produced in the occipital part of the 
 zone by Adhesiveness, Combativeness and Love of Power is not of 
 that exhausting character, and, if not carried to excess, would be 
 very beneficial 4n a debilitated state of the heart, which is very 
 common — a state of dilation in which it is expanded and its mus- 
 cular coat thinned (especially on the right side), — a condition 
 especially frequent among females, and recognized by the 
 sonorous action of the heart — its beats being heard throughout 
 the chest and distinctly recognized at the back.^ 
 
 The best locality for cardiac stimulation is not Combativeness, 
 
 which is too exciting or forcible, and extends below r the cardiac 
 
 zone proper, but posterior to Adhesiveness in the organ of Business 
 
 Energy, which may be located by a line running back horizontally 
 
 from the centre of the forehead and stopping two inches short of 
 
 the median line of the occiput. This corresponds with the 
 
 cardiac location on the spinal column, and if the two localities 
 
 were simultaneously excited the effect would be enhanced.* 
 
 The region of cardiac excitability sometimes needs tranquilizing, 
 
 and its antagonist is the region of Firmness, which gives stability 
 
 * It was by these organs that I controlled the pulse of Dr. Lane before 
 a committee of Boston physicians in 1*43. and produced an enfeebled 
 action of the heart similar to a low stage of fever, as described by Dr. Flint and 
 reported by Dr. Bowditch. 
 
ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. II9 
 
 and tranquil regularity. The organ of Health gives the same sta- 
 bility, with a little more of agreeable activity. These localities 
 should be firmly fixed in the mind of the physician — Firmness 
 on the median line vertically above the cavity of the ear, and run- 
 ning back about two inches to the organ of Dignity : Health, par- 
 allel to Dignity, midway between the median line and temporal 
 arch (which forms the ridge between the lateral and superior sur- 
 faces of the head). 
 
 The organ of Calorification, reached through the chin, coop- 
 erates with that of cardiac excitability, and adds to the rapidity of 
 the heart's action (which is illustrated in fever), and consequently 
 the organ of Coolness, in the thoracic zone (on the middle of 
 the sidehead immediately behind a vertical line from the posterior 
 portion of the ear) is one of soothing and strengthening influences 
 for the heart. In a case of pericarditis, or any inflammatory 
 affection of the heart, we need the influences of Firmness, Health 
 and Coolness, with dispersive passes by the hands or the sponge 
 of warm water (or hot water) on the cheek and temples, passing 
 over Disease and Cardiac Excitability backward and upward.* In 
 angina pectoris we should place our hand on the middle of the 
 dorsal region, and with the other make dispersive passes upward 
 and backward over the heart, and especially over the region of 
 Cardiac excitability on the body, below and behind the nipple. 
 (See plate.) 
 
 The Thoracic region at the temples produces a nervous and 
 sanguineous determination to the lungs, prompting expansion 
 by the ribs, or costal inspiration. This inspiration, as a physical 
 act, promotes spiritual inspiration, which will be found in those 
 who have a full developement along the line from pulmonic excita- 
 bility to the external angle of the brow. 
 
 * The first important application of my discoveries to the treatment of 
 a serious case of disease, in 1841, was in the case of a young man, at Louisville, 
 dangerously ill of pericarditis, in whom I had perfect control of the heart, through 
 the brain, and taught his attendants to soothe the action of the heart by sponging 
 with warm water the cardiac region on the side head, which was more effective 
 than any medical treatment that he had received. On his recoverv he ascribed his 
 cure to the treatment I administered and directed, which was entirely through the 
 brain. 
 
120 ZONAL ARRAGEMENT OF THE URA1N. 
 
 In dry, asthmatic or constricted conditions of the lungs this 
 pulmonic excitement may be beneficial, but it would be objection- 
 able in pneumonia, or any inflammatory irritation in the chest, in 
 which we need the invigorating influence of the pulmonic energy 
 at the back part of the pulmonic zone, one and a half or two 
 inches from the median line, where we find the same influence as 
 on the back between the shoulders, four or five inches below the 
 neck, the best locality for the invigoration of the lungs. But all 
 severe irritations or inflammations of the lnngs are best treated by 
 tranquillizing derivation — by stimulating the anterior tibial 
 surface of the leg. 
 
 The Thoracic region on the sidehead assumes a more exciting 
 character as it descends, and rouses the heart and lower portion of 
 the lungs — passing then into the Phrenic zone it rouses the dia- 
 phragm and developes a more extensive and exciting respiration. 
 Hence we ma} 7 say that the entire sidehead below the cephalic 
 zone tends to increase the activity of respiration — the lower portion 
 increasing its depth by action of the diaphragm. 
 
 The liver may be stimulated by applying the fingers on the 
 hepatic region, adjacent to the meatus auditorius (cavity of the 
 ear) ; but in proportion as we extend our application backward on 
 the same level, we give it a greater amount of vital energy. 
 
 The fact that the cerebral organs are the organs of psychic 
 impulses does not modify the truth of this doctrine of therapeutic 
 treatment, for the psychic impulses in each zone are precisely those 
 which affect the physiological organs to which they correspond, 
 and with which they effect their purposes. When we study their 
 functions we perceive that each organ in the cephalic zone requires 
 the use of the brain — that each in the Pulmonic gives greater 
 energy and activity to normal respiration — that each in the 
 Cardiac zone is associated in its action with greater activity of the 
 heart — that each in the Hepatic zone tends to increase the energy 
 of the liver, and that all below the Hepatic zone promote the 
 energy of digestion and consumption of food by their restless 
 impulses and animal force. 
 
 The Gastric and Abdominal region, lying in front of the ear, 
 
ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. 121 
 
 along the jaw bone, is the cerebral source of that activity in the 
 stomach and alimentary canal which creates the exhaustion of hun- 
 ger, and is therefore an important region to treat in cases of inac- 
 tivity or disease of the stomach. A -predominant action in this 
 locality would not be the best thing for gastric health, but in touch- 
 ing this region the vital influence of the operator adds an element 
 of health, and I frequently place the thumbs on Health, while the 
 fingers stimulate the gastric organ. 
 
 The most effective energy for the gastric abdominal region in 
 treating the brain will be given by placing both hands on the 
 Gastric zone, covering the base of the cranium, while the fingers 
 rest upon the Gastric organ just before the ear, or if standing 
 before the patient, to place the thumbs on the Gastric organ, and 
 the hands around the base of the cranium. 
 
 Immediately below the Gastric and Abdominal zone comes 
 the Crural, which we cover with the hands on the neck — in the 
 psychic sense it is a region of turbulence and restless animality — 
 in a physiological sense the stimulation of the lower limbs to action 
 and developement. The demand for food, and the ability to dis- 
 pose of it when swallowed depend mainly upon the posterior part 
 of the Gastric Abdominal zone, and we have an interesting con- 
 firmation of this in an experiment of Dr. Ferrier, in which the 
 desire for food in a monkey was destroyed by an injury of the 
 posterior part of the brain. 
 
 The depressing influence of hunger and of gastric irritations 
 may be diminished by the antagonists of the Gastric organ, which 
 produce a feeling of buoyant energy and fortitude, which destroys 
 the feeling of hunger. The organ of Fortitude, which resists 
 the weakness and depression of hunger, and other gloomy influ- 
 ences, -is in front of the organ of Health, and exterior to the organ 
 of Firmness. This does not produce entire indifference to food or 
 incapacity to enjoy it, but relieves the gnawing and depressing 
 feeling of hunger. To produce indifference to food, it would be 
 necessary to rouse the antagonists of the Gastro-Abdominal region 
 — the emotions of the upper surface of the brain which lies in 
 front of the vertical line. It is quite a familiar fact that love pro- 
 
122 ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. 
 
 duces indifference to food. The greater activity of the superior 
 conditions in women is the cause of their moderate appetites, 
 which do not run into intemperance and gluttony. 
 
 A morbid or irritable zone may be recognized at the junction 
 of the hepatic and gastric zones, each of which partakes largely 
 of morbific capacities. Anteriorly, on the body, the morbific 
 zone presents the epigastric and hypochondriac regions. The 
 hypochondriac is so sensitive to all injurious influences as to 
 become the chief inlet of disease, and is therefore marked as the 
 region of Disease, while the epigastric is a region of extreme sen- 
 sibility. The morbid zone contains the most degenerate blood in 
 the body, the maximum congestive tendency, and the greatest sen- 
 sibility to injury. A blow on this region anteriorly, is the most 
 prostrating and fatal that can be inflicted, and irritations in this 
 region have the most depressing effect on the vital and moral ener- 
 gies. In Claude Bernard's experiments on the stomach of living 
 dogs it was found that the introduction of a little boiling water 
 threw the animal at once into a kind of adynamic state, which was 
 followed by death in three or four hours. The mucous membrane 
 of the stomach was found red and swollen, whilst an abundant 
 exudation of blackish blood had taken place into the cavity of the 
 organ. Like injurious effects, to a greater or less degree, fol- 
 lowed an introduction of other irritants, such as nitrate of silver, 
 or ammonia. " There is no other portion of the body where such 
 prostrating effects could be produced by so small an amount of 
 injury. Entire limbs may be destroyed by inflammation or suppu- 
 ation, and large portions of the lungs may be destroyed by ulcer- 
 ation without fatal consequences. The destruction of life by hot 
 water in the stomach, should warn us against the dangerous effects 
 of continual drugging by harsh remedies, against which nature 
 revolts. Medicines should be made so agreeable in their taste and 
 other properties that they could not offend the stomach or the senses . 
 It is difficult to accept the man as a friend, who insults us at his 
 first approach, or who gives us a painful blow, and it may be as 
 difficult to reconcile the stomach to the offensive agents that we 
 thrust upon it, while it readily yields to the beneficent influence of 
 
ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE DRAIN. 1 23 
 
 mineral waters and of homoeopathic medicines which are inof- 
 fensive. 
 
 Warm clothing around the waist is very debilitating and even 
 prostrating, especially in warm weather, and the cooling of the 
 waist by a wet cloth, or as it is sometimes called, a wet pack, is 
 often very wholesome and bracing. The anterior half of the mor- 
 bid zone is a region from which dispersive passes are very often 
 required and upon which we may often with great benefit apply the 
 positive pole for currents to any part of the posterior surfaces of the 
 body. 
 
 A curious illustration of the character of the morbid zone was 
 furnished in the experiments of Brown Sequard, who found that in 
 dividing one-half of the spinal cord, between the seventh dorsal 
 and third lumbar nerves in the guinea pig, the animal in from 
 three to five weeks became epileptic; also, that on the injured side 
 there was a space one and one-half inches long by pne inch wide, 
 just below the ear, where irritations or pinchings would produce 
 the epileptic fit. This cerebral sympathy corresponds to the prin- 
 ciples of Sarcognomy. 
 
 The experiment of cauterizing the lower lobe of the ear for 
 sciatica, which is said to have been successfully performed in 
 France, is another illustration of the same principle. 
 
 Another illustration of the morbid zone was furnished in vivi- 
 sections to destroy the supra-renal capsules, an operation of no 
 formidable character, but in which the animals would die from 
 injury of the solar plexus, unless great skill were exercised. 
 
 Morbidness or tendency to disease consists in an extreme 
 capacity for fceling and being affected by injurious influences. 
 Hence it can be developed fully only at the frontal regions. Farther 
 back, as reactive energy appears, it assumes the character of 
 irritability and quarrelsome or domineering aggressiveness — a 
 condition morally morbid, which propagates moral and physical 
 disease among its victims. This zone extends along the base of 
 the brain, just over the meatus auditorius (cavity of the ear) and 
 embraces a group of impulses which are discordant and wretched 
 when they predominate, leading to a miserable life.. 
 
124 ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. 
 
 The reader will bear in mind that we do not regard disease as 
 the primitive or normal function of any organ, but as the result of 
 malign impressions on the sensitive and irritable condition, which 
 belongs to certain organs. The morbific faculties are those which 
 are most easily disturbed and which have the least reactive power, 
 and the morbid results occur when their irritation overpowers the 
 sustaining vital energies which belong to the opposite class of fac- 
 ulties. Hence if the morbific faculties predominate in the constitu- 
 tion, morbid effects inevitably occur under the ordinary circum- 
 stances of home life. 
 
 As the Crural region (the source of the energy of the lower 
 limbs) nearly coincides in the spinal cord and in the brain with the 
 Gastro-Abdominal, it follows that active locomotion is an efficient 
 invigorator for the digestive organs, and that the exercise of the 
 cephalic zone giving predominance to the higher organs of the 
 brain would diminish the activity of stomach and bowels which is 
 usually the effect of sedentary, intellectual pursuits. The organs 
 below the diaphragm all require an active life to give them energy, 
 and in nervauric treatment they require the hands to be placed 
 around the basis of the cranium. 
 
 In addition to the Morbid Zone at the waist, which affects the 
 physiological functions directly, there is another at the base of the 
 pelvis which tends strongly to the disorder and prostration of the 
 nervous system in mania, idiocy and paralysis. It corresponds 
 to a cephalic zone at the base of the cranium, the anterior por- 
 tion of which is the region of Insanity. 
 
 When the hands are applied around the neck they are on the 
 crural region and send a stimulation into the lower limbs, giving 
 them warmth and strength, and reinforcing animal life generally. 
 
 Although strictly speaking the organs developing through 
 the neck (or reached through the neck) are those which corres- 
 pond with the lower limbs and rouse their muscular energy they 
 are associated with organs a little higher, as the lower limbs are 
 associated with the lumbar and sacral regions of the spine, the 
 source of their impulses. Hence the base of the occiput, includ- 
 ing Combativeness, should be impressed as well as the cervical 
 
Zonal Arrangement of the brain* 125 
 
 region, when we would make the strongest impression on the lower 
 limbs. 
 
 On the median line, on the level of the crural region, just below 
 the occipital knob, corresponding to the middle region of the cere- 
 bellum and posterior to the medulla oblongata, is the region of Sex- 
 ual Energy, corresponding with the lumbo-sacral junction of the 
 spinal column, which vitalizes the sexual organs, adds much to the 
 general vigor of the constitution and gives a great stimulus to the 
 nervous system, corresponding to the normal effects of sexual 
 developement, and therefore highly important in reanimating im- 
 paired constitutions. I have been especially struck with its value 
 in renovating feeble or diseased eyes. The fingers of one hand 
 being placed in the median fossa just mentioned, and the other in 
 front, on the central organ of vision, just over the centre of the 
 eyeball gives a restorative, brightening influence to the eyes, more 
 effective than any other mode of cerebral treatment. In giving 
 this treatment the optic nerves and their origin in the tubercula 
 quadrigemina (optic lobes) are between the two localities treated. 
 
 The Sexual functions respond to two localities, the cerebellic 
 fossa, already mentioned, a seat of physical energy, and the 
 prominence of the larynx on the front of the neck, which coin- 
 cides with the anterior surface of the spinal cord, near the foramen 
 magnum. The doctrines of Gall, in reference to the cerebellum, 
 were but an approximation to the truth, its sexual functions occu- 
 pying only a small portion on the median line. 
 
 Finally, while I regard the zonal arrangement as valuable, 
 both in a philosophic sense and for therapeutic uses, I do not 
 regard it as at all exempt from the intricate blending and coopera- 
 tion which we find in the spinal region. Each organ has 
 secondary relations or cooperations above and below its own zone, 
 especially when influenced by the action of others. 
 
 Thus, Alimentiveness, in its common action, developing 
 hunger, excites the reckless, combative, domineering energies of 
 its own zone, which demand "bread or blood," and which in 
 carnivorous animals drive them to attack their prey. But when 
 fully satisified it cooperates with the Cheerfulness and Serenity of 
 
126 ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN; 
 
 the moral region , and then acts with Adhesiveness, desiring society 
 and with its physical influence which promotes nourishment and 
 assimilation. Hence the pleasures of the table are best enjoyed 
 socially, and few would desire to be solitary at their meals. 
 
 The region of Adhesiveness on the body is on the line of the 
 intercostal nerves that surround the stomach, and the line of the 
 splanchnic nerves that supply the stomach through the ganglia of 
 the solar plexus. Hence we should expect it to cooperate as it does 
 with the digestive functions. 
 
 Similar remarks may be made of the other zones, but they 
 are not necessary in this brief exposition. 
 
 Special Functions for Cerebral Treatment. 
 
 Health and Disease : — When the fingers are placed on 
 Health it gives a delightful recuperative influence to the whole 
 system, and when passes or gentle frictions are made, upward and 
 backward toward Health, from the region of Disease (at the cheek- 
 bone occupying^the anterior end of the middle lobe, just behind the 
 eyes, it adds materially to the effect. The influence of the organ 
 of Health is heightened by placing the entire hand across the 
 superior posterior region, covering Health and its neighbors. The 
 hygienic region is the posterior part of the cerebral zone of the 
 brain, and a part of the cephalic zone of the body, which illustrates 
 the proposition that health is a high spiritual function depending 
 mainly on the soul and brain. 
 
 Sleep and Wakefulness. — The wakeful faculties are the 
 intellectual, energetic and restless. The centre of wakefulness is 
 the intellectual organ of Consciousness, located in the centre of 
 the forehead. Its antagonist is located on a line running back 
 from it horizontally, about three-fourths of an inch be'hind a verti- 
 cal line corresponding to the back of the ear. This may be called 
 the organ of Sleep, but it is only when excited into absolute 
 predominance over the frontal organ that it manifests the sleepy 
 influence. Its normal influence when we are awake is to invigo- 
 rate the automatic life of the body, and counteract the exhaustive 
 influence of the intellect — also, to restrain its discursiveness and 
 
ZONAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. 127 
 
 confine its action to objects nearer, more easily understood and of 
 more practical value; and when the intellectual organs are fatigued 
 to bring on sleep and sustain the unconscious processes of 
 interior life. 
 
 I have often produced sleep by this organ, and I find it best 
 to use the organ of Somnolence, an inch behind the brow, to facil- 
 itate the process. The region of Somnolence greatly increases 
 the impressibility ; after the fingers rest upon it a few minutes, a 
 calm, dreamy feeling is developed and the eyes wink or close. A 
 dreamy sleep is produced in the very impressible, and sometimes 
 runs into completely unconscious sleep. When the two organs 
 are touched at once, a sound sleep is the usual result, which may 
 be assisted or retarded by other influences. The amiable organs 
 of the upper surface of the brain produce a contented quietness 
 which favors sleep. Patience and Tranquility (see map) assist as 
 Irritability and Turbulence hinder. The most efficient cooperation 
 is the organ of Lethargy, which we reach just above the Larynx 
 (see map), which promotes a dull drowsiness. In removing sleep 
 we disperse from Somnolence, Lethargy and Sleep, upward and 
 backward, touch the organ of Consciousness, the organ of Light 
 (or vision) and any of the energetic organs such as Health, Energy, 
 Ambition and Turbulence. 
 
 The Ideal Powers. — For the display of intellectual and 
 spiritual phenomena, we may excite the Somnolent region to 
 increase impressibility and intuition. By the organ of Spirituality 
 (see map) we may excite the capacity for feeling and perceiving 
 spiritual influences, which may be brought to the mind by holding 
 on the forehead a letter of some deceased friend, or a picture — the 
 psychometric impression from which will bring a consciousness of 
 the present condition of the departed. To give more varied per- 
 ceptions we may touch the region of Clairvoyance, lying at the 
 root of the nose (occupying the internal base of the front lobe). 
 
 General Vigo:?, may be promoted by placing one hand 
 across the region surrounding Health — the superior posterior part 
 of the occiput, and the other around the lower part of the occiput 
 or by placing the fingers upon Health, Vital Force and the sexual 
 region in the fossa, below the occipital knob. 
 
128 ZONAL ARRAtlGEMENT OF THE BRAIN. 
 
 Feverish Conditions may best be treated on the body, but 
 may be assisted by treatment on the head, making dispersive 
 passes from Disease to Health and stimulating the organ of cold- 
 ness, which lies ,on a vertical line corresponding with the posterior 
 margin of the ear, extending two or three inches upward from the 
 level of the top of the ear. 
 
 Mental Soundness. — The region of Sanity is the seat of 
 those energies which resist every form of mental disorder, whether 
 Insanity, Dementia, Melancholia, Monomania, Lethargy, Idiocy, 
 Childishness, Hysteria, Delirium Tremens, Rage, Homicidal 
 Mania, Suicide, or Kleptomania. The insane tendencies are 
 reached under the jaw ; hence passes from the junction of the 
 neck and the jaw toward Sanity would have a good effect. Mel- 
 ancholy has a somewhat higher location (on the lower angle of 
 the jaw) and the special antagonist of Melancholy — the region 
 of Cheerfulness — is situated just above Sanity, being above the 
 parietal ridge and on the superior aspect of the head. The excite- 
 ment of the organ of Cheerfulness produces a delightfully 
 cheering effect, removing all mental depression. The special 
 locations of Idiocy, Childishness, Hysteria, Melancholy and 
 Lethargy are shown on the map. 
 
 Warmth. — The region of warmth in the head is the anterior 
 aspect of the medulla oblongata, and its external surface is at the 
 chin. The hand placed around the chin stimulates Calorification, 
 and the effect is enhanced by placing the other hand on the occipi- 
 tal base, which is a cooperative region. If the hand also extends 
 down the neck in the crural region it tends to throw the warmth 
 to the lower limbs. 
 
 Mental Discipline and Concentration^^ best promoted 
 by the region of Sanity, especially its anterior portion, in which 
 we find that power of quiet concentration, as well as the disposition 
 to local attachment and fixedness of residence which phrenologists 
 have ascribed to the space just behind Dignity or Self-Esteem on 
 the median line — a location which I find entirelv erroneous. 
 It is the regions of Insanity and Turbulence which destroy 
 mental concentration. 
 
CHAPTER VII. 
 HEALTH, AND ITS RESTORATION. 
 
 Definition of Health as an organ and faculty. Why that name is used. Effects 
 of the organ of Health. Animation. Position and influence of the organ. 
 Its ethical and spiritual relations. Vital power and animation, disease and 
 death. Function of the shoulders and crown of the head. Relation of 
 Health to ethics and religion. Its position in the brain between the moral 
 and physical. The spiritual as the support of physical Health. Delieiency 
 of language for nomenclature. Bia, Zje, Aniina, Animus, Psyche, Psycho- 
 biosis, and Psychodynamia as names. Animation and Health. Difficulty 
 of expressing psychic and physical life in conjunction. Their combination 
 in the superior posterior region of the brain and body. Healthful physical 
 and moral exercises. Cultivation of the sentiments qualifies for healing. 
 Love and Health correlative. Experience of Dr. Jennings. Personal heal- 
 ing by Newton and others. The religious and spiritual elements. 
 Necessity of scientific preparation for healing. 
 
 Psychic Treatment.— Permanent or constitutional health should be 
 established. This requires moral powai, not passive or negative, but active 
 virtues. Power .the element of success. Pursuit of duty the only satisfac- 
 tory success. The higher virtues — heroic. Happiness may be brought to 
 families and a perfect education to youth. Psychic treatment an indispen- 
 sable part of education. Health and Virtue twin brathers. Special 
 directions for treatment by the hand and the battery. 
 
 The object of all treatment is the restoration of health, and it 
 is necessary to understand in what that consists. Health, in the 
 negative sense, is freedom from all disturbing injurious influence, 
 leaving us to enjoy all the pleasures of life as we obtain them. 
 
 In this sense health is obtained by removing from the blood all 
 noxious or imperfectly vitalized elements, and promoting the 
 absorption and removal of all objectionable structures, such as the 
 tubercle of consumption, or the cells of cancerous matter, leaving 
 the vital force to act unincumbered. 
 
 To effect this, we must rouse all the secreting organs to the 
 full performance of their duty ; for the purity of the blood depends 
 on the perfection of the secretions. This must be done either by 
 
I30 HEALTH AND ITS RESTORATION. 
 
 medical or nervauric treatment. We must find the organ, or 
 organs, which are diseased or sluggish, and rouse them into proper 
 action, at the same time strengthening the vital force to assist. 
 
 But health in the positive sense means much more than this. 
 It means a healthy or disease-resisting constitution — the predomi- 
 nance of vital power, resisting injuries, over Sensibility and Exci- 
 tability which succumb. Hence, after the restoration of morbid 
 organs and relief from morbid conditions, we should energize the 
 faculties and organs which give the highest conditions of health. 
 
 Perfect health is a condition in which there is a large amount 
 of physical and moral energy, and in which the. sensibility, excita- 
 bility and irritability, though sufficient for all necessary purposes, 
 are small in comparison with the vital forces, which endure and 
 resist the attacks upon our sensibility. 
 
 The revolutionary discovery of the new Anthropology is, that 
 all forces and faculties belonging to man have their special seats in 
 the brain, and corresponding positions in the body. Every ele- 
 mentary pow^r or tendency culminates to a certain locality. 
 Health culminates to its locality in the brain, on each side of Self- 
 Respect or Dignity, and in the body to the middle of each shoulder 
 blade. The developement of these two localities insures a healthy 
 constitution. But I must protest in the beginning against the 
 phraseology which I am compelled to use by the poverty of the 
 English language. The word Health does not adequately repre- 
 sent the function of the cephalic and corporeal organs to which I 
 have applied it, for the word has merely a negative meaning, 
 signifying freedom from the influences which cause disease, and 
 their results. No cerebral organ can give us freedom from the 
 causes of disease, and thus compel health, but as the organ in 
 question gives us the vital force which resists disease, and thereby 
 sustains a vigorous health, I have hence been induced to use the 
 word health to express its function, as it generally produces health 
 when sufficiently developed, as the opposite sensitive region is sure 
 to result in disease if sufficiently developed. The word health, 
 therefore, as it expresses the tendency of the organ, has been used 
 for physiological and hygienic instruction. It is not deceptive, for 
 
HEALTH AND ITS RESTORATION. 131 
 
 the influence of the region of Health, either in the brain or in the 
 body, whenever excited, is to produce an immediate improvement 
 of the physical and mental condition. The lungs expand more 
 freely and pleasantly, the brain becomes clearer and more active, 
 the emotions more vivid, the impulses stronger, the muscles more 
 ready for action, the countenance more inclined to smile, and all 
 the viscera, lungs, stomach, liver, kidneys, etc., begin to feel 
 better, and, if troubled with any disorder, to diminish or remove it. 
 It is the general renovator of disturbed functions, and the power 
 that resists the encroachment of all malign influences on either 
 mind or body. But health is only one aspect of its effects — the 
 negative aspect. Its positive character is vital power and harmony 
 — normal life. It animates alike the physical and the moral 
 constitution. It is cheerful, energetic, strong, pleasing, 
 attractive. It gives perfect and exuberant activity to the entire 
 physical, social, moral and intellectual faculties. It animates 
 every nerve, function and faculty to normal action, and if required 
 to select the word which comes nearest to expressing its efficient 
 and ubiquitous influence, as I have habitually witnessed it in the 
 impressible and felt it in myself, I should select the word 
 animation. But the word animation must be understood in its 
 largest sense as animation of the entire being in its perfect action 
 and sustained power and virtue. Indeed the word virtue is almost 
 as good a name as animation. 
 
 Animation, as developed by this organ, vitalizes and perfects 
 the entire being, and its antagonist in the region of disease, uncon- 
 trolled, reduces both soul and body to worthlessness — the body 
 going into the decomposition of death, and the soul being often 
 reduced also to helplessness until released from the body ; for the 
 capacity to suffer and not to act is a fatal condition. 
 
 Perfect health — that is, abundant vital power capable of 
 resisting all causes of disease or depression, and sustaining by 
 sympathy and nervauric action the health, energy and spirits of 
 others — depends upon the large developement and cultivation of 
 this region of Health and Animation — it requires a large devel- 
 opement of the shoulders and the crown of the head, and the posi- 
 
±32 HEALTH AND ITS RESTORATION. 
 
 tion of this function in the constitution is such as to give by its 
 connections (being in the upper half of the brain) a decided pre- 
 dominance of the coronal or moral elements, while by its posterior 
 locations it gives all the nenessary energy to the o'ccipito-basilar 
 organ, in which we have a vital force, unregulated by the moral, 
 needing the control of the intermediate organ of Health which 
 sustains both. 
 
 The organ of Health, by sustaining the higher faculties, not 
 only controls the excesses of the lower, but places man in har- 
 mony with the supernal powers, and the influx which is the 
 interior of his life. Thus the true science of health is connected 
 with ethical or religious science, and the performance of duties ; 
 and all hygienic science which rests in the physical alone will fait 
 short of human needs. The emotional or spiritual part of man's 
 nature is as important as the physical, and this is being contin- 
 ually demonstrattd by the vast number of cures made by spiritual 
 and religious methods, without any drug agency. 
 
 The fact tfiat the organ of Health stands intermediate between 
 the moral and physical agencies of the constitution, so as to give 
 to each its own just proportional activity, explains the great neces- 
 sity for soul culture, and physical culture in any proper system of 
 hygiene and education, and gives us an entirely new view of the 
 philosophy of human developement and of the intimate relations 
 of health with virtue and religion, whereby we learn the impor- 
 tance of the cultivation and exaltation of health as a religious duty, 
 and the criminality of its neglect or abuse. True and complete 
 Godliness brings with it physical perfection and power — power 
 to encounter exposure* danger and toil, triumphantly, as did the 
 Apostles. But the purblind theologies, which have been in fash- 
 ion, take little account of the body, though saintly and apostolic 
 history shows how gloriously the body has been sustained by the 
 spirit, not only in such as Joan of Arc, but in many thousand ear- 
 nest seekers of divine life. 
 
 We cannot say too much of this philosophy of man's nobler 
 life, which has has been so little understood ; we have not even 
 language fitting for its expression. Language must advance, both 
 
HEALTH AND ITS KESTORATION. l$j 
 
 in its concepts and its combinations to keep pace with science and 
 philosophy. 
 
 The Bia and Bios of the Greeks, whence our Biology, belongs 
 to material life alone. They express only the lower life, that 
 which lies behind the mastoid process, which occupies the cerebel- 
 lum and medulla oblongata — which ceases with their decomposi- 
 tion and which is not life, the characteristic of which is its inde- 
 structible permanence. 
 
 Psyche, the soul, comes nearer to our conception of the central 
 power, but it has been used in a mental and spiritual sense, which 
 isolates it from the bodily life and should carry us into the high 
 realms of spirit life. But the unspiritual genius of European races 
 continually tends to the degeneration of language. It has degraded 
 Biology into a purely physical science, and it has nearly expur- 
 gated the soul essence of Psychology, reducing it to a little more 
 than a speculation on mundane mentality — confounding Psyche 
 and Mens — Psychology and a barren Metaphysics. 
 
 We might be tempted to unite the spiritual and physical in 
 such a compound as Psycho-biosis, but that would be a clumsy 
 patchwork of elements, each of which is withered and degenerated 
 in literature. 
 
 We need a single word containing in itself the ideas partially 
 represented by the words Manhood, Life, Health, Virtue and Ani- 
 mation, with an intimation of the exuberance of a happy nature, 
 but there is no such word to express a happy and efficient 
 Psycho-zoic existence. 
 
 Our verbal difficulty arises from the fact that soul and body 
 objectively (and not subjectively) considered, are so far apart and 
 distinct in the common mind, which dwells on material things that 
 they are seldom unitized in thought. A different set of words 
 applies to each, yet such is their parallelism that a single word is 
 often applicable to them both — as, for example, Firmness, Energy, 
 Excitement, Restlessness, Tranquillity, Languor, Depression, 
 Weakness, etc. 
 
 Psycho-dynamia, or ps} T cho-dynamy expresses much of the 
 
134 HEALTH AND ITS RESTORATION. 
 
 compound idea, but conveys more of the power and less of . the 
 happy, normal completeness of life than belongs to the health 
 region of the brain. It expresses mainly the firmness and dignity 
 which are fonnd at the posterior part of the sagittal suture, and at 
 the summit of the dorsal region of the spinal column. 
 
 The Greek Pneiima is closely analogous to Psyche and has 
 not been desecrated by metaphysical speculation. Pncumalology 
 has been left to represent the real and substantial science of the soul, 
 apart from the body, but as it represents the separated soul it 
 cannot represent the embodied soul, with its armament of physical 
 power. Pneuma represents, by its double sense, the air or breath 
 which is the influx of the body and the analogous aura or soul 
 which is the influx of the brain. Hence, Pneumatics is the science 
 of the atmosphere and Pneumatology the science of the ethereal 
 realm of the soul. 
 
 Nearly equivalent for the Biological is the Zoic group of 
 words — Zoon, a living creature (whence Zoology, the science of 
 animals), Zoos, 'living ; Zoe, life ; Zoeros, vivacious or full of life ; 
 and Zootes, the animal nature, as opposed to the Divine nature. The 
 life thus expressed is like the biological, and lacks the psychic 
 or pneumatic element. 
 
 In the Latin, too, we find that words representing air or 
 breath represent also the spiritual element, as if it had been 
 intuitively perceived that our spiritual life is like our breath, 
 an influx of the invisible. 
 
 Anima, signifies alike the air or breeze, the breath and the 
 vital principle or life. Thus it represents animal life, though 
 sometimes poetically extended to the departed spirit. Animus is a 
 word of more vital and energetic meaning — it suggests the think- 
 ing, feeling, willing, emotional soul. It suggests all the strong 
 emotions, impulses and determinations of the departed spirit, and 
 is not void of courage, hope and pleasure. It is, therefore, the 
 most expressive word for the full normal life which comes from the 
 superior posterior region of the brain. Anglicised in animation, 
 it expresses better than any other term the central element of life 
 and character, which I find the supremely beneficent and dominant 
 
HEALTH AND ITS RESTORATION. 135 
 
 quality of perfect life. Possibly some other ancient language may 
 have a better expression, but the Romans, whose powerful animus 
 ruled the world, have given us the best word extant in our 
 language for our present purposes ; but even this has not as much 
 of the pleasing, attractive, persuasive, charming, ethical element 
 as nature has given us in the supreme faculty which wins as well 
 as commands, which gives to life its best enjoyment and highest 
 success. We need three words such as health, energy and happi- 
 ness or cheerfulness to express its full influence and power ; 
 though animation may correctly express its influence when the 
 moral element is lacking, and, therefore, may often be an adequate 
 expression. It gives animation alike to the intellectual, moral 
 and animal faculties and tends to give them a symmetrical 
 developement. 
 
 Speaking of this supreme faculty", as I have done, for thera- 
 peutic effects, I have called it health, because perfect, active 
 health is the condition which it produces ; when in predominance 
 it developes active, exuberant, attractive and pleasing animation — 
 it gives a feeling of purity and brightness in the entire person, and 
 a glow of kindly, social feeling, fitting one for every social duty. 
 I am almost induced to coin a word to express this admirable 
 faculty, but for the present let the word Health answer with a rich 
 and abundant significance, including animation. 
 
 Understanding then, that the superior posterior: region of the 
 brain and the superior posterior region of the body are the har- 
 monic centres of perfect life, whatever they may be called — (this 
 perfect life being concentered at the location provisionally named 
 Health) to give this nobler portion of the constitution absolute pre- 
 dominance in ourselves and in our patients, is what we should seek 
 as healers, and any system of bodily exercises which strongly 
 developes the shoulders, especially, such as the healthlift and row- 
 ing, will be an important addition to p\xx curative resources, not 
 only for the patient but for the healer himself, who should fre- 
 quently use such exercises, and will find them beneficial, espe- 
 cially just before going to heal his patients. 
 
 In addition to these physical exercises there are certain moral 
 
I36 HEALTH AND ITS RESTORATION. 
 
 exercises, by which the healer sustains himself in his duties. 
 These moral exercises consist chiefly in making friends and follow- 
 ers, by attractive and impressive manners, in associating with 
 friends and gaining the strength which comes from their admiration, 
 love and sympathy. He should, therefore, as a truly religious 
 man, cultivate the most affectionate and hospitable sentiments 
 towards all, and should endeavor, not rudely or boldly, but in the 
 most pleasing manner, to take the lead in society, and make him- 
 self an object of interest. If he can take the position of a public 
 teacher or lecturer it will make an important addition to his moral 
 force, and if he can so cultivate his nobler nature as to become the 
 centre, the reservoir, or the channel of that purest health, life and 
 love which belong to the spirit world, he is then admirably 
 equipped for his mission. 
 
 The sustained strength of his own perfect life enables him to 
 diffuse a similar sustaining energy, while his love gives him a 
 pleasure in uplifting others, and a power to benefit them by his 
 mere presence, and everything that emanates from him. 
 
 Love and life are correlative. Love is that which energizes 
 and sustains life. Love in each member of a family sustains life 
 in all the others. Wives pine in health when the husband's love 
 declines — men decline in their whole nature when not sustained 
 by love at home. The patients of a loving physician delight in 
 his presence and live upon his influence, regardless of his drugs, 
 as was shown in the somewhat famous case of the honest 
 Dr. Jennings, of Derby, Conn., who, about forty years ago, 
 becoming convinced that his medicines produced little good effect, 
 gradually reduced his doses, and finally gave them up entirely, 
 substituting bread pills and colored powders and liquids, and con- 
 tinued a practice so successful that after he had publicly confessed 
 that he used no medicine the people adhered to him and could not 
 be persuaded to patronize another physician, even when recom- 
 mended to by Dr. J. himself. 
 
 To what extent the mere presence of the healer may be a 
 substitute for all other healing agencies depends upon his personal 
 endowments. Dr. J. R. Newton, Dr. G. Swan and many others 
 
HEALTH AND ITS RESTORATION. 1 37 
 
 have cured successfully without contact, and at a distance, and it 
 is presumable (but not inevitably necessary) that these remarkable 
 cures were made with the cooperation of attendant spirits. Prayer, 
 which brings in spiritual cooperation, has cured so many hundreds 
 in a public and very marvelous manner that no candid student 
 acquainted with the facts can doubt that the religious element is a 
 large part of the healing power — operating not only by the loving 
 and curative energy developed in the constitution of the healer, but 
 by the abundant spiritual influence which he attracts to himself 
 spontaneously, as well as by prayers. 
 
 Armed with health, vigor, buoyant energy and love, guarded 
 by the precautions I have fully explained and reinforced by the 
 invisible power which aids the spiritual minded man, the healer 
 must be successful, and in proportion to his power, may achieve 
 those results which the world calls miraculous. 
 
 But to achieve any results wisely and well he must thoroughly 
 understand that in which he is engaged. He must thoroughly 
 understand the human constitution and the laws of its operation 
 which are developed by Sarcognomy. Even when he acts as the 
 passive instrument of spirit power the same knowledge is impor- 
 tant, for the ability of the spirit to produce results depends largely 
 upon the character, the natural capacities, and acquired skill and 
 knowledge of the medium. The highest manifestation that spirits 
 can make of artistic, musical, literary or philosophic power, 
 depends upon the natural capacity and acquired skill of the medium. 
 Through a medium of artistic ability fine works of art are produced 
 which would be impossible under other conditions — wise utter- 
 ances come through mediums of superior intuitive intellectual pow- 
 er, and the very best medical results will be produced only through 
 mediums of good intellectual power, well educated in thesciences 
 of life, disease and therapeutics. 
 
 It is evident that a spirit operating through any medium must 
 be hampered by the limited powers and ideas of the medium's 
 brain, even if the mediumship be complete and passive. The 
 wisdom and moral power of a man cannot come through the brain 
 of a child or a horse. An ignorant and unscientific medium cannot 
 
I38 HEALTH AND ITS RESTORATION. 
 
 do full justice to the healing art. Moreover, the spirits who come 
 to aid in treatment are in many cases themselves too ignorant and 
 unscientific to compensate for the deficiencies of the medium. 
 
 The healer who is neither gifted with psychometric intuition, 
 nor sustained by spirit power, nor instructed in Sarcognomy, must 
 operate in a blind and often erroneous manner in nervauric and 
 electric treatment. 
 
 The noblest embody ment of the healing art — the most worthy 
 of public esteem is the physician who has been drawn into the profes- 
 sion by his active benevolence and psychometric skill in understand- 
 ing diseases, who, after going through the usual studies of the 
 colleges has perceived the inadequacy of their remedies,, and devoted 
 himself to the investigation of the materia medisa ; who has felt the 
 inadequacy of their physiology and philosophy, made himself 
 acquainted with the power of what is called animal magnetism, and 
 then recognized its destitution of a scientific basis, has found in 
 Sarcognomy the laws of nervauric and electric healing which he 
 applies under the guidance of his intuitions, while using remedies 
 selected with similar skill adapted to the varying conditions of 
 patients, instead of the mere names of diseases. 
 
 Psycho-Hygienic Treatment. 
 
 The enlightened healer will not limit himself to treating the 
 derangements of the body ; for so close is the parallelism of phys- 
 iological and psychological processes that one cannot be treated 
 without producing an influence upon the other. When we restore 
 the body to health we improve the functions of the brain, and 
 assist the moral nature. 
 
 But actual health or relief from the conditions of disease pro- 
 duced by injurious causes is merely a state, and is not fundamental 
 or constitutional health — the possession of a health power to 
 resist disease and to sustain every function of life. One may be 
 relieved from disease and yet be extremely liable to falling 
 again into depraved conditions. Hence the permanent improve- 
 ment of the constitution is more important than the immediate 
 relief of morbid conditions, and it is a characteristic doctrine of 
 
HEALTH AND ITS RESTORATION. 1 39 
 
 the new physiology that this improvement and elevation of the type 
 of the constitution requires an increase of the moral power — an 
 increase of those calm energies which belong to the soul and to the 
 superior regions of the brain and the body ; hence all hygienic 
 treatment should be ethical in tendency, and the healer should aim 
 to leave his patient if possible with an exalted energy in his higher 
 nature, which would tend to lead him into a better and healthier 
 life. 
 
 But in cultivating this noble manhood and womanhood it is 
 important not to mistake the passive negative virtues for the divinely 
 sustaining elements of life. All conceptions of duty are relatively 
 worthless which do not lead to action. 
 
 The amiable sentiments must exist in sufficient force to con- 
 trol all selfish and misanthropic feelings ; but mere amiability with 
 unselfishness is not the condition or character to which the law of 
 the universe accord success, and the happiness of robust health ; 
 and thousands of good people with this false ideal in their minds 
 have met with misfortunes, both physical and spiritual, from acting 
 on this eroneous view, and have found fault with the world and its 
 Creator, because they have been unfortunate when they have not 
 conformed to the conditions of success. 
 
 The survey of the world in any department with a spirit of 
 candid search for truth, will teach us that -power is the chief ele- 
 ment of success, but that the only satisfactory and happy success 
 is that which is attained by noble means. The success of the car- 
 nivorous animal, the despot, the soldier, the miser or the knave is 
 a physical success in which there is very little happiness, and often 
 very little health. But that success which is gained by heroic 
 energy in the pursuit of noble aims, with pleasing manners that 
 win the love of all, is the only true and satisfactory success. This 
 comes from the upper occipital region in which the higher energies 
 reside, and which is associated with the upper posterior portion of 
 the trunk. 
 
 Our conception of virtue should be that of a positive power, 
 acting with that broad sympathy and intuitive understanding which 
 realize that happiness cannot be an isolated condition, and that 
 
I4O HEALTH AND ITS RESTORATION. 
 
 he who would enter the sphere of true happiness must make a 
 sphere of happiness around him in human beings, and should never 
 relax in the pursuit of the noble aims to which his life is devoted. 
 Firmness and energy are the virtues that command success and he 
 who fails to exercise them should blame himself and not the world 
 for his failure. Godliness, a God-likeness which brings success, 
 is not the sentimental and egotistic quality cultivated by the 
 Pharisee, but that nobler quality which achieves grand results in 
 thought, in action, in society, in government, and in the triumphs 
 of civilization — a quality which in Patrick Henry moved multi- 
 tudes, in Washington ruled a nation, in Jefferson led the progress 
 of liberal thought. 
 
 To cultivate these virtues as accessory to health, the healer 
 should keep his patient under the influence of the upper zone ot 
 the body and of the brain, in a cheerful, energetic mental condi- 
 tion. The tranquil amiability of the upper frontal surface of the 
 chest should be combined with the amiable but positive energy ot 
 the summit of 4he back, on and between the shoulders, and of the 
 arms. The gentler virtues should never be separated from the 
 energies. 
 
 By these manipulations discontented and discordant husbands 
 and wives might sometimes be restored to harmony, as the causes 
 of quarrels which seemed so important while they were under the 
 influence of irritation and gloom would appear very unimportant 
 when good humor was restored. The restoration of harmony 
 would contribute greatly to the restoration of health, for there are 
 thousands whose health is depressed by domestic inharmony. 
 
 In the management of children psychic manipulation is very 
 important, for there are few that might not be favorably affected. 
 The more impressible class are creatures of circumstances. In a 
 turbulent school they speedily absorb all the depravity they mingle 
 with ; but the gentle manipulation of parents may remove many 
 evil influences, conquer ill temper and confirm habits of applica- 
 tion. This treatment will hereafter claim an important part in 
 systems of education, and no one will be considered qualified as a 
 
HEALTH AND ITS RESTORATION. I4I 
 
 teacher who cannot with his hands exert a soothing and 
 refining influence. 
 
 The evil tendencies of the animal nature will be subdued in 
 body and in brain by dispersive passes and by Galvanic currents, 
 while the virtues will be energized at their source in the upper 
 regions of the brain and body, as indicated by Anthropology. 
 
 Psychic or moral treatment is not within the scope of this 
 volume, but it becomes incidentally a part of the therapeutic treat- 
 ment, and it certainly comes within the duties of the true physician, 
 the competent healer, for health and virtue are twin brothers. 
 
 To carry out the doctrines of this chapter, the physician should 
 aim to establish the predominance of the shoulders and the upper 
 occipital region of the brain. 
 
 1. First, he should use the refreshing dispersive passes from 
 the lower margin of the abdomen toward the shoulders. This dis- 
 perses morbid and debilitating nervous conditions. A similar 
 influence may be produced on the head by brisk dispersive passes 
 from the cheek-bones toward the crown of the head — the centre of 
 the scalp, which is near the posterior end of the sagittal suture. 
 
 2. He should stimulate the shoulders and the whole upper 
 dorsal region for a space of six by twelve or fifteen inches across 
 the back by the application of his hands and by a gentle percussion, 
 using vigor in his muscles, but gentleness of touch in contact, 
 unless in a robust person. 
 
 3. When the hands are resting on the back they should be 
 in the centre of each shoulder blade. If the operator is a sensitive 
 percipient he will recognize, while his hands are in this position, 
 the increasing comfort and brightness in the patient's condition, 
 and if he is left in that condition, its beneficial influences will in 
 many cases continue for hours. 
 
 4. The effect may be enhanced by placing one hand across 
 the upper occiput from right to left, covering the region of Health, 
 while the other is on the Health region of the shoulder. 
 
 5. If the patient is nervous, restless or melancholic, one hand 
 may be placed in the armpit at the region of Cheerfulness, while 
 the other is on Health, or both may be applied at Cheerfulness. 
 
142 HEALTH AND ITS RESTORATION. 
 
 6. If the patient has any selfish, morose or gloomy qualities, 
 or is lacking in the enjoyment of kindly emotions and elevated 
 views of duty, the hands should be applied on the upper surface 
 of the shoulder and the chest as far down as the nipple, the effect 
 of which will be soothing and pleasant as well as beneficial to his 
 moral nature, and will assist in the restoration of health. This is 
 the remedy for bad temper, selfishness, gloom, and domestic 
 discord. 
 
 7. While the hand is kept on the shoulder or the healthful 
 region of the head, special treatment may be given with the other 
 hand in application to the various localities that need attention, the 
 effect being greatly enhanced by the hand on the shoulder. 
 
 8. If treatment be administered by the battery, the hygienic 
 current should be administered by applying the positive pole w r ith 
 a broad electrode (a carbon plate or large sponge wet with warm 
 salt water) at the hypochondria, the spot marked as the region of 
 disease, and the negative with a large electrode on the health 
 region of the shoulderr For the best effect there should be two 
 electrodes or rather rheophores to each pole, that the right and left 
 sides may be treated simultaneously. The current may be given 
 from five, ten or twenty cells according to the sensibility of the 
 patient and continued from five to twenty minutes. If small 
 rheophores are applied to the skin they should be moved about. 
 This is less important with large rheophores. 
 
 9. If the patient needs the influence of any special medicine, 
 it may tie administered by dipping the positive sponges in a solu- 
 tion so as to have the current pass through it, or a slighter influence 
 may be imparted by applying a strong solution on the skin and 
 passing the current through it. The epigastrium is the best place 
 for medical application. 
 
 10. If the Faradic current be used, it may be applied as a 
 local stimulus by applying one pole on each shoulder at the site of 
 Health, or by applying two poles near each other at any position 
 needing stimulus. In doing this, however, a broad carbon rheo- 
 phore is best, covered with wet cloth or leather — a broad sponge 
 will answer the same purpose. A moderating rheophore is nee- 
 
HEALTH AND ITS RESTORATION. 1 43 
 
 essary when the poles are near each other. The best material for 
 which is carbon. The Galvanic currents may be used in the same 
 way as a local stimulus by applying them near together with 
 frequent interruptions. One of the rheophores may be used for 
 this purpose by a rapid tapping or a gliding over the surface which 
 produces the broken current that stimulates. 
 
 ii. There is no current in electro-therapeutics at all compar- 
 able to the hygienic current from the hypochondria to the shoulder, 
 and in applying this current, the negative pole may be applied not 
 only to the site of Health, but over the entire upper half of the 
 surface of the back, thus producing a great variety of tonic and 
 restorative effects as shown by the map of Sarcognomy. Thus 
 we may invigorate the brain, lungs, heart, liver and stomach, or 
 administer general tonics as will be explained. 
 
 12. The hygienic region or upper portion of the back and of 
 the occiput will generally restore pleasant and amiable feelings, 
 especially in conjunction with the cheerfulness of the axilla, but 
 whenever a positively amiable influence is needed we should treat 
 the whole upper frontal surface of the chest, on which we develop 
 the warmest sentiments of affection, duty and religion. 
 
 13. The reader will bear in mind that the effect of nervauric 
 operations is materially enhanced by previously exciting impressi- 
 bility at the lower end of the sternum, or in the temples an inch 
 behind the brow. 
 
CHAPTEE VIII. 
 
 OPERATIVE METHODS. 
 
 Transmission of vital power. Proof by experiments on frogs. Failure" of electri- 
 cal experiments by eminent physiologists, Functions of the convolutions 
 which they could not reach. My reasons for neglecting Galvanism. Medi- 
 cal opposition. Psycho-vital influences most appropriate to the brain. 
 Discussion of the experiments of Fritzch and Hitzig. How to begin experi- 
 ments. Use of plasters and other agents. Familiar illustrations of 
 Sarcognomy. Pathological illustrations. Initiating experiments. Vital 
 emanations. Positive and negative poles. Evils and dangers of electricity, 
 delations of operator and patient. Necessary influences for the operator. 
 Spiritual inspiration — its philosophy and power. Power of diagnosis. 
 Prof. Draper's testimony as to the spirit. Conduct in the sick chamber — 
 hygienic precautions. Dispersive manipulations. Non-conductors. Effect 
 of passes. Quackery of massage. Activity in healing. . Precautions for 
 maintenance of health. Dangers of contagion. 
 
 In nervauric therapeutics we use every region of the brain and 
 body for the production of physiological and therapeutic effects, 
 and we rouse these regions by the application of the hand, which 
 is their proper and congenial stimulus in the impressible 
 constitution. 
 
 That the vital force and vital processes of one constitution 
 should rouse similar processes in another is a proposition strongly 
 resisted by most physiologists, notwithstanding their familiar 
 knowledge of the transmission of pathological processes which 
 reproduce exactly the same disease by their emanations. 
 
 There is an experiment on the limbs of frogs which might 
 assist these sceptics to realize such transmission. If the frog 
 galvanoscope is used by placing the nerve of the leg across the 
 muscles of another frog's leg and then passing a feeble electric 
 current through the nerves of the latter sufficient to convulse its 
 muscles, the convulsive movement will also appear in the leg 
 
OPERATIVE METHODS. 145 
 
 which has its nerve resting upon the convulsed muscle. This is 
 not simply due to a passage of electricity, for if a nonconductor, 
 such as a thin plate of mica, be interposed between the second 
 nerve and the first muscle, it does not prevent the convulsion, 
 which shows that a convulsion in one muscle may transmit an 
 influence which will convulse another muscle — an influence 
 which is distinct from electricity, as it is not hindered by electric 
 non-conductors (see Philos. Transactions, 1847 — p 231). 
 
 But it is not necessary to employ electricity at all ; the mus- 
 cles of a frog, a dog or a rabbit may be convulsed by irritating the 
 spinal cord mechanically, and the frog nerve, if in contact with 
 the convulsed muscle, will transfer the convulsive action to its own 
 muscle, and it may be transmitted still further, so that a series of 
 five or six nerves may be started into action by the first. 
 
 The same principle may be illustrated in man. If we con- 
 tract firmly the flexor muscles which close the hand and bring our 
 muscles into contact with those of a sensitive or impressible person 
 who is passive, the emanating influence will gradually cause a con- 
 traction in the same muscles, which not being voluntary will not 
 obey the will but will, pass off gradually. 
 
 This experiment illustrates the general law which has long 
 been applied to healing, and„ which I have applied to experimen- 
 tal investigation — that all vital and psychic processes are trans- 
 ferable, as well as the pathological and the muscular. 
 
 In the European experiments on the brain, with electricity, the 
 results have been extremely barren, not only because electricity is 
 not the proper stimulant for psychic functions, but because the 
 investigation was not conducted in a psychic spirit. As Althaus 
 says, " although the induced current may penetrate to the brain it 
 seems to exert only little influence on it, just as on the retina and 
 other organs of special sense." 
 
 Longet entirely failed to produce muscular action by operating 
 on either the white or the gray substance of the cerebral hemis^ 
 pheres by Galvanism or by mechanical and chemical irritation. 
 
 Weber, Majendie, Budge, SchifF, Matteucci and Van Dten all 
 failed to produce any physical results in the body by Galvanic and 
 
I46 OPERATIVE METHODS. 
 
 Faradic electricity applied to the hemispheres of the cerebrum and 
 the cerebellum in an enormous number of experiments, and the 
 sacrifice of a vast number of animals. The muscular system 
 was reached in such experiments only by the motor nerves, the 
 spinal cord and its commanding summit in the brain before its 
 expansion is lost in the hemispheres, that is to say, in the medulla 
 oblongata, the crura cerebri and the tuberculaquadrigemina, which 
 in animals are called the optic lobes, and which thus appear to be 
 the summit of the muscular tract that responds by electricity ; 
 although we know that in vital action the volitionary power that 
 commands the muscles proceeds from the corpora striata , and that 
 these are controlled by the higher organs of the brain. But elec- 
 tricity is so ill adapted to the higher processes of life that it pro- 
 duced no muscular response to these laborious and skillful expe- 
 rimenters above the tubercula quadrigemina. 
 
 What then were the functions in the hemispheres which would 
 not respond to electricity ? To this the only answer of vivisection 
 was by ablatio*. Flourens, in an extensive series of operations 
 on birds as well as mammalia, found that the functions in the hem- 
 ispheres were those of psychic life — consciousness and volition, 
 for consciousness, volition and all psychic operations whatever were 
 completely abolished after ablation of the hemispheres, while ani- 
 mal life remained complete, and the animals remained in a state of 
 unconsciousness as if asleep, although capable of swallowing food by 
 reflex action through the nerves, when food was put in their mouths. 
 
 In these functions of conscious psychic life which modern 
 physiologists with their rude mechanical conceptions have been 
 unable to reach or evolve, lie the great majority of the operations 
 which are interesting to humanity as the source of our weal or 
 woe, and not only the source of joy or misery, but the source of 
 physiological and pathological changes by an indirect influence 
 on the body. 
 
 It is pitiable to see all the talent and learning of the present 
 century failing after labors so prolonged and costly, and often 
 cruel, to tell us anything important of the functions of the convo- 
 luted brain, in which lies the science of man — a vast magazine 
 
OPERATIVE METHODS. I47 
 
 of knowledge, destined hereafter to fill libraries with elaborate 
 illustrations of that which collegiate science cannot even approach, 
 because it disdains all psychic methods of investigation/ 
 
 The failure of all investigations by electricity was due to the 
 false philosophy which disqualified the inquirers. I have not found 
 it impossible to excite and to reveal the functions of the brain by 
 electrical methods. My first thought in this matter was to demon- 
 strate the functions of the brain by Galvanism, but after a few such 
 experiments, I found the psychic and nervauric influences of the 
 human hand so far superior that, looking only to truth and to 
 science, I hastily laid aside the electric method as inferior (a mis- 
 taken policy) and never returned to its use until recently, 
 presuming in my optimism that intelligent men would not fail to 
 appreciate nervauric experiments with the hand. But a gross 
 mind does not appreciate simple, unpretending truth. My experi- 
 ments before committees were entirely successful, but no 
 sympathetic cord responded in the minds of spectators. A materi- 
 alistic age demands materialistic methods, and if I had appealed, 
 not to the reason, but to the senses, by an array of Galvanic 
 batteries and harsh experiments on hospital patients, the demon- 
 strations would not have come forth still-born, but resounded 
 through the literature of the world, instead of meeting with 
 immediate suppression. When the learned Dr. Samuel L. Forry 
 announced at New York that my experiments were in their impor- 
 tance vastly superior to all that had been achieved by the most 
 eminent physiologists, and the New York Medical and Surgical 
 Journal which he established was ready to do justice to the subject, 
 the peremptory threats of eminent physicians forbade its mention, 
 and the death soon after of Dr. Forry deprived the truth of a cham- 
 pion — a position which Prof. Mitchell, after repeating my 
 experiments successfully, was not disposed to assume, 
 
 I declined the use of the electric method, because that method 
 is liable to evils and dangers from which the nervauric method is 
 free, and because electricity is not commensurate with the psychic 
 functions of life, although like other gross stimulants it may affect 
 them? since it acts on the vaso motor nerves and secretions, and by 
 
I48 OPERATIVE METHODS. 
 
 changing the blood supply affects the organs of the brain and is 
 still better calculated to affect the brain, when in application to the 
 body it stimulates regions to which the brain responds in sympathy* 
 
 The higher functions of the brain which are not in direct cor^ 
 relation with electricity are yet in close correlation with spiritual 
 or ideal influences. A thought, or an external object which rouses 
 a thought, will produce intense emotional action, which may pro- 
 duce violent excitement of the heart and muscles, and either greatly 
 exalt or greatly depress the powers of life, or originate various 
 forms of disease. 
 
 Psycho-vital power must be influenced by psycho-vital causes, 
 and these are found in human beings whose psycho-vital force 
 emanates from contact of the hand and from their entire personal- 
 ity. Hence the nervauric and psychic power must occupy a 
 higher position in our therapeutics than the electric and the scien- 
 tific manual or psychic healer will occupy a more and more honor- 
 able position as society advances. 
 
 The psycho-physiological influence of the hand is of univer- 
 sal application, and the hand is therefore the chief agent in thera- 
 peutic sarcognomy, although in many cases the psychic energy of 
 the operator may reach and powerfully affect the patient with thera- 
 peutic influences, independent of physical contact. 
 
 I do not deny that delicate electric influences may safely mod- 
 ify the action of the organs of the brain, for these influences, like 
 caloric, affect the circulation and nervauric conditions, and through 
 these means the organic action may be modified, but not in the 
 prompt, wholesome and natural manner which belongs to the hand, 
 and which would authorize the general use or substitution of elec- 
 tricity in cerebral therapeutics. 
 
 The nervauric operator who aims to be a well qualified, scien- 
 tific practitioner, should understand well the use of electricity as 
 an important adjunct, and when in addition to this he understands 
 the use of the materia medica, he may take rank as a complete 
 physician and something more than a specialist. 
 
 Before proceeding further, I would ask is there any doubt 
 thrown over my discoveries of over forty years standing, by the 
 
OPERATIVE METHODS. 149 
 
 more recent experiments of European vivisectors, of whose 
 immense labors it would not be improper to say that the mountain 
 in labor has brought forth a mouse. 
 
 I refer more especially to the experiments of Fritzch and 
 Hitzig, who suppose they have discovered in the front lobes of 
 dogs, muscular functions, although those functions are not in any 
 degree affected by the loss of the front lobe. 
 
 Such investigations must be accepted in subordination to 
 the well established and undeniable truth that the functions of the 
 hemispheres are psychic, and that muscular excitability cannot be 
 commanded above the tubercula quadrigemina. Fritzch and 
 Hitzig's experiments are supposed to show that muscular powers 
 are associated with the frontal portion of the brain, as they claim 
 to have excited certain muscles of the neck and limbs by applying 
 the electrodes at certain positions of the frontal convolutions — the 
 details of which need not be discussed at present. Taking the 
 experiments as stated by them, they do not imply that any muscu- 
 lar power exists* in the frontal convulsions, for all direct nerve 
 motors are capable of rousing the muscles under Galvanism after 
 death, but the influence of the frontal convolutions ceased at death 
 in their experiments. 
 
 As the frontal convolutions are known to be entirely psychic 
 and their excision does not in the slightest degree impair the mus- 
 cular power, it is evident that Fritzch and Hitzig only stimulated 
 certain psychic functions, which are associated with the control of 
 the muscular system. But we knew before that volitionary im- 
 pulses to certain muscles originate in the frontal or intellectual 
 portion of the brain, and pass by the corpora striata to their des- 
 tination. It is probable that the electric currents in their experi- 
 ments affected the corpora striata by impinging upon the anterior 
 expansion of the fibres of this striata, which would explain the dif- 
 ferent muscular effects they produced at different points, while the 
 animal was alive, and their failure to produce any effects when 
 they operated on posterior portions of the brain, not belonging to 
 the radical expansion of the corpora striata. Their experiments 
 are curious, but they do not disturb anything that we have hereto- 
 
150 OPERATIVE METHODS. 
 
 fore known of the physiological and psychological functions of the 
 brain. 
 
 I see nothing in the modern experiments of Fritzch and Hitzig, 
 Ferrier and others, which is at all contradictory to my own exper- 
 iments. On the contrary I shall quote them as illustrative confir- 
 mations of my own experiments and discoveries. The movements 
 produced by Dr. Ferrier were little else but the gestures of natural 
 expression of the psychic faculties, easily explained by the laws 
 of Pathognomy. 
 
 The nervauric healer should study very carefully his map of 
 Sarcognomy, becoming familiar with the various localities, and 
 should take every opportunity to verify them in the treatment of 
 patients and in experiments on the well. A single person of highly 
 impressible constitution would enable him to verify every locality 
 and derive a large amount of instruction and entertainment from 
 his experiments. 
 
 A faithful enquirer will have no difficulty in finding all I have 
 found, and much more than has been stated in this volume. 
 
 To conduct the experiments properly, he should not select 
 one accustomed to act as a passive Mesmeric subject or capable of 
 being controlled by an assertion so as to believe himself whatever 
 he is told. The subject of experiment for scientific investigation 
 should be in the best mental condition of clearness of perception, 
 correctness of judgement and independence of mind. 
 
 A very satisfactory mode of experimenting is to develope the 
 local results independent of the personality of the operator, which 
 may be done by heat and cold, by electricity or by stimulating 
 plasters. Mild, gently stimulating capsicum plasters may be used 
 — two inches by four, or three by six — or varied according to the 
 object — and applied to the localities on each side of the body cor- 
 respondingly. The effects may appear in five, ten or twenty min- 
 utes, and the application may be continued for an hour or hours, 
 which will make the results more distinct and positive. 
 
 The continuous application of moderate warmth or of warm 
 clothing upon any locality developes the local function, as the 
 continuous application of cold depresses it. 
 
OPERATIVE METHODS. 151 
 
 All the effects which I thus produce by the hand, by local 
 stimulation, by heat, or by electricity, have been experienced 
 millions of times by intelligent people without attempting to look 
 into their causation. They have been produced, also, millions of 
 times in the practice of medicine without prompting physicians to 
 look into the law of their occurrence, and every intelligent physi- 
 cian who reads these pages will find upon reflection that he has 
 encountered many facts which illustrate the principles of 
 Sarcognomy. 
 
 For example, who has not observed that antagonism between 
 the head and feet which Sarcognomy explains — how coldness of 
 the feet increases the determination to the brain, and excites wake- 
 fulness at night — how the warm bath to the feet relieves the brain 
 and moderates fever, and how the heat and fatigue of the feet from 
 overwork or prolonged walking deadens the action of the brain 
 and reduces the mental power. 
 
 Who has not observed the dangerous effects of drafts of cold 
 air striking the upper part of the back, depressing all the powers 
 of life and endangering pneumonia or fever. 
 
 What physician is not familiar with the association between 
 tenderness or pain at the lower end of the spinal vertebrae, and the 
 pelvic diseases of women — or the prostrating influence of abdomi- 
 nal affections, and the hopeful influence of affections in the upper 
 part of the chest, and the alarming anxiety and fear caused by 
 affections of the heart. 
 
 The stimulation of the brain by a slight hyperemia of the 
 lungs, or of the bronchial region, which I have often experienced, 
 was utilized by a British member of Parliament (Mr. Dunscomb), 
 by putting a stimulating plaster on his chest when he had to 
 address the House. 
 
 Who has not observed the substantial energy of the whole 
 constitution produced by warmly covering the lower limbs, and 
 the debilitating, injurious effects of allowing them to be chilled. 
 
 What woman does not know how closely her bosom is associa- 
 ted with her affections, so as to compel her to exclude from 
 familiarity therewith all but her child, her lover and husband ; and 
 
152 OPERATIVE METHODS. 
 
 what physician does not know the very intimate sympathy 
 between the womb and the female breast. 
 
 All these sympathies and associations, as well as others less 
 familiarly known, are explained by Sarcognomy as illustrations of 
 a general law which applies to every part of the body, and shows 
 exactly the psychic and physiological association of every organ 
 and every portion of the surface. 
 
 The full exposition of this subject is not designed in this man- 
 ual, as it would require an investigation of the history of all dis- 
 eases, showing the parallelism between the phenomena or symp- 
 toms of all diseases and the laws of Sarcognomy — such as we 
 see illustrated in affections of the brain produced by pelvic disor- 
 ders, and in the peculiar hopefulness of consumptive patients, 
 while the disease is doing its fatal work in the upper portion of the 
 lungs. 
 
 Such an investigation would interest the studious physician 
 and philosophic inquirer, but the nervauric healer would find its 
 pathological details less interesting than the experiments on his 
 patients or friends, in which he finds an exact and ready illustra- 
 tion of scientific principles, free from irrelevant details. 
 
 Nervauric treatment by the hand proceeds upon the principle 
 that the hand whenever applied has an adhesive or attractive and 
 stimulating influence upon the spot, developing and exalting its 
 vital powers. Thus the constitution of the patient is roused to 
 effect its own renovation instead of passively receiving the vital 
 force imparted by the healer, as in the ordinary treatment, in 
 which the patient merely receives what the operator gives, and the 
 latter is often exhausted. 
 
 The hand of the operator has an attractive power, which is 
 both psychic and physiological, and consequently attracts to the 
 spot where it is applied the vital forces of the patient. 
 
 The psychic attraction of the hand is easily ascertained upon 
 sensitives. If the sensitive subject stands before you erect and at 
 ease, the application of the hands for a moment on the forehead, 
 followed by gently withdrawing them, will produce a tendency in 
 the head to follow the retiring hand. I do not consider it any 
 
OPERATIVE METHODS. 1 53 
 
 objection to such facts that imagination may produce similar 
 effects. The potentiality of tartar emetic is not refuted when we 
 produce a similar nausea by imagination. In the majority of per- 
 sons this would be imperceptible, but in the sensitives it is marked, 
 and some will be so strongly attracted as to be unable to hold their 
 place and compelled to advance. The most passive subjects will 
 be entirely controlled and may be drawn down upon the floor. 
 
 The psychic attraction of the hand is also realized in our 
 friendly salutations — the grasp of the hand being the expression 
 of personal attraction or friendship. Mechanically the hand is 
 also the instrument of adhesion, retention or holding. 
 
 At the foundation of such phenomena lies the fact that the 
 vital forces, emanating from the brain and chest in voluntary 
 actions and unconscious influences both physiological and psychic 
 must emanate from the surface of the body, if like caloric and 
 electricity they have a real existence. Of these emanations all 
 can recognize caloric, and sensitive persons recognize electricity 
 and psychic influences. For these psychic influences we have at 
 present no instrument of detection but the nerves of the sensitive, 
 and for electric emanations of a delicate character there was 
 formerly no test but the nerves and muscles of the galvanoscopic 
 frog. But the skill of Dubois Reymond and others has furnished 
 instruments of sufficient delicacy to detect the delicate electric cur- 
 rents of living-beings and ascertain that there are not only electric 
 currents in motor nerves and muscles, but certain permanent cur- 
 rents in the body proceeding from its superior portions downwards, 
 as they do in great quantity and power in the Gymnotus or electric 
 eel, and Malapterurus or electric shad. These currents are the 
 product of vitality, changing according to the degree of health 
 and vigor, and cease at death. 
 
 • These "strong and constant currents," as they are called, are not 
 thermo-electric but vital, proceeding from the positive head and 
 chest to the negative extremities — the palms of the hand and the 
 soles of the feet. 
 
 The negative character of the palms of the hands qualifies 
 them to perform the part which they have always performed in 
 
 
154 OPERATIVE METHODS. 
 
 my experiments — that of attracting and concentrating the vital 
 forces and emanations of the subject, in which they coincide with 
 the negative pole of the galvanic battery. Wherever I direct the 
 hands to be applied for any purpose upon the body, the sponge of 
 the negative pole of a weak galvanic current may be applied with 
 similar results — in some respects coarser and more powerful and 
 dangerous* as a concentrative stimulus, but substantially similar. 
 In vital treatment there is more than the mere concentration of 
 functions produced by negative electricity. There are emanations 
 from the operator and absorptions of influence or general s5 7 mpa- 
 thy as in the old practice of animal magnetism. 
 
 It is true that in treating under the guidance of Sarcognomy, 
 
 * The powerful and even dangerous character of electric treatment may be 
 inferred from its effects as stated by the best authors. Althaus says " The sparks 
 from the common electrical machine applied to the skin of any part of the body 
 produce a sensation of pricking and pain; if they are large the skin becomes red 
 and a papular eruption, resembling lichen urticatus, is produced. If a continuous 
 c urrent be made to act upon the skin, a sensation of pricking and heat, redness, 
 inflammation and sloughing of the skin and subjacent stiuctures may be caused, 
 provided the current be powerful and the application prolonged. A volta-Faradic 
 current may produce sensations varying, according to its intensity, from a slight 
 pricking to an acute burning pain; but although the tension of the current may be 
 very high, it will not cause nutritive disturbances like the continuous current." 
 
 " If a continuous current of moderate power be directed to the skin for a short 
 time, it dilates the blood vessels and promotes circulation, out if it be applied for 
 several hours successively (as is often done with Pulvermacher's chains and gal- 
 vanic belt) the blood vessels become paralyzed, and sloughs are produced. 'An in- 
 duced current conveyed for a short time to the motor nerves and muscles rouses 
 their vital energy; but, if its action be prolonged for an hour or more, the motor 
 power of those organs becomes exhausted and temporary paralysis may be the 
 result." 
 
 " Static electricity, electro-magnetism and magneto-electricity only affect that 
 organ if applied so powerfully as to interfere with health and perhaps life; but a 
 gentle, continuous current, directed to the face, scalp or neck, and which causes no 
 or scarcely any, sensation of pain, is readily transmitted from those parts to the 
 cerebral substance. * * * Sensations are caused by an application of 
 the current to the head, which can only be owing to a direct action of it on the cer- 
 ebral matter, viz.: dizziness, giddiness, sleepiness, sickness, faintness, vomiting 
 and even convulsions. The latter phenomena are only noticed if the current be 
 one of considerable power; but giddiness and faintness are often felt, even when 
 a gentle current is used." 
 
 That electricity may be used in a safer and more congenial manner I do not 
 doubt; but it needs important changes, both in electrical instruments and in the 
 application of currents to render it entirely satisfactory. 
 
OPERATIVE METHODS. * 155 
 
 the operator must part with a portion of his vital force to a consti- 
 tution which is in a morbid state, but as he stimulates the healthy 
 energies of the patient, the latter cooperates in the cure, and his 
 cooperation relieves the operator. Thus if one by his combative- 
 ness rouses the hostility of one assailed, their mutual violence stim- 
 ulates each to the highest energy — or if one diffuses humor and 
 boisterous mirth in a company, the mirthful response assists his 
 own gayety, and he feels very differently from what he should if 
 he addressed a solemn group without a smile in response. 
 
 To pour forth hope, joy, love or zeal to cold, unresponsive 
 souls is an exhausting experiment, and to sit sympathetically in 
 company with them produces more depression in ourselves than 
 exaltation in them. The only way in which we can affect them 
 beneficially without being injured is to go as a teacher or healer in 
 the utmost tension of our powers, suppressing our impressible 
 sympathy, while they are kept in a passive, receptive condition. 
 
 The patient to be passive should be in a sitting or lying posi- 
 tion, the latter being better, and in the respectful, friendly, 
 confiding state of mind which is necessary to his passive receptivity. 
 The greater his reverence, love and faith toward his operator the 
 better the result. 
 
 The operator should be in the full tension of his powers — in 
 high health — full of courage, hope, zeal and joy. But he cannot 
 maintain this state of mind which developes his highest pow- 
 ers, under the most prevalent earthly influences. There is too 
 much of difficulty, anxiety and doubt ; too much of jealousy, 
 selfishness and contention ; too much of gloom and moral, as well 
 as physical, malaria in the common experience of life to sustain the 
 bright, joyous energy which should belong to the healer and 
 the teacher. 
 
 True he may go forth on some beautiful day when the atmos- 
 phere woos him with the bland warmth of its zephyrs and its well 
 vitalized purity, when the flying clouds, the waving trees and the 
 rich-tinted flowers pour into his soul a sense of the Divine benefi- 
 cence flowing around him, and thus feel his better nature inspired 
 and strengthened by an influx of joy, and hence I think the best 
 
I56 OPERATIVE METHODS. 
 
 triumphs of nervauric healing are in warm climates or in summer 
 weather, and in pure, well-warmed apartments, where the moral 
 warmth of the society is equal to the physical warmth of the 
 atmosphere. 
 
 But the limited amount of such inspiring environment, and the 
 large amount of gloom and of cold, moral apathy, as well as mala- 
 rious and negative* atmosphere, in many places, render it necessary 
 to have some other source of supply than the prevalent physical 
 and moral conditions in which civilized society exists to-day. 
 
 We need a grand and continuous inspiration ; and though I 
 am speaking now of the healer, what I say is equally applicable 
 to every reader, for all need to be sustained in health and moral 
 power for the performance of duty and enjoyment of life. 
 
 We need an unfailing, ever present inspiration. 
 
 WHENCE CAN IT COME? 
 
 and from what can it come? It must come from something which 
 can inspire our hope, love, courage and heroism. That which is 
 to inspire our love must be supremely lovely and noble — that 
 which is to inspire hope must be the landscape of futurity, bright 
 with the sunshine of joy — that which is to inspire courage is the 
 certainty of ultimate conquest over all evils and opposition. 
 Where can all this be found but in heaven? In the boundless 
 spirit world we have an eternity of life triumphant over all evil 
 conditions — not a far-off realm, dimly perceived b}^ a hoodwinked 
 faith — hoped for against doubt, grasped at with the energy of 
 
 * The atmosphere has positive inspiring conditions which vitalize the nervous 
 system and invigorate all the secretious, and negative conditions which exhaust 
 and depress vitality, injure the nervous system, check the secretions and aggra- 
 vate every disease. Electricity and actinism are concerned in these conditions, but 
 scientists have not investigated this subject. They have not been studied in their 
 atmospheric relations to the human constitution, and my own duties have not 
 allowed me time to give this subject a proper investigation. The healing and re- 
 storative influences come from the sun. Hence they are more abundant in south- 
 ern breezes, but are also found in the North winds which blow over a dry and 
 frozen but sunshiny region They are deficient wherever the solar emanations are 
 absorbed by thawing or by evaporation, and abundant when restored to the atmos- 
 phere by freezing or precipitation. The deadliest conditions exist in the absence 
 of sunshine and prolonged evaporation and thawing. 
 
OPERATIVE METHODS. 1 57 
 
 dying despair, or enjoyed in passive melancholy, in the spirit of the 
 poet who sings that, 
 
 " Love and hope and beauty's bloom 
 Are blossoms gathered for the tomb." 
 
 The Heaven to which we look for inspiration is neither remote 
 nor shadowy, nor doubtful. Our friends and relatives and ances- 
 tors are there — he who is now writing these lines will be there in 
 less than a score of years, and some who read them will be there 
 still sooner, and if you would look upon life, dear reader, with a 
 large conception of its realities, you would realize how short, how 
 very short the distance between your present condition and the 
 immortal hosts of higher spheres, who are soon to be your com- 
 panions, and who are your companions now when your finer, 
 interior senses can feel and realize their presence. 
 
 The healer should be inspired — as Jesus was inspired, and 
 promised his followers that they attain a similar inspiration and do 
 similar works. Anthropology shows that they who live the 
 Heavenly life on earth do become inspired and become healers, 
 teachers, reformers, uplifters for humanity, by their moral power 
 and enthusiasm. 
 
 How does this inspiration reach us ! The method is simple 
 and intelligible. The object that is capable of inspiring our love, 
 uplifts, energies, and beautifies our whole nature. 
 
 Men and women are never so happy, so bright, so generous, 
 so heroic as when inspired by mutual love, and happy are they 
 who can find an enduring, faultless earthly love to be an inspiration 
 through life. The bright and faultless objects of perfect love are 
 to most of us discoverable only beyond the river. If we look 
 among the angels we find a perfect love — either some one whom 
 we loved on earth, or some one who has risen to the sublime 
 heights of love and wisdom by centuries of progress, Christendom 
 finds its saints for love and adoration in the Bible, and some are 
 well worthy of Divine love. But whether our love, or our adora- 
 tion, which is the intensity of love, be given to Jesus or St. John, 
 or Mary, the mother — or any of the army of saints from Moses 
 to Joan of Arc, or from Joan of Arc to Washington, the -profound 
 
I58 OPERATIVE METHODS. 
 
 conviction of the nobility and loveliness of that which we adore is 
 what calls out our love, and gives our inspiration. Even if Jesus 
 and Mary had been myths, the faith in their reality would have 
 made them the inspiring power of Christendom, but being realities 
 there was not only this inspiring power, but the inspiring influ- 
 ence of their actual spiritual existence. He whose best conceptions 
 and spiritual capacities have been depressed by the physical wants 
 and struggles of human life below the plane of being on which we 
 can realize the supernal, should endeavor to substitute for confiding 
 faith the power of a vivid imagination, forming grand ideals in his 
 own mind, or allowing them to be evolved by romantic fiction 
 and poetry. 
 
 The worship of Jesus was not absurd — it was an adoring 
 love for the qualities represented by him. The worship of Mary 
 and of all the true Saints was not absurd. It was a wholesome 
 and inspiring love of virtues, idealized in them. Worship often 
 begins for men with the adoration of some true, noble and gifted 
 woman, whose Worship deepens as she rises in the spheres, and 
 this was the worship enjoyed by Auguste Compte after he had lost 
 sight of supernal truth. 
 
 Beyond all these is the love and worship of the ineffable 
 Divine, which no more interferes with or affects other loves than 
 the love for the mother forbids love for her child. On the con- 
 trary, saintly love is the complement of Divine love, and both are 
 the inspiration of that eartly love which extends to every brother, 
 however unworthy he may be. Love on the earth plane is too 
 often an unsatisfactory and thankless love, and is in danger of 
 perishing in the cold, unless sustained by the warmth of Divine 
 and Saintly love, in which we approach something higher than 
 self and are strengthened and enobled thereby. For want of this 
 how many a soul of noble powers, blind to the eternal beauty, 
 has sunk into bitter misanthropy and scorn of all mankind. 
 
 It is evident then that the supernal world calls forth our love 
 by its loveliness, our reverence by its grandeur — our hope by its 
 assurance of happy immortality, and our courage by the assurance 
 
 V 
 
OPERATIVE METHODS. 159 
 
 that we are not perishing worms of the dust, but partakers of a 
 Divine immortal nature which cannot be crushed. 
 
 Inspired thus with the nobler emotions, the healer is brought 
 into sympathy with the supernal love, and as identity of condition 
 implies sympathetic union, he becomes actually inspired by the 
 grand spiritual presence which from higher spheres flows into all 
 who ascend to meet it. It may not be consciously, it may be sim- 
 ply an unconscious portion of his spiritual life, as all inspired sen- 
 timents are — as Ole Bull said that his music was inspired by the 
 mountains of Norway, and Byron said " high mountains are to me 
 a feeling.' ' 
 
 But when the nervous temperament is favorable — when cer- 
 tain anterior interior parts of the brain are well developed, the 
 spiritual power is not merely an unperceived support, but becomes 
 an actual presence, and the attending, inspiring or controlling 
 spirit adds his power to that of a healing medium so generously as 
 to relieve the Jatter of the burden, to give the intuitive diagnosis of 
 disease, and to perform the healing work in giving spiritual 
 vitality, -which is so much more perfect, enduring and inexhausti- 
 ble in the spiritual spheres — the infinite sea of life. 
 
 Aided in this manner, the healer does marvelous works both 
 in diagnosis and in healing, and the advent of this form of prac- 
 tice now, when materialistic philosophy has built up a mass of 
 -physical science concerning living bodies which rises like a Tower 
 of Babel vainly seeking the skies, but which ever fails in exact 
 diagnosis,* and truthful prognosis in difficult cases and fails so 
 often in therapeutic practice — the advent, I say, of a higher form 
 of practice in which spiritual power is concerned, demonstrates the 
 blundering folly and laborious disappointment of human life in 
 the scientific as well as the practical, when alienated from the 
 
 * Dr. -Taft, who recently died at Hartford, Conn., was pronounced at the 
 beginning <>f his professional life, by Dr. Willard Parker, incapable of living over 
 six months, because one of his lungs was about gone ; which opinion being con- 
 firmed by a leading Boston physician was universally accepted. Nevertheless, he 
 lived to the age of sixty-four, and the autopsy astonished the doctors by revealintr 
 a pair of sound lungs. 
 
l6o OPERATIVE METHODS. 
 
 supernal and Spiritual — and the glorious elevation of every depart- 
 ment of life when man is brought into nearer relations to the Divine. 
 
 The learned and eloquent Prof.. Draper was the only physio- 
 logist of eminence who realized the necessity of rising above phys- 
 ical science into the spiritual sphere for that of which the colleges 
 know nothing, which he expressed as follows, in his able text book 
 of human physiology. " We have precisely the same reason for 
 believing the existence of the immortal spirit that we have for 
 knowing that there is an external world. The two facts are of 
 the same order. Of the future continuance of that external world 
 irrespective of onrselves we entertain no doubt; indeed, in certain 
 cases, as in those presented by astronomy, we are able to tell its 
 state a thousand years hence. So long as our attention was con- 
 fined to statical physiology everything connected with the subject 
 now under consideration was enveloped in darkness, but it will be 
 very different when dynamical physiology begins to be cultivated 
 — dynamical physiology which speaks of the course of life, of 
 organs, individuals and races, * * * and then it will 
 appear that the universal opinion of the ages and nations is not a 
 vulgar illusion, # but a solemn philosophical fact." It is to this 
 dynamical physiology that I have given my life, and in which I 
 have found the philosophy of the healing art. In a coming cen- 
 tury the colleges will begin to learn its importance and know that 
 the existence and operation of the soul are " not a vulgar illusion." 
 
 Hoping that the healer has attained the plane of true life and 
 overflowing health which is beneficial to all who approach him, I 
 would then caution him so to maintain his powers as to preserve 
 his own health and efficiency. 
 
 In the first place he should never enter the sick chamber in a 
 hungry, thirsty or enfeebled condition, or when exhausted by treat- 
 ing patients or the cares of business, for in such conditions he is 
 predisposed to absorb the malaria of the sick chamber and the 
 nervauric emanations of the patient, and has less power as a healer. 
 
 He should not expose himself to the physical emanations of 
 the patient, no matter what his condition, for it will require all his 
 energy to resist the vital pathological emanations that impress his 
 
OPERATIVE METHODS. l6l 
 
 sympathetic faculties. He should not breathe the air charged with 
 the respiration and cutaneous emanations of the sick, but should 
 have the chamber thoroughly ventilated before he enters it or have 
 the patient brought into another apartment, and if there is a cur- 
 rent of air should be on the windward side of the patient. 
 
 The best precaution for both patient and healer is to destroy 
 the malaria of human transpiration and household emanations of 
 various kinds by ozone. No costly apparatus is necessary. A 
 small piece of phosphorus placed in a soup plate or saucer of 
 water will slowly generate ozone enough to purify the air of an 
 apartment. When we wish to increase the amount of ozone, we 
 expose the phosphorus, by tilting the plate or diminishing the amount 
 of water, and when we wish to diminish the ozone we cover the 
 phosphorus with water. The emanations of mint, thyme, cedar 
 and pine and most of the odorous oils have in some degree a simi- 
 lar purifying influence upon the air — none perhaps better than 
 thymol. 
 
 In malarious localities, or in houses of imperfect plumbing 
 and drainage, these precautions are very important. The best 
 labors of the healer may be defeated by the insidious influence of 
 impure air. 
 
 Ozone is the natural purifier of the atmosphere, to which it 
 owes its freshness in the forest and mountain heights. It is genera- 
 ted by atmospheric electricity, and may be produced in our apart- 
 ments by machines for frictional electricity. It may also be gen- 
 erated extensively by a mixture of three parts of sulphuric acid and 
 two of the permanganate of potash. 
 
 A plethoric condition of blood vessels is one of the essential 
 conditions of health for all human beings and for animals. The 
 less blood we have the more easily is our vital power exhausted, 
 the more feeble and irritable are the nerves, and the more liable are 
 we to inflammations, colds, fevers and every other form of disease. 
 
 Abundant nourishment is especially necessary to the healer, 
 and when attending feeble, emanciated patients, he finds it neces- 
 sary to eat much more than his ordinary allowance to generate 
 
1 62 OPERATIVE METHODS. 
 
 vital conditions for his patients as well as himself. It would seem 
 mysterious or incredible to the disciples of the materialistic physi- 
 ology, which prevails to-day, that without muscular fatigue or any 
 special evacuation, the mere contact of the hands of the healer 
 with his patient sometimes produces an exhaustion which requires 
 to be supplied with food, and enables him to eat and drink more 
 freely, as if he had been engaged in severe labor. But such is the 
 fact, as I have personally experienced, and it proves that food is 
 the means of supplying something more than mere organized mat- 
 ter — something which may be lost by vital transmission and 
 radiation. 
 
 In the hungry condition, just before meals, the healer should 
 abstain from treating his patients. His diet should be liberal and 
 nourishing (adapted to his own constitution) and a cup of tea or 
 coffee will often add much to his operative power and resistance to 
 disease. In any difficult case he should use some congenial stim- 
 ulus to exalt his powers and resist contagion. Absorption does 
 not occur to any material extent when the blood vessels are very 
 plethoric — hence the free use of liquids, especially such as are of 
 stimulating and tonic qualities, gives great protection against mor- 
 bid contagions. 
 
 When any particular form of disease is prevalent, the healer 
 would find it beneficial to use for himself a sa prophylactic the 
 remedies which that disease requires. In a malarious atmosphere 
 for example two or three grains of dextro quinine taken daily 
 could give him a protection, In some cases he would even find it 
 expedient to take himself the remedy the patient needs, for his 
 own protection, or even to take enough to charge his constitution 
 with its influence and give the influence to the patient by contact. 
 
 Patients may be treated to any extent by external application 
 on the skin of the remedies which they require, and if the opera- 
 tor should apply the required remedies on his hands, he would also 
 find that a pleasant mode of making the required medical impres- 
 sion. The advantage of this course in swallowing the remedies 
 or using them on the hands is the protection it gives the healer and 
 its genial influence on the patient. 
 
OPERATIVE METHODS. 163 
 
 The healer should avoid the atmosphere of disease. His 
 office shoud be very freely ventilated, and in visiting the sick 
 chamber he should have it ventilated before he enters, and should 
 not remain too long ; but above all he should not remain in a -pas- 
 sive condition, but should remain on his feet, either engaged in 
 conversation and giving directions or in active manipulations upon 
 the patient. 
 
 The first thing to be done in almost all cases is to make dis- 
 persive manipulations on the seat of pain or disease. The nerv- 
 aura of the human body is not an imaginary thing ; it is radiated 
 and conducted in every direction ; and when the clothing and at- 
 mosphere are in a very conductive condition, exhaustion is pro- 
 duced as in a moist atmosphere. The bracing effect of a dry 
 non-conductive atmosphere is well known. Metals are good con- 
 ductors, and many a poor sewing woman has had her health 
 seriously impaired by the metalic foot-piece with which she works 
 her machine ; many a writer has had his fingers and writing 
 capacity impaired by the metal instrument used in writing, which 
 would not have occurred if he had used the goose-quill, or a rub- 
 ber, gutta percha, cork or wooden penholder. 
 
 Non-conductors are necessary for our protection. Woollen 
 and silk garments retain the vital conditions and produce a happy 
 effect, different from that of cotton. Linen as the best conductor 
 is objectionable in personal clothing on account of its conductivity. 
 
 The retention of nervaura in the brain by a silk cap has 
 proved very beneficial in impairment of brain power, and the use 
 of silk and woollen clothing is very beneficial to the nervauric 
 healer. 
 
 That the nervaura may be beneficially retained or wastefully 
 lost by our clothing is an evidence of its substantial reality, and 
 every sensitive can feel its emanation from the hands and the 
 various emanations from different parts of the body. 
 
 In disease and pain we may proceed upon the theory that the 
 nervaura of the morbid part is morbid, and should be removed. 
 We frequently find that in manipulating upon the seat of pain, the 
 pain seems to be propelled in the direction of our passes, and if not 
 
164 OPERATIVE METHODS. 
 
 dispersed or scattered, moves along the limb, until at the extremity 
 it departs, The first thing to be done, then, is to make dispersive 
 passes lightly and rapidly to remove the morbid aura, after which 
 the application of the hand produces a wholesome effect. 
 
 The nervaura of the operator's hand applied to the passive 
 patient, all over the person, by gentle passes, or by gentle percus- 
 sion, is a soothing, restorative influence, tending to resist the waste 
 of tissues and vital forces, to diminish fever and excitement, and to 
 promote nutrition and sleep. 
 
 In addition to these effects, it imparts the vital qualities of the 
 operator's constitution, and if he be well supplied with health, 
 benevolence and vital force, gives an increment of these to the 
 patient. Hence, a great deal of good has been done in this way in 
 the practice of what is called animal magnetism, and the percep- 
 tion of the benefits produced by magnetizers has led the materialistic 
 medical profession to attempt an imitation in their own clumsy, 
 mechanical way, which they call massage. 
 
 If the blundering and ignorant practice of any art in disregard 
 of accumulated knowledge is entitled to be called quackery, 
 massage is a conspicuous example of quackery. 
 
 Ignoring all the wonderful cures made by magnetic healers ; 
 ignoring their experimental knowledge and practical directions, 
 which have been so long published and so successfully acted on ; 
 ignoring the very existence of psycho-nervous influences and 
 emanations, physicians demand a class of ignorant subordinates, 
 mechanical rubbers, who operate blindly and often injuriously as 
 well as inefficiently. The ignorance of the massage is not com- 
 pensated by intelligence in the physician, for the latter, if faithful 
 to the dicta and prejudices of his college and clique, has kept 
 himself in willful ignorance. Nevertheless, the rubber, if intelli- 
 gent, will soon find that he produces effects which physicians do 
 not understand, and if honest in attempting to comprehend the 
 treatment, he will learn something of what has been known as 
 animal magnetism, and borrow from that something to render 
 massage more beneficial. His healing skill will then be acceptable, 
 cloaked under the name of massage. But I should be sorry to see 
 
OPERATIVE METHODS. l6^ 
 
 any magnetic healer for the sake of physicians' patronage conceal- 
 ing his artistic skill under the delusive and vulgar title of massage. 
 
 Manual treatment consists in first, dispersive passes on morbid 
 parts ; second, charging the sytem with the nervaura of the opera- 
 ator ; third, stimulating organs by contact and percussion; fourth, 
 changing the vital balance of functions by dispersing from one 
 spot to accumulate at another. 
 
 Excitement accumulated at one spot may be dispersed by dis- 
 persive passes with the hand, by positive currents of electricity, 
 and by sponging the surface with warm or hot water. 
 
 Excitement may be concentrated to any spot by the applica- 
 tion of the hands, by the negative pole of the battery, by the appli- 
 cation of dry heat, and by stimulating plasters. 
 
 By these simple measures we call forth and regulate all the 
 vital forces, rousing lungs, liver, stomach, bowels, kidneys, and 
 the muscular system, and producing all the mental conditions nec- 
 essary to cooperate in the treatment, when we understand the loca- 
 tions presented by Sarcognomy. 
 
 The advantage of treating the constitution locally according to 
 Sarcognomy is that by this method the energies of the patient are 
 specifically roused to aid in the treatment. There are certain con- 
 trolling forces which when roused improve the condition of the 
 entire constitution and respond to the purpose of the healer. 
 
 Thus as the operator stimulates each organ he rouses a bene- 
 ficial response, and is not exhausted. If he stimulates the region 
 of Health he finds a healthful influence returning, which he enjoys 
 and perceives in most cases by his sympathy. 
 
 To call out this reaction and stimulate the constitution of the 
 patient to recovery, as it is stimulated by appropriate medicines, 
 without exhausting the operator, he should not only know exactly 
 what faculties and organs to rouse, but should rouse them actively, 
 instead of passively. If he places himself in an entirely passive 
 and sympathetic condition, with his hands resting on his patient, 
 he absorbs the emanations of the latter, and becomes to some 
 extent the victim of the contagion, so that his health is gradually 
 
1 66 OPERATIVE METHODS. 
 
 undermined. Instead of the operator diffusing health, it is some- 
 times the patient diffusing disease. 
 
 By the active methods which I have recommended the operator 
 repels the influence of disease, and by the knowledge of Sarcog- 
 nomy he is enabled to produce the exact effect that is desired, 
 which might be utterly impossible by any general operation, as 
 when, for example, in a patient suffering from melancholy and 
 hysteric conditions, cheerfulness and tranquillity are restored by 
 placing the hands immediately under the arms. 
 
 But with all these precautions a sensitive healer will gradually 
 absorb morbific influences from contact, sympathy, emanations and 
 the breath of his patient, and needs to be continually guarded. I 
 hope these warnings will not be neglected, but I know that physi- 
 cians and healers habitually neglect themselves, and the approach 
 of morbid conditions is so gentle and insiduous that they take no 
 alarm and find themselves ill unawares. The only safe rule is to 
 demand for ourselves complete, exuberant health at all times, and 
 if there is any decline from that, to look into the cause at once, and 
 remove it. 
 
 The precaution of washing the hands immediately after a treat- 
 ment is a great safe-guard, but where there is not much of the 
 morbid influence each hand may be rapidly brushed by the other. 
 If any medical or morbific influence enters by the arms, passes 
 down the arms and hands may remove it, and after treating a patient 
 a friend may remove from our constitution the deleterious influence 
 by such passes, or we may make them ourselves. 
 
 A still more complete method is, after brushing the hands that 
 have been on the sick, to place them on the well. Select some 
 vigorous, healthy person, and place the hands for a few minutes 
 on his shoulders, about the middle of the shoulder blade. This is 
 the centre of health, and, if such a precaution were regularly 
 observed, the healer instead of losing health by treatment might 
 actually gain. This is the method which should be adopted in the 
 prolonged treatment of a difficult case. The operator should have 
 magazines of health at hand, and draw upon them freely. But 
 
OPERATIVE METHODS. 1 67 
 
 there are some born healers who for many hours increase in power 
 as they relieve the sick, developing their own vitality or drawing 
 from their inspiration. 
 
 Another method which may be adopted in treating difficult 
 cases is to have a healthful and vigorous person cooperate by plac- 
 ing his hands on our shoulders on the region of Health, and thus 
 giving a sustaining power to resist and conquer morbid conditions. 
 
 I cannot impress too strongly on persons of a sensitive tem- 
 perament the necessity of protecting themselves from morbid 
 emanations. True there are some whose vital energy and will 
 enable them to repel morbid influences, but then; are millions who 
 are unconsciously injured ; and the medical profession has greatly 
 increased the disease and mortality from such causes by its stolid 
 materialism , and unwillingness to recognize contagion through 
 the nervous system. My own experience has been quite decisive, 
 as my most serious disturbances of health have come from contact 
 with the sick, and I have on that account never been able to devote 
 much time to the practice of medicine. In Italy contagion is so fully 
 realized by the people that it is not uncommon to destroy "every- 
 thing in the room in which a consumptive has died. In England 
 and America contagion is not understood. A family in Ohio, 
 twenty-five years ago, were importuned by a consumptive in the 
 last stages of life to take him into their house to die, and complied 
 with his wishes, unconscious of danger. Their daughter waited 
 on him until she became so sick she was forced to go away, and 
 became a patient with similar symptoms. She had a strong 
 constitution, but gradually emaciated, losing nearly forty pounds, 
 under the consumptive cough, which has continued twenty-five 
 years in spite of all that could be done, until in despair she called 
 upon me, emaciated and feeble, for medical treatment. Had the 
 family known the transmissibility of disease this misfortune might 
 have been avoided. 
 
CHAPTER IX. 
 
 NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. 
 
 Impressibility the first question, — its various external indications and causes. 
 Influence of love. Improvement at the critical period of life. Test by the 
 hand. Test by the eye. The receptive or impressible condition. The use 
 of medicines. Impressible region of body. Passive and active methods. 
 Influence of warmth, food and medicine. Virtue the best foundation. Four 
 controlling powers — health, brain power, vital force, sexual developement. 
 The shoulder. Plan of the human constitution. Parallelism of the spiritual 
 faculties operating through the brain, and the physical powers displayed in 
 the body. The psycho-dynamic health power — why at the shoulder — its 
 proximity to the life centres — its connection with the spinal centre of 
 power and ethical region of chest — its approbative character — relation to 
 intercostal nerves. The foundation of Sarcognomy. Importance of shoul- 
 der exercises. The shoulder as a regulating region and centre. Treatment 
 on the back. Narrow and exclusive views deprecated. Back to back prac- 
 tice. Fantastic theories and unscientific methods. Narrowness and 
 prejudice. Importance of protecting the shoulders and back. Nature 
 protects the vital regions of head and body. 
 
 In approaching a new patient the first question is whether his 
 impressibility is sufficient to give a satisfactory response to our 
 efforts, or whether he has the coarse, immoveable temperament on 
 which refined influences are wasted, and which we should willingly 
 resign to the heroic treatment of cathartics, emetics, stimulants, 
 narcotics, epipastics and sudorfics. 
 
 The general appearance will generally be sufficient for those 
 who have intuitive perceptions, but there are distinct indications in 
 the delicacy of the skin, and the general refinement and softness 
 of the person, no less than in the cranial configuration. The pre- 
 dominance of the brain in front of the ear assures us that its facul- 
 ties are better adapted to receiving and appreciating impressions 
 than to reaction and resistance. 
 
 All the anterior organs promote impressibility as all the poste- 
 
NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. 169 
 
 rior resist it, but we are specially interested now in only one kind of 
 impressibility, not the impressibility of the intellectual organs of the 
 forehead, which receive knowledge through the senses and are 
 therefore influenced by ideas — nor that of the genial and benevo- 
 lent sentiments which respond to human worth and energy, but the 
 impressibility which yields to subtle influences, to the subtle 
 emanations of the nervous system. 
 
 This impressibility is associated with the breadth of the head 
 at the temples, especially at the anterior part of that region of sen- 
 sibility which I discovered in 1837 - 38 and which has been forci- 
 bly illustrated by Prof. Ferrier, in the cruel experiment on the 
 brain of a monkey. 
 
 This region of Sensibility, at the basis of the middle lobe, 
 extends from the back of the eye sockets along and above the 
 cheek bone to about an inch in front of the cavity of the ear. Its 
 large developement gives us acute sensibility to every thing that 
 can affect our senses, and the more anterior portion of the organ, 
 possessing the more delicate and refined sensibilities, feels the influ- 
 ences that emanate from vital processes, and therefore is affected 
 by them — hence it may be properly called the organ of impressi- 
 bility, above and anterior to which is the region of Dream- 
 ing and Somnambulism, an inch behind the external angle of the 
 brow. 
 
 Breadth of this region is the best indication of impressibility, 
 but delicate impressibility may exist without the breadth, for the 
 organs which give breadth to the temples, are concurrents or coin- 
 cidents of analagous organs at the median line, on the same level, 
 adjacent to the falx (separating the hemispheres) which may 
 produce delicate forms of impressibility and intuition without 
 giving breadth. 
 
 Moreover, impressibility may arise from a frontal tempera- 
 ment, produced not by large frontal organs but by the predominance 
 of the front over a feeble occiput, and by a frontal life. As the 
 predominance of the animal impulses in the mind and temperament 
 may be produced by living a turbulent animal life among coarse 
 
I70 NERVAURir THERAPEUTICS. 
 
 associates, so a predominance of frontal qualities and frontal tem- 
 perament may be produced by living according to the inclinations 
 of the frontal organs — a quiet, amiable, indolent but unselfish 
 life — a sedentary life of delicacy, refinement and social harmony 
 — the effect of which we recognize in the general appearance. 
 
 The proud, heroic and combative elements of character are 
 antagonistic to this impressibility and tend to destroy it. Hence we 
 do not find a great deal of it among the avaricious and jealous 
 competitors for the highest rank and power. There is far more 
 among the humbler classes, whose selfish passions have not grown 
 strong by indulgence, and whose self esteem does not interfere 
 with a reverential esteem for superiority. It is far more abundant, 
 too, among women in whom the hostile combative elements are 
 generally kept in check, and who live generally under the refin- 
 ing (frontal) influences of home. 
 
 Moreover, Impressibility is especially favored by love, the exalt- 
 ed emotion which dominates over the life of woman as it does not over 
 the life of man ; for love tends strongly to that intimate sympathy, 
 unity and responsiveness which occur through Impressibility. (The 
 modus operandi of this belongs to the psychic study of the organs 
 of the brain.) 
 
 Hence the most perfect and interesting exhibitions of Impres- 
 sibility occur among the most lovely and charming people. It is 
 perhaps never absent when the sexual developement first mature s 
 in young women. The period of refinement, romance, beauty and 
 poetic sentiment, when girlhood verges into womanhood is the 
 period of great impressibility, during which the magnetic touch 
 of a mother or friend is competent to regulate all the delicate 
 machinery of life, to ward off incipient disease, and guide the nor- 
 mal development of body and soul. But, alas, it is too often a 
 period of mismanagement by the ignorance of the family and 
 sometimes by the coarse blundering of drug practitioners, igno- 
 rant alike of the soul and the laws of its tenement — knowing only 
 a scanty number of coarse medicaments, and reluctant to increase 
 their number. 
 
 It is here that Therapeutic Sarcognomy will show its vast and 
 
nervauric therapeutics. 171 
 
 benificent power by making this transitional period not one of ner- 
 vous disorder, habitual languor and general inefficiency, or the 
 initial period of grave and life-long diseases, but a period of men- 
 tal brightness, for activity*and developement into permanent health 
 and usefulness, whence a long line of noble posterity. 
 
 It mut not be supposed that the strong and hardy elements of 
 character are incompatible with impressibility, because they antag- 
 onize it. The first individual in whom I discovered the extreme 
 range of the sensitive faculties, Bishop Polk, was a man of strong 
 character, and became a general in the Confederate army, in 
 which he lost his life. 
 
 In addition to the indications of Impressibility in temperament, 
 sex, habits, education and cranial developement, we may observe 
 indications in the face. A large eye with a large -pufil^ and a full- 
 ness or prominence of the cheeks around the eyes, with a rosy tint, 
 are valuable indications, to which we may add a fullness of the 
 upper chest, of the female bosom, and of the region at the lower 
 end of the sternum. 
 
 But we may easily make a satisfactory test with the hands. 
 Let the patient extend his hand horizontally, with the palm up, 
 while we make a pass over it, the tips of our fingers coming 
 within an inch of the surface of his hand. If merely sensitive, he 
 will recognize the warmth of our hands and possibly a slight, very 
 slight tingling or pricking effect. But if impressible, the nervauric 
 emanation from the fingers will produce a slightly cooling sensa- 
 tion, similar to that from a very gentle breeze. 
 
 The individual in whom this occurs will prove impressible to 
 the influence of the hand, and in many cases will yield so readily 
 to nervauric treatment as to make the cure of his diseases 
 a pleasure. 
 
 To illustrate farther the degree of impressibility, we may 
 touch the locality in the temples an inch behind the external angle 
 of the brow, where we find Impressibility and Somnolence. While 
 touching this locality on each side, a calm, dreamy feeling is pro- 
 duced in the subject, making him indifferent to surrounding objects 
 and presently producing a disposition to close the eyes. The 
 
172 NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. 
 
 upper eyelids droop, quiver and wink, and gradually incline to 
 
 remain closed. In the extremely impressible they will be closed 
 
 so firmly as to resist the effort to open them. 
 
 The whole constitution is now in its most ductile or receptive 
 
 condition, and nervauric treatment is sufficient for all its 
 
 diseases. Yet the scientific operator who is familiar with the real 
 
 value of medicines will still find it expedient to employ their 
 assistance in accelerating and perfecting the cure, for medicines 
 
 wisely adapted to the case are as congenial and wholesome as our 
 common food. There is, indeed, no. dividing line between food 
 and medicine. What is commonly called food is the medicine for 
 the hunger, thirst and exhaustion caused by exertion and exposure. 
 What is called medicine is the food for constitutions more than 
 exhausted by adverse influences. Ferruginous and phosphoric 
 preparations are the food for organs affected by degenerate or 
 deglobulized blood. The coffee and wine which rouse from the 
 prostration by heat and unwholesome air are as medical, only in a 
 milder degree, .as the quinine that resists malaria, and the whiskey 
 which saves the prostrated victim from the effect of the rattle- 
 snake's venom. 
 
 As the object of the healer is success in, controlling the consti- 
 tution of his patient to remove his diseases, it is proper that he 
 should aim to increase and maintain the impressibility upon which 
 his success depends. Hence, if he initiates his operations by 
 touching the temples until the eyes display the effect, he facilitates 
 his subsequent labors. 
 
 I think it preferable, however, to produce the impressible con- 
 dition on the corresponding sensitive and somnolent region of the 
 body by placing the hand on the lower part of the chest, just below 
 the sternum (breast-bone). 
 
 This operation, though not invigorating, is very valuable, as 
 it produces a rather pleasant, passive tranquillity, especially as the 
 patient should be lying down when it is attempted, which is 
 indeed the best position for all therapeutic operations. 
 
 In consequence of the susceptibility thus established, the 
 patient feels the entire influence of his healer by coming into com- 
 
NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. 1J3 
 
 plete sympathy with him. The hand conveys his entire personality, 
 and this operation alone would in many cases work curative results 
 by subordinating the morbid constitution of the patient to the 
 healthy constitution of the healer — producing by this simple 
 operation results which the practitioners of animal magnetism aim 
 to attain by a great variety of passes. 
 
 While \ would recommend this initial process for the subdual 
 of the patient, I must qualify the recommendation by the sugges- 
 tion that it may sometimes be objectionable, for while it increases 
 the susceptibility of the subject it tends also to increase that of the 
 operator, and by his passive condition to make him receptive of 
 the morbid influences of the patient. When these influences from 
 a strong or extremely morbid constitution are too strong, the oper- 
 ator should not assume this passive condition. He may conduct 
 the operation more actively as by a gentle patting or tapping oper- 
 ation* and produce the same effect as by the mere application of 
 the hand. 
 
 What other influences it may be asked will increase the sus- 
 ceptibility. Warmth will contribute much ; it draws the circulation 
 to the surface, increases the susceptibility, and if carried far, 
 diminishes the muscular energy (w r hich belongs to the occipital 
 or resisting region and .antagonizes the amiable elements) . Hence 
 warm climates have more than twice the susceptibility of the cold, 
 and the nervauric healer who would win the greatest and most 
 pleasant triumphs should visit the tropical regions, in which he will 
 find almost the entire population subject to his power. In Mexico 
 and South America the results will be far more briliant than in the 
 United States. 
 
 For this reason impressibility is greater in summer than in 
 winter, and in warm apartments than in cold ones. 
 
 But the moral warmth is as necessary as the physical, and 
 
 * The late Dr. W. McDowell (the first writer upon consumption who devel- 
 oped its philosophy and rational treatment as far back as 1840) told me that an 
 overseer in Virginia was accustomed to make a wager that he could put any one to 
 sleep by force. To do this he would have the man seized by assistants and thrown 
 upon his back on the barn floor, where he was held while the operator, by a steady 
 and gentle patting on the epigastric region, would put him to sleep. 
 
174 NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. 
 
 families ruled by love and harmony will not fail to develope sus- 
 ceptibility. Music also greatly promotes it, especially vocal music 
 — so does the contemplation of beauty in nature or art, and habits 
 of contemplation. There is a great deal of difference between the 
 fashionable music which is a mere combination of force and skill, 
 and the music of feeling like that of the Scotch which has the best 
 influence. 
 
 Diseases of an acute, active character generally promote sus- 
 ceptibility, and increase the sensitiveness to remedies, which 
 explains the success of the infinitesimal homoeopathic remedies, 
 nicely adapted to the disordered organ. Yet many chronic dis- 
 eases in which the nervous system is impaired rather diminish the 
 susceptibility. 
 
 The influence of food and medicine upon susceptibility is 
 worthy of attention. The sensitiveness and irritability of the 
 nerves is increased by a low diet. Animal food tends to muscular 
 developement, which is antagonistic to the refining elements ; veg- 
 etable food and fruits are more appropriate for the frontal and 
 superior regions of the brain. Flesh diet and articles difficult of 
 digestion antagonize impressibility, but articles which gently stim- 
 ulate the frontal organs favor it. 
 
 Coffee, tea and tobacco promote susceptibility, although their 
 excessive use impairs the health, and medicines of the anodyne or 
 nervine class have a tendency to promote it. There are many 
 articles, such as coca, lavender, valerian, cypripedium, vanilla, 
 etc., which, by their tonic and restorative influence, are beneficial 
 to the nervous system, and thus indirectly promote a healthy 
 susceptibility. 
 
 I think it will ultimately be realized that the predominance of 
 virtue and refinement is the best foundation for impressibility, and 
 I doubt not that in "the good time coming" when humanity shall 
 have attained a nobler developement, our entire population, even in 
 cold climates, will become amenable to nervauric healing, and the 
 aggregate vital power of society will sustain each individual 
 against infirmity and disease by an all embracing sympathy and 
 friendship. 
 
NERV AURIC THERAPEUTICS. 173 
 
 Four Controlling Powers. — The perfect developement of 
 the constitution into health and efficiency depends mainly upon 
 four localities, in which the vital forces are concentred, which .may 
 be called the regions of 
 
 PERFECT HEALTH, 
 
 BRAIN POWER, 
 
 VITAL FORCE, AND 
 SEXUAL DEVELOPEMENT. 
 
 The region of perfect health or normal perfection is at the 
 shoulder blades or superior posterior region of the chest. 
 
 This discovery carries us far away from all the crude philoso- 
 phies and speculations of biologists. It is so great a departure 
 from all pre-existing conceptions as to require some explanation to 
 make it clearly intelligible to a philosophic enquirer. 
 
 Through long familiarity, the new philosophy has become to 
 me a familiar and simple view of life, but in sympathizing with one 
 who dwells in the old forms of scientific thought, I perceive the 
 necessity of giving an explanation of this new view of the consti- 
 tution of man. I do not wish the therapeutic practitioner to know 
 only the manual, of treatment and the localities he must rouse, 
 without understanding as well as practicable the plan and philoso- 
 phy of the human constitution, which control his operations. 
 
 The fundamental plan is this, that every function of human 
 life has a distinct local apparatus. There is no organ without a 
 function, and no function without an organ. If we could deter- 
 mine a -priori the functions of life we should know what organs 
 must exist. But the a -priori method has always been a failure 
 and delusion. We know nothing without observation and experi- 
 ment. The existence of such a science as Sarcognomy has never 
 been realized or ever imagined in human speculation, and the spec- 
 ulations of the metaphysicians have only intensified igorance of the 
 constitution of man. 
 
 But this statement of functions and organs gives only a very 
 limited glimpse of the truth ; we find in the body a great many 
 structures for the special purposes of physical existence, and in 
 the brain a great many structures for the purposes of our spiritual 
 
176 NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. 
 
 existence. The brain powers are omni-relative — they face all 
 possible aspects or relations of life, and qualify for all possible 
 duties. They have no mechanical or limited -character, and do 
 not resemble the mechanical and limited functions of the body. 
 Nevertheless, they control and inspire the body, wielding all its 
 powers for their own purposes, and although there is so wide a 
 difference between the genial and spiritual powers connected with 
 the brain, and the special physical powers of the body, there is yet 
 established by Infinite wisdom a wonderful parallelism, unity, con- 
 sociation and cooperation, as if one were the echo of the other — 
 not by any arbitrary decree and inscrutable fixedness of order, 
 but by a marvelous unity of purpose, and practical cooperation 
 which enables us to find for every part of the brain a correspond- 
 ing part of the body, with which it sympathizes, and cooperates 
 in health and in sickness, the details of which cooperation are 
 revealed in Sarcognomy, the science which shows the marvelous 
 adaptation of all physical structures (apparently only for physical 
 purposes), to .sustain, obey and unitize with the grand spiritual 
 powers which in man typify the Supreme Creator. 
 
 The spiritual or phycho-dynamic power or faculty which 
 we do not define but only suggest when we use the word health, 
 is in the psychic sense the centre of our impulses, energies and 
 affections, so related that in its action it calls forth a harmonious 
 combination of sustaining, impelling and regulating powers, as 
 has been already explained in the chapters on health and the spi- 
 nal system. 
 
 Why is this power manifested in the shoulder and why is the 
 shoulder a suitable location for a response to the spiritual faculty 
 of Healthy Animation. 
 
 The middle of the shoulder is adjacent to the great life centre 
 in the chest, where the influx that sustains physical life by oxygen 
 is in continual progress, and the efflux that bears vital conditions 
 and nourishment to every organ of the body from the heart is also 
 in continual progress, and the extent of these two processes is 
 nearly a correct measure of the amount of physiological life, 
 evolved in the body. The large developement of that region, and 
 
NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. I 77 
 
 consequently of the posterior part of the chest, necessarily implies 
 an abundance of vital action. Moreover the shoulder as distin- 
 guished from the chest is an appanage of the cephalic region of 
 the spinal cord, in which as heretofore explained, is found the 
 maximum vital power, and it covers the distribution nerves from the 
 cephalic region of the cord, which forms the brachial plexus, and 
 gives the arms all their power. The shoulder stands between the 
 spinal origin and the muscular and cutaneous distribution of these 
 nerves, and the posterior or scapular region of the shoulder re- 
 ceives its (sub and supra-scapular) nerves from the brachial plexus. 
 Thus the scapular region is associated with the highest vital ele- 
 ments of lungs, heart, spine and arms, and its developement must in- 
 dicate both power and activity. But in addition to this, the shoul- 
 der has an ethical character, derived from its proximity to and con- 
 nection with the summit of the lungs and the corresponding por- 
 tion of the spine. The summit of the lungs is an ethical region, 
 the region that sympathizes with the superior aspect of the brain, 
 the region of the virtues, and gives the upward determination to 
 the vital forces. It is well-known and often expressed in emo- 
 tional language that the bosom responds to or is agitated by the 
 higher emotions. 
 
 Thus the shoulder in addition to its energies is associated with 
 the kindly emotions and responsive to the love which belongs to the 
 mammary region of the chest. The faculty of healthy animation, 
 in the brain region to which the shoulder region corresponds is the 
 faculty which attracts affection by its abundant and harmonious ex- 
 uberance of life and which craves and wins love, which it seeks 
 with approbative zeal. The word approbativeness is indeed an 
 appropriate name for it, for it desires to be loved and continually 
 seeks not applause but affection. 
 
 The adjacent organ however is called Approbativeness be- 
 cause it especially seeks approval, sympathy and admiration. 
 
 This health region on the scapula is on the line of the inter- 
 costal nerves which from the upper dorsal region (its first five ver- 
 tebrae) extend around the summit of the chest, supplying its in- 
 teguments and the intercostal muscles —the integuments of the 
 
1^8 NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. 
 
 amiable region and the muscles of inspiration for the expansion of 
 the upper part of the chest. As the anterior part of the trunk like 
 the anterior part of the brain is distinguished by impressional sen- 
 sibility, while the spine represents reactive energy, the middle of 
 the scapula represents rather more of the impressional capability 
 (which is necessary to the amiable character) than the spinal re- 
 gion, while it also represents the general benevolent or virtuous in- 
 fluence of the summit of the chest and brain. 
 
 Let us return now to practical therapeutic sarcognomy, for a 
 complete demonstration of the rationale and modus operandi of the 
 functions of life is not designed in this volume, and this -partial 
 illustration of one function is designed only to show the reader that 
 sarcognomy stands upon solid scientific fonndations in anatomy as 
 well as psychology, and is neither a matter of analogy and corre- 
 spondence suggested by ingenious speculation, nor a crude result 
 of careless experiments, but has been evolved by careful experi- 
 ments guided by philosophic principles, and has been confirmed 
 still farther during the last forty years by the test of its practical 
 success in guiding the treatment of the sick. 
 
 As we find the centre of normal life or healthy energy in the 
 shoulder — the centre which happily combines the pleasing, honor- 
 able and attractive elements with physical efficiency, longevity and 
 conquest of disease, it follows that shoulder development should be 
 a part of hygiene that lifting, rowing, fencing, handling weights, 
 swinging on the arms and other suitable exercises should be pre- 
 scribed as an aid to our treatment, and that in the treatment, the lead- 
 ing prominence should be given to shoulder methods. 
 
 Thus in treating the various organs, we may keep one hand 
 on Health, while stimulating any other region, which will give a 
 normal direction to each excitement and prevent it from going to 
 excess. Under this influence from Health medical treatment will 
 have a genial effect, which otherwise might prove disturbing and 
 irritating, and the little disturbing influences from lack of sympa- 
 thy or congeniality or other petty annoyances will be overlooked or 
 unfelt. 
 
 The same precaution should be observed in operations up- 
 
Nervauric therapeutics. 179 
 
 on the head. One hand extended upon the superior posterior re- 
 gion which embraces Health will continually do good and regulate 
 all other operations. 
 
 It may also be observed that manipulations or passes toward 
 the region of Health will have a better effect than those in opposite 
 or different directions, unless there be some special reason for the 
 latter., as when downward manipulations are used to accelerate the 
 action of the bowels, or disperse morbid conditions. 
 
 Invigorating passes should be made backward, soothing and 
 regulative, upwards, stimulating or exciting may sometimes be 
 made downwards, but these if continued long become exhausting 
 and injurious. Such injurious effects frequently occur in electrical 
 treatment. The tendency most favorable generally is backward 
 and upward. 
 
 If the healer would approach a number of his patients, either 
 standing erect or lying down, and administer vigorous passes from 
 the hypochondriac or from the hypogastric region upwards 
 and backwards, he would find that they all feel refreshed and invig- 
 orated, and like the operation. 
 
 I do not perceive any possible harm to arise from the continued 
 and vigorous exertion of the health region. Yet in its highest en- 
 ergy it creates an abundance of vital and moral power which must 
 crave a field of exertion and would rebel against the cramped situa- 
 tions in which many are found. It is here to be observed that as we 
 descend the back the influence becomes more active at the lower 
 margin of the scapula assuming the character of playfulness and 
 further down the self-reliant impulses which would not be content 
 with a quiet life. A more quiet influence is found higher up — a 
 healthful serenity and fortitude being found at the top of the shoul- 
 der, as we find it at the summit of the head, vertically above the 
 cavity of the ear, adjacent to the median line. 
 
 The sensitive, depressing hypochondriac influences which are 
 associated with the regions of the solar plexus and anterior margin 
 of the liver, and which in diseases of this region display them- 
 selves in gloomy sensitiveness, are antagonized by the region of 
 buoyant fortitude, which lies between the side of the neck and the 
 
l8o NERV AURIC THERAPEUTICS. 
 
 exterior aspect of the shoulder. Hence this region is disturbed by 
 all affections or irritations of the liver, but not by its inactivity. 
 And as this is the locality at which the suprascapular nerve pro- 1 
 ceeds from the superior portion of the brachial plexus (the portion 
 which has the closest sympathy with the brain) this fact explains 
 the pathological mystery that affections of the liver indicate their 
 existence in many cases by a pain in the shoulder in the region 
 supplied by the suprascapular nerve. The phrenic nerve which 
 communicates with the liver as well as the diaphragm has com- 
 missural branches which connect with one of the nerves to the 
 shoulder. 
 
 If the region of health be so important, the suggestion might 
 arise that treatment through this region alone would be all suffi- 
 cient, and no doubt a successful practice might be conducted in 
 that way, for the public accustomed to the delays and failures of 
 old medical systems, does not know enough to understand what 
 ought to be expected from a course of treatment or how to distin- 
 guish rationar treatment from that of pedantic ignorance. 
 
 The greater importance of the shoulder region, the spinal col- 
 umn and the entire back should not lead us to neglect other re- 
 gions ; we should carefully avoid that common fault of narrow 
 minds, concentration upon one idea or one method to the neglect 
 of everything else. A successful practice might be conducted 
 solely by treating the back of the trunk and the head or applying 
 tonic plasters upon these posterior regions or even tonic metals. 
 
 A fantastic class of healers has arisen who make their cures 
 by sitting back to back with the patient — a method which ought 
 to be efficient in imparting vitality and health directly from one 
 spinal column to the other. If this method had been introduced 
 in a modest and intelligent manner it would not have been pre- 
 sented as the hobby of a narrow mind to*supercede all other meth- 
 ods. Back to back treatment is one of the numerous methods 
 which may be employed by those who fancy it, and it is certainly 
 recommended by its simplicity, to those who would not burden 
 their minds with scientific knowledge. It is an application of the 
 entire region of vital energy, in the operator, to the corresponding 
 
NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. ±8l 
 
 Region of the subject, and therefore cannot fail to do good and 
 make many cures which might be made more satisfactorily and 
 speedily if the operators had proper instruction in Sarcognomy. 
 
 The time occupied in sitting in this manner is no doubt profit- 
 ably spent by those who know but this and nothing more. Yet, in 
 the same time an instructed healer would not only rouse the vital 
 force of the posterior region with his hands but produce all desira- 
 ble effects on other portions of the body and the head. 
 
 The back to back process is too simple an affair to impress 
 the popular mind, unless dignified by a mystical theory, which 
 may give the opportunity for a pretentious and transcendental met- 
 aphysics. The theory of the nonexistence of matter and of dis- 
 eases which answers its purpose as an amusing philosophic toy, 
 seems strangely out of place when brought forward as a sober 
 practical truth to guide a practical operation ^performed by and 
 upon material bodies. The absurdity of the theory is its greatest 
 fascination. As there are persons who, when on the brink of a 
 great precipice, are strongly impelled to throw themselves off, so 
 there are many who in the presence of a great mystery, or what 
 seems to be such, are tempted to plunge into the deepest gulf of 
 absurdity that is visible, as we see in some of the intensely absurd 
 theological dogmas that have ruled the civilized world. 
 
 The upper posterior portion of the trunk — the shoulders and 
 the space between them being the tonic region of the constitution, 
 all processes are invigorating which concentrate the vital forces to 
 that part. Stimulating and tonic plasters are therefore beneficial on 
 this region, and warm clothing has a tonic effect. The capes of 
 the overcoat formerly in fashion were really useful and the shawl 
 is one of the most valuable of female garments, the use of which 
 has been of great benefit to health and life, on the other hand the 
 chilling of the shoulder region is pecularly prostrating to all the 
 powers of life, and it has been maintained by intelligent physicians 
 that the chills ascribed to malaria were more properly attributable 
 to the depressing influence of nocturnal cold operating on the 
 shoulders. 
 
 When riding or walking on a clear night with a cloudless sky 
 
182 NerVAuric therapeutics. 
 
 the shoulders are exposed tothe intense cold of the planetary inter- 
 spaces with which they are exchanging radiation. Unless protect- 
 ed by an umbrella or heavy shoulder clothing, this is a dangerous 
 exposure to delicate persons. Still more dangerous to sit at night be- 
 yond the shelter of the house or porch ; but the injury is far less 
 when the sky is covered with clouds, which reflect the warmth of 
 the earth and shelter from the stellar region ot cold so that the earth 
 surface is less cooled and there is less dew. 
 
 In accordance with these principles mankind generally under- 
 stand that the back must be well clothed, and we are accustomed 
 to speak of clothing as for the back, while we are accustomed to 
 leave the coat open in front. A similar exposure of the back 
 would be so injurious it is never attempted. The opening of the 
 vest at the middle of the breast, even when facing the cold wind, 
 is harmless, while the very same exposure between the shoulders 
 would be dangerous — for the back is the tonic, and the front the 
 atonic region. The front receives impressions, and the back re-acts 
 and resists by ite own spontaneity, sustaining a vital force, which 
 the front tends to expend. 
 
 Nature has carefully guarded the seats of vital force. It is 
 the front of the head, as well as the front of the body that faces the 
 cool breeze without injury. The top, the side and the back of the 
 head which are the seats of our vital forces, are well protected by 
 hair. The front, the forehead, the seat of unvital and devitalizing 
 intellect is bare. So are the anterior parts of the temples and the 
 upper part of the face, in which all the functions are non-vital or 
 exhausting. The chilling of these regions may retard intelligence 
 and pliability, but never injures health or life — even the loss of a 
 considerable amount of brain in these anterior regions is not a 
 serious affair for health or vitality. While the passive, sensitive and 
 yielding functions of organs behind the upper part of the face, ren- 
 der them so unnecessary to vital power as not to require much pro- 
 tection ; the organs covered by the lower part of the face are highly 
 necessary to life, embracing, as they do, calorific, respiratory mus-, 
 cular and digestive capacities, and hence the beard thickly covers 
 precisely the regions which need protection, and when an intensely 
 
NERVAURIC THERAPEUTICS. 183 
 
 cold wind renders the warmest clothing necessary, a woollen wrap- 
 ping around the lower part of the face and neck, where nature has 
 placed the beard and hair, is worth more than five times the amount 
 of clothing applied anywhere else. 
 
 Returning to our subject — the posterior regions of body and 
 brain are protected by being in the rear and thus escaping collisions. 
 Their life power residing in the brain and spinal cord, is protected 
 by the very strong bones of the skull and the spinal column. 
 Hence the position instinctively assumed by the sick and infirm, 
 lying horizontally on the back, gives great preservative and recup- 
 erative power by the warmth which it gives the spinal column, and 
 the predominance it gives the brain, which is relieved from the tax 
 of muscular effort, and has a better blood snpply in the horizontal 
 than in the erect position. The advantage of the horizontal posi- 
 tion is sometimes lost by those who after lying on the back turn on 
 the side without bringing warm clothing against the back to main- 
 tain its warmth. The importance of the spinal column is illustra- 
 ted by heat as well as cold. Very injurious and debilitating 
 effects are experienced by those who stand in such a position that 
 the back is continually exposed to the heat of a fire or stove. 
 
 As we know the nervous system to be the seat of life and the 
 measure of its developement, we next proceed to consider the 
 brain power. 
 
CHAPTEE X. 
 
 THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 
 
 Brain power and its location. Prior developement of the brain. False doctrines 
 corrected. Brain power compared to Health power. Connection of the 
 latter with Moral Power and conduct. Local treatments Vital force and 
 sexual vitality. Locations of Vital Force. Its distinction from Health. 
 Influence of Vital Force when roused. Its connection with Nutrition. Lo- 
 cation of the latter. Its influence on the constitution. Importance to inva- 
 lids. Treatment through brain. Digestion. Its connection with the spine 
 and with the gastric region. Organ of Alimentiveness. Its depressing influ- 
 ence. Buoyant Fortitude. Its moral association. Fasting. Influence of 
 Firmness, pathognonricalty explained. Hunger and appetite. Best method 
 of treating stomach. Physiological influences of firmness and the shoulder. 
 Gastric irritations and emesis. Gastric medicines. Proper manipulations. 
 Region of assimilative absorption. Moral forces concerned. How to pro- 
 mote assimilation. Spiritual relations of this region. Intellectual and oc- 
 cipital influences. Retentive power of the latter. Relaxing power of the 
 former. Contrast of the Adhesive and intellectual regions. Adhesiveness 
 on the occiput and on the back. Combativeness, its location and influence. 
 Importance of Adhesiveness to patients. Importance in society and busi- 
 ness. Retentive influence of the back. Its explanation. Region of business 
 energy. Effect of spinal injuries. Of repletion. Cooperation of the ener- 
 gies. Conservative and destructive agencies. Upper and lower part of the 
 abdomen. 
 
 Brain Power in Sarcognomy (cooperation of the body with 
 the brain) belongs to the cephalic region of the cord. Why it is 
 located there and how it operates were fully illustrated in the chap- 
 ter on the Spinal Region. 
 
 The recognition of the brain and its cooperative corporeal re- 
 gion as the seat of life is a great step in the transition from the old 
 to the new physiology. It is sustained, not only by the clear dem- 
 onstration that life is an influx, which was referred to in the sec- 
 ond chapter, but also by the priority of the formation of the brain 
 in the earliest embryonic condition of vertebrate animals. In the 
 
THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 185 
 
 earliest charges of the vitelline substance of the chick,- the blasto- 
 derm exhibits a mucous and a serous stratum or hypoblast and ep- 
 iblast — from this latter are evolved the cerebro-spinal system and 
 the cutaneous surface. Originating thus together they preserve a 
 parallelism and sympathy which are illustrated in Sarcognomy. In 
 the developement of the cerebro-spinal system two dorsal laminoe 
 rise up on each side of the primitive groove of the blastoderm and 
 unite so as to enclose a channel for the cerebro-spinal system in 
 which the brain and spinal cord are developed. In this develope- 
 ment the cephalic end takes precedence in time, and is much the 
 largest part, which shows the priority of the brain in developement in 
 connection with its primitive centres the pituitary and pineal bodies. 
 
 Where life is regarded as the product of chemical operations 
 taking place all over the body, and the brain as merely an intel- 
 lectual, conscious and volitional centre, it appears rather as an or- 
 gan of vital expenditure and source of weakness than as the seat 
 and source of vital power. Hence we have been abundantly 
 warned against extreme culture and mental precocity as endanger- 
 ing or consuming vitality, and illustrative examples have not been 
 lacking. Education was thus made to appear a burdensome if 
 not a dangerous affair for delicate constitutions. 
 
 Yet these notions were all scientific errors and practical mis- 
 takes. The proper cultivation of the brain is the most efficient 
 method of developing true life, health and longevity, and by act- 
 ing upon this principle I am enabled now in my seventieth year to 
 enjoy in buoyant health, vigor and happiness the maximum capacity 
 of my life. 
 
 The great mistake of most biological theorists has arisen from 
 their ignorance of the true character of the brain, in which they 
 recognize only what they are compelled to admit, intellection and 
 the volitionary guidance of muscular motion, both of which are 
 exhaustive operations, expending vitality, while they perceive 
 nothing of the great energizing powers of the superior and poste- 
 rior regions. The mental developement and excitement which are 
 injurious to the young are solely intellectual, and when education is 
 confined to forcing or training the intellectual faculties it is necessa- 
 
l86 THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 
 
 rily exhausting and injurious in its tendencies, of which all aca- 
 demic colleges and universities are today examples. 
 
 But the early developement and power of the brain in its 
 higher vitalizing regions, so far from being exhaustive or injurious, 
 is the precursor of a noble and powerful manhood, and the evils 
 just mentioned result not from the normal, but from the abnormal, 
 one-sided growth or culture, the premature developement of the 
 sensitive and debilitating faculties at the expense of the vital forces. 
 The boy whose manly courage enabled him to play the part of a 
 man in assisting his family, taking care of his brothers, managing 
 the live stock on a farm or transacting business for his father is 
 really and substantially precocious by a normal developement of 
 the brain, and hence displays a manly vigor beyond his fellows, 
 ending in an energetic and able manhood. 
 
 Brain power, the power that vitalizes and sustains everything 
 belongs to the region protected by the hair and centralizes to the 
 centre of the scalp from which the hair radiates. It manifests it- 
 self in the strength of the voice, the power of the eye, the energy 
 and impressiveness of the bearing, the vigor with which every 
 faculty acts, and the power of endurance. 
 
 The action of the cephalic region (brain power) is somewhat 
 more powerful but less harmonious than that of the Health region, 
 and commands more respect than love or admiration. The Health 
 region wins by a greater degree of sweetness, grace and insensibility 
 to injury. How pleasing the thought that the most perfect enjoy- 
 ment of life and efficiency are associated with the most attractive 
 manners and the most faithful attention to our social duties. 
 
 It is one of the most interesting and instructive revelations 
 of anthropology that every departure from the proper line of con- 
 duct is a departure from perfect health and enjoyment, and therefore 
 the more Godlike the life, the greater its internal rewards, although 
 there may be suffering inflicted by those who, living on a lower 
 plane, are a cause of unhappiness both to themselves and to others. 
 
 The virtue which is thus rewarded and which is associated 
 with the upper posterior region of the head and trunk is not the 
 passive virtue which does no wrong act and cultivates unselfishness, 
 
THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 187 
 
 as the supreme purpose, but the active virtue which is ever energetic 
 in discharging duties, in giving pleasure to all around and exerting 
 a wholesome, attractive, uplifting and beneficent influence in all in- 
 tercourse, while devoted and zealous in industry. 
 
 The stimulation of the Cephalic and Hygienic regions would 
 be enough but for the reason that the departures from health being 
 located in different parts of the body need the direct assistance of 
 the operator's vitality at each location in addition to the influence 
 transmitted from controlling centres. Still ti is a well established 
 though marvelous fact that influences may be transmitted from the 
 soul and brain, which with supreme power dissipate the most ca- 
 lamitous and long standing chronic diseases. 
 
 Two of the most important inferior regions for local treatment 
 are those of vital force and sexual vitality. 
 
 Vital Force, situated on the summit of the posterior aspect of the 
 thigh, is not the perfect and satisfactory vital power which is found 
 in the shoulder, but a similar power on a lower plane — a power 
 displayed in the muscular system and shown by indomitable en- 
 ergy and restless activity, yet not so restless as the influence of the 
 lower part of the thigh. 
 
 We find this vital force on the head, about an inch behind and 
 interior to the lower end of the mastoid process (behind the ear) and 
 its influence gives us a consciousness of physical power. I recol- 
 lect how distinctly I felt it sympathetically start about forty years ago, 
 from contact with the organ in the head of an impressible subject 
 who was a good walker — a feeling as if a walk of ten miles 
 would be a pleasure. 
 
 The difference between the organs of Vitality, or Vital Force, 
 and Health is, that the latter gives a full harmonious developement 
 of character or personality, including physical capacity and endur- 
 ance ; while the former gives physical power alone, without 
 sustaining health or firmness, and without moral government or 
 character. Acting in predominance, it would give the desperate 
 and hostile energy of the outlaw, whose crimes have arrayed the 
 world against him. In this predominance it destroys the moral 
 sense, and concentrates all the power of the brain and soul in the 
 
l88 THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 
 
 impulsion of the muscular system. Yet in the normal course of 
 life the basilar forces of the brain do not run into such evils. On 
 the contrary, each basilar organ seems to act as a radical power, 
 sustaining the action of a higher faculty, as will be explained in 
 my system of Anthropology. This vital force is antagonistic to 
 the humane and tender sentiment which is most deeply interested 
 in the condition of others, and which causes some persons to faint 
 at the sight of great suffering or bloodshed. 
 
 In the invalid this power needs rousing, unless his condition 
 be one of violence and passion, tending to insanity. The body 
 being in an enfeebled condition the spinal cord is not acting with 
 proper vigor, and needs an influence descending from the brain, 
 which is elicited by the organ of Vitality, for its line of action is 
 directly downward. Under this influence the deadly languor of 
 disease gives place to more natural feelings ; debility is dimin- 
 ished ; all the organs begin to act in a more normal way, as if 
 they had received their appropriate medicine. The process of 
 decay and dis'solution is checked, and healthy nutrition is revived ; 
 for the region of nutrition is adjacent to that of Vital Force, and 
 goes with it by proximity. In applying the hand upon Vitality it 
 should be extended so as to cover the region of Nutrition or 
 growth, which is situated a little more anteriorly, just below the 
 head of the thigh-bone. 
 
 As one stands erect with his arms hanging by his side the 
 wrist falls upon the head of the thigh-bone (femur) ; if then the 
 wrist be moved backward just behind the femur the palm of the 
 hand would fall upon the region of Nutrition, the influence of 
 which produces growth and improves the capillary circulation. 
 This region being usually more developed in women than in men 
 enables them to maintain their proper developement and plump- 
 ness with a smaller amount of food, and to nourish without injury 
 or loss the children whom they sustain during gestation and 
 suckling. 
 
 A deficient developement of Nutrition produces a tendency to 
 emaciation, no matter how ravenous the appetite. Persons inclined 
 to corpulence or embonpoint are often small eaters (especially 
 
TtlE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 189 
 
 females), their power of nutrition being so great that little 
 food is needed. 
 
 The stimulation of the organ of Nutrition is very important in 
 all nervous constitutions. The direct influence of the organ is 
 soothing and comfortable — its ultimate effect overcomes the ner- 
 vous condition which is mainly due to a deficient supply of blood, 
 a deficiency which may be overcome by the organ of Nutrition, 
 with the aid of good food, to which phosphates, hypophosphites 
 and a very small quantity of iron, make an important addition, 
 effecting the developement of blood. 
 
 In the majority of invalids both Nutrition and Vitality need 
 stimulation, and the hand can easily be applied so as to cover both. 
 One may stimulate himself in these regions by applying the hands, 
 and this application upon retiring at night or before rising in the 
 morning will have an appreciable effect, as I have verified in my'own 
 person, although one is too much accustomed to his own personal 
 aura to be as strongly affected by it as by the influence of another. 
 
 These localities on the body explain the very injurious effects 
 of sitting on a cold stone, or the cold wet ground ; they also explain 
 the sedative effects of a very warm sitz bath and the energizing 
 • effects of a cold sitz bath so conducted as to promote reaction. 
 
 The effects produced at the summit of the thigh are satisfac- 
 torily produced also at the basis of the brain. Thus when the 
 hand grasps the junction of the head and neck covering the base 
 of the cerebellum, a most beneficial, vitalizing and restorative 
 influence is diffused throughout the person, which is increased by 
 placing the hand at the summit of the thigh. 
 
 The region of Nutrition does not embrace all the nutrient 
 functions of the constitution. There are three other influences to 
 be considered — those of digestion, absorption and tonic retention 
 or resistance to dissolution. 
 
 Digestion depends upon the energy of the stomach which is 
 sustained by the lower half of the dorsal region of the spine, upon 
 which the hand should be placed for its invigoration. In accord- 
 ance with the general principle that power is located posteriorly, 
 but excitement farther forward, midway to the front we shall find 
 
±90 THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 
 
 the hungry or digestive influence at the margin of the ribs on the 
 side, a little in front of the middle line, and nearly on the level of 
 the stomach. This corresponds with the gastric region on the 
 head, in front of the cavity of the ear, which is really the organ 
 of Alimentiveness located by phrenologists heretofore higher than 
 it should be. In stimulating this locality we assist and accelerate 
 digestion, producing, if continued sufficiently long, a feeling of 
 hunger. This feeling, the product of the Alimentive organ, is more 
 depressing than stimulating, and tends to produce gloomy, selfish 
 and irritable feelings. Hence every one knows that it is not judi- 
 cious to seek favors from any one when he is hungry. The expla- 
 nation is that the Alimentive organ is in the midst of the group of 
 selfish, gloomy and indolent feelings. Hence, whenever it is over 
 active, whether from hunger, dyspepsia, gluttony, drunkenness or 
 noxious, nauseous or poisonous ingesta, it greatly lowers the vital 
 forces and moral energies. One attains his maximum energy only 
 after the irritation of hunger is relieved by food and the gastric 
 action roused by the food has subsided, from its digestion, when 
 the buoyant energy caused by the addition of nourishment to the 
 blood antagonizes gastric action and the stomach ceases to dis- 
 turb us. 
 
 Buoyant Fortitude is the* character of the region which antag- 
 onizes Alimentiveness. This is developed by a state of repletion 
 which gives nourishment to the brain, as we find after the enjoy- 
 ment of good food and drink. But it is developed also by the 
 moral causes which energize the upper region of the brain. The 
 resolute purposes of heroism in war or struggle of any kind, and 
 the lofty enthusiasm generated by religious, philanthropic, patriotic, 
 loving and conscientious emotions, or even the earnest application 
 of study will so energize the firm and buoyant regions of the brain, 
 as to arrest gastric action and destroy entirely the desire for food. 
 Thus many persons in the zeal of study or labor reduce the 
 stomach to such inactivity as to lay the foundation for dyspepsia. 
 
 Under great moral or religious excitement fasting is natural 
 — but the attempt to enforce fasting as a ceremony, when it is not 
 prompted or sustained by any religious or earnest emotion, is only 
 
THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. I9I 
 
 another mode of irritating the stomach and increasing the amount 
 of demoralizing animality. Such fasting, however, harmonizes 
 well with the gloomy theology which dwells upon the prospect of 
 eternal misery for our fellow beings. 
 
 The influence of the higher emotions in controlling the hungry 
 gloom of the stomach and sustaining our buoyant vigor is ex- 
 plained by Pathognomy, which is the mathematical key to Anthro- 
 pology, and will require a special volume for its elucidation. 
 
 Pathognomy illustrates the law of linear direction which gov- 
 erns all life in all worlds. 
 
 The pathognomic direction of the region of Firmness, in 
 which it nearly coincides with the whole moral region, is up- 
 wards, drawing vitality and circulation toward the brain and the 
 shoulders. 
 
 In accordance with this influence the red blood ascends by 
 the aorta, the carotid and vertebral arteries to the brain, developeing 
 its maximum power and the power of the spinal cord ; and the 
 thoracic duct, starting from the level of the second lumbar ver- 
 tebra, comes upward for about twenty inches, carrying nearly ripe 
 blood, the chyle, to the sub-clavian vein and thus removing the 
 depression which is the cause of hunger. The chyle is thus car- 
 ried up to the corporeal region of Firmness and Fortitude. 
 
 This strong volitionary influence is absolutely essential to 
 health. Whenever, through the opposite elements, fear and 
 despair, this upward influence is checked, the countenance becomes 
 pallid, the brain has less circulation and loses power, the features 
 droop, the person is impoverished in spite of food, the thoracic duct 
 carries up little nourishment, life withers away and sometimes even 
 the scalp is so paralyzed and changed that the hair turns gray or 
 white from a night of terror. Life declines whenever Firmness 
 and Hope are diminished. 
 
 The hunger which belongs to the organ of Alimentiveness is 
 not an invigorating impulse -per se, being distinct from the eager 
 desire and impulse to take food which belongs to the posterior por- 
 tion of the brain on the same level, and on the body is found far- 
 ther back and higher up. Hence in treating the affections of the 
 
I92 THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 
 
 stomach, the hand should be extended upward and backward in 
 the direction of the ribs to the lower dorsal region — the Alimen- 
 tive location being used more to rouse from inactivity than to give 
 vital power. We may have from the posterior influence a vigor- 
 ous appetite without any of the depressing feelings of hunger, or 
 we may have from Alimentiveness the depression of hunger with- 
 out much appetite, or efficient digestive capacity. We are far 
 below the standard of health when such a condition can arise, or 
 when any loss of a meal or irregularity of diet can produce much 
 depression. , 
 
 This depression is resisted in the region of Firmness and 
 Health, which should ever predominate over the sensibilities and 
 appetites. The portion of the firm region which is on the median 
 line (or sagittal suture), vertically above the ear, and on the 
 shoulder adjoining the neck, is antagonistic to the excitability of 
 the heart and gives a feeling of fearlessness. The portion about 
 an inch from the median line is antagonistic to the excitability of 
 the liver and stomach, and hence resists the hypochondriac gloom 
 of the hepatic region and the debilitating gloom of hunger. This 
 buoyant influence we find on the shoulder, behind the middle of 
 the upper surface, between the neck and the acromion process or 
 prominent angle of the shoulder. Hence this is the region to 
 antagonize hunger and the gastric irritations of dyspepsia, which 
 produces the selfish and boorish ill-humor so conspicuous in 
 Carlyle, the famous representative of the moral tendency of 
 gastric irritability. But Carlyle is not the only conspicuous exam- 
 ple of literature empoisoned by the unhealthy influences of a 
 diseased or depraved body. 
 
 If we stimulate the region of buoyant fortitude by. the hand or 
 by a plaster, we relieve the gastric irritation, but there may be 
 materials — vitiated secretions or undigested food — which main- 
 tain the irritation, and which, to facilitate our success, should be 
 overcome medically, as by an emetic or a peptic anodyne. A sim- 
 ple emetic of warm water, which may be made more effectual by 
 adding one or two teaspoonsful of the tincture of lobalia, or ipecac, 
 and at the same time more soothing by stirring in enough of 
 
THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 
 
 *93 
 
 slippery elm to make it mucilaginous, will unload the stomach in 
 a healthy manner. An extemporaneous emetic is frequently 
 •prepared by adding mustard and salt to a glass of warm water. 
 
 Soothing and antiseptic agencies may be used to control the 
 contents of the alimentary canal, or to soothe and protect the 
 stomach, after they are ejected. For the soothing and removal of 
 irritation, one of the best articles is the Scr ophalaria nodosa or fig- 
 wort — an article the U. S. Dispensatory says is "very little 
 used "and the gastric virtue of which seems to be entirely Unkown 
 to the medical profession. Half a teaspoonful of the fluid extract 
 may be repeated hourly until relief is given. Ten or twenty 
 grains of the bisulphite of lime or bisulphite of sod i in a cup of 
 water will counteract decomposing or fermenting conditions. 
 
 If acid be present, ten or twenty grains of calcined magnesia 
 bicarbonate of potassa or bicarbonate of soda in solution will serve 
 to neutralize it, or it may be neutralized by milk. 
 
 It will be expedient to accelerate the restoration of a feeble stom- 
 ach by twenty drop doses of the fluid extract of alnus rubra (or 
 tag alder) with which the scrophularia would favorably cooperate 
 in controlling irritations. Medical treatment is not, within the 
 scope of this volume, but I think that an enlightened healer should 
 
 beware of the narrowness of mind which confines itself to a favor- 
 ite class of agencies, and should master as far as practicable the 
 vast and powerful resources of the materia medica, with which he 
 can expedite and complete his cures, and do justice to a class of 
 patients who cannot afford to pay for protracted nervauric treat- 
 ment. Hence I make a few suggestions of medical remedies. 
 
 Gastric troubles may be truly dyspeptic from the irritation of 
 the nerves, and concentration of excitement at the stomach, or they 
 may be apeptic from the lack of action in the stomach. In the lat- 
 ter case the Alimentive region may be excited on the body, and on 
 the head ; but in the former case some dispersive passes are neces- 
 sary to remove irritation and the regions of Fortitude and Health 
 should be excited to suppress the gastric trouble while the lower 
 dorsal region is used to give gastric vitality. 
 
i94 
 
 THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 
 
 In addition to the regions of Nutrition and gastric energy a 
 proper nourishment requires the process of assimilative absorption, 
 for want of which digestion fails in its purpose, and Nutrition has 
 but an imperfect supply of material. The region of Assimilative 
 Absorption on the body is immediately around and above the um- 
 bilicus. The application of the hand at this locality produces the 
 tranquil feeling favorable to rest and sleep which belong to assimi- 
 lation. In applying the hand here we cover the absorbent region 
 or mesentery, and the course of the absorbents to the origin of the 
 thoracic duct, the common receptacle of chyle at the second lum- 
 bar vertebra — also the jejunum the chief source of the digestive 
 supply of chyle, the duodenum, pancreas, colon and lower portion 
 of the stomach. The energy of this region with its hundred and 
 fifty mesenteric or absorbent glands, effects the final preparation of 
 the chyle and its propulsion on its upward course to join the mass 
 of our blood through the subclavian veins which convey it to the 
 right side of the heart to pass through the lungs before it mingles 
 in the general 'circulation. 
 
 It is obvious therefore that a failure in assimilative absorption 
 would interfere with the results of digestion and nutrition. In 
 many cases no doubt this failure of assimilation is due to the fail- 
 ure in the moral forces or mental depression. There is a tendency 
 to emaciation and degeneracy in inferior characters. Criminals 
 are generally of an inferior physique. Dramatists contrast the 
 lean and hungry conspirator with the good natured plump and 
 contented citizen. Amiability promotes nutrition by assimilation. 
 "Laugh and grow fat" is an old saying. Amiable and contented 
 animals fatten easily and give milk abundantly while the fierce 
 carnivora are remarkably lean. 
 
 Thus we see there is a close association between the amiable 
 elements which cause us to love and assimilate with all nature, and 
 the physiological powers which assimilate and accept the material 
 that is brought us. The assimilative is in fact an amiable region 
 and has an amiable influence upon the character while it is opera- 
 tive. The region immediately adjacent to and above assimilation 
 
THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 195 
 
 is one of amiable impressibility and yielding sympathy* which as 
 we pass upward merges into that of somnolent, somnambulic, 
 sympathetic, psychometric and clairvoyant conditions, of which 
 there is abundant evidence in the records of animal magnetism, 
 which prove the possibility of clairvoyance from the epigastric 
 region. 
 
 The region of Assimilation therefore must not be overlooked 
 in treating the general constitution and the digestive functions. It 
 promotes impressibility, amiability and healthful repose, bringing 
 the subject more fully under control, into sympathy with the oper- 
 ator, and promoting restoration by nourishment, for which pur- 
 poses the patient should be in the horizontal position, lying on his 
 back, when this region is exerted, to facilitate. the progress of the 
 chyle in the thoracic duct by a horizontal instead of a vertical 
 course. 
 
 The assimilative tract is one of healthful tendencies. The ili- 
 um with its Peyer's glands is frequently involved in disease, not 
 only in fevers but in consumption and in cholera. Disease is less 
 frequent in the duodenum and jejunum. Brunner's glands in the 
 jejunum are remarkably free from disease. 
 
 Hence the absorbent region is very appropriate for stimula- 
 tion and does not so frequently require dispersive manipulation as 
 the region below the umbilicus. 
 
 It is probable that the assimilative or umbilical region has more 
 extensive relations to psychic life than those involved in the absorp- 
 tion of chyle. The umbilical region is the seat of the original 
 mysterious influx of life, by the connection with our ancestry. 
 This changes after birth into absorption from nature, instead of ab- 
 sorption from the maternal constitution. It is along the umbilical 
 chain that we trace the continuity of the human race back into the 
 darkness of the uncounted ages, in which by influx and evolution 
 man has been brought to his present condition. The process of 
 
 * This is, no doubt, the foundation of the old scriptural expression " bowels 
 of compassion." The seers intuitively felt that there were tender feelings in the 
 
 gastro-umbilical region. 
 
196 THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 
 
 gestation being probably a surviving type or analogue of the crea- 
 tive evolutionary process of the over soul of the universe. 
 
 I regard the umbilical or assimilative region as having in the 
 brain and soul important spiritual functions and relations, especially 
 as to personal sympathy, attachment, and spiritual influences, but 
 at present we are considering merely its relations to nutrition, 
 developement and health. The associative faculties which estab- 
 lish the most intimate sjinpathy and union between any two per- 
 sons, lie along the median line. 
 
 Besides Nutrition, Digestion and Assimilation there is yet 
 another important influence on human developement — that which 
 consolidates and holds together the materials gathered in by diges- 
 tion and assimilation, and precipitated by Nutrition. That influ- 
 ence we find in the back — in the region antagonistic to the 
 intellect. 
 
 To understand this philosophically we must know that the 
 intellectual faculties tend to carry man out of himself and destroy 
 his individuality by merging his consciousness in his environ- 
 ment, or in the thoughts of others. When they plunge his mind 
 into his physical environment by perception and sensation, they 
 lower his nature more effectually than when they carry him into 
 the sphere of spiritual truth and philosophy. But they necessa- 
 rily impair his physical energy, weaken his desires, unfit him for 
 achievement, and relax both physical and mental fibre, in propor- 
 tion to their -predominance > which has very different effects from 
 mere activity. 
 
 The impairment of vital force by intellectual predominance 
 renders the tissues softer and less compact, more inclined to disin- 
 tegration and less capable of sustaining a robust manhood ; which 
 is the effect of excessive schooling. 
 
 We must, then, rely upon the influences antagonistic to intel- 
 lect for the preservation of vital force and compactness. The dis- 
 covery of these influences was a revolution in Psychology. They 
 belong to that portion of the occiput which antagonizes the organs 
 of the forehead, and, as to the body, they are found upon the mid- 
 dle of the back, below the shoulder blades. They may be dis- 
 
THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. IQ7 
 
 tinguished as the Adhesive Group — the group of organs of which 
 Adhesiveness is the centre — organs which desire to keep every- 
 thing fixed, as the intellect desires change or progress. 
 
 The Adhesive region, a region of desire and impulse is inter- 
 ested in that which is personal to ourselves, local and limited - — 
 the intellectual in that which is impersonal and unlimited. The 
 intellectual region is interested in all humanity alike — the Adhe- 
 sive region in our friends alone. The intellectual region avoids 
 action, enterprise, and responsibility — - it is at home in soli- 
 tude ; the Adhesive region seeks to be actively engaged in the 
 midst of society and exerting an influence. The intellectual region 
 produces delicacy, sensibility and inactivity — the Adhestve region 
 produces impulsive energy and ability to interest others. The one 
 is passionless and feeble — the other highly emotional and strong. 
 One is exhausted and broken down by social responsibility — the 
 other is spontaneously energetic, will not endure solitude, and con- 
 tinually gains power or influence in society. One developes in 
 solitude, the other in stirring life. One exhausts and emaciates 
 in action, the other grows and strengthens. 
 
 The latter is the tonic and vitalizing element which resists the 
 disintegration of the body, by exertion and by fever. It is the ele- 
 ment to which quinine and other cinchona preparations appeal, in 
 opposing the decomposition of fever, in doing which they resist 
 the intellectual element so effectually as sometimes to impair the 
 hearing, the memory and the vision. 
 
 This stirring, active power holds every faculty ready for 
 social relations and thus gives an attractive vitality to the whole 
 person — a tonicity which resists exhaustive and malign impres- 
 sions. The word Adhesiveness expresses the physical as well as 
 spiritual character of the faculty. It resists the waste of our phys- 
 iological and spiritual elements, as Acquisitiveness, resists the 
 waste of our property. Hence it gives compactness to the person, 
 and by retaining the organized elements longer in the body, brings 
 them to a higher vitality and perfection. Thus it becomes the 
 tonic supporter of the physical developement, giving to the char- 
 
I98 THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 
 
 acter and the person the qualities that are interesting or attractive. 
 
 Hence we find it desirable to stimulate the Adhesive region to 
 perfect the nutrient processes and enhance vitality. This region 
 we find on the lateral part of the occiput, above and behind the 
 ear, and on the body below the shoulder blades, occupying nearly 
 two hand's breadth downward. 
 
 Lower upon the occiput and upon the back, we find the stil[ 
 more energetic and tonic element of Combativeness, which gives 
 great energy to the muscular system but which tends to give the 
 muscular system a predominance over the cerebral and the evil 
 passions over the friendly emotions. From Adhesiveness upward 
 on the shoulder the influence becomes more pleasant, tending to 
 give the brain and moral nature a predominance over muscular 
 growth and physical force. 
 
 Adhesiveness lying between the two assists both the moral 
 and physical forces, as we see it in women sustaining the family 
 relations and in men sustaining personal attachments gregarious 
 life, national* unity and cooperation in war as well as sectarian 
 and partisan cooperation in peace. 
 
 The many important influences of the Adhesive region should 
 teach us the importance of rousing it in our patients not only by ner- 
 vauric treatment but by social enjoyment. The loss of society 
 greatly impairs the vigor of the constitution, especially in those 
 who are very Adhesive. Solitary confinement is a cruel and de- 
 pressing punishment, and an enforced solitary life or life without 
 friends impairs the general energy and even the vigor of the di- 
 gestive organs. The indulgence of the social impulses whether 
 in amusements or otherwise is the restorative power which many 
 need, to revive their health ; and it is the rupture of the social at- 
 tachments which so often breaks down the vigor and usefulness of 
 young soldiers, bringing on what is called nostalgia or homesick- 
 ness. Disappointments in love leave similar effects on women, low- 
 ering vitality and impairing the action of the heart. Grief for the 
 loss of friends and members of the family circle often breaks 
 down the health of mothers. When health is thus impaired we 
 should offer the balm of our sympathetic interest and seek to in- 
 
THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 199 
 
 terest the sufferer in new social attractions. All the excitements of 
 active life — business, travel and social pleasure, address Adhesive- 
 ness — hence their restorative power. The relation of Adhesive- 
 ness to society and business is that of a steady motor power and 
 tonic, preventing us from being discouraged or indifferent, and 
 contributing material assistance to the unconscious processes of or- 
 ganic life. It is a great fountain of spontaneous impulse. 
 
 The fullness and rotundity of the back are important to the 
 strength and retentiveness of the constitution. The rounded back 
 which is more conspicuous in the hog tha^the ox, in the donkey 
 and mule than in the horse, and which reaches its maximum in the 
 camel and dromedary is associated with greater retentiveness and 
 ability to sustain life upon smaller quantities of food. 
 
 The location of Adhesiveness on the back is on the lines of 
 nerve distribution from the lower dorsal region, which, as already 
 explained, controls the digestion and assimilation of food internally 
 by the ganglionic nerves, while it braces the abdomen by the 
 abdominal muscles, and thus not only assists by mechanical pro- 
 pulsion the processes of digestion and assimilation, but braces the 
 trunk by the action of these muscles, as it must be braced for any 
 vigorous exertion. The compression of the abdominal viscera, and 
 expulsion of the dark venous blood contained, greatly increase the 
 general energy. 
 
 Tims does the Adhesive region carry out its energizing influ- 
 ence and its attractive and assimilative nature which gives to the 
 adhesive the power of attracting and interesting friends — the 
 quality which is called magnetism from its analogy to the action of 
 the magnet. 
 
 We now perceive that the Adhesive region or middle of the 
 back should not be overlooked in nervauric treatment. It extends 
 across the back behind the arms on the level of the lower half of 
 the humerus (upper arm) or in other words below the shoulder 
 blade. Its middle portion, along the spinal column, has a more 
 positively energetic and muscular influence, sustaining general 
 activity, and may be properly called the region of Business Energy 
 
200 THE OCCIPITAL ENERGIES. 
 
 which sustains an active life. These explanations make it appar- 
 ent that affections of the lower dorsal region must impair the diges- 
 tive powers and the general energy — the blind energies of the 
 animal nature opposed to the intellectual. Hence injuries impair- 
 ing the spinal power, which disqualify for active life, are frequent- 
 ly accompanied by a predominance of the intellectual faculties — 
 by wakefulness, clairvoyance, somnambulism and spiritual phe- 
 nomena, as in the famous case of Mollie Fancher of Brooklyn, 
 while on the other hand an overload of food which taxes the dor- 
 sal region interferes very seriously with intellectual action and 
 energy, and the soundest sleep is obtained by resting on the back 
 so as to keep the Adhesive region warm. 
 
 It is now apparent that the Vital Force and Nutrition at the 
 posterior summit of the thigh cooperate with Business Energy, 
 Adhesiveness, Alimentiveness and Assimilation in the middle of 
 the trunk, and that all are needed in restoring the invalid. 
 
 The tonic character of Adhesiveness as a conservative and 
 retentive power,, alike in physiology and psychology, is illustrated 
 by its immediate proximity to the region of Coldness, just behind 
 the arm on the side of the chest. Coldness is preeminently the 
 conservative influence which forbids decomposition and combus- 
 tion. Cold is antiseptic as heat is putrefactive in tendency. 
 Coolness produces muscular firmness, as heat produces muscular 
 relaxation. The calorific region of the body is that of dead, 
 decomposed matter — the Hypogastric region. 
 
 The Adhesive associated with the lower dorsal region, pre- 
 sides over the inception and preservation of dead substance, for 
 vital purposes by the stomach and absorbents. The secretion of the 
 stomach is acid and pre-eminently antiseptic, while the lower intes- 
 tines have the alkaline condition which is favorable to decomposi- 
 tion. Their inflammation produces the maximum of fever, but the 
 inflammation of the stomach has so little febrile intensity that the 
 pulse is very feeble and the limbs dry and husky. Thus the stom- 
 ach is associated with the superior half of the brain which is cool 
 and conservative, and it manifests this conservative character 
 chiefly when Adhesiveness is well developed. 
 
. CHAPTER XI. 
 THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS, 
 
 The gastro-enteric region, its location in the brain and on the abdominal sur- 
 face. Digestion and defecation. Treatment of diarrhoea, dysentery &c. 
 Region of Energy. Control of appetites. Tonics. Source of intemperance 
 in the brain. Its cure by moral power. Its treatment by medicines, The ner- 
 vauric treatment, diet. Organ of the love of stimulus. Its degrees of ac- 
 tion. Cure of intemperance. Remedies for gastric conditions. Lumbar 
 region. Expellant functions. Controlling the functions through the brain. 
 Causes of the appetite. General view of localities on the abdomen and their 
 functions. 
 
 Physiological and moral influence of the thighs, the knees and Nutri- 
 tion. Embryonic and microcosmal relation of the leg to the vertebrata 
 mollusca, articulata. radiata aud mineral kingdom. Relation to fishes, rep- 
 tiles, birds, and quadrupeds. The cold aquatic temperament on the front. 
 Aerial and mammalian posteriorly. Effects of their excitement. Cold 
 blooded life — vegetables, zoophytes, worms, articulata, mollusca, reptiles 
 and fishes, strong in reparation but void of inflammation. Birds, quadru- 
 peds and man have least restorative power. Cold blooded elements in the 
 human constitution developed by sarcoguomy. ' Possibility of avoiding in- 
 flammation and fever, an important discovery. Curative processes for pneu- 
 monia, bronchitis and consumption. Tibial surface and dorsum of the foot. 
 Importance of hemastasis as an aid. Invigorating the lungs. Antice- 
 phalic character of the foot. 
 
 The Gastro-enteric region controlling the alimentary canal, is 
 located in the brain at the base of the middle lobe running inward 
 along the base of the petrous ridge of the temporal bone, and is 
 reached from the surface along the course of the lower jaw, from 
 its insertion in the glenoid cavity downward to about midway be- 
 tween its posterior interior angle and the center of the chin. 
 
 The corresponding tract on the body extends downward and for- 
 ward from the margin of the ribs to a point midway between the 
 umbilicus and the inguinal depression or angle between the thigh 
 and the abdomen. Along this tract the alimentary canal may be 
 controlled. At its upper end we rouse the activity of the stomach 
 
202 THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 
 
 and as we descend we act upon lower portions the lowest being 
 efficient in promoting evacuation of the bowels. Constipation is 
 overcome on this tract by downward manipulation and vigorous 
 action at its lower extremity. 
 
 In irritations, such as those of diarrhoea, cholera, dysentery, 
 cholic, dispersive passes backward and upward should be made 
 with energy, and a general stimulation along the spine. The 
 complete control over such conditions is effected on the top of the 
 shoulder, and on its upper posterior aspect. The abdominal re- 
 gion in predominance has a relaxing, debilitating character, 
 whether that predominance be produced by excessive food and 
 drink, by oppressive undigested materials, or by irritations and in- 
 flammations. The utter prostration of all physical and mental en- 
 ergy, which occurs in dysenteries, fevers, and other abdominal 
 irritations attests the character of that region. Its antagonist in 
 the shoulder is the region of Energy, which brings all the vital 
 forces into active play, and makes us intolerant of idleness. This 
 region of Energy, corresponding with the top of the shoulder, on 
 which we bear our burdens, directs the vital forces according to 
 the pathognomic law to the brain and from the abdomen, producing 
 thereby the indifference to food, which we feel when our interest 
 and energy are roused. The same indifference to food and drink 
 is produced by the tonics and nervines which rouse our energies, 
 whether they be drugs or moral influences, and it is by the use of 
 nervine tonics that we increase the moral energies and subdue the 
 urgency of appetite, so as to enable one who wishes to reform to 
 overcome the propensity for intoxicating drinks. 
 
 Temperance societies have relied too much upon a furious 
 warfare against alcohol, but intemperance does not depend en- 
 tirely upon the temptation offered by the free sale of alcoholic 
 drinks, and cannot be entirely controlled by limiting the sale. It 
 depends upon a natural appetite which exists in the base of the 
 brain in the posterior part of the organ of Alimentiveness, which 
 comes into play under circumstances of nervous depression or ex- 
 haustion, just as thirst appears when there has been an exhaustion 
 
THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 203 
 
 of fluids. Hence a demand for stimulation of some sort is al- 
 most as universal as a demand for food and drink. 
 
 Thus nervous depression or lack of cheerfulness and buoyancy 
 arises not only from depressing causes but from the predominance 
 of the base of the brain, the discordant condition of society — the 
 predominance of the animal over the moral, which is a condition 
 more or less gloomy and eager for enlivening influences. Hence 
 the -present dev elopement of the human race has the conditions in 
 which intemperance must flourish, and all savage races become 
 drunkards when they have the opportunity. But women who 
 have a decided predominance of the moral over the basilar region 
 are very seldom addicted to intemperance, and when men are 
 equally developed they will become equally temperate. 
 
 This developement is often affected by powerful religous im- 
 pressions, and the greatest success in the treatment ot intemper- 
 ance has been in the inebriate homes in New York and Philadel- 
 phia, in which religious influence is relied upon. 
 
 There is not sufficient moral energy in most persons to resist 
 the discouraging and depressing influences of the struggles for a 
 livelihood, the competition of rivals, the hostility of enemies, the 
 uncertainty of business, the lack of reliable love and friendship, 
 and the moods of ill health. From such depression we may be re- 
 lieved by cheerful society and friendship, by the moral enthusiasm 
 of any great and worthy purpose, or by fervent religious senti- 
 ments, or we may be placed permanently above the gloomy level 
 of intemperance by such a moral education as will give the high- 
 er sentiments an unchangeable control. 
 
 I see no hope for the eradication of intemperance by law, un- 
 til moral education shall have done its work. But in the mean- 
 time every beneficent influence, every happy social influence, ev- 
 erything which diminishes the burdens and calamities of human 
 life, everything which increases the influence of women, every- 
 thing which gives cheerful and innocent amusement, contributes 
 to diminish the demand for alchoholic stimulants. 
 
 The purification of the atmosphere, the removal of the 
 sources of malaria and all that improves health contribute to tern- 
 
204 THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 
 
 perance, while malaria and misery work in the opposite direction. 
 
 I think it not impossible to prepare medicines which will so ef- 
 fectually sustain the energies of the nervous system as to check in- 
 temperance and reduce its ravages to a small amount and I should 
 not hesitate to prescribe such remedies in any case, modified to 
 suit the temperament or condition of each individual. Intemper- 
 ance may be based upon conditions of the nervous system, the liv- 
 er, or the digestive organs, which must be controlled by the 
 remedy. 
 
 A diet should be adopted in which, fruits, cereals and vegeta- 
 bles are most prominent, the greatest benefit being derived from 
 fruit, and the stimulation desired should be sought in tea and coffee. 
 Under such regulations the alchoholic appetite is much more 
 easily subdued. The treatment should be dispersive from the 
 gastric region, and generally upward over the abdomen, and 
 should stimulate the entire upper region of the trunk, front and 
 back, above the mammae, to produce that elevated, happy, ami- 
 able and firm condition in which ardent spirits are repulsive. 
 
 They are extremely repulsive to refined women, on account of 
 the influence of their moral nature which pervades every fibre and 
 repels all gross and debasing influence. But in proportion as the 
 basilar forces are roused, coarse stimulants and gross food become 
 acceptable. I have found in my experiments that when the organ 
 of love of stimulus is gently roused it requires mild stimulants, 
 such as tea, coffee, and condiments, ardent spirits being disliked ; 
 but as it is further excited, malt liquors, and wines are desired, 
 first diluted, then pure — and a delicate female whom a spoonful 
 of brandy would almost intoxicate may be made under this basilar 
 influence to seek the strongest liquors and drink them like an old 
 toper without becoming intoxicated, just as one exhausted by hem- 
 orrhage or prostrated by serpent bites may take a pint of brandy 
 without intoxication. This impunity depends upon the depressant 
 influence of the love of stimulus, and if that should cease to act 
 extreme intoxication would appear at once. Thus when the very 
 impressible Mr. Inman had taken a drink of brandy under the 
 influence of love of stimulus without showing any effect, I sup- 
 
THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 20^ 
 
 posed the impunity would continue, but when I continued my 
 experiments, exciting the upper region of the brain, diverting the 
 activity from the love of stimulus and thus destroying his capacity 
 for enduring it, he suddenly sunk to the floor dead drunk, to my 
 astonishment, and could be relieved only by re-exciting the love of 
 stimulus. For a similar reason in convivial assemblies we see 
 intoxication much sooner reached under the influence of social 
 pleasure than when men are sipping their liquor alone or taking it 
 as a stimulus under the pressure of business. Men of a coarse 
 and morose nature drink large quantities with impunity, while the 
 more amiable class speedily succumb in intoxication, and are more 
 rapidly destroyed, as women would be if forced into drinking. 
 Hence the most signal examples of alcoholic ruin occur in the 
 brightest members of society, who are seduced by the influence of 
 bad examples and local fashion from their natural temperance, or 
 who yield in moments of temporary depression. 
 
 The man who resolutely desires to reform may find it a des- 
 perate struggle to resist the unbalanced action of his brain, 
 producing a passionate craving, but if assisted by nervine tonics 
 he will certainly be able to conquer, and if of the impressible 
 temperament, a little nervauric treatment will completely banish 
 the evil influence. In ten minutes the appetite of the sensitive 
 may be extinguished and alcholic drinks made loathsome, 
 and if this process is repeated as often necessary to make the 
 temperate inclination habitual, all danger will be banished. 
 
 The healer will most readily relieve abdominal irritations and 
 diseases by dispersive passes upwards with one hand while the 
 other is on the top of the shoulder, treating each side alternately, 
 but I should mention for his benefit some simple remedies which 
 he will find very serviceable, either by external application or by 
 internal administration. There are more than a hundred remedies 
 in our materia medica which I have found of marked value in 
 their direct action on the stomach, to soothe, invigorate or relieve it. 
 Jn flatulent conditions angelica and celery seed are the most useful, 
 but when the disturbance amounts to a cholic, Dioscorea villosa is 
 a sure reliance. In gastric weakness mild tonics such as Camo- 
 
2o6 THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 
 
 mile, Columba and Coptis (gold-thread) are very beneficial, but a 
 more efficient tonic restorative influence, extending to all the 
 viscera, is found in the Balmony (Chelone glabra), Barberry 
 (Berberis vulgaris) and the Ptelea trifoliata ; the Balmony, Bar- 
 berry, Hydrastis and Mountain Ash (Sorbus aucuparia) are all 
 efficient in resisting the alcoholic appetite and repairing its ravages. 
 The flow of gastric juice may be promoted by Alnus rubra 
 (tagalder), assisted by a little Capsicum and Inula (elecampane). 
 
 The deranged conditions of the stomach from irritations and 
 improper contents are generally relieved by charcoal and the 
 presence of acid by calcined magnesia. If this is not sufficient, 
 the following prescription may be relied on : — 
 
 Fluid Extract of Scrophularia nodosa, 
 " Cochineal, 
 
 Triosteum perfoliatum, 
 Sambucus Canadensis, 
 each one ounce — mix. Dose, a teaspoonful every two hours 
 until relief. 
 
 The use of pepsin or lactopeptin as an assistant to the powers 
 of an enfeebled stomach will overcome many difficulties. 
 
 In treating the abdominal functions the hands should be 
 applied on the lumbar as well as the lower dorsal region — the 
 dorsal region having more to do with the digestive and assimila- 
 tive functions, and the lumbar region with the expulsive functions 
 of the lower intestines. 
 
 Psychologically speaking the tendency of the upper half of 
 the body is attractive and retentive — the lower half hostile, 
 degrading and repellant. Physiologically, the character is the 
 same — the upper half of the body tends to vitalize and retain the 
 nutritive elements — the lower half to degrade and expel them — 
 fecal material is expelled by the ileum — nutrient material is 
 carried up by the thoracic duct. The exercise of the lower limbs 
 rouses the lumbar portion of the cord, strengthens the expellant 
 functions and overcomes constipation. The low^r half of the 
 alimentary canal, which sympathizes with the violent passions, is 
 always more developed in the carnivpra than in the herbivora. 
 
THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 207 
 
 The treatment of the abdominal functions through the brain 
 involves their stimulation through the lower jaw, and their con- 
 trol through the region behind Integrity which extends from Firm- 
 ness, (behind Integrity and Cheerfulness) over the temporal arch, 
 just behind Sanity. The hand upon this region checks the 
 abdominal irritation like an anodyne tonic. Upon the jaw before 
 the ear, the fingers produce the same effect as applications upon 
 the alimentary tract on the abdomen. If we place the middle fin- 
 ger upon Alimentiveness before the ear and the thumb upon the 
 organ of Health, the effect upon the sensitive is a gradual resto- 
 ration of healthy action to the stomach. 
 
 The love of stimulus occupying the posterior portion of Ali- 
 mentiveness immediately at the cavity of the ear, I have found no 
 difficulty in exciting it separately so to produce a desire for alco- 
 holic stimulants and abilitv to bear them. 
 
 The appetites for food, drink and stimulation being at the 
 base of the brain are necessarily roused by basilar action — by a 
 stirring, active life, especially when such a life is associated with 
 no cheerful pleasant influences, but is in the sphere of selfishness 
 and rivalry. The hunger of active labor is much more urgent 
 than that of sedentary pursuits and.requires a freer supply of nitro- 
 genous or animal food. Its nervous depression (for basilar action 
 or muscular exertion consumes the vitality of the brain) creates 
 the demand for stimulation which leads laborers by millions to the 
 shops that supply them beer, gin and whiskey. The demand for 
 these will not cease until labor can be made less depressing. 
 When the circumstances of labor are more pleasant and social, 
 when its monotony is relieved by song, music and conversation, 
 when the atmosphere of the shop is made pure, its society refined 
 and polite and all its features agreeable, the laborer will be 
 relieved from the intense craving for stimulus. 
 
 In stimulating the digestive organs through the brain, we 
 should recollect that the whole posterior basilar region contributes 
 to their energy, and therefore we may reinforce them by applying 
 the hands around the base of the brain on the level of the ear. 
 
208 THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 
 
 Let us now briefly review the functions accessible through the 
 abdominal surface to imprint them on the memory. 
 
 i . At and below the lower end of the sternum — which would 
 be called the epigastric region, we have Sensibility Somnolence, and 
 the region of Impressibility, through which we exert a tranquillizing 
 soporific influence, during which we may elicit the intellectual 
 phenomena of trance, psychometric perception, clairvoyance, 
 sympathy, and develope the curability of diseases by nervauric 
 and spiritual influences. This region brings the patient completely 
 under the influence of the operator. The corresponding cerebral 
 region extends from the root of the nose to an inch behind the brow 
 (marked S). The word Sympathy conveys a correct idea of the 
 general tendency of this region. The sympathy is intellectual, 
 emotional and physical and may amount to an entire surrender to 
 the control of the operator. Those who are largely developed in 
 this region easily become mesmeric subjects or fall into the class 
 that are controlled by a word. 
 
 2. Just i>elow the epigastric location, extending to the umbili- 
 cus and about two inches below, we find the region of assimi- 
 lation and absorption, the influence of which is pleasant and 
 soothing, harmonizing well with the soporific influence above, while 
 promoting nourishment and digestion. 
 
 The influence of these two regions, especially the upper, is 
 extremely amiable. The spiritual, psychometric and clairvoyant 
 faculties are closely associated in the brain with the intellectual, 
 amiable and sympathetic faculties. Hence there is generally a 
 remarkable degree of refinement, beauty of sentiment and lan- 
 guage, and kindly, benevolent and ethical teaching in connection 
 with trance speaking and psychometry. 
 
 3. Below and around the umbilicus, exterior to the region of 
 Assimilative Absorption is the region of Respiration, correspond- 
 ing with the respiratory organs around the mouth and nose, of which 
 I shall speak in connection with the thoracic organs. The corres- 
 ponding cerebral region is marked R. 
 
 4. Below the umbilicus, half way to the pelvis, is the region 
 
THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 20Q 
 
 of Calorification by which we develope heat which is actively con- 
 cerned in all fevers. 
 
 5. Below Calorification comes the uterine region, which 
 might in a psychic sense be called the region of excitability. 
 
 6. Below the uterine region is the mons veneris or pubic 
 region, which is associated with a tendency to lethargy and sleep 
 and corresponds with the position of the urinary bladder. 
 
 7. On each side of the pubic region extends the groin or 
 angle between the thigh and abdomen, which corresponds with the 
 sexual secretions, menstrual and seminal. It is a part of the 
 sexual region which includes the sexual organs. 
 
 8. Above the sexual region and in front of the hips (the 
 anterior margin of the ilium) is the region of Melancholy. It 
 antagonizes the region of Cheerfulness at the armpits. 
 
 9. Above Melancholy, on the side of the body, between the 
 hip and ribs, is the region of absolute selfishness, which is antag- 
 onistic to every conception of duty to others and to all moral 
 dignity. Its physiological influence is to reinforce the appetites 
 and animal passions, and in some persons it needs stimulation to 
 revive animal life and physiological processes. In predominance 
 it may be called Baseness. 
 
 10. Just above the region of Selfishness, on the side, is 
 the region of Irritability on the lower margin of the ribs, the 
 effect of which if strongly excited is highly exciting and irritating. 
 Dr. Beard, I. believe, is the only electrician who has discovered 
 and mentioned the character of this region. He says (p 343), 
 "This sensitiveness is, of course, more in the thin and the ner- 
 vous than in the corpulent and phlegmatic. It is usually most 
 marked on the inferior ribs on the right and left side of the body, 
 over the liver and spleen. The peculiar sensitiveness of the ribs 
 at these points is sometimes erroneously supposed to indicate dis- 
 ease of the organs beneath them." It is a curious fact that Dr. 
 Ferrier once struck upon the corresponding location in the brain 
 without understanding it, when he enraged a cat by exciting the 
 basis of the middle lobe. 
 
2IO THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 
 
 Irritability belongs to the Phrenic Zone, through which we 
 excite the diaphragm. 
 
 ii. Anterior to Melancholy and Selfishness is the region of 
 the Abdominal functions controlling the Alimentary canal, running 
 from the margin of the ribs to Defecation, half way between um- 
 bilicus and groin. The upper end, relating to the stomach, cor- 
 responds to Alimentiveness. The lower location is marked D. 
 
 12. Anterior to Alimentiveness is the region of Disease, loca- 
 ted along the margins of the ribs. Scientifically speaking it might 
 be called the centre of organic sensibility, but practically it may 
 be properly called Disease, as the tendency or liability to disease 
 is proportioned to its predominance over the health sustaining 
 power of the upper occiput and shoulders. 
 
 On this zone of the trunk is found anteriorly the maximum 
 sensitiveness and maximum liability to injury. Brown Sequard 
 found that animals killed by a shock through the diaphragm were 
 killed more quickly and surely than when assailed through the 
 head. In such cases the blood after death was fluid, the abdomi- 
 nal viscera congested, and the thoracic region nearly empty. 
 
 13. The remaining space between the Alimentive, Morbid, 
 Respiratory and Sympathetic regions is a region of emotional im- 
 pulse, or excitability corresponding to the cerebral region of Ex- 
 pression behind the face. It explains the sympathy of the brain 
 with abdominal conditions. In the upper portion of this region of 
 expression, which is adjacent to the sympathetic region — the 
 emotional influence is of the amiable and soothing character. In 
 the lower portion it is exciting and stimulating, partaking of the 
 character of deep Respiration and Ardor. The therapeutic value 
 of these organs consists in the soothing, yielding influence which 
 is found on the surfaces above. the umbilicus, and the more exciting 
 or stimulating influences which are found below the level of the 
 umbilicus, producing deeper respiration and greater warmth. The 
 level of the umbilicus may be taken as as the division between the 
 soothing and exciting influences of the abdominal surface. 
 
 Of the organs just enumerated, Calorification requires a full 
 exposition, not only for therapeutic purposes, but as an illustration 
 
THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 211 
 
 of Physiology and Pathology. For the present, however, I shall 
 speak of it merely for therapeutic purposes, reserving the physio- 
 logical and pathological exposition for the second volume, the expo- 
 sition of Electro-Therapeutics. Briefly, the Calorific function is 
 located as to its origin in the brain, at the medulla oblongata, 
 which we reach through the chin, and it is developed in the body 
 by an influence passing down the cord and proceeding from the 
 dorsal ganglia to the abdomen, in which it is developed through 
 the ileum and is reached through the external location, between 
 the pubis and umbilicus. Hence warmth is developed and diffused 
 by covering the chin with one hand and the occipital base with the 
 other, or by placing one hand on the hypogastric location of 
 Calorification, and the other at the lumbo-dorsal junction. The 
 anterior locations develope caloric, but the posterior assist and 
 give it a more healthy diffusion. 
 
 The region gf Coolness is on the sidehead, about the middle 
 of the vertical line rising from the posterior region of the external 
 ear, and on the body its location corresponds nearly with the mid- 
 dle of the posterior line of the arm. 
 
 Hence in treating a chill by the battery we pass a current 
 from Coolness to Calorification, and in treating a fever we 
 reverse the current. 
 
 Fevers may also be treated by a current of hot water poured 
 on the lower abdomen, and typhoid fever is especially benefitted 
 by this, as it involves disease of the small intestines. The great 
 benefit of plunging the feet in hot water at the beginning of a 
 fever is due to the influence on the hypogastric region and the 
 diversion from the brain, as well as the sedative influences 
 of the hot water. 
 
 The experiments of Brodie, of Chossat and of Heidenhain 
 have fully proved the dependence of calorification on the nervous 
 system, the origin of the power in the brain and the capacity of 
 the nervous system, either to develope or to depress the health of 
 any part of the body ; but no one has heretofore discovered this 
 corporeal seat of calorification or understood its relations to the 
 brain. The nearest approach was in the much neglected 
 
212 THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 
 
 experiments of Chossat, who showed that Calorification was inter- 
 rupted by sections of the splanchnic nerves and also by tying the 
 abdominal aorta. Thus he came near completing the demonstra- 
 tion that Calorification is chiefly dependent upon the ilium in 
 which fecalization is performed — the locality in which irritations 
 and inflammations produce the most intense fevers. Fevers 
 associated with abdominal disease at other locations have a lower 
 temperature and less continuous heat. At the spleen the inter- 
 missions are much longer than the fever. At the liver the fever 
 is remittent ; at the stomach the temperature is lower (as in yellow 
 fever) ; but when the hypogastric region is involved, the fevers 
 are severe and continuous and the influence upon the 
 brain greater. 
 
 In nervauric treatment chills would be overcome by applying the 
 hands on the chin and the occipital base, or on the hypogastric 
 region and lumbo-dorsal junction, or by manipulations from Cool- 
 ness on the side to the hypogastric region. 
 
 Fevers should be overcome by dispersive passes from the 
 hypogastric and hypochondriac locations and stimulating the 
 regions of Coolness and Health. Some assistance may be given 
 by the aquatic region on the tibial surface, especially when there 
 is any inflammation. I think the tibial surface will be 'quite a val- 
 uable resource in eruptive diseases when there is much' heat of 
 the skin. 
 
 The lower limbs sustain important relations to the lungs, the 
 brain and the vital force and developement. 
 
 The thigh, depending on the lumbar region, is the seat of the 
 strongest animal power, and is the region through which to rein- 
 force the muscular system. The locomotion and labor sustained 
 by the frontal surface of the thigh should be roused by vigorous 
 percussion whenever we wish to increase the physical strength. 
 The lateral and posterior surfaces of the thigh are also highly 
 invigorating but much more impulsive, bold and restless in their 
 moral influence. Hence they are specially beneficial to those who 
 are quiet and timid. The region of Vital Force at the summit of 
 the thigh is beneficial in all cases of weakness. Its best effect is 
 
THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 213 
 
 produced in combination with the health region of the shoulders, 
 or the region of Cheerfulness in the axilla. It also forms a happy 
 combination with the region of Hope on the upper surface of the 
 breast, above the nipple. 
 
 As we approach the knees, the crural influence becomes more 
 decidedly restless. Hence the dispersive manipulations from the 
 knees to the feet have an especially soothing influence. The pos- 
 terior aspect of the thigh has the general character expressed by 
 the word Turbulence, and hence cooperates with the criminal im- 
 pulses when very large. The internal aspect of the thighs should 
 not be stimulated except in those addicted to a very passive, ascetic 
 life. Its tendency is toward dissipation, sensuality and vagrancy. 
 
 The upper posterior lateral surface of the thighs, the region of 
 Nutrition, is almost always a necessary locality for the treatment 
 of patients, for few are ever out of health without a deficient supply 
 of red blood. Nutrition developes blood and flesh and moderates 
 nervous excitability. It is quite convenient to excite Nutrition and 
 Vital Force at the same time, by the hand or by the 
 negative sponge. 
 
 Below the knee we find in the leg one of the great wonders 
 of Sarcognomy. The leg corresponds to the pre-natal embryonic 
 developement which illustrates the law of evolution and the micro- 
 cosmal character of the human constitution. It corresponds to all 
 below the grade of humanity — the animal, vegetable and 
 mineral kingdoms. 
 
 It is easy to trace upon the leg the developement of the higher 
 kingdom, the Vertebrata, which occupy the space between the 
 knee and the ankle changing near the ankle to the mollusca, 
 articulata and radiata. Upon the upper surface of the foot we 
 have the vegetable kingdom, and on its lower surface the mineral 
 kingdom, corresponding to the entire globe. Each animal of the 
 vertebrata may be recognized at some portion of the vertebral 
 region, and we might locate upon the leg, if it were of any impor- 
 tance, the dog, the horse, the shark, the whale, the eagle, the 
 serpent, etc., and in the vegetative region the trees and herbage. 
 But, laying aside the curious and wonderful, for practical utility, 
 
214 TtIE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 
 
 we find in this representative microcosmal region some of the 
 most important functions that modify life and control disease. 
 
 The vertebrata, divided into fisnes, reptiles, birds and quad- 
 rupeds or mammalia, are represented in corresponding groups on 
 the leg. The fishes and reptiles occupy the anterior or tibial 
 surface exterior to the edge of the tibia ; the next vertical section 
 of the leg, extending just around the posterior exterior angle of 
 the muscular prominence, is devoted to the birds and the remain- 
 der, the body of the calf, is devoted to the mammalia. 
 
 The consequences of this arrangement are very important — 
 the anterior or aquatic surface corresponds to a lower grade of 
 vitality and sensibility — a cold, unintellectual,unsensitive, uninflam- 
 mable temperament, The aerial region of bird life is associated 
 with a more active temperament, greater warmth and activity of 
 respiration, while the mammalian region is associated with the 
 greatest developement of animal life and a temperament more like 
 the human, excepting its intellectual inferiority. 
 
 Hence, in stimulating the calf of the leg we reinforce animal 
 life, very much as we do on the thighs. In stimulating the 
 exterior aerial region we favor the activity and vivacity of the 
 temperament ; but in stimulating the aquatic region of the front we 
 make an entire change of temperament, carrying it below the 
 level of inflammatory and febrile diseases. 
 
 Below the vertebrate class of birds, there is not sufficient 
 nervous developement to be capable of inflammation. The repa- 
 rative power increases as the inflammatory capacity declines, 
 so that wounds are healed and parts reproduced without 
 inflammation. 
 
 In the vegetable kingdom, without a nervous system or 
 intelligence, the reparative power is at its maximum, and inflam- 
 mation and fever are impossible. Zoophytes are as free from 
 inflammation as plants. Polypi may be cut to pieces and stuck 
 together as successfully as plants may be grafted. Worms, too, 
 may be cut to pieces and left to grow as separate individuals or 
 stuck together to grow as one. Among the Articulata and Mol- 
 lusca the reparative power is immense but the inflammatory ten- 
 
THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 
 
 2I 5 
 
 dency imperceptible. Crabs, lobsters and young spiders repro- 
 duce their legs when torn off without anything like inflammation. 
 The snail reproduces its head if the upper ganglion has not been 
 destroyed. In the oyster and muscle the death and putrefaction of 
 ipa.rtof the body is not necessarily fatal to the animal. Fishes reproduce 
 their lost fins and heal all their wounds without inflammation or 
 suppuration. Lizards, serpents, salamanders, frogs and toads 
 have great reparative power without inflammation. The lizard 
 even reproduces its tail. Prof. Macartney removed part of the 
 brain and skull of a toad which was healed without inflammation. 
 It is in birds that we first find the nervous system sufficiently devel- 
 oped to be capable of inflammation. Quadrupeds are still more 
 liable to inflammation. The maximum inflammatory capacity 
 with the least restorative power is found in man. 
 
 But as man in his embryonic life passes through the lower 
 forms of life, it is only after the second month that he attains the 
 inflammable constitution, but the lower elements which existed in 
 the embryo continue to exist in the matured form though overlaid 
 and concealed by the higher powers, and the mature man retains 
 in his constitution the elements which sympathize with all amimal 
 life, and which sometimes come to .the surface, as in the barking 
 and biting of hydrophobia and the imitations of animals practiced 
 under a species of religious insanity at camp meetings in our early 
 history. 
 
 Sarcognomy has brought out these buried elements of embry- 
 onic life and given them a definite location on the legs, correspond- 
 ing perhaps to the summit of the spinal column and portions of 
 the base of the brain. 
 
 The utility of the discovery is this : If the impressible sub- 
 ject can be carried back to the aquatic form of cold blooded life 
 by exciting these organs on the body he may be carried below the 
 stage of inflammation and fever . 
 
 This, I believe, is one of the most important discoveries ever 
 made in pathology and therapeutics, for in all very impressible 
 persons the aquatic location may be excited until they feel the 
 mental stupor or vacancy of mind, the blunted sensibility and the 
 
2l6 THE ABDOMINAL AND CRURAL REGIONS. 
 
 inclination to an aquatic life. They say they feel like lying down 
 or floating in the water. The respiration is greatly diminished as 
 well as the mental action. The lungs not only become quiet, but 
 lose their irritability, and all inflammatory or irritative conditions 
 of the lungs are subdued. 
 
 The aquatic region of the leg, then, is the region to which we 
 must look for the cure of pneumonia and bronchitis and the allevia- 
 tion, if not cure, of consumption, by stimulating plasters on the 
 tibial region or by Galvanic currents with negative rheophores 
 on the tibia or by manipulation. 
 
 The tibial surface of the legs, then, is the counter-agent of 
 the lungs and to a considerable extent of the brain. As we go 
 down the leg the antagonism to the brain increases, and on the 
 upper surface of the foot mentality is arrested and respiration also, 
 in proportion to the strength of the local influence. Thus does the 
 diseased organ secure a tranquil rest and freedom from inflamma- 
 tory action. I would be much obliged to nervauric healers for 
 exact accounts of cases of pneumonia and bronchitis treated on 
 these principles as evidence of the extent to which they are appli- 
 cable. The experience of my pupils already is sufficient to 
 authorize me to speak with confidence. 
 
 The aquatic influence may subdue the inflammatory condition in 
 the lungs, but we need a more active process to disperse the conges- 
 tion, which is the most formidable difficulty and this we have in 
 hemastasis. Ligatures around the thighs and shoulders, 
 compelling the limbs to swell with accumulated blood, will 
 infallibly deplete the congested lungs. 
 
 On the other hand when the lungs, instead of being oppressed 
 with inflammatory congestion are feeble, anemic and lacking in 
 depth of respiration they are benefitted by stimulating the thigh, and 
 
 calf of the leg, as well as the pulmonic locality in the dorsal region. 
 The entire foot is the anti-cephalic region — the bottom of the 
 foot corresponding with the mineral region and producing a feel- 
 ing of dullness and extreme heaviness. Hence protracted Gal- 
 vanic currents to the soles of the feet are liable to produce depres- 
 sing and injurious influences. A current from the soles of the 
 feet to the shoulders would be of much greater general utility. 
 
CHAPTER XH. 
 PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 
 
 Lumbosacral Region. Importance of sexual developement. Its effects. 
 Injury by deficiency. Its influence for Health. Centres of Love — spirit- 
 ual and physical. Difference of the Sexes. Sensibility of the womb. Value 
 of treatment on the back. Lse of Helonias. Medical quackery. Ingui- 
 nal region. Uterine region. Region of Sanity and Chastity. Sexual 
 excitement, its control and its seat in the brain. Pathological casts illus- 
 trating its location. Influence of virility on Health and Vigor. Health as 
 a cooperative. Centre of cerebellum as a reinforcement of Vitality. Treat- 
 ment of the eyes. Anatomical reference. Pathological relations to Insan- 
 ity and Nausea. Morbid tendencies of the basilar and pelvic organs. The 
 true nature of Insanity. Its location in the brain and the body. How Insan- 
 ity is to be cured by treatment on the body and the brain. Counter-irri- 
 tation on the back of the neck. The hypochondriac region concerned. Loca- 
 tion of Nausea on the body. The colon, cholic. nausea, vomiting and diar- 
 rhoea. Nausea of pregnancy. Influence of Nausea. Method of its treat- 
 ment. 
 
 Next to the region of vital force at the posterior summit of the 
 thigh, we should consider the region of sexual life and develope- 
 ment at the junction of the lumbar vertebrae with the pelvis in the 
 portion called the sacrum — at the lower end of the backbone, to 
 which the hips are united. 
 
 Sexual developement is essential to the completeness of every 
 being. Sexual and parental relations require a higher develope- 
 ment of the faculties, virtues and energies than a non-sexual 
 existence. They require Adhesiveness, Familiarity, Love and 
 delicate sympathies between two persons — consequently a higher 
 developement of refinement and virtue, to make the relation attrac- 
 tive, pleasant and permanent. The parental relation which follows 
 sexual love demands an additional developement of the virtues and 
 energies to meet its requirements properly. Hence the mammalia 
 or animals that nourish their young by the maternal milk and give 
 
2l8 PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 
 
 them prolonged care stand at the head of the animal kingdom. 
 
 It is, therefore, wisely ordered that sexual developement in 
 both man and woman, but more especially in woman, shall 
 produce an increase of Vital Force. Adhesiveness, Love and 
 Health, according to pathognomic laws to be explained hereafter. 
 
 Such being the case, sexual developement is one of the most 
 important incidents of human life. In developes in both sexes refine- 
 ment, poetic thought, imagination, amiability, social attraction, desire 
 to please, health, animation and courage, which qualities produce a 
 more perfect developement of the person, a more vivid expression 
 of the countenance, improvement in the voice, in the eye and in 
 the manners. 
 
 * A retarded or unhealthy developement of puberty is a great 
 injury to the female constitution, and throughout life woman's 
 health and happiness depend greatly on the sexual system. 
 
 The sexual functions, therefore, cannot be neglected in 
 nervauric treatment, or in the conduct of life. The man or 
 woman who has not attained full sexual developement is a barren 
 object, like a plant which has never bloomed, which has neither 
 the beauty and fragrance of flowers, nor the benevolence of fruit, 
 nor the possibility of a new life springing from its own. It is a 
 meagre and unripe condition of humanity in which the sexual 
 evolution is hindered, as we see illustrated in the difference 
 between castrated and natural animals. 
 
 Sexual developement is the last and highest stage of growth, 
 which changes the rude boy into the attractive and dignified 
 gentleman by perfecting the physical constitution and adding 
 thereto the moral energy and warmth which fit him for society by 
 attractive manners, and for the more important duties of life by an 
 exaltation of the kindly emotions and the sense of duty and 
 responsibility. It is true that mere sexuality as a controlling 
 power becomes a vicious impulse in its abnormal action, but I 
 speak of its normal action, according to the law by which the 
 inferior sustain the higher faculties, as when Vital Force sustains 
 Firmness and Heroism. 
 
PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 2IO, 
 
 In repressing sexual evolution, whether by castration or by 
 rigid authority and ascetic manners, we exert a degrading influ- 
 ence, impairing social harmony and happiness, and bringing life 
 nearer to a basis of absolute selfishness. We are marring 
 the Divine image in man, and assuming superiority to the 
 Divine wisdom. 
 
 Love is the world's saving, uplifting and perpetuating power, 
 and in the sexual plan of humanity the Divine wisdom has secured 
 its permanent presence and power. All attempts to amend or 
 control the Divine plan arise from a lack of true religion — a lack 
 of the reverence, love and faith which appreciate the Divine plan 
 of nature, allowing the entrance of censorious disgust where 
 admiration of the Divine plan should exist. Actuated by this 
 disgust religious sects have -assumed to crush human sexuality as a 
 noxious weed, and compensate for its absence by extra cultivation 
 of religious sentiments. The sinceritv and fervor of their e&orts 
 cannot be denied, but they have fallen short of the physical, 
 social and moral developement to which they aspire, for they are 
 thwarting a plan that is wiser than human inventions. It is impos- 
 sible that eunuchs or ascetic celibates should embody the highest 
 type of humanity, either physically or morally, which is devel- 
 oped only through the predestined plan of love and parentage. 
 
 These considerations are not foreign to the subject of nervau- 
 ric treatment, for it includes the sexual functions, and they are a 
 very important part of the vital forces that maintain health and 
 happiness. Love is correlative with health and perfection; it is 
 attracted by physical and moral perfection in another, and it is the 
 most powerful means of developing that perfection in its object. 
 All the virtue of which man is capable is developed in the home in 
 which he enjoys the sunshine of a woman's love and all the happy 
 energies, virtues and health of which a woman is capable are de- 
 veloped in the warmth of a devoted husband's love. This love, 
 like all that constitutes humanity, has both its physical and its 
 spiritual operation, and is beneficial and necessary alike in both. 
 Perfection is not attainable without the full developement, and the 
 normal life of the fully developed, in a perfectly harmonious con- 
 
220 PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 
 
 jugal relation. Such relations as the world goes are seldom 
 entirely harmonious, but a full developement of the love nature in 
 either party goes far to overcome all evils and secure contentment 
 and health, where, otherwise* there might be gloom and misery. 
 The refined and tender gallantry developed in man by sexual love 
 is necessary to the happiness of woman, and the all yielding, all 
 devoted sentiment which it developes in woman, not only gives to 
 her husband the cheerful content which is necessary to perfect 
 health, but developes in herself a happiness and a moral strength 
 which sustain his physical constitution and resist the decay of age. 
 
 Sexual love has two controlling centres : the lumbo-sacral, 
 which controls and sustains the sexual organs, and the mammas, 
 on the front of the chest, which correspond to the organ of Love 
 in the brain (just behind the coronal suture) . The lower organ 
 inspires the impulse to personal familiarity, fondling and contact, 
 the upper produces admiration, sympathy, tenderness, devotion, 
 service and fidelity, which in their highest degree might be called 
 worship.' The familiarity and the devotion are not exclusively 
 sexual, but their chief manifestations are found between those of 
 opposite sex. In parental love the difference in sex has less influ- 
 ence, though certainly not absent. 
 
 The superior love has an animating, inspiring influence over 
 the whole moral nature, for love heightened to adoration is the 
 essence of all religion, and the inferior faculty has a similar ener- 
 gizing influence on the whole physical constitution, and these two 
 elements are so closely linked by the Creator as to make their joint 
 developement a necessity, for neither can attain its maximum pow- 
 er without the the full developement of both. 
 
 The larger developement of the mammas in women corres- 
 ponds to their higher developement in love and their consequent 
 superior control by the moral nature, which is too obvious to re- 
 quire illustration. It is so very marked that the same exterior 
 configuration of the head will produce better results in women than 
 in men, because in woman there is a greater activity in the coro- 
 nal region of the brain than in man. The same external form of 
 skull which in a male would authorize me to pronounce him most 
 
PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 221 
 
 probably a criminal would not authorize such an opinion if it were 
 that of a female. 
 
 The sexual organs in a woman are very closely associated 
 with the developement of the mammae, and the loving emotions 
 of which they are the corporeal seat. Pregnancy brings on the 
 developement of the mammas, and the secretion of milk, and stim- 
 ulation of the mammae promotes the developement of menstruation. 
 
 The sexual conformation is different in man, and it has a 
 much less intimate association with the higher love (which is 
 explained by the laws of Pathognomy). Hence, in woman love 
 is more spiritual and devoted — in man more physical, passionate 
 and impulsive. But in each sex its intimate relation to Vital Force 
 is apparent, since the sexual apparatus is in various degrees asso- 
 ciated by its nerves with the whole lumbar and sacral regions upon 
 which the lower limbs depend. Hence in the sexual derange- 
 ments of women (and such derangements are pretty sure to follow 
 unnatural repression or inharmonious life) great weakness of the 
 limbs results, and sedentary habits (if not absolute repose) become 
 necessary, while the entire nervous system is greatly deranged. 
 
 The womb is such a centre of excitability, sympathy and 
 sensitiveness that it is easily affected by a thousand physical and 
 moral causes, and hence there are very few women who have posi- 
 tive sexual health. The great majority of females need treatment 
 for some form of sexual derangement. Even many who think 
 themselves in health (because they do not know what perfect 
 health is) need this nervauric treatment, which produces far better 
 results than the common drug practice. The old style of drug 
 practice on women was so crude, so barbarous and so wretchedly 
 meagre in its resources as to be responsible for a vast amount of 
 human suffering,* and its consequences transmitted to this 
 generation. 
 
 In the majority of females, whether married or single, five or 
 ten minutes of dispersive passes on the lumbo-sacral region will 
 help to remove morbid conditions. Following this, the application 
 of the hand to vitalize that region will have an admirable restora- 
 tive effect. Nature has furnished us, in the Helonias dioica a 
 
222 PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 
 
 nearly specific tonic for this region, and the fluid extract if applied 
 as an embrocation on the skin of the lumbo-sacral region or used 
 as a vaginal injection diluted with thirty or forty parts of tepid 
 water will powerfully aid the restoration of health to the sexual 
 apparatus of woman. It has, moreover, a fine influence on the 
 brain, the stomach and the entire constitution, and ten or twenty 
 drop doses by the stomach will produce its constitutional effects on 
 all parts if used from one to four times daily. A popular knowl- 
 edge and a general use of this remedy would have done more for 
 the health of women than all that has been done by the medical 
 profession with the exception of the modern treatment of enlight- 
 ened and liberal physicians. 
 
 In addition to invigorating the lumbo-sacral region, it is 
 almost always quite necessary to use dispersive manipulations on 
 the inguinal region or seat of sexual profluvia. This is espe- 
 cially necessary in cases of menorrhagia and dysmenorrhoea, and in 
 males, in cases of spermatorrhoea or sexual weakness and relaxa- 
 tion. I know.of no cases in which I have deemed the stimulation 
 of the inguinal region necessary, except in amenorrhoea, in which 
 it mi.ght be roused with the lumbo-sacral region, but not alone. 
 The trouble from dysmenorrhea at the catamenial periods is in gen- 
 eral easily relieved by one or more doses of Hayden's Viburnum 
 Compound, which should be kept on hand by women who need it. 
 
 The uterine region above the pubes and below the umbilicus, 
 also needs stimulation, only in cases of retarded developement or 
 amenorrhoea. In the majority of cases it needs dispersive treat- 
 ment to procure nervous tranquility — as it is the seat of that exci- 
 tability which causes excessive emotional activity, and at length 
 appears as hysteria Hysteria will be readily controlled by dis- 
 persive passes from the uterine region upward and backward, 
 for it is a condition of Impressibility which readily responds 
 to nervauric treatment. I do not deny however that the uterine 
 region may receive an increment of health from the hand of a good 
 healer, especially if the other hand be kept on the region of Health 
 on the shoulder blade. 
 
 In tranquillizing the sexual system the best treatment is by 
 
PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 223 
 
 dispersive passes over the uterine and inguinal regions upward 
 and backward toward the armpits — then placing the hands just 
 below the arms, on the side of the chest which covers the region 
 of mental soundness and tranquillity, which has been marked on 
 the bust as the region of Sanity — a region antagonistic to all 
 abnormal excitement and nervous depression. The posterior part 
 of this region running into Coldness, may properly' be called the 
 region of Chastity, as it antagonizes sexual excitement. In cases 
 of inordinate sexual desire with nymphomania or priapism, the 
 region of Chastity should be excited, and dispersive means used at 
 the uterine inguinal and lumbo-sacral regions. The dispersive 
 treatment may always be reinforced by bathing or sponging with 
 hot water. This sexual excitement has. its cerebral seat at and 
 below the occipital knob, in the superior and central portions of 
 the cerebellum^ at which location the sexual power may be 
 reinforced by stimulation, as the sexual excitement may be subdued 
 by the application of hot water or by the prolonged application of 
 ice or of ether, which produces great coldness by its evaporation. 
 Sexual functions are certainly performed by the sexual organs, 
 as forcible motion is effected by muscles, but in each case the 
 controlling power is in the nervous system. The sexual parts 
 depend upon their nerves, they upon the spinal cord and the spinal 
 cord upon the brain. Hence strong sexual excitement may be 
 produced by a thought, but congested or hyperemic conditions of 
 the sexual organs, even to priapism, may fail to excite any sexual 
 passion, as its seat is really cephalic. On the other hand, the 
 most morbid or destructive conditions of the sexual organs do not 
 destroy the sexual inclinations. They have been manifested by 
 women (according to Richerand and Gall) in whom the womb 
 -was entirely absent and others in whom the womb and vagina 
 were in the last stages of disease. Prof. Caillot relates one of 
 these cases in which the womb was entirely absent.- 
 
 (M. Serres reports a case o.f apoplexy with priapism, in which the autopsy 
 revealed inflammation of the central superior portion of the cerebellum, extending 
 along the connecting fibres to the quadrigeminal bodies. 
 
 In another case (of a robust day laborer) of apoplexy and satyriasis, with 
 
224 PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 
 
 It is not merely in reference to the sexual organs themselves 
 that we are interested in the lumbo-sacral region of virility, but in 
 reference to general health and developement also. 
 
 When we are stimulating the region of Health on the shoulders 
 or on the head we add a large amount of physical power by acting 
 on the region of Vital Force on the thigh, or on the base of the brain 
 behind the mastoid process — an addition which may be very 
 important to those exhausted by disease or those naturally deficient 
 in vital force. 
 
 In like manner the lumbo-sacral region may be used for the 
 reinforcement of vitality as a controlling centre for the pelvis and 
 lower limbs. Its influence is not like the region of Vital Force, 
 concentered on the muscular and locomotive energies, but extends 
 
 repealed emissions, the cerebrum was natural, but the cerebelhim exhibited the 
 most extreme inflammation in the central superior portion (looking as if it had 
 been macerated in blood) and there was a small cavity in the right hemisphere. 
 
 In a third case of apoplexy (of a man forty six years of age), accompanied by 
 convulsive movements and satyriasis, with heat and swelling of the genitals, the 
 cerebellum was farge and its upper surface of a lively red, indicating inflammation, 
 which extended along the process to the quadrigeminal bodies, which were also 
 inflamed. This inflammation of the upper surface of the cerebellum was highly 
 advanced along its superior central portion, in which cavities were just beginning 
 to be formed. 
 
 In the fourth case, of a man named Gambier, apoplectic and unconscious, the 
 limbs of the right side were entirely paralyzed, and this was explained in the 
 autopsy by the effusion three inches long and one inch wide in the left corpus 
 striatum. The limbs of the right side presented spasmodic contractions, and 
 priapism continued to death. The latter was explained by the condition of the 
 cerebellum, "the cerebellum, and especially the superior ventiicular process, pre- 
 sented numerous little effusions of the size of a grain of hemp seed." 
 
 These and other similar cases show as clearly as Pathology can that the 
 central and superior portions of the cerebellum are concerned in the sexual 
 functions, and the seat of inflammation in priapism or satyriasis. Inflammation 
 and destruction of other portions of the cerebellum proceed most commonly to 
 paralysis, but without sexual disturbance. 
 
 After I had located the sexual function by experiments below the occipital 
 knob, it was very satisfactory to find that Pathology so clearly confirmed 
 what 1 had discovered. 
 
 In a case of extreme nymphomania in a woman, Josephine Dubourg, lasting 
 through many years, and accompanied by insatiable excesses, the autopsy showed 
 what might have been expected, chronic induration of the central portion of the 
 cerebellum, with some small incipient ulcerations; all around this central portion 
 the cerebellum was inflamed and harder than natural, and the arteries of the 
 cerebellum were unusually developed, as well as the arteries of the pelvis.) 
 
PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 225 
 
 to the entire nervous system, like the developing influence of 
 puberty, which in man is probably effected through the seminal 
 secretion. Sexually speaking its influence developes not voluptu- 
 ousness, but virility. Therapeutically, it is reanimating alike to 
 the nervous and muscular systems. Hence the combination of 
 luinbo-sacral virility with the animating Health of the shoul- 
 ders — either on the body or on the head — is often the very best 
 thing that can be done to develope normal and useful life. 
 
 In rousing the various organs which need restoration, it is 
 expedient to develope simultaneously the influence of Health 
 which always makes a beneficial regulative influence. Thus in 
 stimulating the gastric region with one hand, if the other be located 
 on Health, the resulting effect on the stomach is very beneficial — 
 the restorative influence of Health being sent to it as the soothing 
 influence of morphine goes to the organ that is in pain. 
 
 When organs are languid or lifeless from weakness or 
 exhaustion, the lumbo-sacral or cerebellic influence may be 
 used to assist in their restoration. Thus in almost all cases of 
 weakness of the eyes they may be invigorated or reanimated by 
 placing the fingers of one hand under the occipital knob on the 
 centre of the cerebellum, and the other across the brows. 
 
 The precise central seat of the sense of vision is at the base 
 of the front lobe just above the pupil of the eye, and if the fingers 
 or thumb and fingers are applied to this spot it will stimulate the 
 visual power, while the animation derived from the centre of the 
 cerebellum will greatly increase the effect. But as all the convolu- 
 tions of the brows contribute to aid the sense of vision, it is well to 
 extend the outer margin of the hand across the brows. 
 
 Perhaps the anatomical arrangement may help to illustrate 
 this result. The sexual portion of the cerebellum is connected by 
 continuous fibres called the processus e cercbello with the quadri- 
 geminal bodies which are the origin of the optic nerve, and are 
 called the optic lobes, and in applying the fingers as above 
 described this whole tract from the cerebellum to the retinas is 
 included between them. 
 
226 PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 
 
 Let us now consider the pelvic region in its pathological rela- 
 tions which are of great importance. 
 
 The lower margin of the pelvis has pathological tendencies 
 as strongly marked as the hypochondriac regions — the hypochon- 
 driac influences being adverse to physical health and vigor — the 
 pelvic to mental soundness and the strength of the nervous system. 
 I must repeat again to avoid misconception that no organ is to be 
 regarded as an unhealthy or injurious element of the constitution 
 — all organs being constructed for necessary purposes. But such 
 tendencies arise from negative causes — from the absence of the 
 controlling forces which keep the organs in their proper sphere. 
 The evil influence connected with any organ is that which arises 
 from its uncontrolled predominance in the constitution, and they 
 arise whenever its developement is excessive or its antagonists are 
 deficient. 
 
 The sexual organs, for example, produce in their excesses an 
 utter prostration of the nervous system, of which we may see a 
 terrible picture in medical writings upon masturbation, licentious- 
 ness, spermatorrhoea and sexual diseases. The mental and phys- 
 ical prostration that arise from such causes are due partly to the 
 intense sensibility in the pelvis and hypochondria, partly to the 
 character of the secretions, which are extremely exhaustive, and 
 partly to the influence of the excretions of the rectum and blad- 
 der — partly, also, to the anti-cephalic character of the leg and 
 foot in association with the sacral region of the spinal column. 
 
 Mental derangement, shown as monomania, idiocy, melan- 
 choly, peevishness, ill temper, childishness, hallucination, etc., 
 depends primarily upon the failure of blood supply and circulation 
 in the brain, which becomes enfeebled like all other organs, under 
 such failure, and becomes softened in structure so as to be incapa- 
 ble of any vigorous action. The tendency of all the basilar organs 
 in predominance is in some degree insane, as they divert the circu- 
 lation from the brain, and the majority of the human race are 
 and ever have been very far from Sanity. It is but a few years 
 since the most enlightened and advanced nation on earth was*-en- 
 
PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 227 
 
 gaged in the horrible insanity of civil war, and this homicidal 
 insanity still prevails among all the great nations. 
 
 While all the basilar forces in predominance are insane in 
 various degrees, the maximum insane tendency is in front of the 
 vertical line between the front and back, where the sensitive exci- 
 tability attains its maximum and where we apply the term Insan- 
 ity, because that is its effect in predominance. 
 
 The excessive excitability and irritability of this region, oper- 
 ating on an enfeebled circulation, causes the most extreme 
 irregularities in different parts of the brain, congestion, hyperemia, 
 anemia, etc., destroying the mental balance and soundness of 
 judgment, as when one is under the influence of extreme despond- 
 ency, hallucination or rage. The slightest influences over-power 
 the mental energy of any organ in this condition, or excite other 
 organs to- wild excess, and under the influence of unbalanced 
 feelings the judgment loses all correctness. 
 
 The developement from which this excitability comes is in the 
 basis of the brain, at the entrance of the carotid arteries, and its 
 external indication is under the jaw, where the carotids and 
 jugulars pass, and where the superior cervical ganglion controls the 
 anterior cerebral circulation. The corresponding location on the 
 body is at the perineum between the thighs — a centre of depraving 
 influences. Here we have the passional force and the turbulence 
 of the thighs ; the hostile passions of the buttocks ; the stupefying 
 influence of urine and feces ; the brutality of the leg, and the 
 mental torpor of the foot which belong to the sacral region, with 
 the passional excitability of the sexual organs, which is most con- 
 spicuous in hysteria — all of which are intensified in effect by 
 conditions a little higher up — the prostrating melancholy of the 
 upper inguinal region, and the intense nausea of the sacro-iliac 
 junction. Under these combined influences we have every degree 
 of mental prostration, dementia, gloom, rage, idiocy and incapacity 
 to entertain a rational conception. 
 
 The therapeutic consequences of this discovery are immense, 
 and I earnestly entreat the superintendents of insane asylums to 
 test the discovery in their treatment of the insane. 
 
228 PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 
 
 The therapeutic indication is, that when we can transfer the 
 vital action from the base of the pelvis, or insane region, to the 
 region of sanity on the thorax under the arms, or on the spine at 
 the dorsal summit insanity will be cured. 
 
 The cure may be effected by restoring the pelvic organs to 
 health — securing free and healthy action of the bowels by 
 soothing, alterative aperients', restoring the womb, chiefly by 
 Helonias, and the urinary organs by Hydrangea and Epigea, to 
 which Flowers of Lavender make a good addition, and sending vital- 
 ity from the perineum to the region of Sanity by Galvanic currents, 
 the patient sitting, as on a saddle, on the positive sponge, or a 
 metallic tube or rod, or a seat with a metallic centre-piece like a 
 saddle, while negative sponges of large size are applied in the 
 axilla, and occasionally on the summit of the dorsal region. Of 
 course no one would expect a chronic condition to be removed by 
 a single Galvanic application, or by anything less than a pro- 
 tracted treatment. In some few cases the effects would be prompt 
 and marvelous — in the majority they would come slowly, at least 
 as long as any .organic derangement in the body remained. 
 
 In giving the nervauric treatment, passes should be made from 
 the coccyx to the summit of the spine, and from the groin and 
 inside of the thighs to the axilla. At the same time the Hygienic 
 current should be used, for general health is needed to sustain the 
 health of the brain. That is given by a current from the hypo- 
 chondria to the centre of the shoulder-blade, or by passes in that 
 direction. The positive pole should be applied at and behind the 
 location marked Disease. 
 
 But may not Insanity be treated directly at the brain? Assur- 
 edly it may. Currents may be passed from the under-jaw space, 
 just in front of the carotids and jugulars, to two corresponding 
 points — one on the sagittal suture, where the organ of Firmness is 
 located, and the other parallel thereto, on the temporal arch in the 
 middle of the parietal bone — its central point of ossification in the 
 fetus and infant.. 
 
 The current may be from a battery of five to ten cells, applied on 
 both sides of the head simultaneously by large sponge rheophores. 
 
PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 229 
 
 In nervauric treatment, passes from the region of Insanity to 
 the crown of the head, and the application of the hand on the 
 hygienic region would be proper. At the same time dispersive 
 passes downward on the neck over the insane region and similar 
 downward passes on the back of the neck would be proper. 
 
 There is an insane region, externally located on the. back of 
 the neck, on the median line just below the basis of the cranium, 
 on which dispersive passes are beneficial and on which physicians 
 have often found counter-irritation very useful in cerebral disorders. 
 Setons, blisters and irritating plasters on this location withdraw 
 diseased conditions from the brain. The brain may be greatly 
 soothed and benefitted in morbid conditions by' applying the posi- 
 tive sponge on the insane location at the lower angle of the jaw 
 just in front of the lower part of the ear, or on the cervical loca- 
 tion just mentioned (which affects its posterior half) the negative 
 being applied at the shoulder or axilla, or in the hand — or if there 
 is an inflammatory condition, on the tibial surface of the leg. 
 
 The hypochondriac region cooperates efficiently with the 
 lower pelvic in producing insane conditions. Hence it is highly 
 important to rectify the conditions of the liver and stomach. The 
 liver especially, has much to do with mental depression and mania. 
 
 There is another pelvic influence or function which has been 
 up to the present time almost as much of a mystery as Insanity. 
 I refer to nausea — a condition which has never been located or 
 explained. Sarcognomy shows its location at the sacro-iliac sym- 
 physis externally, which corresponds internally with the two ends 
 of the colon, its origin from the ileum on the right side and its 
 sigmoid flexure, connecting with the rectum on the left. The colon 
 is the chief seat of nausea. Its disorders, called cholics are charac- 
 terized chiefly by nausea and vomiting, as well as great mental 
 depression, which is explained by the location of melancholy just 
 in front of the ilium. 
 
 Lead cholic, which is accompanied by an irritated and con- 
 tracted condition of the colon, developes the functions shown by 
 Sarcognomy, melancholy and defecation, or desire to empty the 
 
230 PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 
 
 bowels, being in front of the colon and nausea behind it. Hence 
 the attack comes on with desponding wretchedness and mental 
 prostration, and a nausea which increases till it produces vomiting, 
 while the desire to evacuate the bowels is tormenting. The ner- 
 vous depression is so great as sometimes to result in paralysis of 
 the upper or lower limbs or tongue, or of the forearm. The 
 whole pelvic region has this paralyzing tendency, which is at its 
 maximum in the anterior part of the insane region. The pain 
 extends to the small of the back, and produces great restlessness. 
 Vomiting gives only a momentary relief — the depression and 
 weakness continue. 
 
 Bilious cholic is also accompanied by nausea and vomiting. 
 But in both affections there is no elevation of temperature, but 
 rather a coldness, as this irritation diverts from the calorific region, 
 whereas the irritations of the ileum, which is in the calorific region, 
 are accompanied by high fever. The existence of feverish heat 
 and thirst distinguishes inflammations of the small intestines from 
 cholic or affection of the colon. Diarrhoea and cholera, which are 
 affections chiefly of the colon, are also accompanied by nausea 
 and vomiting — sometimes quite protracted. 
 
 Nausea and vomiting arise from all severe affections of the 
 colon, and may even be caused by harsh purgatives. Obstruction 
 of the colon by fecal matter or by strangulated hernia necessarily 
 results in nausea and vomiting, and even an adjacent irritation 
 may extend to the colon and produce nausea, as we observe in the 
 early stages of pregnancy. The external location of Nausea, the 
 sacro-iliac symphysis, corresponds to the internal iliac artery for 
 the pelvic region, from which the pudic artery proceeds, supplying 
 the reproductive organs, and establishing a vascular as well as 
 nervous connection, and connection of proximity with the colon 
 and rectum. 
 
 With this location of nausea, what are its physiological and 
 therapeutic bearings? Physiologically, its influence is prostrating 
 to the brain, but not to physical life. Emetics are depressing, but 
 not dangerous. 
 
PELVIC FUNCTIONS AND ORGANS. 23 1 
 
 Animal life of a gloomy character is promoted by nausea, and 
 as every thing in the sacral region has a relation to the lower 
 limbs, especially the legs, nausea is a powerful means of subduing 
 inflammatory and irritated -conditions of the brain and chest, 
 though not so comfortable as the tibial region of the leg. Hence 
 it is that nausea is a familiar reliance in treating the lungs to take 
 down inflammatory conditions and promote expectoration : — most 
 expectorants are nauseants. 
 
 Therapeutically, we learn that nausea is to be treated on the 
 lower part of the back by vigorous dispersive passes which may 
 be assisted by upward dispersive passes in front from the same 
 level — from the hypogastric and hypochondriac regions. 
 
 When this principle is understood, seasickness will be con- 
 quered by positive currents from the region of Nausea to Health — 
 to the top of the shoulder and to the upper frontal surface of the 
 chest as low as the nipple. 
 
 As the philosophy of Insanity and Nausea has never before 
 been known or suspected, I would request those who verify these 
 principles in treatment to send me a report of their results. 
 
m 
 
 CHAPTEE XIII. 
 ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 
 
 Jts marvelous phenomena. Opposition of materialism. Its unscientific character. 
 Sarcognomy. Delenze's Practical Instruction. His erroneous theories cor- 
 rected. His formula for magnetizing. The scientific method of producing 
 the results. The localities on the head and the body. The evil effects of the 
 unscientific method. Effects of the downward passes. Superiority of the 
 upward. Nature of the magnetic seance. Blind empiricism. The improper 
 method of removing pain or disease. Prevalence of contagion. Use of the 
 breath and of water. Method of waking. Use of magnetized water. The 
 baqnet. Exalted powers of Somnambulism. Their source and philosophy. 
 Explanation of the power of operators and best methods. Blind routine of 
 magnetizers. Failure of the medical profession. Hartshorn's translation — 
 its valuable testimony. Mechanical ideas of the medical profession. How 
 to produce insensibility. Testimony of Cuvier, La-Place and Georget. 
 Corroboration by Psychometry. Treatment of Dr. Elliotson in London. 
 Cloquet's operation in the magnetic state. Clairvoyance of Miss Brackett. 
 Duty of the disciples of truth. 
 
 The nervauric treatment of disease, heretofore practiced 
 under the name of animal magnetism, which was so famously 
 illustrated by Mesmer as to cause many to give it the name of 
 Mesmerism, has achieved a vast amount of curative results in dis- 
 ease, and marvelous phenomena in the developement of human 
 intuition through Clairvoyance and Somniloquence. The vast 
 amount of its benevolence and the jealous hostility of the great 
 mass of the medical profession, notwithstanding its well attested 
 cures and the numerous learned and brilliant volumes in which its 
 claims have been set forth, are a sad illustration of the moral con- 
 dition of the present century. 
 
 The greater part of this opposition has been owing to the res- 
 olute, unyielding spirit of materialism which has dominated in all 
 scientific circles ; but a considerable part, also, has been due to the 
 fact that Animal Magnetism, as taught and practiced, has been 
 
ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 233 
 
 purely empirical and has never attained the status of a science or 
 been cultivated in a thoroughly scientific manner. 
 
 The marvelous effects produced on the human constitution 
 were never traced to their source in the brain and the body ; and as 
 when the causes of phenomena are unknown and unsought, science 
 does not exist, the whole subject becomes puzzling, embar- 
 rassing and repellant to minds accustomed to the mastery of 
 positive science. 
 
 If the rationale of clairvoyance and somniloquence had been 
 discovered, if the philosophy of magnetic cures had been made 
 clear, and if the marvelous powers exercised over the magnetic 
 subject had been used to unfold the mysteries and localities of the 
 vital forces, so as to give command of all vital functions, philo- 
 sophic thinkers would have found in the science an irresistible 
 attraction. 
 
 Sarcognomy is the result of the scientific method applied to 
 this investigation, and enables us to review the operations and 
 correct the errors of the cultivators of Animal Magnetism. To 
 perform this task briefly and bring the chaos of benevolent empiri- 
 cism under the jurisdiction of science, let us look at the instructions 
 of Deleuze, the learned and benevolent Expounder of Animal 
 Magnetism. 
 
 His volume of " Practical Instruction " opens with the state- 
 ments of principles which he pronounces essential and invariable, 
 viz. : that man exercises a salutary influence over his fellow-beings 
 by his will, which is called magnetism — that the first condition of 
 the operation " is to exercise the will " — that this will operates 
 through something called the magnetic fluid, and that "the direct 
 action of magnetism ceases when the magnetizer ceases to will," 
 and that " magnetism generally exercises no influence upon 
 persons in health." 
 
 This is but a collection of errors. The vital emanation or 
 nervaura which has been called animal magnetism, proceeds con- 
 tinually and unconsciously from every human being and tends to 
 impress his influence, his mental and physical characteristics, on 
 all with whom he is in contact or approximation. We see this in 
 
234 ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 
 
 the diffusion of smallpox and virulent fevers, in the contagious 
 influences that rule public assemblies, and in the assimilation of 
 those who associate together. We see it especially in the power 
 of the healing presence of a benevolent physician, who cures with- 
 out medicine and without contact, which has been the method of 
 some of our best healers. It is realized whenever the hands are 
 placed upon a patient, whether there be any purpose or not, and 
 in all my experiments for developing the faculties, passions and 
 vital forces in which the nature of the sensitive is for the time 
 being revolutionized or subjected to the domination of various 
 passions, such as pride, religion, sympathy, fear or anger, I have 
 always carefully avoided any exercise of will, or any desire to 
 influence the results, and have instructed my pupils accordingly. 
 The influence of the hand is sufficient apart from will. And 
 yet a determined influence of the will must influence a passive 
 sensitive, and therefore may add materially to the result. But that 
 ^ the nervaura exerts no influence on persons in health, is an 
 astonishing statement to come from so intelligent and respectable a 
 -source. All mankind are susceptible in various degrees to the 
 influence of the nervaura and the will ; and I have often found a 
 higher susceptibility during health than in disease. Some diseases 
 enhance and others diminish the susceptibility. 
 
 Deleuze next describes his process of magnetizing, which is 
 little more than the general or extensive application of the opera- 
 tor's handsito the person of the subject, by gentle touches and 
 passes, while the patient sits in a passive condition with nothing to 
 attract; his attention but these manipulations, while he rests in the 
 state of self-surrender which is enjoined. His first direction is 
 quite trivial and unimportant, "take his thumbs between your two 
 fingers so that the inside of your thumbs may touch the inside of 
 his. Remain in this situation from two to five .minutes, or until 
 yott<periceitfe there is an equal .degree of heat between your thumbs 
 and his. "This is a puerile formula. The impression to be made by 
 (the o-peratoafs hands can. be much better made by applying his 
 whole, hands to the inner. Surface of the patient's, the tendency- oi 
 which would.be to , establish, sypathetic .connection, and: lntluenOfc.. 
 
ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 235 
 
 But the whole magnetizing procedure, thumbing, passes, hand- 
 shaking, etc., is a crude, partial, unscientific method. The appli- 
 cation of the operator's hands upon any portion of the anterior sur- 
 face of the chest would have a better effect. Still better would be 
 the application of the hands on the top of the head, anteriorly and 
 laterally, which would produce an amiable and submissive feeling. 
 The whole object of the magnetic seance of half an hour or an 
 hour is to produce the passive, sensitive condition which yields to 
 all influences, and may gradually pass into a state of Somnilo- 
 quent trance, and it is a practicable, though tedious way of effect- 
 ing it. Deleuze recommends the first seance to be for an hour, and 
 if no effect is experienced to continue treatment for a month. But 
 the object desired may be attained frequently in twenty min- 
 utes. It is the evolution of functions which belong to the region 
 behind the eyes, where the front and middle lobes of the brain 
 come together — the regions of Sensibility, Impressibility and 
 Somnolence. If the patient is sufficiently sensitive to be mate- 
 rially affected by the passes of the operator, he can certainly be 
 affected by the direct application of the hands to the organs to be 
 roused. The application of the fingers upon the temples, an inch 
 behind the brow, will produce in a few minutes the same effects 
 which the magnetizer seeks by the tedious formula of magnetic 
 passes which Deleuze minutely describes. If the fingers are accu- 
 rately placed upon Somnolence, the effect is revealed in a few 
 minutes by the winking of the eyes and disposition to close them. A 
 thorough sensitive will in a few minutes be brought into the som- 
 niloquent trance — others may only realize the soothing effect. 
 If the fingers are placed a little further back, the effect will be a 
 developement of Sensibility and Impressibility which will render 
 the subject more amenable to local treatment and to the action of 
 delicate remedies. *It will also bring him sympathetically under 
 the influence of the operator's constitution, or will, if need be, as 
 well as the tedious processes of Deleuze. Without touching the 
 head, however, the whole results of the magnetic seance may be 
 developed by placing the hand at the lower end of the sternurri, 
 extending down on the median line from four to five inches. The 
 
236 ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 
 
 entire space between the umbilicus and sternum is a region of 
 soothing, sympathetic, somnolent influences which the magnetizer 
 endeavors to develope, not by operating directly upon their seat, but 
 by applying a general treatment. He who would attempt to 
 develope a particular note in the piano by pounding the frame 
 work instead of touching the proper key would commit a similar error. 
 
 In the Deleuze process the hands are moved to the level of 
 the head, placed on the shoulders about a minute and drawn 
 lightly down to the tips of the fingers, "touching lightly,'* then 
 placed on the head a moment, brought down before the face at a 
 distance of one or two inches, as far as the pit of the stomach — 
 then slowly down to the ends of the feet. Then repeat without 
 touching the head, but "shaking the fingers" at the end of each 
 pass, and end by making transverse passes at a distance of three 
 or four inches before the face and before the chest. Passes may 
 also be made from the shoulders down the back, hips and thighs. 
 
 Much of these directions are arbitrary and fanciful. Passes 
 along the median line down to the epigastrium are, however, ap- 
 propriate to the purpose, and in the most sensitive may be effective 
 but not so prompt and efficient as the direct application of the hands 
 to the epigastrium. In these passes mistakes are frequently made 
 by applying an influence to the hypochondria. Deleuze himself 
 says ; " Sometimes the patient experiences pain at the stomach and 
 nausea which is even followed by vomiting ; at other times he expe- 
 riences cholic pains, and sometimes desires the sitting suspended 
 because he feels a species of irritation," all of which shows the 
 injurious effects of downward passes to the hypochondria and the 
 abdomen generally, prompted by the mistaken dogma that the 
 downward are the only magnetic passes. It is very remarkable 
 that this was never discovered and that neither electricians nor 
 magnetizers had any conception of the pathological tendency of 
 the hypochondria, although they often brought out its pathological 
 influence and electricians, as Althaus and others, have been com- 
 pelled to desist from operations in the hypochondriac region, yet 
 there was never enough of the spirit of investigation to discover 
 the local cause of the injurious results produced. 
 
ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 1^] 
 
 Deleuze says that the patient must "not be in the least alarmed 
 at any crisis or transient indisposition." Magnetism "frequently 
 brings on very sharp pains. These pains prove that it acts 
 powerfully ; they are necssary to subdue the disease. If, then, 
 you experience sufferings, you will have the fortitude to bear them 
 without speaking of them to any one. You will not even ask your 
 magnetizer to calm them. If you have not beforehand taken the 
 firm resolution of resisting the first pains that it causes you to feel 
 — if your magnetizer has not confidence and force of character 
 enough not to be alarmed about them, it would be better for you 
 not to commence. I acknowledge that magnetism has been known 
 to excite a nervous irritation and an uneasiness which continue 
 after the sittings without being followed by any crisis." 
 
 These frank admissions are just what we should expect from 
 his adhering to the dogma that downward passes alone are bene- 
 ficial (which is entirely false), and prosecuting blindly his regular 
 routine without inquiring or wishing to inquire into the causes of 
 the results. The notion that some injury ^to the patient is a neces- 
 sary part of the curative process is parallel to a similar notion that 
 has tacitly pervaded the old harsh and heroic practice of medicine. 
 It is utterly false. A beneficent agency never does harm, except 
 by the blind ignorance of those who apply it. 
 
 So far from downward passes being the only beneficial or 
 magnetic ones, their general tendency is decidedly injurious when 
 they carry the vital forces from the thorax to the abdomen — 
 pre-eminently injurious when they carry the influence no lower 
 than the hypochondria — relaxing, debilitating, depressing and 
 nervous when they extend to the hypogastric region, where we 
 find nervousness and melancholy, from which evil effects the 
 magnetizer escapes only by continuing the passes down the limbs, 
 producing physical vigor at the thighs and mental dullness or 
 quietude upon the legs and feet. Onimus and Legros, in the prac- 
 tice of electro-therapeutics, acted upon a similar notion current 
 among electricians, and in treating a case of chorea they passed 
 the electric current from the hands to the feet, expecting to cure dis- 
 ease in the lower limbs by the descending current. They found to 
 
238 ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 
 
 their surprise, however, that the arms in four seances were cured by 
 the asscending current they received. They continued the downward 
 current from the spine for six seances without any benefit to the 
 lower limbs, and then tried an ascending current to the spine, 
 which completed the cure in two seances. 
 
 The result of the long passes is to diminish mentality and all 
 the energetic impulses and emotions which sustain health, and to 
 promote a state of purely animal life, subject, however, to the 
 danger of producing very morbid, irritating, sickening and depres- 
 sing influences, unless the impression be thoroughly removed from 
 the abdomen to the limbs. 
 
 Upon the front of the body passes from the abdomen up the 
 thorax are as beneficial as the reverse are injurious. Let any one 
 who wishes to realize this try a number of individuals in succession 
 with brisk and energetic passes, with a light friction on the cloth- 
 ing (or still lighter if on the skin), upward from the hypochondria 
 to the shoulders or neck, or from the hypogastric region to the 
 shoulders, eitjier above or below the arms. It will be found 
 invariably that these passes and frictions are refreshing, energizing 
 and delightful. They disperse all morbid, debilitating conditions, 
 rouse the pleasant emotions and promote calmness and health. 
 
 The passes down to the feet recommended by Deleuze are 
 appropriate for reducing the activity of the brain, and are thus 
 favorable to sleep. 
 
 Deleuze says, "it is proper in finishing to make several passes 
 along the legs, from the knees to the end of the feet. These 
 passes free the head." This is a correct observation, although the 
 author had no conception of the reason involved. Dismissing the 
 formula of passes, the application of the hands on the top of the 
 feet is the best way of freeing the head — and the application on 
 the front of the legs relieves both head and chest, as 
 Sarcognomy explains. 
 
 " The descending passes are magnetic. The ascending move- 
 ments are not," says Deleuze. This is incorrect — all passes are 
 about equally efficient. The terminus of the pass determines its 
 effect. Prolonged passes terminating at the hypochondria are quite 
 
ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 239 
 
 injurious. Any function of life may be developed by passes 
 towards its locality, whether upward or downward. Somnolence 
 may be promoted by passes to the epigastrium, whether downward, 
 upward or lateral. The Sarcognomist makes passes from the 
 function to be checked toward the function to be developed. 
 
 Deleuze commends magnetizing by the long pass from the 
 head to the feet without touching, and also with gentle friction, as 
 beneficial, which is true in many cases, but in general he prefers 
 to keep the hand one or two inches from the body and sometimes 
 at a distance of several feet. 
 
 This is not idle mummery. An influence may be exerted 
 upon sensitives without contact, and moreover, passes without 
 contact vividly excite the imagination and sensitiveness of the 
 patient, and thus add to the effect. Neither are such passes 
 inefficient with those in health. It is merely a question of 
 impressibility and imagination. 
 
 The true effect of the magnetic seance is the cultivation of 
 sensibility by a passive condition with the attention fixed upon the 
 faint impression from the operator's hands — secondly, the surren- 
 der of soul and body to the influence of the active operator in close 
 proximity as an auditor surrenders to the influence of the speaker ; 
 thirdly, the promotion of Somnolence by fixed attention to the 
 operator and his monotonous passes. The latter result, however, 
 may be more simply attained by fixed attention to any other object 
 held near the eyes, an expedient sometimes employed in public 
 exhibitions for selecting impressible subjects, or by a steady gaze 
 into the patient's eyes. Moreover, Somnolence is strongly promo- 
 ted by the nervauric emanations in proportion as they are recog- 
 nized and felt by the subject. The whole process therefore is 
 designed to produce indirectly what we produce directly when we 
 stimulate the region in the temples or on the epigastrium ; and the 
 practicability of developing the latter by a Galvanic current renders 
 such a process more intelligible and satisfactory to a scientific mind. 
 
 But Deleuze was purely empirical. He gives his directions, 
 predicts the results and then says ; "It is iiscless < to search out the 
 
24O ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 
 
 causes of these facts ; it is sufficient that experience has established 
 them " and this is a leading reason why scientists have manifested 
 an aversion to the subject of Animal Magnetism. 
 
 The term Animal Magnetism is perhaps allowable, though 
 somewhat fanciful. Magnetism is an attractive force inherent in 
 minerals. The human nervaura is not simply an attractive influ- 
 ence. It has every conceivable variety of influences — attractive, 
 repulsive, wholesome, injurious, intellectual, stupid, elevating, 
 debasing, exciting, calming — and Sarcognomy enables us to 
 comprehend all these various influences and their local sources so as 
 to evoke them when needed and to use them for good purposes. 
 
 The attractive influences which have some analogy to Magne- 
 tism belong to the upper portion of the back and to the upper por- 
 tion of the occiput. 
 
 In his directions for the treatment of disease, Deleuze cor- 
 rectly states that pains are carried off by passes in the direction in 
 which they are moved, but some of his advice is not quite judicious. 
 He directs th,e application of the hand for several minutes upon 
 the seat of pain or disease, followed by a descending pass toward 
 the extremities. This may be well for the patient, but not for the 
 operator. In placing his hands on the morbid part the operator is 
 making an exchange of vital influences, and if sensitive himself 
 he receives the entire morbidemanation in to his hands, and in a 
 few such operations receives a very sensible injurious influence. 
 We do not need to refer to very contagious diseases to understand 
 this matter — all conditions, whether pathological or physiological, 
 are contagious to the sensitive, and this perpetual contagion is the 
 chief objection to the nervauric practice. Hence I have always 
 warned my pupils with great emphasis to protect themselves — 
 not to remain passively in contact with any form of disease, but to 
 maintain as active a condition as possible — not to rest in contact 
 with morbid parts, but first energetically remove the morbid condi- 
 tion and aura by dispersive passes, carrying it out of the body 
 before applying the sanative influence of the healthy hand — not 
 applying it then in a very passive manner, but holding the muscles 
 firm and making as much active manipulation as possible. 
 
ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 2A.I 
 
 Deleuze recommends another process which is beneficial, but 
 instead of applying it at first, as he suggests, it should be applied 
 after dispersive passes or frictions. He says, "place a piece of 
 linen several times folded or a fragment of woollen or cotton cloth 
 upon the suffering part, apply the mouth above it, and breathe 
 through it." This method applies a very general and wholesome 
 influence from the interior of the chest, and is not sufficiently 
 appreciated. 
 
 Deleuze also mentions a case in which water was used for 
 carrying off disease : M, N. filled a glass with water and covered 
 it with a linen cloth to prevent spilling, then applied it to the back 
 of the head of a patient, making passes from the head to the 
 tumbler, giving decided relief. It is very true that water may 
 carry off pathological influences, as all hydropathists know, and 
 this is further illustrated in the electric bath. 
 
 Deleuze directs the patient whose eyes are closed to be roused 
 by "passes transversely across the eyes." It is far more effective 
 to stand behind the patient and make passes, either from the outer 
 angle of the eyes or from the inner angles, backward and upward 
 toward the region of Firmness and Energy. 
 
 Deleuze relates a*case of hysteria with convulsions occurring 
 in his practice, which alarmed and astonished him, but speedily 
 passed off. If he had known the proper hypogastric treatment it 
 would have been very easily controlled. 
 
 The instructions of Deleuze in reference to the use of magne- 
 tized water for healing need not be discussed farther than to say. 
 that psychometry fully establishes the potential influence over 
 sensitives of any and every emanation from a human being and 
 the objects to which that . emanation may be attached. He 
 recommends the use of magnetized objects to apply upon the seat 
 of pain, such as tissues of cotton or silk, and plates of glass, gold 
 or steel. Modern magnetizers in the United States are using 
 paper with success for sending out magnetic influences to patients. 
 Of course the success of such means depends on a high degree of 
 susceptibility in the patient and a very potent vitality in the operator. 
 In the magnetic baquet, composed of bottles of magnetized 
 
242 ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 
 
 water, communicating by wires with a central conductor as if they 
 were Ley den jars charged with electricity, the good Deleuze 
 passes from the sphere of tangible science into that of imagination 
 — for imagination skilfully impressed would produce far greater 
 results than his baquet. 
 
 In the developement of somniloquence, no matter by what 
 process, or by the course of nature, there is a great exaltation of 
 the interior or intuitive faculties, and Deleuze speaks very correctly 
 of the phenomena of somniloquence or somnambulism. He says, 
 " in the state of somnambulism the moral sensibility is undeniably 
 much more lively." The cause of this is developed by Sarcog- 
 nomy. "There is in most somnambulists a developement of 
 sensibility of which we can have no conception. They are suscep- 
 tible of receiving influence from everything that surrounds them, 
 and principally from living beings. They are not only affected by 
 physical emanations or the effluvia of living bodies, but also to a 
 degree much more surprising by the thoughts and sentiments of 
 those who surround them. If you are alone with a somnambulist 
 and any one is permitted to enter, the somnambulist generally 
 perceives it. Sometimes the person who enters is indifferent to 
 him ; at other times he feels for him either a sympathy or an 
 antipathy." If the stranger is incredulous and suspects the 
 sincerity of the somnambulist, or makes a jest of what he sees, the 
 somnambulist is troubled and loses his lucidity. M If many 
 witnesses surround and are occupied about him the fluid of each of 
 them acts upon his organization." 
 
 This sensitive condition is merely an active state of the 
 interior faculties, which exists normally in those who have a large 
 developement of the lateral and interior regions of the front lobe 
 and who by their psychometric perceptions are continually in 
 rapport with those around them, or those at a distance to whom 
 their minds are directed. 
 
 The developement of Intuition, the divinely intelligent 
 element in man, under the name of Psychometry, will guide 
 mankind hereafter into more profound science and philosophy 
 than has ever before been conceived — carrying us into all the 
 
ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 243 
 
 mysteries of physiology, pneumatology, paleontology, astronomy, 
 geology and antiquity. This interior faculty has been apparent in 
 the somnambulism of magnetizers, but has not been guided and 
 used for the results of which it is capable. 
 
 Deleuze describes the somnambulistic phenomena which 
 sometimes appear as follows : " when the somnambulist has 
 reached this degree of exaltation his manner of speaking is almost 
 always different from that which he has in his ordinary state. 
 His diction is pure and simple, elegant and precise; his manner, 
 unimpatient ; everything announces in him a state of tranquility, a 
 distinct view of that of which he speaks, and an entire conviction 
 of its reality. You perceive in his discourse not the least of what 
 is called excitement or enthusiasm. In this new situation the 
 mind is filled with religious ideas with which perhaps it was never 
 before occupied. * * * This life appears to him only 
 •a journey, during which we ought to collect what is necessary for 
 us in our everlasting mansions. * * Sometimes 
 
 the prodigious difference he perceives between his new manner of 
 viewing objects and that which he had in his ordinary state, the 
 new lights which shine for him, the new faculties with which he 
 finds himself endowed, the immensity of the horizon which is 
 spread before his eyes, persuade him that he is inspired." 
 
 In that mental condition supernal intelligences do communicate 
 and influence the mind, or. may even control the sensitive and 
 make him their mouthpieee. When we know that these exalted 
 powers may be cultivated by stimulating the organs behind the 
 eyes and behind the root of the nose, with their corresponding 
 locations at the lower end of the sternum and the epigastrium, we 
 have added greatly to our power of seeking truth and wisdom, 
 and advancing education. The boy, the girl, or the uneducated 
 laborer may become, by the developement of their interior faculties, 
 teachers to those most advanced in education, as patients have 
 often been enabled to instruct their physicians in diagnoses, 
 prognoses and remedies. 
 
 Of marvellous phenomena Deleuze is but a modest narrator, 
 without the slighest effort at investigation. He says "there exists 
 
244 ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 
 
 with some individuals a magnetic power, truly prodigious, of which 
 I do not pretend to know the cause. " Many magnetizers induce 
 somnambulism with very great facility and do not hope for 
 success except from this crisis, while others can scarcely effect it, 
 yet do not do the less good. Some of them act only by the will, 
 without any apparent magnetic process." 
 
 The explanation of this, which will be given more fully in my 
 Anthropology, is found in the occipital .energy belonging to the 
 region on the head just back of Combativeness, which gives this 
 dominating, entranaing power. The coronal region of the 
 amiable sentiments, the whole upper surface of the head, is the 
 source of the benevolent healing power which does not aim or 
 desire to subjugate others. This benevolent power is nowhere so 
 effective as at its origin in the brain, and the application of the 
 upper surface of the head to the patient or to any painful or 
 diseased part is the most soothing restorative treatment possible. 
 It is remarkable that with all the vast amount of experience in 
 Animal Magnetism nothing should have been known or suspected 
 of this. The whole subject has been dominated by a spirit of blind 
 routine, more monotonous than that of the medical profession. 
 Deleuze himself says, "magnetism, if it has been practiced 
 empirically from a high antiquity, has not, at least, formed a 
 particular science, except for a small number of years. Magne- 
 tism cannot take its rank among the sciences, and present a 
 doctrine of which application may in all cases be made, until 
 physicians take it up seriously." But the hard, mechanical 
 character which the medical profession has assumed utterly 
 disqualifies it for investigating so profound, so delicate, so psychic 
 a subject. It has not even been able to develope the rational 
 principles of electric practice. 
 
 The remark that some magnetizers act by the will alone 
 indicates that the region of will is largely developed — the region of 
 Firmness, which is assisted by all the occipital organs — and that 
 they have more of the psychic temperament derived from the interior 
 regions of the brain, which brings them into rapport with persons 
 at a distance, or into intimate sympathy with those who are near. 
 
ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 245 
 
 But little more need be said of Therapeutic Magnetism as 
 presented by Deleuze. There is very little of it, beyond a limited 
 formula, or rules of proceeding, which might be fully expressed in 
 three or four pages, and which certainly has no claim to be 
 considered a science or a scientific art. But the volume of his 
 "Practical Instruction," reproduced in this country by T. C. Harts- 
 horn, of Providence, R. I., is filled with gossipy details, good 
 advice to magnetizers, descriptions of cases and their treatment, 
 which certainly show success in the practice, and numerous 
 illustrations of somnambulism and clairvoyance, mainly added by 
 Mr. Hartshorn, with the testimony of physicians, making an 
 aggregate of documentary evidence so weighty and convincing 
 that it exhibits in a clear light the remarkable stolidity of medical 
 colleges in continuing to treat facts so well established with silent 
 scorn or open hostility, and at last endeavoring to reduce the 
 whole subject to the coarse, mechanical proceeding which they 
 call massage or rubbing. 
 
 I have shown that the somnambulic, clairvoyant and 
 entranced conditions which constitute the mass of the phenomena 
 of animal magnetism- are the results of the predominance of certain 
 faculties with which all mankind are endowed in various degrees, 
 and which may be elicited by direct stimulation of their organs by 
 the fingers or hand, and by Galvanic currents. 
 
 To produce the sleep or trance of insensibility the organ of 
 Somnolence in the temples may be excited, or it may be produced 
 by placing one hand at the epigastrium on the median line, just 
 below the sternum, and the other on the back just behind the middle 
 of the humerus, and below the shoulder-blade, which tends to a 
 deep sleep. The insensibility to pain may be promoted by placing 
 the hand upon the shoulder, from the acromion process (the external 
 and upper surface of the shoulder) extending three or 
 four inches inward. 
 
 Possibly these volumes may do something to overcome medi- 
 cal prejudice by showing the facility with which the neurological 
 laws of the human constitution may be demonstrated by Galvanism. 
 But scientific testimony seems to produce very little effect when it is 
 
246 ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 
 
 resisted by materialistic dogmatism. In addition to the testimony 
 of a very large number of physicians as to the reality of the 
 magnetic phenomena, the two most eminent of all French scien- 
 tists, Cuvier and La Place, have given their attestation 
 of the truth. 
 
 Cuvier says in his comparative anatomy, "the effects produced 
 upon persons who before the operation (of mesmerizing) was 
 begun were in a state of insensibility ; those which have taken 
 place upon other persons after the operation itself has reduced 
 them to that state, and also to the effects produced upon brutes, no 
 longer -permit it to be doubted that the proximity of two animated 
 bodies, in a certain position, and with the help of certain motions, 
 do produce a real effect, wholly independent of the imagination 
 of either. It is also evident that these effects are owing to a 
 communication which takes place between the nervous systems of 
 the two parties." The testimony of La Place in his great treatise 
 on the calculation of probabilities is equally positive and explicit. 
 
 The eminent physiologist, Georget, said, "I have seen, 
 positively seen, a great many times, somnambulists announce 
 several hours, several days, twenty days beforehand, the hour, 
 the minute even, of the attack of epileptic and hysteric fits, and of 
 the menstrual eruptions, and indicate the duration and the intensity 
 of the attacks — things which were actually verified." 
 
 The existence of these intuitive and prophetic powers in man 
 I have demonstrated in developing the science of Psychometry, 
 and pointed out their location, and in Sarcognomy I place the 
 entire modus operandi in the possession of the public, of which 
 for many years probably only the most enlightened will avail 
 themselves. 
 
 Let us not forget that Dr. Elliotson, at the head of the medical 
 profession in London, was driven into retirement for attempting to 
 introduce in England the magnetic anaesthesia in surgical opera- 
 tions, after the committee of the Royal Academy of Medicine at 
 Paris in 1836 had made the following statement of the success of 
 Cloquet in operating during the somnambulic trance — a specimen of 
 the large class of facts of which the present generation of physicians 
 
ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 247 
 
 have been carefully kept in ignorance by their professors — an 
 ignorance which they are most faithfully transmitting to their 
 successors. 
 
 The report made in 1831, signed by Bourdois de la Motte, 
 president; Fouquier, Gueneau de Mussy, Guersent, Itard, 
 J. J. Leroux, Marc, Thillaye and Husson says : 
 
 " You have all heard of a fact which at the time fixed the 
 attention of the Chirurgical Section, and which was communicated 
 to it at the session of April 16, 1829, by M. Jules Cloquet. The 
 Committee thought it their duty to embody it in this report, as one 
 of the least equivocal proofs of the power of the magnetic sleep. 
 It relates to Madame Plantin, aged sixty-four years, living at 
 151 Rue Saint-Denis, who consulted M. Cloquet, on the 8th "of 
 April, 1829, about an ulcerated cancer on her right breast, which 
 she had had many years, and which was complicated with a 
 considerable enlargement of the axillary ganglions. M. Chape- 
 lain, the physician of this woman, whom he had magnetized for 
 some months, with the intention, as he said, -of reducing the 
 enlargement of the breast, had been able to obtain no other result 
 than a very profound sleep, during which her sensibility appeared 
 annihilated, but the ideas preserved all their lucidity. He proposed 
 to M. Cloquet that he should operate upon it while she was 
 plunged into the magnetic sleep. M. Cloquet, considering the 
 operation indispensable, consented to do it ; and it was agreed 
 that it should take place on the following Sunday, April 12. The 
 two evenings previous, this woman was magnetized several times 
 by M. Chapelain, who disposed her, when in somnambulism, to 
 support the operation without fear, and even led her to speak of it 
 with composure, while, as soon as she waked, she repelled the 
 idea with horror. 
 
 "On the day appointed for the operation, M. Cloquet, on his 
 arrival at half past ten o'clock in the morning, found the patient 
 dressed, and seated in an arm-chair, in the position of a person 
 peacefully wrapped in a natural sleep. It was nearly an hour 
 since she had returned from mass, which she always attended at 
 the same hour. M. Chapelain had put her into the magnetic 
 
248 ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 
 
 sleep since she came back. The patient spoke with great 
 calmness of the operation she was about to undergo. Every 
 arrangement having been made for the operation, she undressed 
 herself, and sat down upon a chair. 
 
 "M. Chapelain held the right arm, the left arm being suffered 
 to hang by her side. M. Pailloux, a student of the Saint-Louis 
 Hospital, was charged to hand the instruments and to make the 
 ligatures. First an incision was made from the armpit, above the 
 tumor, to the inner side of the breast. The second, commencing 
 at the same point, separated the tumor below, and passed round to 
 meet the first. M. Cloquet dissected the enlarged ganglions with 
 caution, on account of their proximity to the axillary artery, and 
 took off the tumor. The time consumed in the operation was ten 
 or twelve minutes. 
 
 " During all this time, the patient continued to converse tran- 
 quilly with the operator, and did not exhibit the slightest sign of 
 sensibility ; no movement of the limbs or of the features, no 
 change in the respiration, nor in the voice, no emotion, not even 
 in the -pulse, were manifested ; the patient did not cease to be in 
 the state of self-lorgetfulness and passive insensibility, in which 
 she was several minutes before the operation. They were not 
 obliged to hold her ; they merely sustained her. A ligature was 
 applied to the lateral thoracic artery, which was exposed during 
 the extraction of the ganglions. The wound was closed with 
 sticking plaster, and dressed; the patient was put on the bed, 
 still in the state of somnambulism, and left there forty-eight hours. 
 An hour after the operation, a slight hemorrhage ensued, which 
 did not continue. The first dressing was removed on the 
 succeeding Tuesday, April 14. The wound was cleansed and 
 dressed anew : the patient manifested no sensibility nor pain. 
 The pulse preserved its natural beat. 
 
 "After the dressing had been put on, M. Chapelain awoke the 
 patient, whose somnambulic sleep had lasted ever since one hour 
 before the operation, that is to say, for two days. This woman 
 did not appear to have any idea or any impression of what had 
 passed; but, on learning that she had been operated upon, and 
 
ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 249 
 
 seeing her children around her, she experienced a very lively 
 emotion, which the magnetizer terminated by putting her asleep 
 immediately." 
 
 The report of the commission fully confirmed the claims of 
 the friends of Animal Magnetism, giving some interesting illustra- 
 tions of clairvoyance and the power of somnambulists to prescribe 
 successfully for the sick. Two centuries previously, in France, 
 during the time of Richelieu, Grandier was condemned and 
 burned alive for the exercise of the powers which this commission 
 commended as a matter of science. Unfortunately the medical 
 profession during the last half century has been retrograding in 
 this matter toward seventeenth century ignorance. 
 
 Notwithstanding the vast number of public and private exhi- 
 bitions of the power of clairvoyance, a brutal hostility to this fac- 
 ulty has been exhibited by many of the leaders of the medical 
 profession, and I think it well to republish here one of the best 
 illustrations of this power. 
 
 Rev. E. B. Hall, of Providence, (Dec. i, 1837) stated in 
 reference to Miss Brackett " I have seen a sealed letter containing 
 a passage enclosed in lead, which letter she held at the side of her 
 head not more than a moment, all in sight, then gave it back to 
 the writer, and afterward wrote what she had read in it. The let- 
 ter was opened in my presence, and the two writings agreed in 
 every word, there being two differences in spelling only." 
 
 In another instance M. S. Covill of Troy, being skeptical, 
 wrote a sentence on paper without any one's knowledge, enclosed 
 it between two thick cards, folded the whole up in deep blue paper, 
 sealed it with his own seal and a number of wafers, and put it all 
 into a larger sheet directed to Mr. Isaac Thorpe ; this sealed letter 
 as he received it was presented by Mr. Thorpe to Miss Brackett 
 in the presence of quite a number of gentlemen, requesting her to 
 read it without breaking the seals. She took the letter with her 
 on retiring for the night and in the morning dictated the following 
 as its contents, which was written down by Mr. H. Hopkins : — 
 
 " No other than the eye of Omnipotence can read this in this 
 envelopement. * * * * 1837." 
 
250 ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 
 
 The stars represented a portion she could not read. The let- 
 ter was returned with the seals undisturbed, and her reading was 
 published before the answer was received. Mr. Scoville stated 
 that the reading was, "No other than the eye of Omnipotence can 
 read this sentence in this envelope. Troy, New York, August, 
 1837." Thus the reading was correct in everything but the local 
 date and the word "sentence," which was omitted. 
 
 These marvelous powers of the soul and brain, which the 
 cultivators of Animal Magnetism have demonstrated so many 
 thousand times without overcoming that hostility which springs 
 from the coarser elements of human nature, are now clearly intelli- 
 gible, since I have traced them to their location in the front lobe of 
 the brain, and shown how they may be evoked. 
 
 The vast number of illustrations of clairvoyance and of the 
 power of the disembodied soul during the last thirty years, and the 
 vast number of cures effected by human vitality without medicine 
 and without learning would have wrought an entire revolution in 
 philosophy, and therapeutics, if the educated classes had been 
 taught to reason. 
 
 The great need of the age is a true education, which will 
 enable all classes to welcome and appreciate new truth. 
 
 The progress of the higher departments of science and phil- 
 osophy is not like the steady growth of physical science, but is 
 rather a matter of accidental impulse, local fashion, and prejudice. 
 The systematic cultivation of animal magnetism has been neglected. 
 The study of the brain by comparative developement has been 
 almost forgotten, although it vastly exceeds in interest and value 
 all other methods in natural history and ethnology. 
 
 My own experimental investigation, which organizes a positive 
 and complete Anthropology, has not been sufficiently urged to 
 enforce its proper consideration. The marvelous facts of spiritua- 
 lism, and the diagnostic and healing powers which it has developed 
 are now the chief objects of interest with progressive minds, and 
 our therapeutic science is about to be enriched by the partisans of 
 psychic methods, who discard all physical means, as the medical 
 
ANIMAL MAGNETISM REVIEWED AND RECTIFIED. 25 I 
 
 profession has discarded the psychic. Every step in that direction 
 is an advance toward higher conditions. The marvelous cures, so 
 numerous and well attested, achieved by prayer, faith, spirit 
 agency and what has been called " mind cure," far transcend the 
 achievements of medical therapeutics, and the question is being 
 determined by experience, to what extent these psychic agencies 
 can be substituted for the physical means upon which the world 
 has heretofore relied. 
 
 The partisans of physical science have confined themselves 
 rigorously to physical methods, forgetting that man is an eternal 
 spiritual being, even while dwelling in a material form. If the 
 partisans of psychic science, ignoring physical means, treat the 
 sonl alone, we may obtain comparative statistics of the two 
 methods, and the true philosopher, comprehending each, will 
 avail himself of both. 
 
OHAPTEE XIV. 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF PRACTICAL RULES. 
 
 I now present, in very concise statement, the rules to be 
 observed in nervauric and electric therapeutics, by showing what 
 localities are to be stimulated or repressed for various purposes. 
 The organs mentioned will be found on the charts of the head and 
 body. The reader will understand that stimulation is effected by 
 the application of the hands, by gentle percussion, by the negative 
 pole of a Galvanic current, by a Faradic current confined to the 
 spot applied for a very short time, by stimulating plasters or em- 
 brocations, by heat and in some cases by friction. 
 
 Repression is effected by dispersive passes, by the positive 
 pole, by cold steadily applied for a long time, by hot water brief- 
 ly applied, by evaporating liquids and by medical sedatives. 
 
 The localities referred to and the directions will serve to guide 
 all external treatment, by clothing, by plasters, by baths and by 
 the pneumatic or vacuum treatment. Warm clothing applied on 
 any part of the body developes the local influence according to 
 Sarcognomy, and variations of the clothing produce important 
 effects. 
 
 i. To establish health. Stimulate Health, repress Disease 
 on the body and the head. Disperse excitement from morbid or- 
 gans, and reinforce them by the hands. Rouse all inactive func- 
 tions and repress those in excess. 
 
 2. To -promote mental soundness. Stimulate Sanity and 
 Cheerfulness, and the entire summit of the trunk — the shoulders 
 
SYNOPSIS OF PRACTICAL RULES. 253 
 
 and upper surface of the chest. Repress Insanity, Melancholy, 
 Disease, Irritability and Excitability. 
 
 3. To promote mental vigor. Stimulate the Cephalic zone 
 of head and body. For the psychometric clairvoyant and spirit- 
 ual faculties, stimulate at the lower end of the sternum — for Ora- 
 tory at the five upper dorsal vertebrae and the posterior surface of 
 the shoulder joints. On the head, Oratory is on the upper occi- 
 put — Clairvoyance at the root of the nose, Psychometry in the 
 sensitive region of the temples and the Intuitive region at the front 
 lobe, which is behind the root of the nose. 
 
 4. To produce sleep. Stimulate three inches below the 
 sternum, or on the cerebral organ of Somnolence — then on the 
 organ of sleep on the body and head, assisting if necessary by 
 the front of the leg and foot. 
 
 5. To -promote wakefulness. Stimulate the middle of the 
 forehead — disperse upwards from the temples. Stimulate upper 
 occiput, shoulders and thighs — disperse from the whole front of 
 the abdomen, inguinal and pubic regions, and from the region 
 under the jaw. 
 
 6. To relieve headache. Brush rapidly downward along 
 the jugular veins and the back of the neck ; brush upward and 
 backward from the temples, and backward on the median line. 
 Make dispersive passes at the seat of the pain. If the head is 
 cool stimulate the cephalic zone — if hot, the front of the leg and 
 top of the foot. 
 
 7. To invigorate the lower limbs. Stimulate occipital base 
 of brain and neck, lumbar and sacral regions of back, entire 
 thighs and calves of legs. 
 
 8. To overcome -pneumonia and other conditions in which 
 there is hyperemia, warmth, irritation or congestion in the chest. 
 Stimulate pulmonic portion of dorsal region (between the shoul- 
 ders) and tibial surface of the leg (aquatic region) including top 
 of foot. Use dispersive passes from front of chest toward feet and 
 hands. For prompt effects use hemastasis, by applying ligatures 
 around the shoulders and thighs, which will be more effective if 
 
254 SYNOPSIS OF PRACTICAL RULES. 
 
 the legs and forearms are inserted in warm water or stimulated 
 with mustard. Keep the limbs distended with blood several hours. 
 
 9. To overcome asthmatic, or dry and constricted conditions 
 of the lungs — stimulate inspiration on the chest and the pulmonic 
 region on the back. 
 
 10. To overcome excitability of the heart. Stimulate the 
 entire shoulder and the middle of the dorsal region, also Firmness 
 and the upper occipital region of the head, dispersing from 
 the temples. 
 
 11. To deepen respiration. Stimulate on the abdomen 
 below the umbilicus, and on the face below the mouth. For 
 expansion of the chest by costal respiration — stimulate Inspiration 
 on the ribs, and the thoracic or pulmonic region in the temples. 
 Stimulate Health to co-operate. 
 
 12. 1 T o -promote the healthy action of the stomach. Stimulate 
 the lower dorsal region and the gastric location just below the ribs 
 (Alimentiveness) in connection with Health. 
 
 13. To r&use the diaphragm. Stimulate on the side and the 
 spine, along the course of the seventh and eighth ribs, and on the 
 region of Respiration below the umbilicus. 
 
 14. To overcome constipation. Stimulate the region of 
 Defecation on the abdomen (lower end of Gastro-enteric region) 
 and the entire lumbar region ; or pass mild Faradic currents 
 between these two locations, or alternating Galvanic currents. 
 
 15. To overcome menorrhagia and dysmenorrhea. Make 
 rapid dispersive passes from the groin upward and backward ; 
 stimulate the lumbo-sacral junction, and the location of Cheerful- 
 ness, Sanity and Chastity near the axilla, with the hand or the 
 negative pole, the positive being on the groin. 
 
 16. To overcome Insanity, in any of its forms of mania, 
 dementia, etc., the pelvic organs should be restored to health and 
 all serious affections in the region of the liver and stomach 
 relieved; then Galvanic currents for ten, twenty or in some cases 
 even thirty minutes, should be passed from the perineum to the 
 region of Sanity at the axillae, on each side — also to Health and 
 the cephalic or upper dorsal region. Very gentle Galvanic 
 
SYNOPSIS OF PRACTICAL RULES. 255 
 
 currents may also be passed from the under-jaw region of Insanity 
 to the cerebral locations of Sanity and Firmness, or the latter may 
 be stimulated by the hand, and the former subdued by dispersive 
 passes on the side and back of the neck. When there is violent 
 excitement and over-active circulation in the head, a stream of hot 
 water applied to the disturbing regions on the side and back 'of the 
 neck, along the carotid and vertebral arteries, will have a 
 beneficial influence. 
 
 17. To relieve hysteria. Use dispersive passes or Galvanic 
 currents, from the location of the womb to the region of Sanity 
 at the axilla and stimulate the region of Health at the top of the 
 shoulder. 
 
 18. To treat organic diseases of the womb. Remove exci- 
 tability as in hysteria ; use suitable medical injections, such as 
 Helonias, Hydrastis, White Pond Lily (Nymphoea odorata) and 
 Bromide of Ammonium, and apply the positive pole to the cervex, 
 sending a current to the lumbar region or to the axilla. 
 
 19. To control nausea. Nauseating substances sometimes 
 require to be removed by an emetic or by a gentle, soothing 
 cathartic. Medicinally, nausea has been resisted by soothing aro- 
 matics such as peppermint water and minute fractions of a grain 
 of morphine, or by ingluvin and lactopeptin, which assist diges- 
 tion, or by minute portions of lobelia or ipecac, which act homoeo- 
 pathically. To treat nausea and vomiting according to Sarcogno- 
 my, relief should be given by dispersion from the seats of Nausea 
 and Disease on the body. In slight cases vigorous dispersive up- 
 ward passes from Disease, and stimulation of Health and the 
 lower dorsal region will restore the stomach to a comfortable con- 
 dition. In such cases a Galvanic current from Disease to Health 
 is beneficial, and relief has sometimes been given by a Galvanic 
 current at the locality of the stomach from left to right, aided by 
 the application of atropia or of belladonna on the surface. Dr. 
 LeConiat claims to have relieved seasickness by applying the neg- 
 ative pole near the pyloric end of the stomach, and passing the 
 positive over the surface from the cardiac to the pyloric end after 
 moistening the skin with a solution of sulphate of atropia, the 
 
256 SYNOPSIS OF PRACTICAL RtJLES. 
 
 active element of belladonna. But this treatment is rather pallia- 
 tive than radical. The radical treatment must reach the sacro- 
 iliac region of Nausea or Disgust, though it may be assisted by 
 hypochondriac and epigastric treatment. Thorough dispersive 
 treatment should be applied at Nausea, and the Galvanic current 
 introduced at that location and conducted to the shoulder where 
 the negative pole may be applied on the top, back and front of 
 that region over the entire space between the lower angle of the 
 scapula and the nipple. With the highly sensitive, the nervauric 
 manipulation would be equally effective — - stimulating the upper 
 region just mentioned, and dispersing from the lower. The hori- 
 zontal position of the body favors the predominance of the upper 
 region, and it would even be advantageous if the head of the 
 couch were a little lower than the foot, and if the shoulders and 
 arms were kept especially warm. 
 
 20. Phthisis -pulmonalis, or tuberculous consumption, when 
 not too far advanced, may be controlled and cured in the very 
 impressible with very little use of medicine ; but in all others 
 medical treatment must be the chief reliance. The fundamental 
 rules of all treatment are to diminish the irritation of the lungs, 
 promote a healthy expectoration, increase the muscular energy, 
 increase the digestive and assimilative power, and develope the 
 largest possible amount of healthy red blood. Hence, in the early 
 stages an active, hardy, out-door life, developing a vigorous appetite 
 and satisfying it with rich nitrogenous food (especially flesh) has 
 often wrought a perfect cure. 
 
 In the nervauric treatment, the irritation of the lungs must be 
 relieved by dispersive passes to the hands and feet, and by stimu- 
 lating the aquatic or tibial region, which overcomes pulmonary 
 irritation. The lower dorsal region should be stimulated to 
 promote digestion : the shoulders or Health region, and the space 
 between them, to invigorate the lungs — Vital Force and Nutrition 
 to resist debility and emaciation, and the upper and lower limbs 
 should be stimulated to assist them in active daily exercise. An 
 active life in the open air and sunshine and the most generous 
 sustaining diet that can be digested are necessary. 
 
SYNOPSIS OF PRACTICAL RULES. 257 
 
 21. Pericarditis, and other inflammations of the heart 
 require the tranquillizing and tonic influence of Firmness, Patience, 
 Fortitude and Heroism, located at and near the sagittal suture or 
 median line of the head, and on the body at the top of the shoulder. 
 The most exterior part of the shoulder gives Heroism or Hardi- 
 hood and interiorly at the base of the neck we find Patience and 
 serenity which overcomes all excitability and irritation. We get 
 additional vigor for the heart as we descend on the shoulder blade 
 and also on the spinal column, between the shoulders. In addi- 
 tion to these quiet tonic influences, by which we produce a slower 
 and steadier pulse, we need the antiphlogistic influence of the tib- 
 ial or aquatic region, which is the proper reliance for resisting 
 inflammatory diseases. Under these two influences the in- 
 flammation, pain, excitement and oppression are relieved, 
 and nature displays its restorative power. As there is usually con- 
 siderable heat or fever, this would require in addition to the 
 aquatic influence that of coldness, on the side of the body and 
 on the head, which directly resists the fever. 
 
 We should not forget that the first thing to be done in this, as 
 in other active local affections, is to disperse the local morbid influ- 
 ence. Dispersive passes upward and backward over the heart 
 toward the shoulder and spine should be our first ministration and 
 should be repeated as often as the symptoms indicate the need. 
 
 22. Dilation of the heart — a condition of debility, recog- 
 nized by the feeble circulation, oppression at the heart, weakness 
 of its impulse and the increased extent of its sound in the chest 
 requires perseverance in a tonic treatment through the shoulders, 
 the upper dorsal region and the thighs to produce the same results 
 attained in the medical treatment by the use of Cereus, Convallaria 
 and Digitalis which are necessary in such cases. The Cereus 
 Grandiflora or Bonplandii and the Convallaria I should consider 
 indispensable, but they do not supercede the necessity of nervauric 
 treatment for the impressible. 
 
 23. Affections of ike liver should be treated adjacent to its 
 location, bearing in mind that we impart energy through the pos- 
 
258 SYNOPSIS OF PRACTICAL RULES. 
 
 terior surfaces. Hence when we apply the hand on the lower 
 dorsal vertebras we energize the liver. Passing forward on the 
 side of the trunk, the influence becomes more exciting and less 
 tonic. In its congested and irritated conditions, dispersive passes 
 from the front to the back are appropriate, together with the stimu- 
 lation of the lower dorsal region and the shoulders. In inflamma- 
 tory conditions, the region of coolness and the tibial region have 
 a good influence. We stimulate the liver on the hepatic zone of 
 the brain, producing the most energetic effect about two inches 
 behind the cavity of the ear. 
 
 24. Affections of the stomach are treated at the lower dorsal 
 vertebras and at the gastric location on the abdomen below the ribs 
 — also on the assimilative region above the umbilicus — the 
 shoulders being used to control the excitement and give it a 
 healthy direction. 
 
 25. All irritations of the abdominal organs are treated with 
 dispersive passes backwards and upwards — the lower dorsal and 
 lumbar regions being used to vitalize, and the shoulders to control, 
 regulate and moderate the action. 
 
 26. Fevers require efficient dispersion from the hypochon- 
 driac and hypogastric regions (Disease and Calorification) and 
 the stimulation of Health and Coolness — and'of the tibial region 
 when the brain and nervous system are excited. 
 
 27. Chills require the excitement of Calorification, Health, 
 the lumbar region and the thighs. 
 
 28. Inflammations or inflammatory diseases require the 
 influence of Coolness, the tibial region and the top of the shoulder. 
 The first counteracts inflammatory heat and fever, the second 
 diminishes capacity for inflammation, and the third diminishes 
 sensitive excitability and sustains the vital energy. 
 
 29. Paralytic affections (if the brain is not involved) 
 require treatment through the spine — dispersive passes, followed 
 by the vitalizing application of the hand — or Galvanic currents 
 in alternating directions through the spinal region affected, for 
 about ten minutes. Descending currents are commonly used from 
 
SYNOPSIS OF PRACTICAL RULES. 259 
 
 a point above the affected portion through the cord to the muscles. 
 Brief ascending currents add to the effect. Faradic currents may 
 be applied directly to the muscles concerned. 
 
 When the brain is involved, dispersive downward manipula- 
 tions may be used over the affected part and very gentle Galvanic 
 currents may be passed downward a week or two after the attack. 
 
 30. Local affections require local treatment but may all be 
 greatly aided by constitutional treatment according to Sarcognomy, 
 to increase the vital power and modify the local condition. 
 
 31. Kidney diseases require local treatment, their spinal con^ 
 trol being just above the kidneys. The antagonistic functions 
 which produce their quiescence being located around the shoulder 
 and especially at its superior anterior aspect. 
 
 32. Antagonism. Antagonistic organs oppose each other, 
 each tending in high excitement to suspend or suppress the action 
 of the other, as courage suppresses fear, and. benevolence sup- 
 presses selfishness. Hence we diminish the excitability and 
 activity of any organ by exciting its antagonist. But this 
 antagonism exists in various degrees. There is the direct 
 and absolute antagonism which tends to suppress the function 
 entirely. There is also the antagonism to excitability, which has 
 a quieting effect but does not suppress the functional power. 
 There are many other modifying influences, the exposition of 
 which would require a full developement of Anthropology. As 
 we do not seek the suppression of functions, the antagonism to 
 excitability is what we may find useful. The absolute antagonism 
 to the bodily functions belongs to the superior anterior regions of 
 the brain, which tend to develope the spiritual at the expense of 
 the corporeal. 
 
 The antagonism to excitability of the heart is on the upper 
 aspect of the shoulder adjacent to the neck. The antagonism to 
 excitability of the lungs occupies the arms from the shoulder to the 
 elbow. The more sedative antagonism to excitability of brain 
 and lungs occupies the foot and the tibial surface of the leg. The 
 antagonism to gastric and hepatic excitability is on the shoulder 
 
26o DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. 
 
 midway between the neck and the acromion prominence, extend- 
 ing backward on the upper part of the scapula. The excitability 
 of the alimentary canal is antagonized from the top of the shoul- 
 der back and downwards to to a little below the axilla. Uterine 
 and sexual excitability are antagonized on the side of the chest 
 below the axilla (marked Ch.) Locomotive or restless excitability 
 is antagonized on the side of the chest at the anterior line of the 
 arm. 
 
 DESCRIPTION OF THE STATUESQUE CHART OF 
 PSYCHO-PHYSIOLOGICAL SARCOGNOMY. 
 
 The "functional" division of the head (front view) shows 
 the functional influence of the different regions. The " correspon- 
 dential " division (rear view) shows the regions of the head which 
 correspond with the regions of the body. 
 
 The subdivisions of the spinal column, cervical, dorsal, lumbar 
 and sacral are plainly marked on the rear view. The upper or 
 thoracic portion of the figure has been excessively developed by 
 the artist, at the expense of the lumbar and sacral regions. The 
 controlling powers of the spinal column, cephalic, thoracic, 
 abdominal, pelvic and crural are plainly indicated, which are 
 described in the chapter on the spinal region. 
 
 The upper half of the dorsal region is marked Thoracic and 
 the lower half Abdominal, as the one governs the Thoracic 
 muscles and viscera, and the other the Abdominal. The Thoracic 
 region has not been marked Pulmonic and Cardiac, but its upper 
 portion has chiefly the calm Pulmonic character and the lower 
 portion manifests the Cardiac energy and the vital force of deeper 
 respiration, running into diaphragmatic action at the Phrenic zone, 
 where the Thoracic and Abdominal come together. The functions 
 
DESCRIPTION OF THE PLATES. 26l 
 
 of the lumbar and sacral regions and the lumbo-sacral function are 
 fully described in Chapter IX. 
 
 The shoulders and arms, corresponding to the Brachial 
 region of the brain, present Firmness, Fortitude, Energy, Heroism 
 or Hardihood, and running down to the elbow, we have, poste- 
 riorly, Dignity (or Self-esteem and Self-respect), Self-confidence 
 and Love of Power assuming an arrogant character at the elbow. 
 On the opposite anterior surface (the biceps flexor) we have 
 Ambition of every grade, from the highest to the lowest, and on 
 the exterior surface the impulse called Ostentation, which is one 
 of the leading and most costly characteristics of civilized society. 
 The interior surface of the arm facing the body corresponds to 
 affections and attachments which are more forcibly expressed on 
 the inner surface of the forearm. 
 
 The inner surface of the forearm and palm of the hand have 
 the adhesive and attractive character which is sometimes called 
 magnetic. The influence is gently tonic, vitalizing and somewhat 
 soporific. The external surface of the forearm and hand is 
 hostile and combative or repellant. The left arm of the figure is 
 ignored, to mark the locations on the body which it would conceal 
 — Cheerfulness at the junction of the arm and trunk — Sanity 
 just below it, running down into Cautiousness and Excitability, 
 behind which is Coldness, the antagonist of fever and of undue 
 excitability. In the ordinary position of the arm Coldness would 
 be parallel to its posterior line. Sleep, between Coldness and 
 Adhesiveness, is the centre of conservative physiological 
 influences. 
 
 Adhesiveness is a tonic sustaining influence, less violent and 
 impulsive than the organs below, less firm and sustaining than the 
 organs above. 
 
 Approbativeness. above Adhesiveness, has a more cheerful, 
 pleasing and healthful influence — more of social ambition and 
 self-reliance, approximating closely to health. At the lower angle 
 of the scapula, in the Approbative region, is the organ of Playful- 
 ness (marked Play.) the source of gayety, humor and lively sport 
 which cooperates well with cheerfulness. As the antagonist of 
 
262 DESCRIPTION OF CHARTS. 
 
 thought, it dissipates the effects of study and prolonged meditation. 
 The dorsal region of the spinal column has been fully 
 explained as the source of the energies of the thoracic and abdom- 
 inal muscles and viscera. Its psychic influences necessarily relate 
 to the actions in which the thorax and entire trunk are concerned 
 
 — which Qf course are numerous and energetic. The name which 
 best expresses the power of the lower portion is Business Energy 
 
 — while the upper portion, which uses less muscular and more 
 moral and vocal power, may be properly called Oratory, or the 
 faculty by which we impress our fellow beings. 
 
 At the lumbo-sacral junction we find the centre of sexual 
 energy, and in the lumbar region the sources of the energies exer- 
 cised by the combative and hostile passions. 
 
 The animal forces and passions acquire their maximum 
 energy at the posterior base of the trunk, where Hatred or Domina- 
 tion, Desperation and Destructive Violence are found, correspond- 
 ing to the base of the brain. This is all a region of animal force, 
 which attains, its maximum at the summit of the thigh where 
 Hatred passes into Turbulence (Vital Force). The influence of 
 this region when highly excited is gloomy and unpleasant. An 
 especially unpleasant influence is found at the sacro-iliac symphi- 
 sis, that is, about two inches on each side of the lumbo-sacral 
 junction — the region of disgust or Nausea which repels the 
 offensive objects from the stomach and bowels, as the other portion 
 of this region repel external objects. In this we find the explana- 
 tion of sea-sickness and of nausea and vomiting from other causes. 
 The cerebral correspondence is on the posterior portion of the cer- 
 ebellum, which explains the frequent occurrence of vomiting in 
 diseases of the cerebellum. 
 
 The entire basis of the pelvis from the coccyx to the pubes is 
 the seat of the forms of excitability which in predominance 
 destroy the integrity of the brain and nervous system by Insanity, 
 Idiocy and Paralysis. The same remark is applicable in a minor 
 degree to the right and left groin and the hypogastric space 
 between them, which is the seat of hysteria. In the midst of this 
 anti-cephalic region we locate Insanity, at the perineum. 
 
DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. 263 
 
 The word Vivacity, on the hips, (the developement of which 
 is shown by the breadth of the hips) expresses a quality more 
 conspicuous in the female than the male. It corresponds in a 
 lower grade with Playfulness on the scapula, but has a more hys- 
 terical impulsiveness. 
 
 The entire developement of the lower limbs is singularly 
 parallel on a lower plane with that of the upper. The energies of 
 the thigh resemble those of the arm, and the leg the forearm. 
 
 Vital Force at the summit of the thigh, and Nutrition just 
 exterior to it are essential to life and growth. We find them 
 deficient in the emaciated and consumptive. The antagonistic 
 region to Vital. Force is on the chest, above the mammas. The 
 antagonism to Nutrition is farther back, at the upper end of 
 Inspiration. The antagonism to the muscular impulses of the 
 thigh is at the anterior part of Sanity called Tranquillity. The 
 muscular impulse assumes a restless character at the knee. 
 
 The anterior surface of the leg, exterior to the edge of the 
 tibia (marked Aquatic), is the seat of the lower condition of life, 
 first realized in the embryonic condition, which corresponds to 
 cold-blooded or aquatic animals — a condition which limits the 
 action of the brain and lungs produces a sedative, cooling, soporific 
 impression, and overcomes all inflammatory tendencies. 
 
 The region marked Aerial corresponds to a higher grade of 
 life which we find in birds, characterized by greater activity and 
 warmth. The region marked mammalian corresponds to a fuller 
 developement of animal life, approaching more nearly the human 
 — hence the calf of the leg gives important aid in reinforcing 
 animal life, especially when reduced by mental labor. 
 
 The Vegetative region, corresponding to the upper surface of 
 the foot, is valuable in therapeutics for subduing all excitement of 
 the nervous system and lungs, and promoting sleep. It has the 
 cooling influence of the Aquatic region. 
 
 The Mineral region, or bottom of the foot, is extremely seda- 
 tive, producing dullness and heaviness, and may be used for the 
 promotion of sleep and as a general sedative.- 
 
 On the front of the trunk we observe at the summit of the 
 
264 DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. 
 
 Moral region Benevolence, Religion, Patience (B. R. Pat.;, 
 below which are the Moral region and the Intellectual. The ex- 
 terior part of the Moral region, anterior to Firmness and Energy 
 contains the loving emotions, merging into the friendly, adjacent 
 to the Intellectual. The word Love at the mammae fully expresses 
 the character of that locality. Adjacent to Patience and Energy 
 the moral sentiment assumes the character of Conscientiousness or 
 Duty. 
 
 At the lower end of the Intellectual region (the end of the 
 sternum), we find Somnolence, the region of Dreaming or Intel- 
 lectual sleep, similar to that produced by mesmeric proceedings. 
 Between Somnolence and Love is the region of Spirituality which 
 gives the perception of spiritual beings. At the junction of Som- 
 nolence and Sensibility is the maximum of impressibility, and by 
 impressing this region we increase our control of the subject. The 
 region of Sensibility just below, includes both psychic and physi- 
 cal sensibility, and increases the sensibility to all impressions. At 
 the margin of the ribs or hypochondria this sensitiveness to inju- 
 rious impressions attains its maximum, and we mark this locality 
 as Disease, because it gives a liability and tendency to morbid 
 action. 
 
 Posterior to the mammae and parallel to the anterior line of 
 the arm is the organ of Inspiration, the correspondent of which is 
 in the temples. Physically it causes a determination to the lungs, 
 and promotes expansion of the ribs. Its psychic effect is mental 
 or spiritual inspiration - — a condition of emotional and mental 
 activity. 
 
 Behind Inspiration, Cautiousness would be covered by the 
 usual attitude of the arm. It descends into Excitability, the source 
 of excitement and fear, behind which, on the side, is the region of 
 Irritability (Irritab), the influence of which is unpleasant when 
 strongly excited — a fact which some have discovered in 
 electrical practice. 
 
 Just below the margin of the ribs is the organ of Alimentive- 
 ness, adjacent to the low r er aspect of the stomach. The 
 Gastro-enteric region (acting on the alimentary canal) extend^ 
 
DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. 265 
 
 from Alimentiveness obliquely down to a point midway between 
 the umbilicus and the middle of the groin, which may be regarded 
 as the special region of defecation. 
 
 Posterior to the Gastro-enteric region we find on the side 
 between the ribs and hips the region of Selfishness, which in its 
 full influence becomes Baseness or selfish disregard of moral obli- 
 gations. Its moderate influence serves chiefly to promote the 
 abdominal functions. 
 
 Below this and anterior to the margin of the ilium or hip 
 bone, but above the groin, is the region of Melancholy — the 
 normal influence of which is to dispose us to look out for evils and 
 dangers and indulge in unfavorable views of all things, resulting 
 in Melancholy, unless this is controlled by the influence of 
 Cheerfulness, which gives favorable views of life and disposes us 
 to expect and demand the good will of others. 
 
 Below the umbilicus, halfway to the mons veneris or pubic 
 bones, is the organ of Calorification, which is in close relation 
 with the small intestine called the i-leum, and which is the corpo- 
 real region for the evolution of heat, corresponding with the ante- 
 rior surface of the medulla oblongata, externally reached through 
 the chin, on which we mark the cerebral seat of Calorification. 
 The temperature of the body and its febrile conditions are regu- 
 lated by Calorification and Coldness. 
 
 Below Calorification is the Uterine region controlling the 
 excitability of the womb and producing the liability to hysteria. 
 In the male sex, a similar 'excitability exists at this location, and 
 sometimes even hysteria has been exhibited. Below this come the 
 sexual organs, immediately above which, at the mons veneris (or 
 junction of the pubic bones) is the region of Lethargy (corre- 
 sponding to the bladder) which has a dull soporific influence. The 
 location in the head is just above the larynx. The sexual organs 
 correspond in cerebral location with the larynx, which explains 
 their power over the voice and the developement of the larynx. 
 
 The sexual regions below Calorification are antagonized at 
 the space between Coldness and Sanity, marked Ch. or Chastity, 
 the predominance of which over sexual impulses is highly impor- 
 
266 ^DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. 
 
 tant to the integrity of the nervous system. Sexual excess is the 
 surest of all methods of degrading and injuring the brain. 
 
 Above Calorification we have around the umbilicus (corre- 
 sponding with the cerebral location around the nose and mouth) 
 the region of Respiration. By stimulating this below the umbili- 
 cus we deepen respiration. 
 
 Above the umbilicus, extending toward Somnolence, is the 
 region of Assimilative absorption, corresponding with the mesen- 
 teric action, which supplies the thoracic duct. Its influence is 
 soothing and restorative ; as we ascend it becomes drowsy or som- 
 nolent, and at the organ of Somnolence merges in the intuitive and 
 psychometric powers which belong to its upper portion, adjacent 
 to the intellectual. 
 
 DESCRIPTION OF THE PSYCHOLOGICAL CHART 
 
 OF THE BRAIN. 
 
 In this chart we have a general view of the functions of the 
 cerebral organs — not a complete analysis, for that would require 
 a hundred and fifty or two hundred subdivisions, but enough to 
 give a practical understanding for therapeutic purposes. 
 
 As these organs manifest all the opposite tendencies of human 
 nature, they constitute a complete system of antagonism, and the 
 character or constitution is determined by the proportions of the 
 antagonizing organs, which may be enumerated as follows. 
 
 It is not possible, however, to elncidate the antagonisms of all 
 the organs by mere lists of names. It would require numerous 
 subdivisions and definitions, for there are very few words which 
 correspond closely to any cerebral function. The fact that the 
 cerebral functions are both psychic and physiological forbids their 
 complete expression by any word. In the volume of Anthropol- 
 
DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. 267 
 
 ogy the exact antagonism of organs will be made clear by full 
 descriptions of these functions. 
 
 Health, Disease. 
 
 Firmness and Fortitude, Excitability and Alimentiveness. 
 
 Heroism and Hardihood, Sensibility. 
 
 Energy, Relaxation and Gastro-enteric 
 
 Cheerfulness, Melancholy. [region. 
 
 Sanity, Insanity. 
 
 Integrity or Conscientiousness, Selfishness. 
 
 Region. of Loving Emotions, Region of Violent Passions. 
 
 Region of Friendly Emotions, Region of Combative Impulses. 
 
 Region of Combining and 
 
 Creative Faculties, Business Energy and Ambition. 
 
 Intellectual Region, Adhesiveness, lower part of Ap- 
 
 » probativeness and upper part 
 
 of Combativeness. 
 Modesty, Ostentation. 
 
 Reverence, Dignity, Self Confidence, Love 
 
 of Power. 
 Sublimity, Animality. 
 
 Cautiousness and Tranquility, Turbulence and Muscularity. 
 Coldness, Calorification. 
 
 Consciousness, Sleep. 
 
 The region of Insanity presents violent impulses in the poste- 
 rior part, idiotic and childish in front, and forms of monomania 
 between. 
 
 The region of Loving Emotions comprises Religion, Philan- 
 thropy or Kindness, Hope and Love — also the tendency to trance 
 and suspension of physiological life. The normal action of this 
 region sustains the brain and the spiritual life - — the abnormal or 
 excessive action suppresses physiological processes, developing 
 the spirit at the expense of the body, as its antagonist at the base 
 of the brain in abnormal action stimulates the body at the expense 
 of the spirit, thus producing moral and physical injury, but in its 
 normal action animates and impels all vital processes. 
 
268 DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. 
 
 The Friendly Emotions comprise Benevolence, Devotedness, 
 Faith, Liberality, Sincerity, Sympathy, Friendship, Politeness, 
 Imitation, Humor, Admiration. Their influence is soothing, 
 brightening and somewhat intellectual. 
 
 The antagonistic region of Combative Impulses is stern, self- 
 ish, narrow minded and energetic. It embraces Avarice, Jealousy, 
 Rivalry, Secretiveness, Aggressiveness, Stubbornness, Censorious- 
 ness, Dogmatism, Etc. These are the effects of overaction. Mod- 
 erately stimulated it is an important tonic to the mental constitution, 
 giving power to overcome difficulties. 
 
 The Intellectual region comprises : — Understanding, con- 
 sisting of Foresight, Sagacity, Judgement, Wit, Reason Ingenuity ; 
 Recollection, consisting of Memory, Time and System ; Percep- 
 tion, consisting of Form, Size, Distance, Weight, Color, Order, 
 Light and Shade. The influence o*f this region is intellectually 
 bright, but physically negative and exhausting, as we see in intel- 
 lectual labors. Its antagonism appears on the map in Adhesive- 
 ness, with the lower portion of Approbativeness and upper portion 
 of Combativeness. Taking this as the Adhesive region, for 
 Adhesiveness is its leading character, its influence is social, 
 animating, invigorating, tonic and retentive — the opposite of the 
 intellectual. 
 
 The sense of vision is exercised by the perceptive organs 
 mentioned, which lie on the supra-orbital plate (which constitutes 
 the vault of the eye sockets). The centre of vision is the sense of 
 Light, which is located between Color and Shade. The latter, at 
 the inner angle of the eye, adapts it to a dim light and connects 
 with the intuitive or clairvoyant region behind the root of the nose. 
 The sense of hearing is at the junction of Sensibility and 
 Language — a location which has been recently demonstrated 
 by vivisection. 
 
 The organ of Consciousness is the centre of the intellectual 
 group, imparting its vividness to perception, recollection and under- 
 standing, and connecting with the interior intuition. 
 
 Magnanimity (Mag.), at the junction of Sanity and Approba- 
 tiveness, indicates the seat of a faculty analogous to self-respect, as 
 
DESCRIPTION OF PLATES. 269 
 
 Sanity is analogous to Firmness. The region of Approbativeness 
 has several subdivisions not necessary to mention for therapeutic 
 purposes. Its impulse is to teach, to lead, to persuade 
 and to please. 
 
 The combining and creative region contains Ideality, Imagina- 
 tion, Scheming, Invention, Composition, Calculation, Tune, 
 Language, Somnolence. Its antagonistic region of Business 
 Energy and Ambition prompts to action instead of meditation. 
 Yet by one of the most important laws of Anthropology, these 
 antagonistic regions co-operate in action. The passive influence 
 of the frontal region is seen at its maximum under the influence of 
 Somnolence on the hrad or the body. The active influence of the 
 occipital region is seen when it is excited on the arms or on the 
 head. Passes from the sternum and epigastrium to the shoulder 
 are rousing — in the opposite direction, soothing. 
 
 DESCRIPTION OF THE ANATOMICAL PLATE. 
 
 The sketch of the spinal column is presented to illustrate the 
 chapter on the spinal region. 
 
 The profile of the head exhibits the position of the brain in 
 the cranium and its three regions, frontal F, middle M, and occip- 
 ital, O. The cerebellum is seen under the occiput and behind the 
 ear. 
 
 The Zonal arrangement of the brain exhibits its sympathy 
 with the different regions of the body, as explained in Chapter VI. 
 
 The view of the brain exhibits the interior of the right hemis- 
 phere, divided from the left, along the median line. This view is 
 important in understanding the relations of the soul and the doc- 
 trine of influx. The most intimate relations of the soul and chan- 
 nels of its influx are found on the median line, as shown in this 
 section. In the pineal gland, septum lucidum, mammillary body 
 and intermediate stricures are located the highest spiritual powers 
 and channels of influx. 
 
j\mmojp Qy 
 
 T^SVchol ogicaf Chart <f& Bra in. 
 
v** ^ 
 
 
 
 
 d> * 
 
 
 
 * ^ 
 
 
 W** 
 
 B 1 A * t^> 
 
 .... ■ 
 
 V> ,^ 
 
 
 
 "t/' 
 
 
 v , 
 
 </> >v 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 %<£ 
 
 
 A' 
 
 
 
 *> 
 
 
 V 
 
 ^> 
 
 5f ->. 
 
 
 v^' 
 
 ^ V 
 
 ■V 
 
 J> </> 
 
 ^\ x 
 
 
 <*, 
 
 '/ .-* 
 
 
 
 ** * 
 
 
 v^ 
 
 
 
 $> ^. 
 
 / 
 
 v ** 
 
 
 
 
 
 A- V 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,0o 
 
 
 
 
 a\ 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 
 & *z 
 
 
 ? ^ 
 
 
 
 
 - O^ 
 
 
 ,0o 
 
 
 
 N x xV 
 
 
 
 
 a- 
 
 ■>* \ 
 
 
 
 \ X 
 
 
 
 
 <^ 
 
 ^> 
 
 x°o* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \> 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ " K A 
 
 ^ V* 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 
 % & 
 
 
 
 
 > ^ 
 
 
 
 
 \° °^ 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 & "^ 
 
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 
 
 DDDESTTSbTE 
 
 # 
 
 I 
 
 
 ■